UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
V100R019C02
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Issue
01
Date
2011-07-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address:
Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
About This Document
About This Document
Intended Audience
This document describes the configuration of important services supported by the UA5000. The
description covers the following topics:
l
Purpose
l
Networking
l
Data plan
l
Prerequisite(s)
l
Note
l
Configuration flowchart
l
Operation procedure
l
Result
This document helps users to know the configuration of important services on the UA5000.
This document is intended for:
l
Installation and commissioning engineers
l
System maintenance engineers
l
Data configuration engineers
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Symbol
About This Document
Description
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
your time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or
supplement important points of the main text.
Command Conventions
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are
optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets
and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can
be selected.
GUI Conventions
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the “>”
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Compared with issue 02 (2011-03-25) of V100R019C01, issue 01 has the following changes:
Modified:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
About This Document
l
7.8 (Optional) Configuring System Parameters
l
9.1 Introduction to a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248 Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Managing the License...................................................................................................................1
1.1 Introduction to the License.................................................................................................................................2
1.2 License Principle................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application...........................................................................................3
1.4 Configuring the ESN..........................................................................................................................................6
1.5 Configuring the License Server..........................................................................................................................7
2 Device Management.....................................................................................................................9
2.1 Introduction to the Device................................................................................................................................11
2.2 Adding the Connection Between the Shelves...................................................................................................11
2.3 Setting the Description of a Shelf.....................................................................................................................13
2.4 Resetting a Control Board................................................................................................................................13
2.5 Adding a Service Board....................................................................................................................................14
2.6 Deleting a Service Board..................................................................................................................................16
2.7 Resetting a Service Board.................................................................................................................................17
2.8 Prohibiting a Service Board..............................................................................................................................17
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels..................................................................................19
3.1 Introduction to the System DSP Channels.......................................................................................................20
3.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP Channel...............................................................................................20
3.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP Channels.....................................................................22
3.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP Resources Reserved for the VAG.............................24
3.5 Prohibiting the DSP Channel............................................................................................................................25
4 Configuring the Clock................................................................................................................28
4.1 Introduction to the Clock..................................................................................................................................29
4.2 Configuration Example of a Clock Source.......................................................................................................30
4.3 Configuring the Reference Clock Source.........................................................................................................32
4.4 Setting the Clock Source Priority.....................................................................................................................33
5 Configuring the MG Interface..................................................................................................35
5.1 Introduction to the MG Interface......................................................................................................................37
5.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)..................................................................37
5.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)................................................................40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Contents
5.4 Adding an MG Interface...................................................................................................................................42
5.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool......................................................................................................................47
5.6 Configuring MG Interface Attributes (the H.248 Protocol).............................................................................48
5.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)............................................................50
5.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface Based on the H.248 Protocol................................53
5.9 Configuring Software Parameters of an MG Interface Based on the MGCP Protocol....................................61
5.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG Interface.......................................................................................66
5.11 Configuring a Digitmap for an MG Interface Based on the H.248 Protocol..................................................68
5.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)...............................................................70
5.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC.............................................................................................71
5.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG................................................................................................73
5.15 Enabling an MG Interface..............................................................................................................................74
6 Configuring the SIP Interface...................................................................................................76
6.1 Introduction to SIP Interface............................................................................................................................78
6.2 Configuration Example of a SIP Interface........................................................................................................78
6.3 Configuring the IP Address Pool (SIP)............................................................................................................82
6.4 Adding a SIP Interface.....................................................................................................................................83
6.5 Configuring the Attributes of a SIP Interface...................................................................................................84
6.6 Configuring Software Parameters of a SIP Interface.......................................................................................87
6.7 Configuring Software Character Parameters of a SIP Interface.......................................................................92
6.8 Configuring a Local Digitmap for SIP.............................................................................................................96
6.9 Configuring the Ringing Mode of the SIP Interface........................................................................................98
6.10 Resetting the SIP Interface...........................................................................................................................100
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service.....................................................................................102
7.1 Introduction to the VoIP Service....................................................................................................................104
7.2 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service (Independent Upstream).................................................104
7.3 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)......................................110
7.4 Configuration Example of a SIP PSTN Service in Independent Upstream Mode.........................................118
7.5 Configuration Example of the SIP PSTN Service (Integrated Upstream).....................................................123
7.6 Configuring the Emergency Standalone Function Based on the H.248 Protocol...........................................129
7.7 Configuring the Standalone Function Based on the SIP Protocol..................................................................131
7.8 (Optional) Configuring System Parameters...................................................................................................133
7.9 Configuring the MG PSTN Subscriber Data..................................................................................................135
7.10 Configuring the SIP PSTN User Data..........................................................................................................139
7.11 Configuring PSTN Port Attributes...............................................................................................................142
7.12 Configuring the QoS IP Precedence.............................................................................................................143
7.13 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority...........................................................................................................147
7.14 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP Address................................................................148
7.15 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced Function..........................................................................................149
8 Configuring the VAG Service.................................................................................................152
8.1 Introduction to the VAG Service....................................................................................................................153
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Contents
8.2 Configuration Example of the VAG Service..................................................................................................153
8.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAG.......................................................................................................158
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248 Protocol..................................162
9.1 Introduction to a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248 Protocol..............................................................163
9.2 Configuration Example of a P2P ISDN BRA Service Based on the H.248 Protocol....................................164
9.3 Configuration Example of a P2MP ISDN BRA Service Based on the H.248 Protocol.................................169
9.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When the EDTB Service Board Is Used).....................174
9.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol Stack....................................................................................................178
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP Protocol.......................................182
10.1 (Only in Integrated Upstream Mode) Configuring the VLAN Upstream Interface of the IPM...................183
10.2 Configuring the Working mode of the PVM Control Board........................................................................184
10.3 Configuring a SIP Interface..........................................................................................................................184
10.4 Configuring a SIP ISDN User......................................................................................................................184
10.4.1 Configuring SIP ISDN BRA User Data..............................................................................................185
10.4.2 Configuring SIP ISDN PRA User Data...............................................................................................186
10.4.3 (Optional) Configuring System Parameters........................................................................................187
10.4.4 (Optional) Configuring the Overseas Parameters................................................................................189
10.4.5 (Optional) Configuring the Attributes of an ISDN BRA Port.............................................................189
10.4.6 (Optional) Configuring the Attributes of an E1 Port...........................................................................190
10.5 Configuration Example of an ISDN BRA Service Based on the SIP Protocol............................................191
10.6 Configuration Example of an ISDN PRA Service Based on the SIP Protocol............................................194
11 Configuring the FoIP Service................................................................................................197
11.1 Configuring the FoIP Service (Based on the H.248 or MGCP Protocol).....................................................198
11.2 Configuring an FoIP Service Based on the SIP Protocol.............................................................................201
12 Configuring the MoIP Service..............................................................................................206
12.1 Configuring the MoIP Service (Based on the H.248 or MGCP Protocol)...................................................207
12.2 Configuring an MoIP Service Based on the SIP Protocol............................................................................208
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service......................................................................................210
13.1 Introduction to the R2 Access Service.........................................................................................................211
13.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access Service.......................................................................................212
13.3 Adding an R2 Profile....................................................................................................................................217
13.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 Profile .....................................................................................218
13.4.1 Configuring the R2 Address Receiving Attributes..............................................................................218
13.4.2 Configuring the R2 Address Sending Attributes.................................................................................219
13.4.3 Configuring the R2 Profile Attributes.................................................................................................220
13.4.4 Configuring the R2 Line Signaling Attributes....................................................................................220
13.4.5 Configuring the R2 Register Signaling Attributes..............................................................................221
13.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration File...............................................................................................222
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service........................................................................................224
14.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice Service...........................................................................................................225
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Contents
14.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service.........................................................................................226
14.3 Configuring a PSTN Subscriber...................................................................................................................231
14.4 Configuring an ISDN Subscriber.................................................................................................................232
14.5 Blocking a V5 Service Port..........................................................................................................................234
14.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service Port.........................................................................................234
15 Configuring the DDI Service................................................................................................236
15.1 Introduction to the DDI Service...................................................................................................................237
15.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service.................................................................................................238
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service...........................................................................242
16.1 Introduction to the TDM G.SHDSL Service................................................................................................243
16.2 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service (with Data Interface Extended)...........................243
16.3 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service (with the E1 Port Extended)................................248
16.4 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service (with the ISDN PRA Extended)..........................253
17 Configuring the MTA Service...............................................................................................259
17.1 Introduction to the MTA Service..................................................................................................................260
17.2 Configuration Example of the MTA Service...............................................................................................260
18 Configuring the VFB Service................................................................................................264
18.1 Introduction to the VFB Service...................................................................................................................265
18.2 Configuration Example of the VFB Audio Private Line Service.................................................................265
18.3 Configuration Example of the Party Line Service........................................................................................268
19 Configuring the ATI Service.................................................................................................273
19.1 Introduction to the ATI Service....................................................................................................................274
19.2 Configuration Example of the ATI Audio Private Line Service..................................................................274
19.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the E&M Trunk Interface.............................................277
20 Configuring the CDI Service.................................................................................................281
20.1 Introduction to the CDI Service....................................................................................................................282
20.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension Service......................................................................282
20.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway Service.................................................................................285
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service.........................................................................................288
21.1 Configuring the Single-NE Sub-Rate Service..............................................................................................290
21.1.1 Configuring the SRX Board................................................................................................................291
21.1.2 Configuring the SPC............................................................................................................................292
21.2 Configuring the Cross-NE Sub-Rate Service...............................................................................................292
21.2.1 Configuring the SRX Board................................................................................................................294
21.2.2 Configuring the SPC............................................................................................................................295
21.3 Configuration Example of the Single-NE Sub-Rate Service........................................................................295
21.4 Configuration Example of the Cross-NE Sub-Rate Service.........................................................................297
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service Implemented
Through the DDU2 Board...........................................................................................................300
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Contents
22.1 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
in the Single NE Networking Mode.....................................................................................................................301
22.1.1 Configuring the DDU2 Board.............................................................................................................302
22.1.2 Configuring the SPC............................................................................................................................302
22.2 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
in the Cross-NE Networking Mode......................................................................................................................303
22.2.1 Configuring the DDU2 Board.............................................................................................................304
22.2.2 Configuring the SPC............................................................................................................................304
22.3 Configuration Example of the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service Implemented Through the
DDU2 Board in the Single NE Networking Mode...............................................................................................305
22.4 Configuration Example of the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service Implemented Through the
DDU2 Board in the Cross-NE Networking Mode................................................................................................306
23 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent Transmission........................ 308
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service.......................................................................312
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission.............................................................. 323
25.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream Transmission......................................................................................324
25.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream Transmission....................................................................324
25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A Board.............................................................................332
25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A Board..............................................................................332
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission..............................................................334
26.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream Transmission.....................................................................................335
26.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream Transmission...................................................................335
26.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A Board............................................................................343
26.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A Board...............................................................................344
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending..................................................................................346
27.1 Introduction to Remote Cascading...............................................................................................................347
27.2 Configuration Example of a Remote Cascaded RSU Subrack.....................................................................347
27.3 Configuration Example of a Remote Cascaded PV8 Subrack......................................................................352
28 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service......................................................................... 360
28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoS.........................................................................................................361
28.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test Task..............................................................................................361
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service..................................................................363
29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Security...................................................................................................364
29.2 Configuring the Device Authentication........................................................................................................364
29.2.1 Configuring the Device Authentication (the H.248 Protocol).............................................................364
29.2.2 Configuring the Device Authentication (the MGCP Protocol)...........................................................366
29.2.3 Configuring Device Authentication (SIP Protocol).............................................................................368
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service..............................................................370
30.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Reliability...............................................................................................372
30.2 Configuring the Dual Homing......................................................................................................................373
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Contents
30.2.1 Configuring the Dual Homing (the H.248 Protocol)...........................................................................374
30.2.2 Configuring the Dual Homing (the MGCP Protocol).........................................................................374
30.2.3 Configuring the Dual Homing (Based On SIP)...................................................................................375
30.3 Configuring the Standalone Service.............................................................................................................376
30.4 Configuring the IUA Joint Switchover.........................................................................................................378
30.5 Configuring an Emergency Channel............................................................................................................379
30.6 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling Stream and the Media Stream.....................................381
31 Configuring the Link Detection...........................................................................................383
31.1 Introduction to the Link Detection...............................................................................................................384
31.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection....................................................................................384
31.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection....................................................................................387
31.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link Detection............................................................391
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring.........................................................................396
32.1 Introduction to the Environment Monitoring...............................................................................................398
32.2 Configuration Example of the ESC..............................................................................................................399
32.3 Configuration Example of the Fan Monitoring............................................................................................403
32.4 Configuration Example of the Power Monitoring........................................................................................405
32.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power Monitoring.......................................................................408
32.6 Adding an EMU............................................................................................................................................410
32.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters.............................................................................................................411
32.8 Setting the ESC Digital Parameters..............................................................................................................412
32.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm Reporting..........................................................................................................414
32.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment Mode...................................................................................................415
32.11 Setting the Fan Speed.................................................................................................................................416
32.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters.........................................................................................................417
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking................................................423
33.1 Networking...................................................................................................................................................424
33.2 Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................................424
33.3 Data Plan (IPM)............................................................................................................................................425
33.4 Data Plan (PVMB)........................................................................................................................................426
33.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)....................................................................................................................427
33.6 Configuration Procedure (PVMB)................................................................................................................431
33.7 Verification...................................................................................................................................................433
A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................434
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
1 Managing the License
1
Managing the License
About This Chapter
The license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. To
ensure that the required service on theUA5000 can be activated and accessed, you must
implement the management of the license functions.
1.1 Introduction to the License
The license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. The
prerequisite for using the license function normally is specifying the functions of and relations
between the license server, license file, function entries, and resource entries.
1.2 License Principle
The UA5000 adopts the network license scheme to manage and control the license.
1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application
Configure the license equipment serial number (ESN) and specify the license server for the
UA5000 so that the UA5000 and license server can communicate normally, and theUA5000
supports the controlled features normally.
1.4 Configuring the ESN
The ESN uniquely identifies a device on the license server. Only after the UA5000 is configured
with an ESN, the license server can identify the device.
1.5 Configuring the License Server
Each UA5000 corresponds to a license file. This license file is saved on the license server which
manages the license functions. Configure the IP address of the license server of the UA5000 and
the TCP port number used for the communication between the UA5000 and the license server.
Thus, the UA5000 and the license server can communicate with each other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
1 Managing the License
1.1 Introduction to the License
The license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. The
prerequisite for using the license function normally is specifying the functions of and relations
between the license server, license file, function entries, and resource entries.
Service Description
With the license function enabled, the license server performs license control on the function
entries and the resource entries supported by the UA5000 to provide individualized services for
users.
Service Specifications
The controlled features are the features that are controlled through the license. These features
are unavailable without authorization. Such controlled features include function entries and
resource entries.
l
A function entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the function.
l
A resource entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the number.
The controllable function entries and resource entries of the UA5000 include the following:
l
Calling feature
– Number of PSTN subscribers
– Number of BRA subscribers
– Number of PRA subscribers
l
SPC service
– Number of SPCs
l
Interface feature
– Number of V5 interfaces
– Number of H248 interfaces
– Number of MGCP interfaces
– Number of R2 subscribers
l
EMM control power
– Number of EMM control power supplies
l
MG property
– T38 coding and decoding function
– G723 and G729 coding and decoding function
– 2198 redundancy function
– Dual homing function of the H248 interface
– Standalone function of the H248 interface
– Dual homing function of the MGCP interface
– Dual homing function of L2UA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
1 Managing the License
NOTE
l If you need to use the license function supported by the UA5000, consider the installation of the license
server in network planning.
l It is recommended that you install the software of the license server on the same computer with the
software of the network management system (NMS) server. If the NMS server does not exist, install
one license server in the network.
1.2 License Principle
The UA5000 adopts the network license scheme to manage and control the license.
License Function Principle
l
When the license server is deployed in a network, the license server can be installed on the
same computer with the NMS server, but the two servers are different. The license server
can also be installed on a separate server. Each multi-service access node (MSAN) device
functions as a license client. The license server manages the licenses of all the clients in a
centralized manner.
l
In the management range of each license server, each product has one license file.
Generally, a management range can be a district or a city. The license file is stored on the
license server. The license file defines the product resources controlled by the license. One
license server can manage multiple products. Hence, multiple license files can be stored
on one license server.
License Implementation Principle
l
In the system initialization process of the UA5000, each service module must register their
controlled resource entries and function entries. After the system runs in the normal state,
based on the registration information, the management module of a license client obtains
the authorization information about the license controlling entries of the device from the
license server.
l
When you configure a service module through the command line or the NMS, the device
checks whether the resource entries of the service module are overloaded or the function
entries of the service module are authorized.
– For license-controlled resource entries, if the resource entries are overloaded, the system
terminates the service configuration and prompts that the license resources are
insufficient.
– For license-controlled function entries, if the function entries are not authorized, the
system prompts you that the functions are unauthorized.
– If the resource entries are not overloaded or the function entries are authorized, the
system allows you to continue the service configuration.
– For a license-controlled resources entry, the license resources applied for the service
module are released when the service configuration is deleted.
1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application
Configure the license equipment serial number (ESN) and specify the license server for the
UA5000 so that the UA5000 and license server can communicate normally, and theUA5000
supports the controlled features normally.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
1 Managing the License
Prerequisite
l
The network devices and the lines must be normal.
l
All boards of the UA5000 must be normal.
l
The license function must be enabled.
Networking
Figure 1-1 shows the example network for configuring the license application.
The license function is enabled on the UA5000. The license server is installed on the same
computer as the NMS server (U2000). The license management tool installed on the U2000
client configures and manages the license file. UA5000_A communicates with the license server
through port 0/5/0. The TCP port number is 10010.
Figure 1-1 Example network for configuring the license application
N2000 BMS&License Server
100.100.100.1/24
N2000 Client
60.60.60.2/24
Router
60.60.60.1/24
......
UA5000_A
UA5000_B
UA5000_N
Data Plan
Table 1-1 provides the data plan for configuring the license application.
Table 1-1 Data plan for configuring the license application
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Data
License server
IP address: 100.100.100.1/24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Item
1 Managing the License
Data
TCP port number: 10010
UA5000_A
IP address of the layer 3 interface: 60.60.60.1/24
Router
IP address of the port connected to UA5000_A: 60.60.60.2/24
NOTE
l The configuration at the UA5000 side is the same. This section uses the configuration of UA5000_A
as an example.
l This topic describes only the configuration at the device side. For details on how to configure the license
server, see the related configuration manual of the license server.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 1-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the license application.
Figure 1-2 Flowchart for configuring the license application
Start
Configure the ESN
Specify the license server
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the equipment serial number (ESN).
NOTE
At the license server side, you need to add the ESN of the device to the license server, and add the function
entries and resource entries for the device.
huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1
Step 2 Specify the license server.
huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 100.100.100.1 tcpport 10010
Step 3 Save the data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
1 Managing the License
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, run the display license info command to check whether the
communication between the device and the license server is normal. UA5000_A is initialized,
and each service module can register the controlled resource entries or function entries.
NOTE
The license does not take effect immediately after it is configured.
By default, the license takes effect 15-20 minutes after it is configured successfully. After configuring the
license, if you run the save command to save the configuration, and then run the reset command to reset
the device, the license takes effect immediately after the system resets.
1.4 Configuring the ESN
The ESN uniquely identifies a device on the license server. Only after the UA5000 is configured
with an ESN, the license server can identify the device.
Context
l
The ESN of the UA5000 must be an existing IP address in the IP address pool. You can
run the ip address command to add the IP address to the IP address pool.
l
After adding the ESN for the UA5000, you need to add the ESN of the device to the license
server, and add the function entries and resource entries for the device.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the license esn command to configure the ESN for the device.
Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the basic information about the license.
----End
Example
To configure the ESN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1
huawei(config)#display license info
License switch: enable
ESN: 60.60.60.1
IP address of the first server: 100.100.100.1
IP address of the second server: 200.200.200.1
TCP port number: 1024
Communication status: abnormal
License status: unregistered
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
1 Managing the License
NOTE
l When the upper layer device is disconnected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal.
The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, the controlled resources cannot be
configured and the controlled function cannot be enabled.
l When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license client
is normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can be
configured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.
Related Operation
Table 1-2 lists the related operation for configuring the ESN for the device.
Table 1-2 Related operation for configuring the ESN for the device
To…
Run the Command...
Configure the license server
license server
1.5 Configuring the License Server
Each UA5000 corresponds to a license file. This license file is saved on the license server which
manages the license functions. Configure the IP address of the license server of the UA5000 and
the TCP port number used for the communication between the UA5000 and the license server.
Thus, the UA5000 and the license server can communicate with each other.
Context
l
The IP address of the license server and the TCP port number must be the same as the data
in the actual network plan.
l
When the IP address of the license server and the TCP port number change, you need to
re-configure the device.
l
Two IP addresses of the license server can be configured at the device side. The two IP
addresses must be different from each other. Only one TCP port number can be configured
at the device side.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the license server command to configure the license server.
Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the basic information about the license.
----End
Example
To configure the IP address of license server 1 as 10.10.10.1, the IP address of license server 2
as 20.20.20.1, and TCP port number as 1024, do as follows:
huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 10.10.10.1 20.20.20.1 tcpport 1024
huawei(config)#display license info
Special license switch: disable
Basic license switch:
enable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
1 Managing the License
ESN: 10.71.55.192
IP address of the first server: 10.10.10.1
IP address of the second server: 20.20.20.1
TCP port number: 1024
Communication status: normal
License status: registered
NOTE
l When the upper layer device is not connected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal.
The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, the controlled resources cannot be
configured and the controlled function cannot be enabled.
l When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license client
is normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can be
configured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.
Related Operation
Table 1-3 lists the related operation for configuring the license server.
Table 1-3 Related operation for configuring the license server
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Configure the ESN
license esn
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
2
Device Management
About This Chapter
This topic describes how to manage the UA5000. Device management includes shelf
management and board management.
2.1 Introduction to the Device
Introduction to the device includes the management of the device and the types and status of the
control board and service board supported by UA5000.
2.2 Adding the Connection Between the Shelves
The connection between shelves need not be added when only the master shelf exists. When the
master shelf and slave shelf are required, you must add a slave shelf and a connection between
the master shelf and slave shelf.
2.3 Setting the Description of a Shelf
Set and change regularly the number of a test group or the description of a shelf to update the
shelf information in time.
2.4 Resetting a Control Board
Reset a control board to run the newly loaded program and database. If there is no standby control
board, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the service boards. Exercise caution
when performing this operation.
2.5 Adding a Service Board
Adding a service board is to provide you the data configuration when the service board is offline,
namely, an operation when the actual service board is not inserted. The system checks the
configured data in details. After the service board is added successfully and the service board is
inserted, it runs according to the configuration.
2.6 Deleting a Service Board
When the service board in a certain slot is faulty or not required because of the system capacity
reduction, you can delete the service board. When the service board is deleted successfully, you
can add a new service board in the idle slot.
2.7 Resetting a Service Board
You can reset a service board when the service board does not work properly. The system
generates a fault alarm after the reset operation. The system generates a recovery alarm after the
board recovers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
2.8 Prohibiting a Service Board
When a service board does not work normally, or a certain port on a service board is faulty, you
must prohibit the service board first. When you prohibit a service board, you prohibit not only
the normal services on the board but also any other operation till the service board is unprohibited
(enabled).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
2.1 Introduction to the Device
Introduction to the device includes the management of the device and the types and status of the
control board and service board supported by UA5000.
Service Description
l
Shelf management includes the following: adding a shelf, adding a link between two
shelves, deleting a shelf, deleting a link between two shelves, configuring the attributes of
a shelf, querying shelf information, and querying a link between two shelves.
l
Control board management includes the following: resetting a control board and querying
control board information.
l
Service board management includes the following: adding a service board offline,
confirming a service board, deleting a service board, resetting a service board, prohibiting
a service board, unprohibiting a service board, and querying the service board information.
You can use the HABD or HABL shelf as the master shelf and use the HABF as the slave shelf
for the UA5000. Thus, the connection between shelves is supported.
When you use the HABM shelf as the master shelf for the UA5000 MiniMSAN, the connection
between shelves is not supported.
Introduction to Board Status
Table 2-1 lists the service board status.
Table 2-1 Service board status
Status
Remarks
Normal
It indicates that the board is running in the normal state.
Failed
It indicates that the board is faulty.
Config
It indicates that the board is being configured.
Auto_find
It indicates that the board is inserted, but not confirmed.
Prohibited
It indicates that the board is prohibited.
2.2 Adding the Connection Between the Shelves
The connection between shelves need not be added when only the master shelf exists. When the
master shelf and slave shelf are required, you must add a slave shelf and a connection between
the master shelf and slave shelf.
Context
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The master shelf and the PVM control board are in the normal state after the master shelf
is added.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
l
2 Device Management
The slave shelf is in the faulty state after it is added. The slave shelf is normal after the
connection is added between shelves.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the frame add command to add a shelf.
Step 2 Run the frame connect command to add a connection between shelves.
Step 3 Run the display frame info command to query the connection between shelves.
----End
Example
To add a connection between the master and slave shelves, do as follows:
huawei(config)#frame add 0
FrameType:
0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA)
2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL)
4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC)
6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM)
8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB)
10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD)
12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE)
14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA)
16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL)
18 : RSUG_ONU04A
20 : PV8_HUBT(HUBT)
22 : PV8_15(HDB)
24 : PV8_12(HFB)
26 : PV8_6A(HMB)
28 : UAM_V (HUBM)
30 : UAFM_V(HUBE)
32 : UAMB_V(HUBB)
34 : ONUF01D100_V(HUBL)
36 : RSP_19(HCB)
38 : RSP_14(HIB)
40 : RSP_10(HGB)
42 : RSP_6B(HLB)
44 : UAS_R (HUBS)
46 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
48 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
50 : VRSP_12(HABA)
52 : HWTA(HIB_1)
54 : HWTA(HIB_3)
Please select frame type (0 ~ 54):1
Frame add successfully
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD)
MAIN_H602HABD(HABD)
MAIN_H601HABO(HABO)
SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE)
SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA)
SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_30(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_12(HABC)
RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO)
RSUG_ONU08A
PV8_19(HCB)
PV8_14(HIB)
PV8_10(HGB)
PV8_6B(HLB)
UAS_V (HUBS)
UAFS_V(HUBF)
ONU60A_V(HUBO)
ONUF10DV100_V(HUBN)
RSP_15(HDB)
RSP_12(HFB)
RSP_6A(HMB)
UAM_R (HUBM)
UAFM_R(HUBE)
UAMB_R(HUBB)
ONUF01D100_R(HUBL)
VRSP_18(HABA)
HWTA(HIB_2)
huawei(config)#frame connect
{ upframeid<U><0,97> }:0
{ downframeid<U><0,97> }:1
Command:
frame connect 0 1
Add the frame connection successfully
huawei(config)#display frame connect
--------------------------------------------Record
Upper-frame
Lower-frame
--------------------------------------------0
0
1
---------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 2-2 lists the related operation for configuring the connection between shelves.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
Table 2-2 Related operation for configuring the connection between shelves
To...
Run the Command...
Delete the connection between shelves
undo frame connect
2.3 Setting the Description of a Shelf
Set and change regularly the number of a test group or the description of a shelf to update the
shelf information in time.
Precaution
l
Set the information of the test group of a shelf before setting the number of the test group.
l
The number of the test group and the description of the shelf cannot be modified at the
same time.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the frame set command to set the description of a shelf.
Step 2 Run the display frame info command to query the description of a shelf.
----End
Example
To set the description of shelf 0 to huawei, do as follows:
huawei(config)#frame set 0 desc huawei
huawei(config)#display frame info 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Type :
MAIN_F(H612HABD)
State:
Normal
Desc :
huawei
TestGroup: 0
EMU 0 ID: 5
Subnode:12 State:Communications failed
EMU 1 ID: 4
Subnode:15 State:Communications failed
EMU 2 ID: 2
Subnode:1
State:Communications normal
EMU 3 ID: 1
Subnode:2
State:Communications failed
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.4 Resetting a Control Board
Reset a control board to run the newly loaded program and database. If there is no standby control
board, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the service boards. Exercise caution
when performing this operation.
Context
The control boards include active control board and standby control board.
Resetting an active control board results in the following:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
l
In the case of an active/standby configuration, the resetting operation does not affect the
ongoing services.
l
If there is no standby control board, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the
service boards. In other words, this operation causes the resetting of the system.
l
The resetting of a control board may discard unsaved data. Therefore, before the operation,
run the save command to save the system data.
l
The board reset command cannot be used to reset a control board.
Precaution
NOTE
Reset the system only when required. Otherwise, the services may be affected. In general, the system
is reset after a new application or database is loaded.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the reboot command to reset the control board.
----End
Example
To reset the active control board, do as follows:
huawei#reboot active
Please check whether data has saved, the unsaved data may lose if reboot active
board, are you sure
to reboot active board? (y/n)[n]:y
Reboot active will cause system forced switchover, are you sure to rebootactive
board?
(y/n)[n]:y
To reset the standby control board, do as follows:
huawei#reboot standby
Please check whether data has saved, are you sure to reboot standby board? (y/n)
[n]:y
2.5 Adding a Service Board
Adding a service board is to provide you the data configuration when the service board is offline,
namely, an operation when the actual service board is not inserted. The system checks the
configured data in details. After the service board is added successfully and the service board is
inserted, it runs according to the configuration.
Precaution
l
After a service board is added offline, the status of the service board is faulty. The status
changes to normal only when the slot is inserted with a service board of the same type. If
a service board of different type is inserted, the service board cannot be started because the
slot and the service board do not match.
l
You can add a service board only in an idle slot.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add a service board offline.
Step 2 Insert the service board of the same type manually into the service shelf
Step 3 Run the board confirm command to confirm a service board.
Step 4 Run the display board command to query the status of a service board.
----End
Example
To insert an A32 board in slot 0/10, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10
huawei(config)#display board 0/10
-------------------------------------------------------Board Name
: A32
Board state
: Normal
Online state
: Board has ports
: 32
0 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
1 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
2 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
3 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
4 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
5 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
6 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
7 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
8 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
9 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
10 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
11 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
12 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
13 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
14 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
15 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
16 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
17 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
18 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
19 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
20 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
21 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
22 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
23 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
24 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
25 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
26 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
27 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
28 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
29 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
30 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
31 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
A/u Law
: A law
Port Impedance
: Bureau machine in China(200+680|| 100nf)
Port Current
: 25mA steady current
Work Environment : Work Mode
: Ring Voltage
: --------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 2-3 lists the related operation for adding a service board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
Table 2-3 Related operation for adding a service board
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a
service
board
board delete
Before deleting a service board,
delete the data on it first. Otherwise,
deleting the service board fails.
2.6 Deleting a Service Board
When the service board in a certain slot is faulty or not required because of the system capacity
reduction, you can delete the service board. When the service board is deleted successfully, you
can add a new service board in the idle slot.
Precaution
l
Before deleting a service board, delete the data on it first. Otherwise, deleting the service
board fails.
l
A control board in the auto-find state cannot be deleted; however, the faulty standby PVM
board can be deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board delete command to delete a service board.
Step 2 Run the display board command to query the status of a board.
----End
Example
To delete the faulty service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board delete 0/12
Are you sure to delete this board? (y/n)[n]: y
0 frame 12 slot board delete successfully
huawei(config)#display board 0/12
Failure: Board does not exist
Related Operation
Table 2-4 lists the related operation for deleting a service board.
Table 2-4 Related operation for deleting a service board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Add a service board
board add
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
2.7 Resetting a Service Board
You can reset a service board when the service board does not work properly. The system
generates a fault alarm after the reset operation. The system generates a recovery alarm after the
board recovers.
Precaution
l
When the service board starts successfully after resetting, it reports the registration
information to the control board. The control board configures the data of the service board
to restore the services.
l
Do not reset the power board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board reset command to reset a service board.
----End
Example
To reset the service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board reset 0/12
Are you sure to reset board? (y/n)[n]:y
0 frame 2 slot reset board message sent successfully...
2.8 Prohibiting a Service Board
When a service board does not work normally, or a certain port on a service board is faulty, you
must prohibit the service board first. When you prohibit a service board, you prohibit not only
the normal services on the board but also any other operation till the service board is unprohibited
(enabled).
Context
You need to prohibit service boards in the following cases:
l
The services of a board are suspended but not deleted.
l
The dynamic resources are released.
l
The control board cannot be prohibited.
l
The service board that is in the auto-find state and is unconfirmed cannot be prohibited.
l
Prohibiting a service board interrupts the services of the board.
l
It is not allowed to prohibit the power board.
Precaution
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
2 Device Management
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board prohibit command to prohibit a service board.
Step 2 Run the display board command to query the status of a service board.
----End
Example
To prohibit the service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board prohibit 0/12
Prohibiting board will interrupt all services on this board, are you
sure to prohibit board? (y/n)[n]:y
Prohibit board successfully
huawei(config)#display board 0/12
-------------------------------------------------------Board Name
: A32
Board state
: Prohibited
Online state
: Unmanageable
Board has ports
: 32
0 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
1 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
2 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
3 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
4 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
5 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
6 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
7 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
8 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
9 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
10 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
11 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
12 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
13 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
14 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
15 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
16 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
17 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
18 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
19 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
20 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
21 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
22 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
23 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
24 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
25 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
26 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
27 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
28 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
29 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
30 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
31 port type
: PSTN_PORT
Licensed
A/u Law
: A law
Port Impedance
: Bureau machine in China(200+680|| 100nf)
Port Current
: 25mA steady current
Work Environment : EMSAN
Work Mode
: COMBO
Ring Voltage
: --------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
Configuring the System DSP Channels
About This Chapter
The number of digital signal processor (DSP) channels specifies the processing capability of a
DSP chip. Configuring the system DSP channels includes configuring the attributes of the DSP
channels and configuring the number of DSP channels for subscribers with different priorities.
3.1 Introduction to the System DSP Channels
Through the DSP channels, the analog signals accessed by the UA5000 can be digitized. Thus,
the voice service can be transmitted over the IP network.
3.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP Channel
The attributes of the DSP channel include the parameters such as the maximum rate of the fax
training, fax training mode, input gain of the DSP chip, output gain of the DSP chip, and default
interval for the DSP to packetize RTP packets. By configuring the parameters of the attributes
of the DSP channel, you can ensure the voice quality during the analog-digit and digit-analog
conversion.
3.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP Channels
The number of the globally shared DSP channels refer to the number of the system DSP channels
minus the number of the channels reserved for the VAG. By configuring the number of the
globally shared DSP channels, you can allocate different numbers of the DSP channels for
subscribers with different priorities.
3.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP Resources Reserved for the VAG
The number of DSP channels reserved for the VAG refers to the number of private DSP channels
reserved for the specified VAG. Subscribers in the VAG can use only the reserved DSP channels.
Through the reservation of DSP channels for the VAG, subscribers of different priorities in the
VAG can be allocated with different numbers of DSP channels.
3.5 Prohibiting the DSP Channel
When one or more DSP channels on a subboard are faulty, you can prohibit the faulty DSP
channel so that the service is not affected.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
3.1 Introduction to the System DSP Channels
Through the DSP channels, the analog signals accessed by the UA5000 can be digitized. Thus,
the voice service can be transmitted over the IP network.
Service Description
DSP is a type of chip used to process the digital signals. The PVM board uses DSP to packetize
the PCM signals to the voice packets, and then sends the voice packets into the IP network. In
this way, the VoIP function is realized.
DSP channel: The processing capability of the DSP chip is further quantified and can be reflected
by the number of channels.
Service Specifications
Each DSP channel processes the information in one 64 K PCM voice channel.
Only after you insert a DSP subboard in the PVM control board, the PVM control board supports
the DSP channels. The number of total DSP channels varies according to different subboard.
3.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP Channel
The attributes of the DSP channel include the parameters such as the maximum rate of the fax
training, fax training mode, input gain of the DSP chip, output gain of the DSP chip, and default
interval for the DSP to packetize RTP packets. By configuring the parameters of the attributes
of the DSP channel, you can ensure the voice quality during the analog-digit and digit-analog
conversion.
Context
l
The UA5000 supports two fax training modes: end-to-end training and local training.
l
The network transmission delay, the device processing delay, and the serial link delay exist
in the VoIP service. The occurrence of the delay causes the voice jitter and decreases the
call quality. JitterBuffer is used to eliminate the delay, and improve the voice quality with
the lost-packet compensation function.
l
For details of the attributes of the DSP channel, see the parameter description of the dsp
attribute command.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the dsp attribute command to configure the attributes of the DSP channel.
Step 2 Run the display dsp attribute command to query the DSP parameters.
----End
Example
Assume the following:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
l
The maximum rate of the fax training is V29.
l
The fax training mode is local training.
l
The initial adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 50.
l
The maximum adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 100.
l
The maximum fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 90.
l
The minimum adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 20.
l
The minimum fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 40.
l
The initial fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 60.
l
The input gain of the DSP chip is 2 dB.
l
The output gain of the DSP chip is 2 dB.
l
The default coding mode of the DSP channel is G.729.
l
The interval of transmitting the RTCP packet of the DSP channel is 500 ms.
l
The default value of severe packet loss second threshold is 500.
l
The VQM function is enabled.
l
The default RTP packetization interval of the DSP channel is 30 ms.
l
The default echo suppression function of the DSP channel is enabled.
l
The default silence compression function of the DSP channel is enabled.
l
The PLC algorithm function of the DSP channel is enabled.
l
The value of the clearmode payload of the DSP channel is 100.
To configure the DSP attributes, do as follows:
huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-rate 1 train-mode 1 init-adapt-jb 50 max-adaptjb 100 max-fixed-jb 90 min-adapt-jb 20 min-fixed-jb 40 nominal-fixed-jb 60 inputgain 2 output-gain 2 code 3 rtcp-interval 500 sev-degradethreshold 500 bvqm 1 rtpinterval 30 echoflag 1
huawei(config)#dsp attribute clearmode-payload 100 silenceflag 1 statisticsflag 1
plc 1
huawei(config)#display dsp attribute
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate
:V29
Fax Train Mode
:Local Train
DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:100
DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:20
DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:50
DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:90
DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:40
DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:60
DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db)
:-8
DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db)
:-8
DSP code type
:G.729
RTCP package send interval time(ms)
:500
Severe Degrade Threshold(periods)
:500
Support VQM
:Enable
DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms)
:30
DSP echo check
:Open
DSP silence reduce
:Open
DSP need statistics or not
:Yes
DSP Packet Lose Compensate
:Open
DSP clearmode payload value
:100
Support RTCP XR
:Disable
T30 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax
:3
T4 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax
:3
Fax V8 Negotiate
:Enable
DSP VBD payload value
:102
DSP G.726-16k payload value
:103
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
DSP G.726-24k payload value
:104
DSP G.726-32k payload value
:101
DSP G.726-40k payload value
:105
DSP 2198 payload value
:96
DSP 2833 payload value
:97
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 3-1 lists the related operations for configuring the attributes of the DSP channel.
Table 3-1 Related operation for configuring the attributes of the DSP channel
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Prohibit the DSP channel
dsp prohibit
Prohibit the DSP channel that
cannot be used any more.
Unprohibit the DSP channel
undo dsp prohibit
When the DSP channel
recovers, unprohibit the DSP
channel to reuse it.
Query the status of the DSP
channel
display dsp state
-
Query the DSP status of the
VAG
display dsp statistic
Query the configuration and the
usage of the DSP resources on
a specified VAG.
3.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP
Channels
The number of the globally shared DSP channels refer to the number of the system DSP channels
minus the number of the channels reserved for the VAG. By configuring the number of the
globally shared DSP channels, you can allocate different numbers of the DSP channels for
subscribers with different priorities.
Context
l
The subscribers are classified into the following three categories:
– Cat1: category 1 government subscribers
– Cat2: category 2 government subscribers
– Cat3: common subscribers.
The priorities of three-category subscribers are as follows: cat1 > cat2 > cat3.
l
The DSP resources are configured for subscribers according to the following principles:
– For category 1 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured
first. When the resources are insufficient, the resources reserved for category 2
government subscribers are configured. When the resources are insufficient again, the
resources reserved for common subscribers are configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
– For category 2 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured
first. When the resources are insufficient, the resource reserved for common subscribers
are configured.
– For common subscribers, the remaining globally shared DSP resources are configured.
Precaution
The reserved DSP channels must be configured for subscribers according to the number of
subscribers with the priorities of cat1 and cat2.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the dsp reserve share command to configure the number of DSP channels in globally
shared DSP resources.
Step 2 Run the display dsp statistic share command to query the allocation and the usage of globally
shared DSP resources.
----End
Example
To reserve 150 DSP channels for category 1 government subscribers and 200 DSP channels for
category 2 government subscribers in globally shared DSP resources, do as follows:
huawei(config)#dsp reserve share cat1 150 cat2 200
huawei(config)#display dsp statistic share
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Config
Used
Cat1 DSP Channels:
150
0
Cat2 DSP Channels:
200
0
Common DSP Channels:
226
0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Global Share DSP Channels Total: 576
DSP Channels Used:
0
Cat1 User Used:
0
Cat2 User Used:
0
Common User Used:
0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 3-2 lists the related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in globally
shared DSP resources.
Table 3-2 Related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in globally shared
DSP resources
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the command...
Remarks
Configure the attributes of the
DSP channel
dsp attribute
-
Configure the number of DSP
channels in the DSP resources
reserved for the VAG
dsp reserve
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
To...
Run the command...
Remarks
Query the attributes of the DSP
channel
display dsp attribute
-
Query the DSP channel status
of the VAG
display dsp statistic
Query the DSP resource
configuration and the usage of a
specified VAG.
3.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP
Resources Reserved for the VAG
The number of DSP channels reserved for the VAG refers to the number of private DSP channels
reserved for the specified VAG. Subscribers in the VAG can use only the reserved DSP channels.
Through the reservation of DSP channels for the VAG, subscribers of different priorities in the
VAG can be allocated with different numbers of DSP channels.
Context
l
Subscribers in the VAG can only use DSP channels in the reserved DSP resources.
l
Subscribers are classified into the following three categories:
– Cat1: category 1 subscribers
– Cat2: category 2 subscribers
– Cat3: common subscribers.
The priorities of three category subscribers are as follows: cat1 > cat2 > cat3.
l
The DSP resources are configured for subscribers according to the following principles:
– For category 1 subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured first. When
the resources are insufficient, the resources reserved for category 2 subscribers are
configured. When the resources are insufficient again, the resources reserved for
common subscribers are configured.
– For category 2 subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured first. When
the resources are insufficient, the resource reserved for common subscribers are
configured.
– For common subscribers, the remaining DSP resources are configured.
l
For the related information about the VAG, see "8 Configuring the VAG Service."
Precaution
The reserved DSP channels must be configured for subscribers according to the number of
subscribers with the priorities of cat1 and cat2.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface h248 or interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode to be
configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
Step 2 Run the dsp reserve command to configure the number of DSP channels in the DSP resources
reserved for the VAG.
Step 3 Run the display dsp statistic command to query the allocation and the usage of DSP resources
in a specified VAG.
----End
Example
To configure 100 DSP channels for VAG 0, 25 DSP channels for category 1 subscribers, and
25 DSP channels for category 2 subscribers, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#dsp reserve total 100 cat1 25 cat2 25
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display dsp statistic
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Config
Used
DSP Channels Total:
100
0
Cat1 DSP Channels:
25
0
Cat2 DSP Channels:
25
0
Common DSP Channels:
50
0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Cat1 User Used:
0
Cat2 User Used:
0
Common User Used:
0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 3-3 lists the related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in the reserved
DSP resources for the VAG.
Table 3-3 Related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in the reserved DSP
resources for the VAG
To...
Run the command...
Remarks
Configure the attributes of the
DSP channel
dsp attribute
-
Configuring the number of
DSP channels in globally
shared DSP resources
dsp reserve share
-
Query the attributes of the DSP
channel
display dsp attribute
-
Query the status of globally
shared DSP channels
display dsp statistic
share
Query the configuration and the
usage of the globally shared
DSP resources.
3.5 Prohibiting the DSP Channel
When one or more DSP channels on a subboard are faulty, you can prohibit the faulty DSP
channel so that the service is not affected.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
Precaution
A DSP channel that is processing the voice service cannot be prohibited.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the dsp prohibit command to prohibit the DSP channel.
Step 2 Run the display dsp state command to query the status of the DSP channel.
----End
Example
To prohibit two consecutive DSP channels on subboard 0/5/0, with the start DSP channel number
3, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-resource)#display dsp state 0/5/0 3 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Channel NO. DSP Channel State 0-idle $-G.711 busy A-All busy W-Wastage X-fault
@-IP loopback *-PCM loopback #-prohibited
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0000-0049 ---00
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 2 DSP channel
2 idle, 0 G.711 Busy, 0 All Busy, 0 Wastage, 0 Fault, 0 IP loopback, 0 PCM
loopback, 0 prohibited
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-narrow-resource)#dsp prohibit 0/5/0 3 2
huawei(config-narrow-resource)#display dsp state 0/5/0 3 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Channel NO. DSP Channel State 0-idle $-G.711 busy A-All busy W-Wastage X-fault
@-IP loopback *-PCM loopback #-prohibited
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0000-0049 ---##
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 2 DSP channel
0 idle, 0 G.711 Busy, 0 All Busy, 0 Wastage, 0 Fault, 0 IP loopback, 0 PCM
loopback, 2 prohibited
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 3-4 lists the related operations for prohibiting the DSP channel.
Table 3-4 Related operations for prohibiting the DSP channel
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Configure the attributes of the
DSP channel
dsp attribute
-
Query the attributes of the DSP
channel
display dsp attribute
-
Unprohibit the DSP channel
undo dsp prohibit
When the DSP channel
recovers, unprohibit the DSP
channel to use it again.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
3 Configuring the System DSP Channels
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the DSP channel status
of the VAG
display dsp statistic
Query the configuration and the
usage of the DSP resources on
a specified VAG.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
4 Configuring the Clock
4
Configuring the Clock
About This Chapter
In the digital network consisting of the UA5000 and other devices, the primary problem to be
solved is clock synchronization. The UA5000 adopts the master-slave mode to synchronize the
clock with the clocks of the devices in the network.
4.1 Introduction to the Clock
The purpose of clock synchronization is to restrict the clock frequency and the phase of each
node in a network within the predefined tolerance scope. This prevents the transmission
performance degradation due to poor timings at the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ends.
4.2 Configuration Example of a Clock Source
This topic describes how to implement the clock synchronization of the UA5000 by extracting
the clock signals from ports 0/4/0 and 0/5/0 on the UA5000.
4.3 Configuring the Reference Clock Source
Configure the reference clock source for the port on the PVM board to synchronize the clock of
the UA5000 with the clock of the upper-layer device.
4.4 Setting the Clock Source Priority
Set the clock source priority for each clock source on the PVM board. The UA5000 uses the
clock source with the highest priority for the clock synchronization. When the link of the clock
source with the highest priority is faulty, the UA5000 uses the clock source with the second
highest priority for the clock synchronization. This rule applies to the rest clock sources.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
4 Configuring the Clock
4.1 Introduction to the Clock
The purpose of clock synchronization is to restrict the clock frequency and the phase of each
node in a network within the predefined tolerance scope. This prevents the transmission
performance degradation due to poor timings at the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ends.
Service Description
There are two methods of achieving clock synchronization in a digital network: pseudo
synchronization and master-slave synchronization. Table 4-1 shows the details of the two clock
synchronization modes.
Table 4-1 Clock synchronization description
Synchronization
Mode
Description
Pseudo
synchronization
In a digital network using pseudo synchronization, all digital
exchanges are independent in terms of the clock. The clock of each
digital exchange is of high precision and stability. Usually, the cesium
clock is used. Because these clocks are independent from each other,
their frequencies and phases are not totally synchronized, but the
difference can be ignored because these clocks are precise. Hence,
this clock synchronization is called pseudo synchronization.
It is applied in international digital networks.
Master-slave
synchronization
In a network that uses the master-slave synchronization, there is a
master exchange with a high-precision clock. The other exchanges in
the network are controlled by the master exchange, that is, the clocks
of other exchanges in the network are synchronized with the clock of
this master exchange. The clock of the lower layer exchange is
synchronized with the clock of the upper layer exchange until the
clock of the end exchange is synchronized.
Service Specifications
The reference clock source of the system includes Bits clock, E1 line clock, and GPON line
clock. A maximum of 10 clock sources can be configured when you run the clock source
command to add the reference clock.
Service Implementation
The UA5000 often uses the master-slave synchronization mode. The working procedure is as
follows:
1.
The UA5000 extracts the clock signals sent from the upper-layer device at the line side as
the clock source of the system. The clock source, with the highest priority and in the normal
state, is used as the system clock.
2.
The UA5000 sends the clock signals to all the service boards through the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3.
4 Configuring the Clock
The service boards send the clock signals to a lower-layer network element.
NOTE
The control boards can also send the clock signals to a lower-layer network element.
4.2 Configuration Example of a Clock Source
This topic describes how to implement the clock synchronization of the UA5000 by extracting
the clock signals from ports 0/4/0 and 0/5/0 on the UA5000.
Prerequisite
The UA5000 must be connected properly according to the networking.
Precaution
l
You can configure a maximum of 10 clock sources.
l
The added clock module must be set with a priority before use.
l
After the priority of the clock module is set, it takes effect immediately. This operation may
result in clock switch.
l
When running the undo clock source command to delete the clock source that is being
used by the system, it can result in clock switch.
Networking
Figure 4-1 shows the networking of the clock configuration.
Figure 4-1 Networking of the clock configuration
E1/V5
SDH
E1/V5
P P
V V
M M
A A
3 3
2 2
UA5000
Data Plan
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
By running the clock source command, you can configure a maximum of 10 clock sources.
The following section uses the configuration of two clock sources as an example.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
l
4 Configuring the Clock
By running the clock priority command, you can configure a maximum of 10 priority
levels. The following section uses the configuration of the priority level of the two clock
sources as an example.
Table 4-2 provides the data plan for configuring the UA5000 clock.
Table 4-2 Data plan for configuring the clock
Item
Data
srcindex
System reference clock source 0: 0
System reference clock source 1: 1
Port number
System reference clock source 0: 0/4/0
System reference clock source 1: 0/4/1
priority
System reference clock source 0: High
System reference clock source 1: Low
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 4-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the clock.
Figure 4-2 Flowchart for configuring the clock
Start
Configure the system
reference clock source
Set the priority of the
system clock source
Query the clock source
status
End
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the reference clock source.
l Clock source 0 extracts clock signals from port 0/4/0.
l Clock source 1 extracts clock signals from port 0/4/1.
huawei(config)#clock source 0 E1 0/4/0
huawei(config)#clock source 1 E1 0/4/1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
4 Configuring the Clock
Step 2 Set the priority of the clock source.
l Set the clock source 0 with the highest priority.
l Set the clock source 1 with the second highest priority.
huawei(config)#clock priority 0/1
Step 3 Query the status of the clock source.
huawei(config)#display clock source
-------------------------------------------------------Index Config
Source
Priority
State
Output
-------------------------------------------------------0
E1
0/4/0
0
OK
Yes
1
E1
0/4/1
1
OK
No
--------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
The UA5000 selects clock source 0 as the system clock and delivers the clock signals to each
service board.
4.3 Configuring the Reference Clock Source
Configure the reference clock source for the port on the PVM board to synchronize the clock of
the UA5000 with the clock of the upper-layer device.
Context
The system supports a maximum of 10 reference clock sources.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the clock source command to add the reference clock source.
Step 2 Run the display clock source command to query the reference clock source.
----End
Example
To add an E1 clock source with index 0 to port 0/4/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#clock source 0 e1 0/4/0
Clock source set succeeded
huawei(config)#display clock source
-------------------------------------------------------Index Config
Source
Priority
State
Output
-------------------------------------------------------0
E1
0/4/0
0
OK
Yes
--------------------------------------------------------
To delete the clock source with index 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#undo clock source 0
Clock source deletion succeeded
huawei(config)#display clock source
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
4 Configuring the Clock
The current system clock source is local
Failure: User not config any clock source
Related Operation
Table 4-3 lists the related operation for configuring the reference clock source of the system.
Table 4-3 Related operation for configuring the reference clock source of the system
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the clock priority
clock priority
After the priority of the clock
module is set, it takes effect
immediately. This operation
may result in clock switch.
4.4 Setting the Clock Source Priority
Set the clock source priority for each clock source on the PVM board. The UA5000 uses the
clock source with the highest priority for the clock synchronization. When the link of the clock
source with the highest priority is faulty, the UA5000 uses the clock source with the second
highest priority for the clock synchronization. This rule applies to the rest clock sources.
Precaution
After the priority is set, the priority of the clock module takes effect immediately. This operation
may result in clock switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the clock priority command to set the clock priority of the reference clock source.
Step 2 Run the display clock source command to query the reference clock source.
----End
Example
To set the priority level of the clock source with index 1 as high, and the priority level of clock
source with index 0 as low, do as follows:
huawei(config)#clock
{ priority<K>|source<K> }:priority
{ p0/p1/p2/p3/p4/p5/p6/p7/p8/p9<S><1,19> }:1/0
Command:
clock priority 1/0
Clock source priority set succeeded
huawei(config)#display clock source
-------------------------------------------------------Index Config
Source
Priority
State
Output
-------------------------------------------------------0
E1
0/4/0
1
OK
Yes
1
E1
0/5/0
0
OK
No
--------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
4 Configuring the Clock
Related Operation
Table 4-4 lists the related operations for setting the clock source priority.
Table 4-4 Related operations for setting the clock source priority
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the reference clock source
clock source
The added clock source must
be set with a priority before
being used.
Query the reference clock source
display clock source
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Configuring the MG Interface
About This Chapter
When configuring the IP services such as voice over IP (VoIP) and integrated services digital
network (ISDN), configure the media gateway (MG) first. One MG corresponds to a unique MG
IP address and MG port number, which are the only ways for the UA5000 to communicate with
the MGC.
5.1 Introduction to the MG Interface
In the application of the next generation network (NGN), the UA5000 communicates with the
upper-layer MGC through the MG interface (the MG IP address and MG port number of the
MG interface). Each MG interface corresponds to one virtual access gateway (VAG).
5.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)
Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software
parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure
the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.
5.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)
Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software
parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure
the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.
5.4 Adding an MG Interface
Add an MG interface to the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and the MGC can communicate with
each other through the MG interface.
5.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool
The IP address can be used for configuring the service only after the IP address is added to the
IP address pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the planned IP
address to the IP address pool.
5.6 Configuring MG Interface Attributes (the H.248 Protocol)
The MG interface attributes include the parameters required for setting up the communication
between the MG interface and the MGC. The MG interface and the MGC can communicate with
each other in the normal state only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes are the
same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
5.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port number
required for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and also
include the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC can
communicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes
are the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
5.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface Based on the H.248 Protocol
The software parameters of a media gateway (MG) interface include parameters such as whether
the MG interface supports authentication during registration and whether the MG interface
supports the emergency standalone function. After the software character parameters are
configured successfully, they take effect for the services carried on this MG interface.
5.9 Configuring Software Parameters of an MG Interface Based on the MGCP Protocol
The software parameters of a media gateway (MG) interface include parameters such as whether
to hold an ongoing call if the MG interface fails to communicate with the media gateway
controller (MGC) and whether the MG interface supports the dual-homing function. After the
software parameters are configured successfully, they take effect on the services carried on the
MG interface.
5.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG Interface
Configuring the ringing mode includes configuring the cadence ringing type and initial ringing
type. Configure the ringing mode of the MG interface to meet different requirements for the
ringing of different subscribers.
5.11 Configuring a Digitmap for an MG Interface Based on the H.248 Protocol
The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by the H.248 protocol. A digitmap consists of strings
of characters with certain meanings. Configuring a digitmap of a media gateway (MG) interface
includes configuring the internal phone digitmap, emergency channel digitmap, automatic redial
digitmap, and overload emergency call digitmap for the MG interface. In addition, users can
configure a local common digitmap for all MG interfaces.
5.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)
The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by MGCP. A digitmap consists of strings of
characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includes
configuring the automatic re-dial digitmap and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG
interface.
5.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC
The MGC processes the calls reported by multiple AGs that the MGC controls. If the traffic
volumes of multiple AGs increase, the MGC may be overloaded. When the MGC is overloaded,
the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with related priority or
the emergency calls are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are
improved.
5.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG
If the traffic volume of the MG increases suddenly, the MG may be overloaded. When the MG
is overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with the
related priority or the emergency calls are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of
the system are improved.
5.15 Enabling an MG Interface
Enable an MG interface so that the MG interface negotiates with the MGC through the specified
media gateway control protocol and implements the registration on the MGC. Resetting the
interface enables the MG interface to register again on the MGC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
5.1 Introduction to the MG Interface
In the application of the next generation network (NGN), the UA5000 communicates with the
upper-layer MGC through the MG interface (the MG IP address and MG port number of the
MG interface). Each MG interface corresponds to one virtual access gateway (VAG).
Service Description
In the next generation network (NGN), the MG and media gateway controller (MGC) are
completely separated from each other. The MG converts the media format provided in one type
of network to the media format required in another type of network. The MGC controls the status
of a call related to the connection control for media channels in an MG.
In the NGN solutions of Huawei, the UA5000 functions as an MG and the softswitch functions
as an MGC. The MG interface data describes the interface and connection information between
the UA5000 and the MGC.
Service Specifications
l
You can configure a maximum of eight MG interfaces, namely, eight virtual access
gateways (VAGs), on one UA5000.
l
The UA5000 supports the H.248 protocol, the media gateway control protocol (MGCP),
and the SIP protocol. One UA5000 can use only one of the there protocols at the same time.
5.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248
Protocol)
Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software
parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure
the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l
The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol.
l
The IP address to be used in the example must already be configured in the IP address pool
by running the ip address command.
l
The data on the MGC side (corresponding to the data on the MG side) must be configured
correctly.
l
You can add a maximum of eight MG interfaces for a UA5000. If you need to add one
more MG interface, the operation fails, and an error prompt is displayed.
l
One UA5000 supports the H.248 protocol, the MGCP protocol, and the SIP protocol. If
one UA5000 uses one protocol, all the MG interfaces on the UA5000 must also use this
protocol. The default protocol is H.248.
Precaution
Data Plan
Table 5-1 lists the data plan for configuring the MG interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Table 5-1 Data plan for configuring the MG interface
Data Type
Item
Data
MG interface
data
mgid
0
code
text
transfer
udp
protocol
H.248
port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
IP address
Standalone digitmap
1234xxxx
Emergency channel digitmap
110|119|999
automatic re-dial digitmap
1[01246-9]x
emergency call digitmap due to overload or
bandwidth insufficiency
[0-9EF].T
Media IP address 1 of the MG interface on the
UA5000
10.10.10.4/24
Signaling IP address of the MG interface on the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
IP address 1 of the primary MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 5-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the MG interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Figure 5-1 Flowchart for configuring the MG interface
Start
Add an MG interface
Configure
the MG
interface
attributes
(Optiona)
Configure
the ring
mode of the
MG interface
(Optiona)
Configure
digitmaps of
the MG
interface
Enable the MG interface
End
NOTE
For the details about how to configure the ringing mode on an MG interface, see 5.10 Configuring the
Ringing Mode of an MG Interface. This topic uses the default ringing mode in the system.
Procedure
Step 1 Add an MG interface.
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
Step 2 Configure the MG interface attributes.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text
transfer udp primary-mgc-ip1 10.10.20.1 primary-mgc-port 2944 mg-media-ip1
10.10.10.4
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
3
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
0:NoProfile("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
MG signalling IP
10.10.10.2
MG signalling Port
2944
MG media IP1
10.10.10.4
MG media IP2
-
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
MIDType
DeviceName
5 Configuring the MG Interface
IP4_ADDR
-
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC IP:10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC IP:Standby MGC
MGC Domain Name:-------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Configure the MG interface digitmap.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency
110|119|999 dualdial 1[01246-9]x urgent [0-9EF].T
Step 4 Reset the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
Step 5 Query the status of the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
huawei(config)#display if-h248 all
---------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
TransMode State
MGPort MGIP
MGCPort MGCIP/DomainName
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
UDP
Normal
2944
10.10.10.2
2944
10.10.20.1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
After the MG interface is configured successfully, it should be able to communicate with MGC
in the normal state.
5.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP
Protocol)
Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software
parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure
the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l
The UA5000 must use the MGCP protocol.
l
The IP address to be used in this example must be configured in the IP address pool by
running the ip address command.
l
The data on the MGC side must be configured correctly.
Data Plan
Table 5-2 provides the data plan for configuring the MG interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Table 5-2 Data plan for configuring the MG interface
Data Type
Item
Data
MG interface data
mgid
0
protocol
MGCP
port
MG: 2427
MGC: 2727
IP address
IP address of MG interface 0 on the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Context
The difference between the H.248-based MG interface and the MGCP-based MG interface is
that the MGCP-based MG interface does not support the isolation of the media stream and
signaling stream. Hence, the IP address of the media stream must be the same as the IP address
of the signaling stream (the same as the IP address of the MG interface), and the IP address of
the signaling stream must be added to the IP address pool in the system.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 5-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MG interface.
Figure 5-2 Flowchart for configuring the MG interface
Start
Add an MG interface
Configure
the MG
interface
attributes
(Optiona)
Configure
the ring
mode of the
MG interface
(Optiona)
Configure
digitmaps of
the MG
interface
Enable the MG interface
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
NOTE
For the details about how to configure the ringing mode on an MG interface, see 5.10 Configuring the
Ringing Mode of an MG Interface. This topic uses the default ringing mode in the system.
Procedure
Step 1 Add an MG interface.
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
Step 2 Configure the MG interface attributes.
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#if-mgcp attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2427 mgcip_1
10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2727
Step 3 Query the MG interface attributes.
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display if-mgcp attribute
--------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG DomainName
Protocol
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Transmode
IP
Port
HeartBeat Timer(s)
MGCP
Text
UDP
10.10.10.2
2427
60
MGC[1]
MGC PORT
:2727
MGC IP:10.10.20. 1
MGC[1]
MGC Domain Name:
MGC[2]
MGC PORT
:MGC IP:MGC[2]
MGC Domain Name:MGC[3]
MGC PORT
:MGC IP:MGC[3]
MGC Domain Name:---------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Reset the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
Step 5 Query the status of the MG interface.
huawei(config)#display if-mgcp all
-------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
State
MGPort MGIP
MGCPort MGCIP/DomainName
-------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Normal
2427
10.10.10.2
2727
10.10.20.1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
After the MG interface is configured successfully, it should be able to communicate with the
MGC in the normal state.
5.4 Adding an MG Interface
Add an MG interface to the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and the MGC can communicate with
each other through the MG interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Precaution
l
You can add up to eight MG interfaces for one UA5000. If you need to add one more MG
interface, the operation fails, and the error prompt is displayed.
l
One UA5000 supports the H.248 protocol, the MGCP protocol, and the SIP protocol. If
one UA5000 uses one protocol, all the MG interfaces on the UA5000 must also use this
protocol. The default protocol is H.248.
l
If the MG interface that supports the current system protocol exists, you cannot switch the
protocol. You can switch the protocol only after deleting the MG interface.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display protocol support command to query the protocol used by the system.
Step 2 Configure the system protocol.
l If the protocol is different from the planned protocol, do as follows:
1.
Run the undo interface h248 or undo interface mgcp command to delete the original
MG interface.
2.
Run the protocol support command to set the protocol for the system.
l If the protocol is the same as the planned protocol, go to step 4.
Step 3 Run the reboot command to reset the system to make the protocol settings take effect after you
run the save command to save the configuration data.
CAUTION
Resetting the system interrupts the services. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this
command.
Step 4 Add an MG interface.
l When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to add an MG interface.
l When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to add an MG interface.
----End
Example
To add an MG interface with MG ID 0 when the H.248 protocol is used, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display protocol support
System support H248 protocol
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
To add an MG interface with MG ID 0 when the MGCP protocol is used, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display protocol support
System support H248 protocol
huawei(config)#undo interface h248 0
huawei(config)#protocol support mgcp
Configure Protocol need save the data, then reboot the system. Are you sure to
change the protocol? (y/n)[n]:y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
huawei(config)#save
huawei(config)#reboot system
Data is not saved, the unsaved data will lose if reboot system, are you sure
to reboot system? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#
Related Operation
Table 5-3 lists the related operations for adding an MG interface.
Table 5-3 Related operations for adding an MG interface
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Shut down an MG
interface
shutdown
The shutdown type can be
graceful or force.
l The option graceful
indicates that if the active
calls exist on the MG
interface, the calls are held.
When the active calls end or
occur after the set time, the
MGC and the MG are
disconnected.
l The option force indicates
that all the calls are released
after the MGC and the MG
are disconnected.
Restart an MG interface
reset
When an MG interface is
normal, run this command to
reset it. After modifying the
MG interface parameters, reset
the MG interface so that it
registers again with the MGC.
Delete an MG interface
undo interface h248
You cannot delete an MG
interface that is configured with
the subscriber data, or an MG
interface that functions
normally. That is, you can
delete only an MG interface that
is in the close state or in the notstart state.
undo interface mgcp
Query the information
about all the MG
interfaces
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
display if-h248 all
display if-mgcp all
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Run this command to query the
configurations and the current
states of all the MG interfaces in
the global config mode.
44
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the attributes of
an MG interface
display if-h248 attribute
Run this command to query the
configuration of an MG
interface in the MG interface
mode.
Query the status of an
MG interface
display if-h248 state
Add a ringing mapping
record
mg-ringmode add
display if-mgcp attribute
display if-mgcp state
Run this command to query the
current status of an MG
interface in the MG interface
mode.
When the MGC interacts with
the UA5000, the ringing mode
of the UA5000 is adapted to
meet the local standards
through parameter settings. The
ringing mapping involves
mapping the ringing mode
parameters provided by the
MGC and the ringing tones
provided by the UA5000.
The data packet sent to the
UA5000 by the MGC contains
the parameters of the ringing
mode, which has the same value
as the value of mgcpara.
The UA5000 searches the
ringing mapping table for the
matching mgcpara to obtain the
cadence and initial ringing
tones.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Modify a ringing
mapping record
mg-ringmode modify
-
Delete a ringing
mapping record
mg-ringmode delete
As the system supports only 16
ringing mapping records, you
can delete unnecessary records
if required.
Query a ringing
mapping record
display mg-ringmode
attribute
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Configure digitmap
timers
digitmap-timer
The H.248 protocol defines
three digitmap timers: long
timer (L), short timer (S), and
initial timer (T). Run the
digitmap-timer command to
set the timers to comply with the
standards in your country or
area.
l Long timer (L): If the MG
confirms that at least one
more digit needs to be
received to match a dialing
scheme in the digitmap, the
timer between the digits is
set as the long timer.
l Short timer (S): If the
number string matches with
one dialing scheme in the
digitmap, but more numbers
may be received and they
match with other dialing
schemes, the matching
status should not be reported
immediately. The MG must
use the short timer to wait
for receiving more numbers.
l Initial timer (T): It is used
before any dialed number. It
is the duration before the
first digit is received after
offhook. If the initial timer
is set to 0 (namely, T = 0),
the timer fails. In this case,
the MG waits for other
digits.
Force switch over MGC
mgc switch
Run this command to forcibly
register the MG interface with
the new MGC.
Before the switchover, ensure
that the IP address and port ID
of the secondary MGC are
configured in the MG interface
data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
5.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool
The IP address can be used for configuring the service only after the IP address is added to the
IP address pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the planned IP
address to the IP address pool.
Context
It is recommended that you plan the NMS configuration mode of the device before configuring
the IP address pool. Otherwise, changing the NMS configuration mode of the device
subsequently may interrupt the service.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the ip address command to add the IP address to the IP address pool.
Step 2 Run the display ip address command to query the information about the IP address pool in the
system.
----End
Example
To add the IP address 10.144.68.158 with the subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 and the gateway IP
address of 10.144.68.1 to the IP address pool, do as follows:
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.144.68.158 255.255.255.0 10.144.68.1
huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Eth:
IPAddress............: 10.11.11.20
SubMask..............: 255.255.0.0
GateWay..............: 10.11.1.1
MacIndex.............: 0
MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77
VlanID...............: -IPAddress............:
SubMask..............:
GateWay..............:
MacIndex.............:
MacAddress...........:
VlanID...............:
10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0
10.10.10.1
0
00-E0-FC-8B-77-77
--
IPAddress............:
SubMask..............:
GateWay..............:
MacIndex.............:
MacAddress...........:
VlanID...............:
10.144.68.158
255.255.255.0
10.144.68.1
0
00-E0-FC-8B-77-77
--
Related Operation
Table 5-4 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address pool.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Table 5-4 Related operation for configuring the IP address pool
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete the IP address
undo ip address
-
5.6 Configuring MG Interface Attributes (the H.248
Protocol)
The MG interface attributes include the parameters required for setting up the communication
between the MG interface and the MGC. The MG interface and the MGC can communicate with
each other in the normal state only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes are the
same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
Prerequisite
l
The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol.
l
An MG interface must be added successfully. For details about how to add an MG interface,
see "5.4 Adding an MG Interface."
l
The required media and signaling IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.
For details about how to configure an IP address, see "5.5 Configuring the IP Address
Pool."
l
The profile file of the system is correct. To modify the profile, run the h248profile
modify command.
l
The related data on the MGC side must be configured.
l
One UA5000 can be configured with up to eight MG interfaces.
l
The MG interface and the MGC can communicate with each other in the normal state only
when the parameters of the MG interface attributes are the same as the parameters of the
MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
l
The configuration of the MG interface attributes takes effect only on this MG interface.
Context
Precaution
When configuring the attributes of an MG interface that uses the H.248 protocol, pay attention
to the following points:
l
The UA5000 can identify the MGC through the IP address/port ID of the MGC or the MGC
domain name. When configuring the MG interface attributes, you can select one from the
two methods to identify the MGC. If both the methods are configured, the system prefers
the domain name method.
l
The MGC domain name refers to the concept of "domain name" in the traditional Internet.
Run the dns command on the UA5000 to configure the DNS client and perform the domain
name resolution.
l
The options for the encoding scheme are text and binary. The H.248 protocol, however,
supports only the text encoding scheme.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
l
The MG interface supporting the H.248 protocol can be configured with two MGCs (an
MG can register on only one MGC at a time). The MG interface needs to be configured
with two MGCs only when the MG supports the dual homing.
l
For the H601PVMB board, the transmission mode of user datagram protocol (UDP) is
supported. For the H601PVMD board and H612PVMB, the transmission modes of UDP
and stream control transmission protocol (SCTP) are supported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute command to configure the MG interface attributes.
Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the MG interface attributes.
----End
Example
Table 5-5 provides the data plan for configuring the MG interface attributes.
Table 5-5 Data plan for configuring the MG interface attributes
Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
mgid
0
mgip
10.10.10.2
mgport
2944
code
text
transfer
UDP
profile-negotiation
disable
primary-mgc-ip1
10.10.20.1
primary-mgc-port
2944
mg-media-ip1
10.10.10.4
protocol
H.248
H248 profile
Name: profile1
Index: 1
To add an MG interface with such attributes, do as follows:
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text
transfer udp primary-mgc-ip1 10.10.20.1 primary-mgc-port 2944 mg-media-ip1
10.10.10.4 profile-index 1 profile-negotiation disable
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
3
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
1:china_0(”")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
MG signalling IP
MG signalling Port
MG media IP1
MG media IP2
MIDType
DeviceName
5 Configuring the MG Interface
10.10.10.2
2944
10.10.10.4
IP4_ADDR
-
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC IP:10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC IP:Standby MGC
MGC Domain Name:-------------------------------------------------
5.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the
MGCP Protocol)
The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port number
required for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and also
include the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC can
communicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes
are the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
Prerequisite
l
The system must use the MGCP protocol.
l
An MG interface must be added successfully. For details on how to configure an MG
interface, see "5.4 Adding an MG Interface."
l
The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool. For details on how to configure
an IP address, see "5.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool."
l
One UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight MG interfaces.
l
The MG interface attributes configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MG
interface attributes configured on the MGC.
l
You can configure the following MG interface attributes as required:
Context
– 2833 encryption key
– MG domain name
– Heartbeat interval
– MG interface name
– MGC IP address
– MGC domain name
– MGC port number
– IP address of the MG interface
– Port number of the MG interface
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Step 2 Run the if-mgcp attribute command to configure the MG interface attributes.
Step 3 Run the display if-mgcp attribute command to query the MG interface attributes.
NOTE
The MG interface parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.
----End
Example
The following example shows how to configure an MG interface. Table 5-6 provides the data
plan for configuring an MG interface.
Table 5-6 Data plan for configuring an MG interface
Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
mgid
0
mgip
10.10.10.2
mgport
2944
domainName
UA5000.com
mgcip_1
10.10.20.1
mgcport_1
2727
mgcip_2
10.11.10.1
mgcport_2
2727
protocol
MGCP
description
aaln
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#if-mgcp attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2427
domainName UA5000.com desc aaln mgcip_1
10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2727 mgcip_2 10.11.10.1 mgcport_2 2727
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display if-mgcp attribute
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG description
aaln
MG DomainName
UA5000.com
Protocol
MGCP
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
IP
10.10.10.2
Port
2427
HeartBeat Timer(s)
60
MGC[1]
MGC PORT
:2727
MGC IP:10.10.20.1
MGC[1]
MGC Domain Name:MGC[2]
MGC PORT
:2727
MGC IP:10.11.10.1
MGC[2]
MGC Domain Name:MGC[3]
MGC PORT
:MGC IP:MGC[3]
MGC Domain Name:------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 5-7 lists the related operations for configuring the MG interface attributes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Table 5-7 Related operations for configuring MG interface attributes
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Shut down an MG interface
shutdown
The shutdown type can be
graceful or force.
l The option graceful
indicates that the active
calls are held after the
MGC and the MG are
disconnected. After the
set time, the MG and the
MGC are disconnected.
l The option force
indicates that all the calls
are released after the
MGC and the MG are
disconnected.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Enable an MG interface
reset
When an MG interface is
normal, run this command to
reset it. After modifying the
MG interface parameters,
reset the MG interface so that
it registers again with the
MGC.
Delete an MG interface
undo interface mgcp
You cannot delete an MG
interface that is configured
with the subscriber data or an
MG interface that is in use.
Query the information about
all the MG interfaces
display if-mgcp all
Run this command to query
the configurations and the
current states of all the MG
interfaces in the global
config mode.
Query the MG interface
attributes
display if-mgcp attribute
Run this command to query
the configuration of an MG
interface in the MG interface
mode.
Query the status of an MG
interface
display if-mgcp state
Run this command to query
the current status of an MG
interface in MG interface
mode.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Add a ring mapping entry
mg-ringmode add
When the MGC interacts
with the UA5000, the ring
mode is negotiated. The ring
mapping involves mapping
the ring mode parameters
provided by the MGC and the
ring tones provided by the
UA5000.
The data packet sent to the
UA5000 by the MGC
contains a ring mode, which
has the same value as the
value of mgcpara.
The UA5000 searches the
ring mapping table for the
matching mgcpara to obtain
the cadence and initial ring
tones.
Modify a ring mapping entry
mg-ringmode modify
-
Delete a ring mapping entry
mg-ringmode delete
As the system supports only
16 ring mapping entries, you
can delete unnecessary
entries if required.
Query a ring mapping entry
display mg-ringmode
attribute
-
Configure digitmap timers
digitmap-timer
The T timer is used to match
a timer expiry.
Switch the MGC forcibly
mgc switch
Run this command to force
the MG interface to register
with the new MGC.
Before the switchover, make
sure that the IP address and
port number of the secondary
MGC are configured in the
MG interface data.
5.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface
Based on the H.248 Protocol
The software parameters of a media gateway (MG) interface include parameters such as whether
the MG interface supports authentication during registration and whether the MG interface
supports the emergency standalone function. After the software character parameters are
configured successfully, they take effect for the services carried on this MG interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Prerequisite
l
The system protocol of the UA5000 has been configured to H.248.
l
An MG interface has been added successfully.
Context
Table 5-8 lists the software parameters that can be configured for an MG interface based on the
H.248 protocol.
Table 5-8 Software parameters that can be configured for an MG interface based on the H.248
protocol
Parameter
Description
Value
2
Indicates whether an MG interface
supports the multi-homing function.
Numeral type. Range: 0-2.
When users need to configure whether
an MG interface supports the multihoming function, use this parameter.
This parameter can be configured only
when the MG interface is in the local
closed state.
If the MG interface does not support
multi-homing and the secondary media
gateway controller (MGC) is
configured, when the MG interface fails
to register with the primary MGC, the
MG interface does not switch to register
with the secondary MGC. If the MG
interface supports multi-homing and
auto-switching, and has registered with
the secondary MGC, when the primary
MGC recovers, the MG interface can
automatically switch to the primary
MGC. When the multi-homing is
supported, users can run the mgc
switch command to perform MGC
switching.
3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Reserved in the system.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 0: Indicates that multihoming is not supported.
l 1: Indicates that multihoming is supported, but
auto-switching is not
supported.
l 2: Indicates that multihoming and autoswitching are supported.
Default value: 0.
N/A
54
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
4
Indicates whether an MG interface uses
the wildcard for registration.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure whether
an MG interface uses the wildcard for
registration, use this parameter.
This parameter can be configured only
when the MG interface is in the local
closed state.
l 0: Indicates that the
wildcard is used.
l 1: Indicates that the
wildcard is not used.
Default value: 0.
When the wildcard is used for
registration, all the terminals under the
MG interface register with the MGC
using one message, which effectively
reduces the messages between the MG
interface and the MGC. When no
wildcard is used for registration, each
terminal under the MG needs to initiate
the registration with the MGC.
The registration with no wildcard is also
called single-terminal registration.
5
Reserved in the system.
N/A
6
Indicates whether an MG interface
supports device authentication.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure whether
an MG interface supports
authentication, use this parameter.
After the device authentication is
configured, run the auth command to
set authentication parameters, and then
run the reset command to reset the MG
interface. In this way, the MGC can
manage the security of MG devices,
preventing illegal registration with the
MGC.
l 0: Indicates that
authentication is
supported.
l 1: Indicates that
authentication is not
supported.
Default value: 1.
CAUTION
Resetting an MG interface may interrupt
services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
7
Indicates whether an MG interface
supports a security header.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure whether
an MG interface supports a security
header, use this parameter.
l 0: Indicates that security
header is supported.
l 1: Indicates that security
header is not supported.
After the security header is configured,
run the auth command to set
authentication parameters, and then run
the reset command to reset the MG
interface. In this way, the MGC can
manage the security of MG devices,
ensuring the completeness of the
system.
Default value: 1.
8
Reserved in the system.
N/A
9
Reserved in the system.
N/A
11
Indicates whether an MG supports the
emergency standalone function.
Numeral type. Range: 0-3.
When users need to configure whether
an MG interface supports the
emergency standalone function, use
this parameter.
If an MG interface supports the
emergency standalone function, the
users under the MG interface can
communicate with each other even if
the MG interface fails to communicate
with the MGC.
l 0: Indicates that the
emergency standalone
function is not supported.
l 1: Indicates that only
internal calls are
supported.
l 2: Indicates that only
emergency calls are
supported.
l 3: Indicates that the
emergency standalone
function is supported.
Default value: 0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
13
Indicates the maximum digitmap
matching flag of an MG interface.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure the
digitmap matching scheme of an MG
interface, use this parameter.
l 1: maximum matching
In case of the minimum matching, the
MG interface immediately reports the
matching status only if a dialed number
matches a scheme in the digitmap. In
case of the maximum matching, the MG
reports the matching status after the
short timer expires (namely, 5s) to wait
for receiving more numbers because
more received numbers may match the
other dialing schemes.
Default value: 2.
l 0: defined in the protocol
l 2: minimum matching
Users can run the digitmap-timer
command to set the duration of a
digitmap timer.
14
Reserved in the system.
N/A
15
Indicates whether to enable the media
stream source port filtering function on
an MG interface.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure whether
to enable the media stream source port
filtering function on an MG interface,
use this parameter.
l 0: disabled
l 1: enabled
Default value: 0.
After the media stream source port
filtering function is enabled on an MG
interface, the MG interface receives
media streams coming from only a
specified port.
16
Indicates the duration of the timer for
the media stream source port filtering
function on an MG interface.
When users need to set the duration of
the timer for the media stream source
port filtering function on an MG
interface, use this parameter.
Numeral type. Range: 0-30.
Default value: 5.
Unit: s.
When the media stream source port
filtering function is disabled on an MG
interface, if the timer expires, the source
port is automatically filtered.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
22
Indicates the type of the prompt tone
after the MG disconnects from the
MGC.
Numeral type. Range: 0-2.
l 0: busy tone
l 1: device congestion tone
l 2: voice prompt
Default value: 0.
23
Indicates the duration of the timer for
port status synchronization.
Numeral type. Range: 0-120.
After a port in the remote blocking state
receives the signaling sent from the
MGC, the device determines whether to
directly refresh the port status or initiate
a port registration to the MGC again. If
the device initiates the port registration
to the MGC, the port is registered again
after the timer for port status
synchronization expires.
Unit: s.
Default value: 35.
This parameter is invalid for an RTP
terminal.
24
25
Indicates the maximum RTP terminal
ID.
Numeral type. Range:
0-65535.
Ensure that the range of RTP temporary
terminals set on the MG is the same as
that set on the MGC.
Default value: 1000.
Indicates the maximum random value
of avalanche prevention on an H.248
interface.
Numeral type. Range:
30000-300000.
After the system is reset, all H.248
interfaces on the device will register
with the MGC again. In this case, burst
packets may cause MGC failure.
Avalanche prevention is used to prevent
this problem.
Unit: ms.
Default value: 60000.
After the maximum random value of
avalanche prevention is set, the system
generates a time for initiating an H.248
interface registration using the internal
algorithm. When the timer expires, the
H.248 interface registers with the MGC
again. Ensure that the duration for
initiating an H.248 interface
registration is shorter than the sum of
system internal baseline and the
maximum random value of avalanche
prevention.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
26
Indicates the type of the tone played in
the case of local congestion.
Numeral type. Range: 0-4.
Local congestion occurs if an MG
interface is faulty or the endservice
command is executed. In this case, the
local congestion tone is played on a
phone.
l 1: device congestion tone
l 0: busy tone
l 2: mute
l 3: customized tone 1
l 4: customized tone 2
Default value: 0.
27
Indicates the type of the tone played in
the case of remote congestion.
Numeral type. Range: 0-4.
If an MG interface is blocked remotely
because the MGC does not respond or
responds incorrectly, the remote
congestion tone is played on a phone.
l 1: device congestion tone
l 0: busy tone
l 2: mute
l 3: customized tone 1
l 4: customized tone 2
Default value: 0.
28
Indicates the howler tone duration.
The howler tone is played if a call ends
or no number is dialed after off hook,
and the busy tone timer expires. After
the howler tone duration expires, the
port is locked. In this case, the locked
port cannot ring as a called party
temporarily. This recovers after on
hook.
29
30
31
Numeral type. Range:
1-65535.
Default value: 60.
Unit: s.
Indicates the duration of the message
waiting indication (MWI).
Numeral type. Range:
1-60000.
If the MWI service is enabled, the MGC
issues the message waiting tone (the
same as the dial tone) after off hook.
Default value: 3.
Indicates the threshold for generating
an alarm for an extra-long call.
Numeral type. Range:
1-65535.
After the function for generating an
alarm for an extra-long call is enabled,
the system generates an event for an
extra-long call for H.248 users if the call
duration reaches the threshold.
Default value: 60.
Indicates whether to enable the function
for generating an alarm for an extralong call.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
Unit: s.
Unit: min.
l 0: enabled
l 1: disabled
Default value: 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
32
Indicates the minimum duration for
automatic registration of a remotely
blocked port.
Numeral type. Range:
0-60000. 0 indicates that the
port does not register with the
MGC automatically.
After the automatic registration is
enabled, if the MG interface is blocked
because the MGC does not respond or
responds incorrectly, the MG interface
can automatically register with the
MGC.
33
Indicates whether to disable the
heartbeat message between the MG
interface and the MGC.
The heartbeat message is generally
enabled on an MG interface for
communicating with the MGC.
Sometimes, certain MGCs cannot
identify the heartbeat message from the
MG interface and the heartbeat message
is disabled on the MG interface. In this
case, the MGC sends notify messages
to the MG interface periodically for
communication.
34
Indicates whether an MG interface
actively creates or releases a link for the
return to service (RTS) or out of service
(OOS) message issued by the MGC.
Default value: 1800.
Unit: s.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
l 0: disabled
l 1: enabled
Default value: 1.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
l 0: yes
l 1: no
Default value: 0.
35
Indicates the RTS or OOS mode of an
ISDN port.
l If the RTS or OOS in wildcard mode
is configured, an ISDN port reports
only one RTS or OOS message. This
reduces the number messages
between the MG interface and the
MGC.
l If the RTS or OOS in single channel
mode is configured, each channel of
an ISDN port reports one RTS or
OOS message.
Numeral type. Range: 0-2.
l 0: Indicates the RTS or
OOS in wildcard and
single channel mode.
l 1: Indicates the RTS or
OOS in single channel
mode.
l 2: Indicates the RTS or
OOS in wildcard mode.
Default value: 1.
l If the RTS or OOS in wildcard and
single channel mode is configured,
the RTS or OOS message is reported
based on site requirements.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
36
Indicates the interval between the
registration messages during the MCG
multi-homing registration switching.
Numeral type. Range:
1-1800.
When you need to configure the interval
of MGC switchover between primary/
secondary MGCs in case of an MGC
fault, use this parameter.
Default value: 40.
Unit: s.
NOTE
The software parameters of an MG interface are effective only on the MG interface itself.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the software parameters of the MG
interface.
Step 3 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the software parameters of the
MG interface.
NOTE
The software parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.
----End
Example
To configure the software parameters of the MG interface so that the MG interface supports the
multi homing and does not support the switchover function, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 2 1
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------Interface Id:0
para index:2
value:1
--------------------------------------------------------------------APPENDIX:
--------------------------------------------------------------------Interface software parameter name:
2: The selections of the MG interface multi-homing
0: Do not support the multi-homing
1: Support the multi-homing, but do not support the auto switchover
2: Support the multi-homing and auto switchover
5.9 Configuring Software Parameters of an MG Interface
Based on the MGCP Protocol
The software parameters of a media gateway (MG) interface include parameters such as whether
to hold an ongoing call if the MG interface fails to communicate with the media gateway
controller (MGC) and whether the MG interface supports the dual-homing function. After the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
software parameters are configured successfully, they take effect on the services carried on the
MG interface.
Prerequisite
l
The system protocol of the UA5000 has been configured to Media Gateway Control
Protocol (MGCP).
l
An MG interface has been added successfully.
Context
Table 5-9 lists the software parameters of an MG interface based on the MGCP protocol.
Table 5-9 Software parameters of an MG interface based on the MGCP protocol
Parameter
Description
Value
0
Reserved in the system.
N/A
1
Indicates whether to hold
ongoing calls if the MG
interface fails to communicate
with the MGC.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure
whether to hold ongoing calls if
the MG interface fails to
communicate with the MGC,
use this parameter.
2
Indicates whether the MG
interface supports the dualhoming function.
When users need to configure
whether an MG interface
supports the dual-homing
function, use this parameter.
l 0: Hold ongoing calls.
l 1: Release all calls
immediately.
Default value: 1.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
l 0: supported
l 1: not supported
Default value: 0.
If the MG interface does not
support the dual-homing
function and the secondary
MGC is configured, when the
MG interface fails to register
with the primary MGC, the MG
interface does not switch to
register with the secondary
MGC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
3
Indicates whether to disable the
heartbeat message between the
MG and the MGC.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure
whether to disable the heartbeat
message between the MG and
the MGC, use this parameter.
4
l 0: disabled
l 1: enabled
Default value: 1.
Indicates whether to use the
wildcard when the MG
interface registers with the
MGC.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure
whether to use the wildcard for
the registration of the MG
interface with the MGC, use
this parameter.
Default value: 0.
l 0: used
l 1: not used
Using the wildcard for
registration reduces the
messages between the MG
interface and the MGC greatly.
When no wildcard is used for
registration, all the terminals
under the MG interface need to
register with the MGC by turn.
The registration without using
the wildcard is also called
single-terminal registration.
5
6
Indicates the MGC type.
Numeral type. Range: 0-8.
When users need to select
MGCs of different types, use
this parameter.
Default value: 0.
Indicates the upper threshold
for not responding a transmitted
heartbeat message.
Numeral type. Range: 1-10.
Default value: 3.
When users need to configure
the upper threshold for the
number of continuous heartbeat
messages, use this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
7
Indicates whether to support
heartbeat message reporting
using the MG interface as an
endpoint.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure
whether to support heartbeat
message reporting using the
MG interface as an endpoint,
use this parameter.
Default value: 0.
8
Reserved in the system.
N/A
9
Reserved in the system.
N/A
10
Indicates whether to enable the
point-to-point (P2P) fault
reporting function.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
When users need to configure
whether to enable the P2P fault
reporting function on the ISDN
terminals connected to the MG
interface, use this parameter.
11
Indicates whether to enable the
point-to-multipoint (P2MP)
fault reporting function.
When users need to configure
whether to enable the P2MP
fault reporting function on the
ISDN terminals connected to
the MG interface, use this
parameter.
12
Indicates the type of the
congestion tone played locally.
l 0: disabled
l 1: enabled
l 0: enabled
l 1: disabled
Default value: 0.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
l 0: enabled
l 1: disabled
Default value: 1.
Numeral type. Range: 0-4.
l 0: busy tone
l 1: device congestion tone
l 2: mute
l 3: customized tone 1
l 4: customized tone 2
Default value: 0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
13
Indicates the type of the
congestion tone played
remotely.
Numeral type. Range: 0-4.
l 0: busy tone
l 1: device congestion tone
l 2: mute
l 3: customized tone 1
l 4: customized tone 2
Default value: 0.
Indicates the Real-Time
Transport Protocol (RTP)
filtering function on a SIP
interface. When users need to
configure the RTP filtering
function on a SIP interface, use
this parameter.
14
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
l 0: disabled
l 1: enabled
Default value: 1.
After the RTP filtering function
is enabled on a SIP interface,
the SIP interface receives media
streams coming from only a
specified port.
15
Indicates the howler tone
duration.
Numeral type. Range: 1-65535.
Default value: 60.
Unit: s.
16
Indicates whether a number
string reported by signaling
ends with timer flag "T".
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
l 0: Indicates that the number
string ends with timer flag
"T" after the timer expires.
l 1: Indicates that the number
string does not end with timer
flag "T" after the timer
expires.
Default value: 0.
NOTE
The software parameters of an MG interface are effective only on the MG interface itself.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the software parameters of the MG
interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Step 3 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the software parameters of the
MG interface.
----End
Example
To set the software parameters of an MG interface so that all ongoing calls are released after the
MG interface fails to communicate with the MGC, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 1 1
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display mg-software parameter 1
------------------------------------------------Interface Id:0
para index:1
value:1
------------------------------------------------APPENDIX:
------------------------------------------------Interface soft parameter name:
1: Whether MG hold the existent call when connection between MGC and MG is
broken
0 : Hold the existent call
1 : Disconnect all call and release resource
5.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG Interface
Configuring the ringing mode includes configuring the cadence ringing type and initial ringing
type. Configure the ringing mode of the MG interface to meet different requirements for the
ringing of different subscribers.
Prerequisite
The MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
l
If the system defined ring modes can meet the subscriber requirements, you can select the
required ring modes and configure the ring mapping.
l
If the system defined ring modes cannot meet the subscriber requirements, you can
customize ring modes and configure the ring mapping.
Precaution
The mgcpara parameter on the MG must be the same as the mgcpara parameter configured on
the MGC.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the system parameters command to configure the stop initial ringing flag.
NOTE
l If the initial ringing and the cadence ringing are in different cadence ratios, perform step 1. If they are
in the same cadence ratio, skip step 1.
l To use user defined ring modes, perform steps 2-3. To use system defined ring modes, perform step 4.
Step 2 Run the user defined-ring modify command to configure a user defined ring.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Step 3 Run the display user defined-ring command to display the user defined ring modes.
Step 4 Enter the MG interface mode.
1.
When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG
interface mode.
2.
When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG
interface mode.
Step 5 Run the mg-ringmode add command to add a ring mapping entry.
Step 6 Run the display mg-ringmode attribute command to query a ring mapping entry.
----End
Example
To configure the ring for an MG interface, do as follows:
Assume the following:
l
MG ID: 0
l
MGC peer parameter ID: 0
l
Cadence ring: 1:4
l
Initial ring: 1:2
huawei(config)#system parameters 3 1
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-ringmode add 0 0 17
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-ringmode attribute
------------------------------------------------------MGID
PeerParameter CadenceRinging InitialRinging
------------------------------------------------------0
0
0
17
-------------------------------------------------------
To configure a ring mode for an MG interface, do as follows:
Assume the following:
l
MG ID: 0
l
Peer parameter ID: 0
l
User-defined ring 0: 0.4s On, 0.2s Off, 0.4s On, 2.0s Off
l
Initial ring: user-defined ring 0
l
Cadence ring: user-defined ring 0
huawei(config)#system parameters 3 1
huawei(config)#user defined-ring modify 0 para1 400 para2 200 para3 400 para4 2000
huawei(config)#display user defined-ring
-------------------------------------------------RingType Para1 Para2 Para3 Para4 Para5 Para6
-------------------------------------------------0
400
200
400
2000 0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
0
0
0
0
0
0
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
14
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
-------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-ringmode add 1 128 144
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-ringmode attribute
------------------------------------------------------MGID
PeerParameter CadenceRinging InitialRinging
------------------------------------------------------0
1
128
144
------------------------------------------------------NOTE
The user defined ring mode 0–15 corresponds with cadence ring modes 128–143 and initial ring modes
144–159. For example, to use the user defined ring mode 0 as the cadence ring mode, select 128. To use
the user defined ring mode 0 as the initial ring mode, select 144.
5.11 Configuring a Digitmap for an MG Interface Based on
the H.248 Protocol
The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by the H.248 protocol. A digitmap consists of strings
of characters with certain meanings. Configuring a digitmap of a media gateway (MG) interface
includes configuring the internal phone digitmap, emergency channel digitmap, automatic redial
digitmap, and overload emergency call digitmap for the MG interface. In addition, users can
configure a local common digitmap for all MG interfaces.
Prerequisite
An MG interface has been added successfully.
Specifications
Table 5-10 lists the valid digits and characters in a character string and their meanings in H.248.
Table 5-10 Valid digits and characters in a character string and their meanings in H.248
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Digit or
Character
Meaning
0-9
Indicates digits 0-9.
A-D
Undefined
G-K
Undefined
E
Indicates an asterisk (*) in dual tone multiple frequency (DTMF) mode.
F
Indicates a pound (#) in DTMF mode.
X
Indicates any digit ranging from 0 to 9.
T
Indicates the start timer, used before any dialed number.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Digit or
Character
Meaning
S
Indicates the short timer. If a dialed number matches a dialing scheme
in the digitmap, the MG uses the short timer to wait for receiving more
numbers instead of reporting the matching status immediately because
more received numbers may match the other dialing schemes.
L
Indicates the long timer. If the MG verifies that at least one more digit
is needed to match a dialing scheme in the digitmap, the long timer
needs to be set between digits.
Z
Indicates the duration modifier, which refers to a dialing event that lasts
for a long time. It is used before the event character with a fixed
location. When an event duration exceeds the threshold, the dialing
event fills the location.
.
Indicates that zero or more digits or characters can appear before it.
|
Used to separate character strings, indicating that each character string
is a dialing scheme.
[]
Indicates that one digit or character string can be selected from the
options.
NOTE
l When you configure the re-dial digitmap for the card service when the MG interface uses the H.248
protocol, E stands for * and F stands for #. For example, to set the re-dial digitmap for the card service
to ##, you need to set the dualdialdigitmap to FF.
l The time length of the start timer set on the UA5000 must be the same as that set on the softswitch.
Procedure
l
l
Configure the internal phone digitmap, emergency channel digitmap, automatic redial
digitmap, and overload emergency call digitmap for an MG interface based on the H.248
protocol.
1.
In global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter MG interface mode.
2.
Run the digitmap set command to configure the needed internal phone digitmap,
emergency channel digitmap, automatic redial digitmap, and overload emergency call
digitmap.
3.
Run the display digitmap command to query the settings of the digitmap.
Configure a local common digitmap for all MG interfaces based on the H.248 protocol.
1.
In global config mode, run the local-digitmap add command to configure a local
common digitmap.
2.
Run the display local-digitmap command to query the settings of the digitmap.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Example
To configure an internal phone digitmap in the format of 1234xxxx, and an emergency channel
digitmap in the format of 110|119|999, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency
110|119|999
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display digitmap
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Inner digitmap
: 1234xxxx
Emergency digitmap
: 110|119|999
Urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict)
: Dualdial digitmap for card service
: -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
To configure a local common digitmap in the format of 8882xxxx, do as follows:
huawei(config)#local-digitmap add huawei normal 8882xxxx
huawei(config)#display local-digitmap name huawei
-----------------------------------------Name: huawei
Type: normal
Body: 8882xxxx
------------------------------------------
5.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP
Protocol)
The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by MGCP. A digitmap consists of strings of
characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includes
configuring the automatic re-dial digitmap and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG
interface.
Prerequisite
An MG interface must be added successfully.
Specifications
Table 5-11 shows the valid characters in the strings and their meanings in the MGCP protocol.
Table 5-11 Description of the characters in MGCP digitmaps
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Character
Meaning
0-9
-
A-D
-
X
It stands for a wildcard, indicating any digit from 0 to 9.
T
It indicates that the timer timeout is detected. That is, if there is still a number
after the dialing scheme is matched with, the system reports the number digit
by digit.
*
It stands for * in DTMF mode.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Character
Meaning
#
It stands for # in DTMF mode.
.
It indicates that there can be zero or many characters before it.
|
It is used to divide a string into several strings, and each string is a dialing
scheme.
[]
It indicates that one digit or string can be selected among the options.
NOTE
The time length of the start timer on the UA5000 must be consistent with the configuration on the
SoftSwitch.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the digitmap set command to configure digitmaps for services.
Step 3 Run the display digitmap command to query the settings of the digitmap.
----End
Example
To configure the automatic re-dial digitmap for the card service to ##, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#digitmap set dualdial ##
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display digitmap
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Dualdial digitmap for card service
: ##
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 5-12 lists the related operations for configuring the digitmap.
Table 5-12 Related operations for configuring the digitmap (based on MGCP)
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Clear a digitmap
digitmap clear
-
Configure digitmap timers
digitmap-timer
The T timer is used to match
with a timer expiry.
5.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC
The MGC processes the calls reported by multiple AGs that the MGC controls. If the traffic
volumes of multiple AGs increase, the MGC may be overloaded. When the MGC is overloaded,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with related priority or
the emergency calls are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are
improved.
Prerequisite
l
The MGC data must be configured successfully.
l
An MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
The MGC overload means that when the MGC has a large number of tasks to process, the CPU
usage of the MGC increases, and the MGC cannot ensure normal calls. In this case, to solve this
problem, the UA5000 limits the calls according to different levels of priorities.
On a network, the MGC or the MG may be overloaded. That is, either the MGC or the MG is
overloaded, or both are overloaded. When either device is overloaded, the remote device should
support and work with the overloaded device.
The user levels corresponding to the parameters for controlling the MGC overload are as follows:
l
T3: The customized user at the highest level, namely, the user of emergency calls
l
T2: The customized user at the second highest level, namely, the user of cat1 and cat2 calls
l
T1: The customized user at the common level, namely, the user of cat3 calls
NOTE
Cat1, cat2, and cat3 are the priority levels of the user terminal. Cat1 has the highest priority and cat3 has
the lowest priority.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the mgc-overload-control command to configure the maximum pass rate of the calls at
different levels for the MG interface.
Step 2 Run the display mgc-overload-control command to query the maximum pass rate of the calls
at different levels for the MG interface.
----End
Example
Assume that:
l
The user-defined call pass rate threshold at the highest level is 20 offhook/s.
l
The user-defined call pass rate threshold at the second highest level is 15 offhook/s.
l
The user-defined call pass rate threshold at the common level is 10 offhook/s.
l
The leaky bucket pass rate is 25 offhook/s.
l
The prompt tone that the subscriber network is busy when a call is rejected by the leaky
bucket is EET.
To configure such parameters for the MGC overload control, do as follows:
huawei(config)#mgc-overload-control parameters mgid 0 t3 20 t2 15 t1 10
maxAdmitRate
25 throttlingCallTreat EET
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
huawei(config)#display mgc-overload-control
<cr>|mgid<K> }:
Command:
display mgc-overload-control
--------------------------------SwitchValue
:disable
MgID
:0
T1Value
:20
T2Value
:15
T3Value
:10
Max LeakRate Configured
:25.00
Used real leakRate of MGC :25.00
ThrottlingCallTreatValue :EET
CallGappingTimerValue
:5
MgcBraWeight
:200
MgcPraWeight
:3000
---------------------------------
5.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG
If the traffic volume of the MG increases suddenly, the MG may be overloaded. When the MG
is overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with the
related priority or the emergency calls are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of
the system are improved.
Prerequisite
An MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
The MG overload means that when the MG has a large number of tasks to process, the CPU
usage of the MG increases, and the MG cannot ensure normal calls. In this case, to solve this
problem, the UA5000 limits calls to control the traffic when the CPU of the MG is overloaded.
On a network, the MGC or the MG may be overloaded. That is, either the MGC or the MG is
overloaded, or both are overloaded. When either device is overloaded, the remote device should
support and work with the overloaded device.
Precaution
l
The MG overload control takes effect only for PSTN subscribers and ISDN subscribers
(including ISDN PRA subscribers, ISDN BRA subscribers, DPNSS subscribers, and
DASS2 subscribers).
l
The UA5000 does not implement the overload processing for the onhook of ISDN
subscribers.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the mg-overload-control set command to configure the MG overload control parameters.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
NOTE
Use the default value 70 to set the corresponding minimum CPU usage for the restriction level overload.
Run the power-dialer-control set command to set the detection, detection cycle, number of detection
events in each cycle, and recovery time for malicious subscribers.
It is recommended that you use the default values for the MG overload control parameters.
----End
Example
Table 5-13 provides the data plan for configuring the MG overload control parameters. The
values of other parameters are the system default values.
Table 5-13 Data plan for configuring the MG overload control parameters
Type
Value
Emergency call
threshold
60
Common call threshold
50
huawei(config)#mg-overload-control set urgent-call-threshold 60 ordinary-call-th
reshold 50
huawei(config)#display mg-overload-control all
-----------------------------------------------------------Support Originating Call overload control : 1(0-disable,1-enable)
Support Terminating Call overload control : 0(0-disable,1-enable)
Support Mass Call Clear control
: 0(0-disable,1-enable)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Urgent Call threshold
: 60
Ordinary Call threshold
: 50
MG Overload alarm resum peroid : 30(s)
Max cpu occupancy rate
: 70(%)
Adjust factor for Leak rate
: 20
BRA Weight Value
: 200
PRA Weight Value
: 3000
-----------------------------------------
5.15 Enabling an MG Interface
Enable an MG interface so that the MG interface negotiates with the MGC through the specified
media gateway control protocol and implements the registration on the MGC. Resetting the
interface enables the MG interface to register again on the MGC.
Prerequisite
l
An MG interface must be added successfully.
l
The data on the MG and the data on the MGC must be configured properly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
5 Configuring the MG Interface
Precaution
l
After adding an MG interface or modifying the MG interface parameters, you need to reset
the MG interface to validate the parameter configuration.
l
Enabling an MG interface interrupts the ongoing services on the interface. Therefore,
exercise caution when enabling an MG interface.
Procedure
Step 1 Enter the MG interface mode
1.
When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG
interface mode.
2.
When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG
interface mode.
Step 2 Run the reset command to reset the MG interface to enable it.
----End
Example
To reset the MG interface with MG ID 0 when the UA5000 uses the H.248 protocol, do as
follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Configuring the SIP Interface
About This Chapter
The UA5000 communicates with the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) through the Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface to implement the interworking between the PSTN network
and the IP network and provide the VoIP service based on the IMS.
6.1 Introduction to SIP Interface
SIP is a control-layer protocol of the IMS, which is used to create, change, or terminate
multimedia sessions. The concept of "SIP interface" is developed to meet the requirements, such
as configuring public attributes for multiple SIP users in the IMS architecture and providing the
SIP VAG function. The following section describes the concepts and specifications related to
the SIP interface.
6.2 Configuration Example of a SIP Interface
Configuring a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface includes configuring the IP address
pool, interface attributes, and ringing modes. After the SIP interface is configured, the
UA5000, which is a Voice over IP Gateway (VGW), can communicate with the IP multimedia
subsystem (IMS) through this interface.
6.3 Configuring the IP Address Pool (SIP)
An IP address can be used in the service configuration only after it is added to the IP address
pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the IP address to be used to
the IP address pool.
6.4 Adding a SIP Interface
This topic describes how to add a SIP interface so that the UA5000 can interact with the IMS
through the SIP interface.
6.5 Configuring the Attributes of a SIP Interface
The basic and optional attributes, such as media IP address, signaling IP address, transfer
protocol, home domain name, domain name, and description information of a Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP) interface can be configured.
6.6 Configuring Software Parameters of a SIP Interface
A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface has multiple software parameters such as its
digitmap matching mode. After the software parameters are configured successfully, they take
effect on the services carried on the SIP interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
6.7 Configuring Software Character Parameters of a SIP Interface
A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface has multiple software character parameters such as
its long-distance call prefix. After configured successfully, the software character parameters
take effect on the services carried on the SIP interface.
6.8 Configuring a Local Digitmap for SIP
When the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is used, an access gateway (AG) provides its default
digitmap itself. If the required digitmap is different from the default digitmap, users can
configure the required digitmap by adding a local digitmap.
6.9 Configuring the Ringing Mode of the SIP Interface
This topic describes how to configure the ringing mode of the SIP interface to meet the user
requirements.
6.10 Resetting the SIP Interface
This topic describes how to reset the SIP interface to make the attributes of the SIP interface
take effect after modification.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
6.1 Introduction to SIP Interface
SIP is a control-layer protocol of the IMS, which is used to create, change, or terminate
multimedia sessions. The concept of "SIP interface" is developed to meet the requirements, such
as configuring public attributes for multiple SIP users in the IMS architecture and providing the
SIP VAG function. The following section describes the concepts and specifications related to
the SIP interface.
Service Description
The IMS is a sub-system that provides the IP-based multimedia session control function on the
next generation network. The IMS includes all the elements of the core network that provide the
audio, video, text, and instant message services.
SIP is a control-layer protocol of the IMS and also one of the framework protocols stipulated
by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) for the multimedia communication system. SIP
is an application-layer protocol, which is used to create, change, or terminate multimedia
sessions. Working with other IETF protocols, such as Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP), Realtime Transport Control Protocol (RTCP), SDP, Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP), and
DNS, SIP is used to implement session establishment and media negotiation.
The UA5000 is connected to the PSTN user terminal in the downstream direction and to the
IMS system through the SIP interface in the upstream direction. The UA5000 implements the
VoIP service by working with the IMS core network.
The functions and applications of the SIP interface are similar to the functions and applications
of the MG interface.
Service Specifications
l
The UA5000 supports three system protocols: SIP, H.248, and Media Gateway Control
Protocol (MGCP). One UA5000 can use only one protocol.
l
By default, the UA5000 uses H.248 protocol.
l
Similar to the MG interface, one UA5000 supports up to eight SIP interfaces. Each SIP
interface can be configured with the interface attributes separately.
6.2 Configuration Example of a SIP Interface
Configuring a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface includes configuring the IP address
pool, interface attributes, and ringing modes. After the SIP interface is configured, the
UA5000, which is a Voice over IP Gateway (VGW), can communicate with the IP multimedia
subsystem (IMS) through this interface.
Prerequisites
l
The system protocol of the UA5000 has been configured to SIP.
l
The IP address to be used in this example has been configured in the IP address pool by
running the ip address command.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Precaution
l
The UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight SIP interfaces. If eight SIP
interfaces have already existed in the UA5000, adding a SIP interface will fail and the
system will display an error message.
l
The UA5000 supports the following protocols: H.248, Media Gateway Control Protocol
(MGCP), and SIP. One UA5000 can use only one protocol. That is, if SIP is selected as
the system protocol, SIP must be selected for all the MG interfaces on the UA5000.
l
The default system protocol is H.248. Users can run the protocol support sip command
to change the protocol used by the UA5000 to SIP, run the save data command to save the
database file of the system, and then run the reboot command to reset the system to make
configuration take effect.
CAUTION
Resetting the system interrupts services. Therefore, exercise caution when users run this
command.
Data Plan
Table 6-1 provides the data plan for configuring the SIP interface.
Table 6-1 Data plan for configuring the SIP interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Category
Item
Data
Parameters of
the basic
attributes of the
SIP interface
Interface ID
0
Media/Signaling IP address
10.13.4.116
Signaling port ID
5555
Transfer protocol
UDP
IP address of the primary proxy
server
10.13.4.110
Port ID of the primary proxy server
5555
IP address of the secondary proxy
server
10.13.4.120
Port ID of the secondary proxy
server
5555
Profile index
0
Home domain name
huawei.com
Phone context
+86755
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Category
Item
Data
Ringing mode
of the SIP
interface
Index of the cadence ringing mode
2
Index of the initial ringing mode
4
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 6-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the SIP interface.
Figure 6-1 Flowchart for configuring the SIP interface
Start
Add a SIP interface
Configure the basic attributes
of the SIP interface
Configure the optional
attributes of the SIP interface
(Optional) Configure the ringing
mode of the SIP interface
Reset the SIP interface
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a SIP interface.
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
Are you sure to add the SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
Step 2 Configure the basic attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute basic home-domain huawei.com
media-ip 10.13.4.116 signal-ip 10.13.4.116 signal-port 5555 transfer udp
primary-proxy-ip1 10.13.4.110 primary-proxy-port 5555 secondary-proxy-ip1
10.13.4.120 secondary-proxy-port 5555 sipprofile-index 0
Step 3 Configure the optional attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute optional phone-context +86755
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Step 4 (Optional) Configure the ringing mode of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#ringmode add 0 test cadencering 2 initialring 4
Step 5 Query the configured attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display if-sip attribute config
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
Signalling IP
10.13.4.116
Signalling Port
5555
Media IP
10.13.4.116
Transfer Mode
UDP
Primary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.110
Primary Proxy IP 2
Primary Proxy Port
5555
Secondary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.120
Secondary Proxy IP 2
Secondary Proxy Port
5555
Proxy Address Mode
IP
SIPProfile Index
0:Customizing_0/1
Service logic Index
0:Default
Server Address DHCP Option
0:None
Primary Proxy Domain Name
Secondary Proxy Domain Name
Home Domain Name
huawei.com
Description
MG Domain Name
Phone Context
+86755
Register URI
Conference Factory URI
Subscribe to UA-Profile
enable
Subscribe to REG-STATE
disable
Subscribe to MWI
disable
SDP negotiation mode
remote
Mode of supporting proxy dual-homing dualhome
Proxy detection mode
probe
Proxy refresh mode
------------------------------------------------------------
Step 6 Reset the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset the SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#
Resetting SIP interface 0 succeeded
CAUTION
Resetting the SIP interface interrupts services. Therefore, exercise caution when users run this
command.
Step 7 Save the data.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
The current attributes of the queried SIP interface are the same as the configured attributes.
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display if-sip attribute running
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
Signalling IP
10.13.4.116
Signalling Port
5555
Media IP
10.13.4.116
Transfer Mode
UDP
Primary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.110
Primary Proxy IP 2
Primary Proxy Port
5555
Secondary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.120
Secondary Proxy IP 2
Secondary Proxy Port
5555
Proxy Address Mode
IP
SIPProfile Index
0:Customizing_0/1
Service logic Index
0:Default
Server Address DHCP Option
0:None
Primary Proxy Domain Name
Secondary Proxy Domain Name
Home Domain Name
huawei.com
Description
MG Domain Name
Phone Context
+86755
Register URI
Conference Factory URI
Primary Proxy State
up
Secondary Proxy State
up
Subscribe to UA-Profile
enable
Subscribe to REG-STATE
disable
Subscribe to MWI
disable
SDP negotiation mode
remote
Mode of supporting proxy dual-homing dualhome
Proxy detection mode
option
Proxy refresh mode
immediate
------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 Configuring the IP Address Pool (SIP)
An IP address can be used in the service configuration only after it is added to the IP address
pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the IP address to be used to
the IP address pool.
Context
It is recommended that you plan the NMS configuration mode of the device before configuring
the IP address pool. Otherwise, changing the NMS configuration mode of the device interrupts
services.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface eth command to enter the ETH mode.
Step 2 Run the ip address command to add an IP address to the IP address pool.
Step 3 Run the display ip address command to query the information about the IP address pool of the
system.
----End
Example
To add IP address 10.144.68.158 to the IP address pool, wherein the subnet mask and gateway
of the IP address are 255.255.255.0 and 10.144.68.1, do as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.144.68.158 255.255.255.0 10.144.68.1
huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Eth:
IPAddress............: 10.11.11.20
SubMask..............: 255.255.0.0
GateWay..............: 10.11.1.1
MacIndex.............: 0
MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77
VlanID...............: -IPAddress............:
SubMask..............:
GateWay..............:
MacIndex.............:
MacAddress...........:
VlanID...............:
10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0
10.10.10.1
0
00-E0-FC-8B-77-77
--
IPAddress............:
SubMask..............:
GateWay..............:
MacIndex.............:
MacAddress...........:
VlanID...............:
10.144.68.158
255.255.255.0
10.144.68.1
0
00-E0-FC-8B-77-77
--
Related Operation
Table 6-2 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address pool.
Table 6-2 Related operation for configuring the IP address pool
To...
Run the Command...
Delete an IP address
undo ip address
6.4 Adding a SIP Interface
This topic describes how to add a SIP interface so that the UA5000 can interact with the IMS
through the SIP interface.
Context
Similar to the MG interface, one UA5000 supports up to eight SIP interfaces. Each SIP interface
can be configured with the interface attributes separately.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display protocol support command to query the current system protocol.
l
If the system protocol is SIP, go to Step 4.
l
If the system protocol is not SIP, go to Step 2, and then perform the following operations.
Step 2 Run the protocol support command to change the system protocol to SIP.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
NOTE
If the MG interface that supports the current protocol already exists in the system, you must run the undo
interface h248 or undo interface mgcp command to delete this MG interface, and then you can change
the system protocol.
Step 3 Run the save command to save the configuration data, and then run the reboot command to reset
the system so that the new configuration data can take effect.
CAUTION
Resetting the system interrupts the services. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this
command.
Step 4 Run the interface sip command to add a SIP interface.
Step 5 Run the quit command to quit the SIP mode.
----End
Example
To add a SIP interface with ID 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display protocol support
System support H248 protocol
huawei(config)#protocol support sip
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data
and then reboot the system. To ensure that the profile file and digitmap file
are consistent with the protocol configuation, reboot the system and then
re-load the two files. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n)[
n]:y
huawei(config)#save
huawei(config)#reboot system
Are you sure to reboot system? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
Are you sure to add SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#quit
Related Operation
Table 6-3 lists the related operation for adding a SIP interface.
Table 6-3 Related operation for adding a SIP interface
To...
Run the Command...
Delete a SIP interface
undo interface sip
6.5 Configuring the Attributes of a SIP Interface
The basic and optional attributes, such as media IP address, signaling IP address, transfer
protocol, home domain name, domain name, and description information of a Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP) interface can be configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Prerequisite
l
The system protocol of the UA5000 has been configured to SIP.
l
A SIP interface has been added successfully.
l
Media and signaling IP addresses exist in the corresponding address pool.
l
The SIP attributes include the basic attributes and the optional attributes, and the basic
attributes must be configured.
l
The attributes of a SIP interface are effective only on the SIP interface itself.
Context
Precautions
When configuring the SIP interface attributes, pay attention to the following points:
l
The IP address (signaling IP address or media IP address) of the SIP interface must exist
in the corresponding IP address pool.
l
The protocol supports three transfer modes: TCP, UDP, and SCTP.
l
Between Primary Proxy IP/Secondary Proxy IP and Primary Proxy Domain Name/
Secondary Proxy Domain Name, which are basic attributes, at least one attribute must be
configured. If both the attributes (IP address and domain name) are configured, the system
determines which attribute is used according to the configured address mode of the proxy
server (proxy-addr-mode).
l
If the registration server URI is not configured, the port uses the home domain name of the
mandatory attributes for registration.
l
If the interface is configured with the conference service, the conference factory URI needs
to be configured. Otherwise, the conference service is unavailable.
l
The phone context can be indicated by a global number or a domain name. Certain syntax
rules are required. For details, see RFC3966.
l
After the configuration, you must run the reset(sip) command to reset the SIP interface to
make the configuration data take effect. Otherwise, the configuration data is stored only in
the database.
l
The basic attribute home-domain must be configured before resetting the SIP interface.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter SIP mode.
Step 2 Run the if-sip attribute basic command to configure the basic attributes of the SIP interface.
Step 3 Run the if-sip attribute optional command to configure the optional attributes of the SIP
interface.
Step 4 Run the display if-sip attribute command to query the SIP interface attributes.
----End
Example
Table 6-4 provides the data plan for configuring the attributes the SIP interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Table 6-4 Data plan for configuring the attributes the SIP interface
Parameter
Value
Parameters of the basic attributes
MGID
0
media-ip
10.10.10.2
signal-ip
10.10.10.2
signal-port
5555
transfer
UDP
primary-proxy-ip1
10.10.10.3
primary-proxy-port
5555
secondary-proxy-ip1
10.10.10.4
secondary-proxy-port
5555
sipprofile-index
0
home-domain
huawei.com
Parameters of the optional attributes
phone-context
+86755
To configure the attributes of the SIP interface, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute basic home-domain huawei.com media-ip
10.10.10.2 signal-ip 10.10.10.2 signal-port 5555 transfer udp primary-proxy-ip1
10.10.10.3 primary-proxy-port 5555 secondary-proxy-ip1 10.10.10.4 secondary-proxy
-port 5555 sipprofile-index 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute optional phone-context +86755
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display if-sip attribute config
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
Signalling IP
10.10.10.2
Signalling Port
5555
Media IP
10.10.10.2
Transfer Mode
UDP
Primary Proxy IP 1
10.10.10.3
Primary Proxy IP 2
Primary Proxy Port
5555
Secondary Proxy IP 1
10.10.10.4
Secondary Proxy IP 2
Secondary Proxy Port
5555
Proxy Address Mode
IP
SIPProfile Index
0:Customizing_0/1
Service logic Index
0:Default
Server Address DHCP Option
0:None
Primary Proxy Domain Name
Secondary Proxy Domain Name
Home Domain Name
huawei.com
Description
MG Domain Name
Phone Context
+86755
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Register URI
Conference Factory URI
Subscribe to UA-Profile
enable
Subscribe to REG-STATE
disable
Subscribe to MWI
disable
SDP negotiation mode
remote
Mode of supporting proxy dual-homing dualhome
Proxy detection mode
probe
Proxy refresh mode
------------------------------------------------------------
6.6 Configuring Software Parameters of a SIP Interface
A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface has multiple software parameters such as its
digitmap matching mode. After the software parameters are configured successfully, they take
effect on the services carried on the SIP interface.
Prerequisite
l
The system protocol of the UA5000 has been configured to SIP.
l
A SIP interface has been added successfully.
Context
Table 6-5 lists the software parameters of a SIP interface.
Table 6-5 Software parameters of a SIP interface
Parameter
Description
Value
0
Indicates the play tone type for
local blocking.
Numeral type. Range: 0-4.
l 0: busy tone
l 1: device congestion tone
l 2: silence
l 3: user-defined tone 1
l 4: user-defined tone 2
Default value: 0.
1
Indicates the play tone type for
remote blocking.
Numeral type. Range: 0-4.
l 0: busy tone
l 1: device congestion tone
l 2: silence
l 3: user-defined tone 1
l 4: user-defined tone 2
Default value: 0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
2
Indicates whether the
standalone mode is supported.
Numeral type. Range: 0-1.
l 0: Indicates that the
standalone function is not
supported.
l 1: Indicates that the
standalone function is
supported.
Default value: 0.
3
Indicates the call release mode
in case of normal calls.
Numeral type. Range: 0-3.
l 0: Indicates that call release is
controlled by the calling or
called party. Call resources
are released after any party
places the phone on the hook.
l 1: Indicates that call release is
controlled by the calling
party. Call resources are
released only when the
calling party places the phone
on the hook.
l 2: Indicates that call release is
controlled by the called party.
Call resources are released
only when the called party
places the phone on the hook.
l 3: Indicates that call release is
controlled neither by the
calling party nor by the called
party. Call resources are not
released when the calling or
called party places the phone
on the hook.
Default value: 0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
4
Indicates the call release mode
in case of emergency calls.
Numeral type. Range: 0-3.
l 0: Indicates that call release is
controlled by the calling or
called party. Call resources
are released after any party
places the phone on the hook.
l 1: Indicates that call release is
controlled by the calling
party. Call resources are
released only when the
calling party places the phone
on the hook.
l 2: Indicates that call release is
controlled by the called party.
Call resources are released
only when the called party
places the phone on the hook.
l 3: Indicates that call release is
controlled neither by the
calling party nor by the called
party. Call resources are not
released when the calling or
called party places the phone
on the hook.
Default value: 0.
5
Indicates the silence
suppression function of
emergency calls.
Numeral type. Range: 0-3.
l 0: Indicates that the silence
suppression function is
disabled forcedly in case of
emergency calls.
l 1: Indicates that the status of
the silence suppression
function is not controlled.
The function is not disabled
forcedly and is enabled or
disabled according to the
SDP negotiation of the voice
call procedure.
Default value: 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
6
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
7
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
8
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
9
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
10
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
11
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
12
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
13
Indicates the matching mode of
the digitmap.
Enumerated type. Options: 0 and
1.
l 0: minimum matching
l 1: maximum matching
Default value: 0.
14
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
15
Indicates the Real-Time
Transport Protocol (RTP) filter
function of the SIP interface.
Enumerated type. Range: 0-1
When you need to configure
whether the SIP interface filters
the RTP, use this parameter.
l 0: not filter
l 1: filter
Default value: 0.
When the RTP filter function of
the SIP interface is enabled, the
SIP interface receives only the
media stream from a specified
port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
17
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
18
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
19
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
20
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
21
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
22
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
23
Indicates the registration life
cycle.
Enumerated type. Range:
1-65534.
Unit: second.
Default value: 600.
24
Indicates the report mode of the
QoS statistics.
Enumerated type. options: 0 and
1.
l 0: report in T- mode
l 1: not support the report of the
QoS statistics
Default value: 1.
The switch for the pulse signal
switch to the DTMF signal.
25
Enumerated type. options: 0 and
1.
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Default value: 0.
NOTE
The software parameters of a SIP interface are effective only on the SIP interface itself.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter SIP interface mode.
Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure software parameters of a SIP interface.
Step 3 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query software parameters of the SIP
interface.
----End
Example
To set the digitmap matching mode of SIP interface 0 to 1 (maximum matching), do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#mg-software parameter 13 1
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display mg-software parameter 13
------------------------------------------------MGID:0
para index:13 value:1
------------------------------------------------APPENDIX:
------------------------------------------------Interface software parameter name:
13: Digitmap matching mode
0: Minimum
1: Maximum
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
6.7 Configuring Software Character Parameters of a SIP
Interface
A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface has multiple software character parameters such as
its long-distance call prefix. After configured successfully, the software character parameters
take effect on the services carried on the SIP interface.
Prerequisite
l
The system protocol of the UA5000 has been configured to SIP.
l
A SIP interface has been added successfully.
Context
Table 6-6 lists the software character parameters of a SIP interface.
Table 6-6 Software character parameters of a SIP interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Parameter
Description
Value
1
Reserved in the system.
N/A
2
Indicates the accessed network.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
3
Indicates the prefix of a
domestic long-distance call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
4
Indicates the prefix of an
international long-distance call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
5
Indicates a country code (CC)
number string.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
6
Indicates a national destination
code (NDC) number string.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
7
Indicates a synchronous
common channels (SCC)
domain name.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
8
Reserved in the system.
N/A
9
Reserved in the system.
N/A
10
Reserved in the system.
N/A
11
Reserved in the system.
N/A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
12
Indicates the character string
that is displayed when the
calling line identification
presentation (CLIP) is
unavailable.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
13
Reserved in the system.
N/A
14
Indicates the character string
that is displayed when the CLIP
is restricted.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
15
Indicates the SCC code of a
multimedia caller identification
(MCID) service.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
This parameter determines
whether to trigger an MCID
service in SCC mode. After this
parameter is configured, the
MCID service is triggered if the
SCC code is equal to the value
of this parameter. Otherwise,
the MCID service is not
triggered. If this parameter is
not configured, the MCID
service cannot be triggered.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16
Indicates the SCC code for
activating a call forwarding
unconditional (CFU) service.
According to the SCC code, the
access gateway (AG) analyzes
the CFU service and records its
status to determine whether to
play special dial tones.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
17
Indicates the SCC code for
deactivating a CFU service.
According to the SCC code, the
AG analyzes the CFU service
and records its status to
determine whether to play
special dial tones.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
18
Indicates the owner name for
parameters in row O of Session
Description Protocol (SDP).
Huawei is by default filled in if
this parameter is not set.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
19
Indicates the session name for
parameters in row s of SDP. A
hyphen (-) is by default filled in
if this parameter is not set.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
20
Indicates the ring mode name of
the back ring.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
21
Indicates the contents of a
reported hook flash event.
FLASH is by default filled in if
this parameter is not set.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
22
Indicates the value of the
resource priority header field
for a CAT1 common call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
23
Indicates the value of the
resource priority header field
for a CAT2 common call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
24
Indicates the value of the
resource priority header field
for a CAT3 common call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
25
Indicates the value of the
resource priority header field
for a CAT1 emergency call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
26
Indicates the value of the
resource priority header field
for a CAT2 emergency call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
27
Indicates the value of the
resource priority header field
for a CAT3 emergency call.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
28
Indicates the
SERVICEDOMAIN in the
uniform resource identifier
(URI) of the ROUTE header
field.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
29
Indicates the SCC code for
activating a service. When
multiple services need to be
activated, the codes are
separated by semicolon (;). The
first service is the call waiting
(CW) service.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
30
Indicates the SCC code for
deactivating a service. When
multiple services need to be
deactivated, the codes are
separated by semicolon (;). The
first service is the CW service.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
31
Indicates the ring mode name of
the default ring.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
32
Indicates the SCC1 code for
activating a customized event.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
If this parameter is matched, the
SIP_SEVENT_CUSTOM_SC
C1 event is generated. This
character string can carry
parameters. For example,
"*12*(*.)#" indicates that the
SIP_SEVENT_CUSTOM_SC
C1 event is generated, carrying
the parameters that match "*.".
In the service logic of China
Telecom, this parameter is used
for the announced transfer
service.
33
Indicates the SCC2 code for
activating a customized event.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
If this parameter is matched, the
SIP_SEVENT_CUSTOM_SC
C2 event is generated. This
character string can carry
parameters. For example,
"*12*(*.)#" indicates that the
SIP_SEVENT_CUSTOM_SC
C2 event is generated, carrying
the parameters that match "*.".
In the service logic of China
Telecom, this parameter is used
for the unannounced transfer
service.
34
Indicates the SCC3 code for
activating a customized event.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
This parameter is reserved in
the system.
35
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Indicates the P-AccessNetwork-Info header field of a
plain old telephone service
(POTS) packet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
95
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Parameter
Description
Value
36
Indicates the P-AccessNetwork-Info header field of a
basic rate interface (BRI)
packet.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
37
Indicates the P-AccessNetwork-Info header field of a
primary rate interface (PRI)
packet.
Character string type, a string of
1-64 characters.
NOTE
The software character parameters of a SIP interface are effective only on the SIP interface itself.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter SIP interface mode.
Step 2 Run the mg-software strpara command to configure software character parameters of a SIP
interface.
Step 3 Run the display mg-software strpara command to query software character parameters of the
SIP interface.
----End
Example
To set the value of the resource priority header field for a CAT2 emergency call on SIP interface
0 to huawei.em2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#mg-software strpara 26 huawei.em2
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display mg-software strpara config 26
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID: 0
String Index: 26
String: huawei.em2
-----------------------------------------------------------Appendix:
-----------------------------------------------------------Interface software string parameter name:
26: Resource priority header field parameter of CAT2 emergency call
------------------------------------------------------------
6.8 Configuring a Local Digitmap for SIP
When the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is used, an access gateway (AG) provides its default
digitmap itself. If the required digitmap is different from the default digitmap, users can
configure the required digitmap by adding a local digitmap.
Prerequisite
The system protocol of the UA5000 has been configured to SIP.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Specifications
Table 6-7 lists the valid digits and characters in a character string and their meanings in SIP.
Table 6-7 Valid digits and characters in a character string and their meanings in SIP
Digit or
Character
Meaning
0-9
Indicates digits 0-9.
A-D
Undefined
G-K
Undefined
E
Indicates an asterisk (*) in dual tone multiple frequency (DTMF) mode.
F
Indicates a pound (#) in DTMF mode.
X
Indicates any digit ranging from 0 to 9.
T
Indicates the start timer, used before any dialed number.
S
Indicates the short timer. If a dialed number matches a dialing scheme
in the digitmap, the media gateway (MG) uses the short timer to wait
for receiving more numbers instead of reporting the matching status
immediately because more received numbers may match the other
dialing schemes.
L
Indicates the long timer. If the MG verifies that at least one more digit
is needed to match a dialing scheme in the digitmap, the long timer
needs to be set between digits.
Z
Indicates the duration modifier, which refers to a dialing event that lasts
for a long time. It is used before the event character with a fixed
location. When an event duration exceeds the threshold, the dialing
event fills the location.
.
Indicates that zero or more digits or characters can appear before it.
|
Used to separate character strings, indicating that each character string
is a dialing scheme.
[]
Indicates that one digit or character string can be selected from the
options.
NOTE
l The direct-centrex digitmap and the second-centrex digitmap consists of only digits and the character
"|".
l The maximum length of each dialing scheme for direct-centrex digitmap and the second-centrex
digitmap is 7 digits.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the local-digitmap add command to configure a local digitmap.
Step 2 Run the display local-digitmap command to query the configured digitmap.
----End
Example
Assume that the digitmap name is huawei, the digitmap type is normal, and digitmap body is
8882xxxx. To configure such a digitmap for the system running the SIP protocol, do as follows:
huawei(config)#local-digitmap add huawei normal 8882xxxx
huawei(config)#display local-digitmap name huawei
-----------------------------------------Name: huawei
Type: normal
Body: 8882xxxx
------------------------------------------
6.9 Configuring the Ringing Mode of the SIP Interface
This topic describes how to configure the ringing mode of the SIP interface to meet the user
requirements.
Prerequisite
The SIP interface must be added successfully.
Context
l
If the system-defined ringing modes can meet the user requirements, select the required
ringing mode and configure the corresponding ringing mapping.
l
If the system-defined ringing modes cannot meet the user requirements, you can use the
user-defined ringing mode and configure the corresponding ringing mapping.
l
The user can configure the cadence duration for the user-defined ringing to form different
ringing modes.
l
The user-defined ringing modes are 0–15, which correspond to the cadence ringing modes
128–143 and initial ringing modes 144–159 defined by the user. For example, if the userdefined cadence ringing mode is 128, user-defined ringing mode 0 is selected. If the userdefined initial ringing mode is 144, user-defined ringing mode 0 is selected.
l
The system supports up to 16 records of the ringing mode mapping.
l
The ringing mapping name must be unique on the same SIP interface.
l
An index can be used for adding only one ringing mode on the same SIP interface.
l
The system supports up to 16 user-defined ringing modes, which can be modified but cannot
be added.
Precautions
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the user defined-ring modify command to configure the userdefined ringing mode.
NOTE
l If the user-defined ringing mode is used, perform this operation. If the system-defined ringing mode
is used, go to Step 3, and then perform the following operations.
l After the user-defined ringing mode is configured, you must run the board reset command to reset the
corresponding service board to make the configured parameters take effect. In this way, the user of this
service board can use the newly defined ringing mode.
Step 2 Run the display user defined-ring command to query the user-defined ringing.
Step 3 Run the interface sip command to enter the SIP mode.
Step 4 Run the ringmode add command to add the ringing mapping.
Step 5 Run the display ringmode command to query ringing mapping records.
----End
Example
Assume that:
l
The ringing mapping index is 0.
l
The ringing mapping name is test.
l
Both the initial ringing and the cadence ringing use user-defined ringing mode 0.
l
The break-make ratio of user-defined ringing mode 0 is 0.4s on: 0.2s off: 0.4s on: 2.0s off,
that is, the first ringing is played for 400 ms and then stopped for 200 ms. The second
ringing then starts and lasts for 400 ms before its stop for 2000 ms.
To configure a SIP interface with ID 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#user defined-ring modify 0 para1 400 para2 200 para3 400 para4 2000
Note: Please reset the service board to make configured parameter be valid
CAUTION
After the configuration, you must reset the corresponding service board to make the configured
parameters take effect.
huawei(config)#display user defined-ring
-------------------------------------------------RingType Para1 Para2 Para3 Para4 Para5 Para6
-------------------------------------------------0
400
200
400
2000 0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
11
0
0
0
0
0
0
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
14
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
-------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#ringmode add 0 test cadencering 128 initialring 144
/128 corresponds to cadence ringing mode 0 and 144 corresponds to initial ringing
mode 0./
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display ringmode 0
----------------------------------------------------------------MGID: 0
Index: 0
Ringmode-name: test
CadenceRing: Subscriber self-defined Ring 128
InitialRing: Subscriber self-defined Fsk Ring 144
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 6-8 lists the related operations for configuring the ringing mode of the SIP interface.
Table 6-8 Related operations for configuring the ringing mode of the SIP interface
To...
Run the Command...
Delete the record of the ringing
mode mapping of the SIP
interface
ringmode delete
Modify the record of the ringing
mode mapping of the SIP
interface
ringmode modify
6.10 Resetting the SIP Interface
This topic describes how to reset the SIP interface to make the attributes of the SIP interface
take effect after modification.
Precautions
This operation interrupts the services on the current interface. Therefore, exercise caution when
you perform this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface sip command to enter the SIP mode.
Step 2 Run the reset(sip) command to reset the SIP interface.
----End
Example
To enable the SIP interface with ID 0, do as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
6 Configuring the SIP Interface
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset the SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the VoIP PSTN service involves the procedure of configuring the VoIP PSTN
service on the UA5000 and managing the PSTN user.
7.1 Introduction to the VoIP Service
The voice over IP (VoIP) service uses the voice compression technology and transmits the voice
service over the IP network.
7.2 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service (Independent Upstream)
In this example, the UA5000 implements the H.248-based VoIP PSTN service by accessing the
PSTN user through the A32 service board and accessing the upper layer network in independent
upstream mode. The configuration of MGCP is the same as the configuration described here and
thus omitted.
7.3 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)
This topic describes how to configure the H.248-based VoIP PSTN service on the UA5000,
which transmits the voice service to the upper layer network in integrated upstream mode and
connects to the PSTN subscribers through the A32 service board. The configuration of the
MGCP-based VoIP service is similar to the configuration of the H.248-based VoIP PSTN
service. Therefore, this topic does not describes how to configure the MGCP-based VoIP service
any more.
7.4 Configuration Example of a SIP PSTN Service in Independent Upstream Mode
In this example, the UA5000 implements the SIP-based VoIP PSTN service by accessing PSTN
users using the A32 service board and accessing the upper-layer network in independent
upstream mode.
7.5 Configuration Example of the SIP PSTN Service (Integrated Upstream)
In this example, the UA5000 implements the SIP-based VoIP PSTN service by accessing the
PSTN user through the A32 service board and accessing the upper layer network in integrated
upstream mode.
7.6 Configuring the Emergency Standalone Function Based on the H.248 Protocol
With the emergency standalone function, users under the same VAG can still communicate with
each other even if the UA5000 using the H.248 loses communication with the media gateway
controller (MGC).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
7.7 Configuring the Standalone Function Based on the SIP Protocol
With the standalone function, users under the same user agent can still communicate with each
other even if the UA5000 using the SIP loses communication with the IP multimedia subsystem
(IMS).
7.8 (Optional) Configuring System Parameters
Global system parameters such as overseas version flag and message waiting indication (MWI)
mode need to be configured to ensure that user terminals respond in compliance with local
standards.
7.9 Configuring the MG PSTN Subscriber Data
When the system uses the H.248 or MGCP protocol, after the MG interface is configured
successfully, you can add PSTN subscribers on the MG interface by configuring the PSTN
subscriber data. Thus, the function of the communication between PSTN subscribers can be
implemented.
7.10 Configuring the SIP PSTN User Data
When the system protocol is Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), users can add a PSTN user to a
SIP interface by configuring the PSTN user data to implement the call function of the PSTN
user after the SIP interface is configured successfully.
7.11 Configuring PSTN Port Attributes
This topic describes how to configure PSTN port attributes so that the PSTN port can meet the
requirements of the actual application.
7.12 Configuring the QoS IP Precedence
Configuring the QoS IP precedence means configuring the different QoS IP precedences for the
signaling, media, and maintenance packets to meet different requirements for the delay and jitter
of different services.
7.13 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority
Configuring the QoS VLAN priorities means configuring the different QoS VLAN priorities for
the signaling, media, and maintenance packets. Thus, the QoS priorities of the service traffic
streams can be controlled according to the VLAN priorities.
7.14 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP Address
Separating the signaling IP address from the media IP address means configuring two different
IP addresses as the media IP address and signaling IP address. Thus, the media stream and
signaling stream are transmitted over different paths on the network.
7.15 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced Function
Enabling the voice quality enhanced function includes enabling the automatic gain adjustment
and background noise suppression functions so that the voice service is of better quality when
there is noise.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
7.1 Introduction to the VoIP Service
The voice over IP (VoIP) service uses the voice compression technology and transmits the voice
service over the IP network.
Service Description
The VoIP service uses the IP packet switched network for transmission after the analog voice
signals are specially processed, such as compressed and packetized. In this manner, the voice
signals can be transmitted through the connectionless User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
Currently, the VoIP has the following three types:
l
PC to PC: The subscribers are mainly teenagers.
l
PC to phone: The subscribers are mainly young people (such as oversea students). These
subscribers are sensitive to the communication price.
l
Phone to phone: The subscribers use the traditional telephones. The carrier provides the
voice service over the NGN softswitch network.
Service Specifications
The UA5000 provides the voice service through the voice service boards. Table 7-1 shows the
number of ports provided by each type of service boards.
Table 7-1 Number of ports provided by each type of service boards
Board Type
Number of Ports
Remarks
ASL
16
16-port POTS service board
A32
32
32-port POTS service board
A64
64
64-port POTS service board
7.2 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service
(Independent Upstream)
In this example, the UA5000 implements the H.248-based VoIP PSTN service by accessing the
PSTN user through the A32 service board and accessing the upper layer network in independent
upstream mode. The configuration of MGCP is the same as the configuration described here and
thus omitted.
Prerequisite
l
The master shelf must be added successfully. In this example, the H601HABD functions
as the master shelf.
l
The IP addresses used in this example must be configured in the IP address pool.The media
IP address and the signaling IP address are different.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
l
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
The data on the MGC (namely, the data corresponding to the data configured on the MG)
must be configured properly.
Networking
Figure 7-1 shows the example network of the MG PSTN service.
Figure 7-1 Example network of the MG PSTN service
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Router
10.10.10.1/24
H.248
0/11
P
V
M
B
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
A
3
2
Phone1
Phone32
Data Plan
Table 7-2 provides the data plan for configuring the MG PSTN service on the PVMB control
board.
Table 7-2 Data plan for configuring the MG PSTN service on the PVMB control board
Data Type
Item
Data
MG interface data
mgid
0
code
text
protocol
H.248
tranfer
UDP
port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Data Type
IP addresses
Telephone numbers
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Item
Data
start-negotiate-version
2
Signaling IP address of MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.2/24 VLAN 1002
Media IP address of MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.4/24
Default gateway of MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Phone 1-phone 32
Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/11
Telephone numbers:
12340001-12340032
terminal id
0-31, where terminals 0-31
correspond to telephone numbers
12340001-12340032.
ToS strategy
IP priority and ToS priority
System default value
Voice enhancing
function
Automatic gain control (AGC)
function of the PSTN port
Supported
AGC level of the PSTN port
15 (-24 dBm0)
Spectral noise suppression
(SNS) function of the PSTN
port
Supported
SNS level of the PSTN port
20 (20 dB)
Context
l
The MG interface parameters must be the same as the parameters configured on the MGC.
l
The cadence ring tone and initial ring tone defined in the local standard are used.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 7-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MG PSTN service.
Figure 7-2 Flowchart for configuring the MG PSTN service
NOTE
In this example, the system uses the independent upstream mode. The A32 service board provides the
interface for accessing the voice service. The voice signals are directly transmitted to the upper-layer
network after being processed by the PVMB control board. Therefore, you need not configure the IPMB
board. The following figure shows the flowchart for configuring the MG PSTN service on only the PVMB
control board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Start
Configure the IP address
of the service network port
(Optional) Configure
the QoS IP strategy
Configure the working
mode of the control board
Add a service board
and confirm this board
Configure the MG
interface attributes
Query the MG
interface status
Configure the
PSTN user data
(Optional) Configure the
PSTN port attribute
Save the data
End
(Optional) Configure
H.248 protocol parameters
Reset the MG interface
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address of the service network port.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway
10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 vlan_tag 1002
/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port,
whereas the IP address, /
/ subnet mask, gateway, or vlantag of the current service network port on the device
is inconsistent with/
/ the requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the
parameters./
/If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run the ip
address command /
/ to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool./
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
vlan_tag 1002
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Eth:
IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2
SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0
GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1
MacIndex............: 0
MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57
VlanID .............: 1002
IPAddress ..........:
SubMask.............:
GateWay.............:
MacIndex............:
MacAddress..........:
VlanID .............:
10.10.10.4
255.255.255.0
10.10.10.1
0
00-E0-FC-44-16-57
--
Step 2 (Optional) Configure the QoS IP strategy.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
huawei(interface-eth)#quit
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos
Step 3 Configure the working mode of the PVMB board to alone.
In this networking mode, the PVM control board provides services independently, and the voice
service is transmitted upstream through the ETH1 port on the PVM board.
huawei(config)#working mode alone
Step 4 Add A32 service board to the shelf and confirm the board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
huawei(config)#display board 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status
Sub0
Sub1
Online/Offline
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
PWX2
Normal
1
PWX2
Normal
2
3
4
H601PVMB
Standby_normal
H602ETCA
5
H601PVMB
Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM
......
11
A32
Normal
......
35
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Configure MG interface attributes.
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute code text transfer udp primary-mgc-po
rt 2944 mgport 2944 start-negotiate-version 2 mgip 10.10.10.2 mg-media-ip1
10.10.10.4 primary-mgc-ip1 10.10.20.1
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
2
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
1:("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
MG signalling IP
10.10.10.2
MG signalling Port
2944
MG media IP1
10.10.10.4
MG media IP2
MIDType
IP4_ADDR
DeviceName
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC
Active MGC
MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC
Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC
Standby MGC
MGC Domain Name:-------------------------------------------------
IP1:10.10.20.1
IP2:IP1:IP2:-
Step 6 (Optional) Configure H.248 protocol parameters (enable the three-way handshake signal
function of the H.248 protocol stack.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl true
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack tr
------------------------------------------------three way handshake
: true
longtimer(units: ms)
: 30000
MG provisional response timer(units: ms) : 8000
MGC provisional response timer(units: ms): 8000
MG originated pending limit
: 5
MGC originated pending limit
: 5
retransfailoption
: max retransfer times
maxretranstimes
: 7
retransmode
: auto
maxretranstimerval(units: ms)
: 4000
minretranstimerval(units: ms)
: 500
-------------------------------------------------
Step 7 Enable the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
Step 8 Query whether the state of the MG interface is normal.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
huawei(config)#display if-h248 all
---------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
TransMode State
MGPort MGIP
MGCPort MGCIP/DomainName
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
UDP
Normal
2944
10.10.10. 2
2944
10.10.20.1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 9 Configure the data of the PSTN user.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 terminalid 0
telno 12340001
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID
TelNo
Priority TID
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 0
12340001
Cat3
A0
0 / 11 / 1 0
12340002
Cat3
A1
0 / 11 / 2 0
12340003
Cat3
A2
0 / 11 / 3 0
12340004
Cat3
A3
0 / 11 / 4 0
12340005
Cat3
A4
0 / 11 / 5 0
12340006
Cat3
A5
0 / 11 / 6 0
12340007
Cat3
A6
0 / 11 / 7 0
12340008
Cat3
A7
0 / 11 / 8 0
12340009
Cat3
A8
0 / 11 / 9 0
12340010
Cat3
A9
0 / 11 / 10 0
12340011
Cat3
A10
0 / 11 / 11 0
12340012
Cat3
A11
0 / 11 / 12 0
12340013
Cat3
A12
0 / 11 / 13 0
12340014
Cat3
A13
0 / 11 / 14 0
12340015
Cat3
A14
0 / 11 / 15 0
12340016
Cat3
A15
0 / 11 / 16 0
12340017
Cat3
A16
0 / 11 / 17 0
12340018
Cat3
A17
0 / 11 / 18 0
12340019
Cat3
A18
0 / 11 / 19 0
12340020
Cat3
A19
0 / 11 / 20 0
12340021
Cat3
A20
0 / 11 / 21 0
12340022
Cat3
A21
0 / 11 / 22 0
12340023
Cat3
A22
0 / 11 / 23 0
12340024
Cat3
A23
0 / 11 / 24 0
12340025
Cat3
A24
0 / 11 / 25 0
12340026
Cat3
A25
0 / 11 / 26 0
12340027
Cat3
A26
0 / 11 / 27 0
12340028
Cat3
A27
0 / 11 / 28 0
12340029
Cat3
A28
0 / 11 / 29 0
12340030
Cat3
A29
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
0 / 11 / 30 0
12340031
Cat3
A30
0 / 11 / 31 0
12340032
Cat3
A31
-------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
Step 10 (Optional) Configure the attributes of the PSTN port (enable the voice enhancing function).
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 agc enable
agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20
Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/11
------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable
SNS value(db)
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 1 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 2 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 3 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 4 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 5 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 6 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 7 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 8 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 9 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 10 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 11 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 12 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 13 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 14 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 15 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 16 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 17 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 18 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 19 enable
-24
enable
20
---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----
Step 11 Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration is complete, phone 1 to phone 32 can communicate with each other.
7.3 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service (in
Integrated Upstream Mode)
This topic describes how to configure the H.248-based VoIP PSTN service on the UA5000,
which transmits the voice service to the upper layer network in integrated upstream mode and
connects to the PSTN subscribers through the A32 service board. The configuration of the
MGCP-based VoIP service is similar to the configuration of the H.248-based VoIP PSTN
service. Therefore, this topic does not describes how to configure the MGCP-based VoIP service
any more.
Prerequisite
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The master shelf must be added successfully. In this example, the H601HABD is used as
the master shelf.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
l
The IP addresses used in this example must be configured in the IP address pool. The media
IP address and the signaling IP address are different.
l
The data on the MGC (namely, the data corresponding to the data configured on the MG)
must be configured properly.
Networking
Figure 7-3 shows the example network for configuring the MG PSTN service.
Figure 7-3 Example network for configuring the MG PSTN service
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Router
10.10.10.1/24
H.248
0/11
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
I
P
M
B
P
V
M
B
A
3
2
Phone1
Phone32
Data Plan
l
The PVM control board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0 and Inner_FE1 to communicate with
FE ports on the IPMB control board. In this case, the PVM control board uses the IPM
control board for upstream.
– For the H601IPMD board, the inner FE port 2 and port 3 are taken for communication
with the PVM board.
– For the IPMB board and H612 IPMD board, the inner FE port 6 and port 7 are taken
for communication with the PVM board.
IPMB board is taken as example in this task.
l
Table 7-3 provides the data plan for configuring the MG PSTN service on the IPMB control
board.
l
Table 7-4 provides the data plan for configuring the MG PSTN service on the PVMB
control board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Table 7-3 Data plan for configuring the MG PSTN service on the IPMB control board
Shelf ID/Slot ID/Port ID
Corresponding
VLAN
Remarks
0/2/0
1001
The PVMB control board uses
port 0 on the IPMB control board
for uplink. The PVMB control
board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0
and Inner_FE1 to communicate
with FE ports 6 and 7 on the IPMB
control board. Group FE ports 0,
6, and 7 on the IPMB control
board into a VLAN.
0/2/6
0/2/7
Table 7-4 Data plan for configuring the MG PSTN service on the PVMB control board
Type
Item
Data
MG interface data
mgid
0
code
text
protocol
H.248
tranfer
UDP
port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
IP address
Telephone number
allocation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
start-negotiate-version
2
Signaling IP address of MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
Media IP address of MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.4/24
Default gateway of MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/24
phone 1-phone 32
Shelf ID/slot ID: 0/11
Telephone number:
12340001-12340032
terminal id
0-31. Terminals 0-31 correspond
to numbers 12340001-12340032.
TOS strategy
IP priority and TOS priority
System default value
Voice enhanced function
Automatic gain control
(AGC) of the PSTN port
Support
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Type
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Item
Data
Parameter value of the AGC
of the PSTN port
15 (-24 dBm0)
Spectral noise suppression
(SNS) of the PSTN port
Support
Parameter value of the SNS
of the PSTN port
20 (20 dB)
Context
l
The parameters configured on the MG interface and on the MGC interface must be
consistent.
l
The cadence ringing tone and initial ringing tone must use the local standards.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5 show the flowchart for configuring the MG PSTN service.
Figure 7-4 Flowchart for configuring the MG PSTN service on the IPMB control board
Start
Create a VLAN
Add control board
ports to the VLAN
Create an L3 interface and
configure its IP address
Save the data
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Figure 7-5 Flowchart for configuring the MG PSTN service on the PVMB control board
Start
Configure the IP address
of the service network port
Query the MG
interface status
(Optional) Configure
the QoS IP strategy
Configure the working
mode of the control board
Add a service board
and confirm this board
Configure the
PSTN user data
(Optional) Configure the
PSTN port attribute
Configure the MG
interface attributes
(Optional) Configure
H.248 protocol parameters
Save the data
End
Reset the MG interface
Procedure
l
Configuration steps (on the IPMB control board)
1.
Create a VLAN.
huawei(config)#vlan 1001 standard
2.
Add FE ports 6 and 7 and IP uplink port 0 into the VLAN.
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 0
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 6
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 7
3.
Create the L3 interface and configure an IP address for the interface.
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1001
huawei(config-if-vlanif1001)#ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
4.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save data
l
Configuration steps (on the PVMB control board)
1.
Configure the IP address of the service network port.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway
10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 vlan_tag 1001
/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network
port, run this command to change the configuration/
/ if the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, or the vlantag does not meet
the data plan requirements./
/If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool, run the ip
address command to add the media IP address and/
/ signaling IP address to the IP address pool./
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
vlan_tag 1001
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Eth:
IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2
SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0
GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1
MacIndex............: 0
MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57
VlanID .............: 1001
IPAddress ..........:
SubMask.............:
GateWay.............:
MacIndex............:
MacAddress..........:
VlanID .............:
2.
10.10.10.4
255.255.255.0
10.10.10.1
0
00-E0-FC-44-16-57
--
(Optional) Configure the QoS IP strategy.
huawei(interface-eth)#quit
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos
3.
Configure the working mode of the PVMB control board to the integrated networking
mode.
huawei(config)#working mode integrated
If switch working mode from alone to integrated,ETH0 will be service port
and
ETH1 will be outband port,Are you sure?(y/n)[n]:y
4.
Add the A32 service board and confirm the board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
huawei(config)#display board 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status
Sub0
Sub1
Online/Offline
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
PWX2
Normal
1
PWX2
Normal
2
3
4
H601PVMB
Standby_normal
H602ETCA
5
H601PVMB
Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM
......
11
A32
Normal
......
35
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.
Configure the attributes of the MG interface.
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute code text transfer udp primarymgc-port 2944 mgport 2944
start-negotiate-version 2 mgip 10.10.10.2 mg-media-ip1 10.10.10.4 primarymgc-ip1 10.10.20.1
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248
attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
2
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
MG signalling IP
10.10.10.2
MG signalling Port
2944
MG media IP1
10.10.10.4
MG media IP2
MIDType
IP4_ADDR
DeviceName
-
1:
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC
IP1:10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC
IP2:Active MGC
MGC Domain
Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC
IP1:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC
IP2:Standby MGC
MGC Domain
Name:-------------------------------------------------
6.
(Optional) Configure the parameters of the H.248 protocol (enable the three-way
handshake signal function of the H.248 protocol stack).
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl true
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack
tr
------------------------------------------------three way handshake
:
true
longtimer(units: ms)
:
30000
MG provisional response timer(units: ms) :
8000
MGC provisional response timer(units: ms):
8000
MG originated pending limit
:
5
MGC originated pending limit
:
5
retransfailoption
: max retransfer
times
maxretranstimes
:
7
retransmode
:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
auto
maxretranstimerval(units: ms)
:
4000
minretranstimerval(units: ms)
:
500
-------------------------------------------------
7.
Start the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
8.
Query whether the MG interface is in the normal state.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
huawei(config)#display if-h248
all
--------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
TransMode State
MGPort MGIP
MGCPort MGCIP/
DomainName
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0
UDP
Normal
2944
10.10.10. 2
2944
10.10.20.1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.
Configure the PSTN user data.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 terminalid 0
telno 12340001
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID
TelNo
Priority TID
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 0
12340001
Cat3
A0
0 / 11 / 1 0
12340002
Cat3
A1
0 / 11 / 2 0
12340003
Cat3
A2
0 / 11 / 3 0
12340004
Cat3
A3
0 / 11 / 4 0
12340005
Cat3
A4
0 / 11 / 5 0
12340006
Cat3
A5
0 / 11 / 6 0
12340007
Cat3
A6
0 / 11 / 7 0
12340008
Cat3
A7
0 / 11 / 8 0
12340009
Cat3
A8
0 / 11 / 9 0
12340010
Cat3
A9
0 / 11 / 10 0
12340011
Cat3
A10
0 / 11 / 11 0
12340012
Cat3
A11
0 / 11 / 12 0
12340013
Cat3
A12
0 / 11 / 13 0
12340014
Cat3
A13
0 / 11 / 14 0
12340015
Cat3
A14
0 / 11 / 15 0
12340016
Cat3
A15
0 / 11 / 16 0
12340017
Cat3
A16
0 / 11 / 17 0
12340018
Cat3
A17
0 / 11 / 18 0
12340019
Cat3
A18
0 / 11 / 19 0
12340020
Cat3
A19
0 / 11 / 20 0
12340021
Cat3
A20
0 / 11 / 21 0
12340022
Cat3
A21
0 / 11 / 22 0
12340023
Cat3
A22
0 / 11 / 23 0
12340024
Cat3
A23
0 / 11 / 24 0
12340025
Cat3
A24
0 / 11 / 25 0
12340026
Cat3
A25
0 / 11 / 26 0
12340027
Cat3
A26
0 / 11 / 27 0
12340028
Cat3
A27
0 / 11 / 28 0
12340029
Cat3
A28
0 / 11 / 29 0
12340030
Cat3
A29
0 / 11 / 30 0
12340031
Cat3
A30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
0 / 11 / 31 0
12340032
Cat3
A31
-------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
10. (Optional) Configure the port attributes of the PSTN user (enable the voice enhanced
function).
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 agc enable
agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20
Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/11
------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable
SNS value(db)
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 1 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 2 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 3 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 4 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 5 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 6 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 7 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 8 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 9 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 10 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 11 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 12 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 13 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 14 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 15 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 16 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 17 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 18 enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 11 / 19 enable
-24
enable
20
---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----
11. Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, phone 1 to phone 32 can communicate with each other.
7.4 Configuration Example of a SIP PSTN Service in
Independent Upstream Mode
In this example, the UA5000 implements the SIP-based VoIP PSTN service by accessing PSTN
users using the A32 service board and accessing the upper-layer network in independent
upstream mode.
Prerequisite
l
A master subrack has been configured. In this example, the H601HABD subrack is used
as the master subrack.
l
The IP address to be used in the example has been configured in the IP address pool by
running the ip address command.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Networking
Figure 7-6 shows an example network for configuring the SIP PSTN service.
Figure 7-6 Example network for configuring the SIP PSTN service
Router
10.10.10.1/24
SIP
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
0/11
P
V
M
D
A
3
2
Phone1
Phone32
Data Plan
Table 7-5 provides the data plan for configuring the SIP PSTN service on the PVMD control
board.
Table 7-5 Data plan for configuring the SIP PSTN service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Category
Item
Data
Attributes of
the SIP
interface
Interface ID
0
Media/Signaling IP address
10.13.4.116
Signaling port ID
5555
Transfer protocol
UDP
IP address of the primary proxy
server
10.13.4.110
Port ID of the primary proxy server
5555
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Category
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Item
Data
IP address of the secondary proxy
server
10.13.4.120
Port ID of the secondary proxy
server
5555
Profile index
0
Home domain name
huawei.com
Phone context
+86755
Ringing mode
of the SIP
interface
Index of the cadence ringing mode
2
Index of the initial ringing mode
4
Voice service
board A32
Slot that houses the board
0/11
User data
Phone number allocation for
Phone 1 through Phone 32
Phone number: 83110000-83110031
PSTN port attributes
The voice quality enhancement
(VQE) function is supported. The
parameters are as follows:
l Function of automatic gain
control (AGC): supported
l AGC parameter: 15 (-24 dBm0)
l Function of spectral noise
suppression (SNS): supported
l SNS parameter: 20 dB
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 7-7 shows the flowchart for configuring the SIP PSTN service.
NOTE
In this example, the system uses the independent upstream mode. The A32 service board provides the
interface for accessing the voice service. The voice signals are directly transmitted upstream to the upper
layer network after being processed by the PVMD control board. Therefore, the configuration on the IPMB
control board is not required. The following figure shows the flowchart for configuring the SIP PSTN
service on only the PVMD control board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Figure 7-7 Flowchart for configuring the SIP PSTN service
Start
Configure the working
mode of the control board
Add a service board
and confirm this board
Configure the basic attributes
of the SIP interface
Configure the optional
attributes of the SIP interface
Query the configured
attributes of the SIP interface
(Optional) Configure
system parameters
(Optional) Configure
overseas parameters
Configure the SIP
PSTN user data
(Optional) Configure the
SIP PSTN port attribute
Save the data
(Optional) Configure the ringing
mode of the SIP interface
End
Reset the SIP interface
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode of the PVMD control board to the independent networking mode.
In this networking mode, the PVMD control board provides services independently, and the
voice service is transmitted upstream through the ETH1 port on the PVMD board.
huawei(config)#working mode alone
Step 2 Add an A32 board and confirm this board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 A32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
huawei(config)#display board 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status
Sub0
Sub1
Online/Offline
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
PWX2
Normal
1
PWX2
Normal
2
3
4
H601PVMD
Standby_normal
H602ETCA
5
H601PVMD
Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM
6
7
8
9
10
11
A32
Normal
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Configure the basic attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
Are you sure to add the SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute basic home-domain huawei.com media-ip
10.13.4.116 signal-ip 10.13.4.116 signal-port 5555 transfer udp primary-proxy-ip1
10.13.4.110 primary-proxy-port 5555 secondary-proxy-ip1 10.13.4.120 secondaryproxy-port 5555 sipprofile-index 0
Step 4 Configure the optional attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute optional phone-context +86755
Step 5 Query the configured attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display if-sip attribute config
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
Signalling IP
10.13.4.116
Signalling Port
5555
Media IP
10.13.4.116
Transfer Mode
UDP
Primary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.110
Primary Proxy IP 2
Primary Proxy Port
5555
Secondary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.120
Secondary Proxy IP 2
Secondary Proxy Port
5555
Proxy Address Mode
IP
SIPProfile Index
0:Customizing_0/1
Service logic Index
0:Default
Server Address DHCP Option
0:None
Primary Proxy Domain Name
Secondary Proxy Domain Name
Home Domain Name
huawei.com
Description
MG Domain Name
Phone Context
+86755
Register URI
Conference Factory URI
Subscribe to UA-Profile
enable
Subscribe to REG-STATE
disable
Subscribe to MWI
disable
SDP negotiation mode
remote
Mode of supporting proxy dual-homing dualhome
Proxy detection mode
probe
Proxy refresh mode
------------------------------------------------------------
Step 6 (Optional) Configure the ringing mode of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#ringmode add 0 test cadencering 2 initialring 4
Step 7 Reset the SIP interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset the SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#
Resetting SIP interface 0 succeeded
CAUTION
Resetting the SIP interface interrupts services. Therefore, exercise caution when users run this
command.
Step 8 (Optional) Configure system parameters and overseas parameters.
To facilitate providing the voice service, the system parameters and overseas parameters must
be configured so that they are consistent with the parameters in actual application. By default,
the preceding parameters comply with the standard and no configuration is required.
If users need to modify the parameters according to the actual application, run the system
parameters and oversea parameters commands to configure the parameters.
Step 9 Configure the SIP PSTN user data.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#sippstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 telno 83110000
This operation will take several minutes, please wait...
huawei(config-esl-user)#
Command processing completed. 32 user data added successfully
Step 10 (Optional) Configure the SIP PSTN port attribute, that is, enable the VQE function.
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 AGC enable AGC-Level
15 SNS enable SNS-Level 20
Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully
NOTE
If users need to configure other SIP PSTN port attributes, see 7.11 Configuring PSTN Port Attributes.
Step 11 Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, phone 1 through phone 32 can communicate with each other normally.
7.5 Configuration Example of the SIP PSTN Service
(Integrated Upstream)
In this example, the UA5000 implements the SIP-based VoIP PSTN service by accessing the
PSTN user through the A32 service board and accessing the upper layer network in integrated
upstream mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Prerequisite
l
The master shelf must be configured. This example considers the H601HABD shelf as the
master shelf.
l
The IP address to be used in the example must be configured in the IP address pool by
running the ip address command.
Networking
Figure 7-8 shows the example network for configuring the SIP PSTN service.
Figure 7-8 Example network for configuring the SIP PSTN service
Router
10.10.10.1/24
SIP
0/11
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
I
P
M
B
P
V
M
D
A
3
2
Phone1
Phone32
Data Plan
l
The PVM control board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0 and Inner_FE1 to communicate with
FE ports on the IPMB control board. In this case, the PVM control board uses the IPM
control board for upstream.
– For the H601IPMD board, the inner FE port 2 and port 3 are taken for communication
with the PVM board.
– For the IPMB board and H612 IPMD board, the inner FE port 6 and port 7 are taken
for communication with the PVM board.
IPMB board is taken as example in this task.
l
Table 7-6 provides the data plan for configuring the SIP PSTN service on the IPMB control
board.
l
Table 7-7 provides the data plan for configuring the SIP PSTN service on the PVMD
control board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Table 7-6 Data plan for configuring the SIP PSTN service (IPMB)
Shelf/Slot/Port ID
Corresponding
VLAN
Remarks
0/2/0
1001
The PVMD control board uses port 0 on the
IPMB control board for upstream. The PVMD
control board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0 and
Inner_FE1 to communicate with FE ports 6
and 7 on the IPMB control board. Group FE
ports 0, 6, and 7 on the IPMB control board
into a VLAN.
0/2/6
0/2/7
Table 7-7 Data plan for configuring the SIP PSTN service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Type
Configuration Item
Data
Parameters of
the basic
attributes of the
SIP interface
Interface ID
0
Media/Signaling IP address
10.13.4.116
Signaling port ID
5555
Transfer protocol
UDP
IP address of the primary proxy
server
10.13.4.110
Port ID of the primary proxy server
5555
IP address of the secondary proxy
server
10.13.4.120
Port ID of the secondary proxy
server
5555
Profile index
0
Phone context
+86755
Ringing mode
of the SIP
interface
Index of the cadence ringing mode
2
Index of the initial ringing mode
4
Voice service
board A32
Slot that houses the board
0/11
User data
Phone number allocation of
phone1 to phone32
Phone number: 83110000 83110031
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Type
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Configuration Item
Data
PSTN port attributes
The VQE function is supported. The
parameters are as follows:
l AGC function: supported
l AGC parameter: 15 (-24 dBm0)
l SNS function: supported
l SNS parameter: 20 dB
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 7-9 and Figure 7-10 show the flowcharts for configuring the SIP PSTN service.
Figure 7-9 Flowchart for configuring the SIP PSTN service (IPMB)
Start
Create a VLAN
Add control board
ports to the VLAN
Create an L3 interface and
configure its IP address
Save the data
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Figure 7-10 Flowchart for configuring the SIP PSTN service (PVMD)
Start
Configure the working
mode of the control board
Add a service board
and confirm this board
Configure the basic attributes
of the SIP interface
Configure the optional
attributes of the SIP interface
Query the configured
attributes of the SIP interface
Configure the ringing
mode of the SIP interface
(Optional) Configure
system parameters
(Optional) Configure
overseas parameters
Configure the SIP
PSTN user data
(Optional) Configure the
SIP PSTN port attribute
Save the data
End
Reset the SIP interface
Procedure
l
Configuration steps (IPMB)
1.
Create a VLAN.
huawei(config)#vlan 1001 standard
2.
Add FE ports 6 and 7 and IP upstream port 0 to the VLAN.
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 0
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 6
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 7
3.
Create an L3 interface and configure the IP address of this interface.
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1001
huawei(config-if-vlanif1001)#ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
4.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
l
Configuration steps (PVMD)
1.
Configure the working mode of the PVMD control board to the integrated networking
mode.
huawei(config)#working mode integrated
If switch working mode from alone to integrated,ETH0 will be service port
and
ETH1 will be outband port,Are you sure?(y/n)[n]:y
2.
Add the A32 service board and confirm this board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 A32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
huawei(config)#display board 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
SlotID
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
BoardName
Status
Sub0
Sub1
Online/Offline
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
PWX2
Normal
1
PWX2
Normal
2
3
4
H601PVMB
Standby_normal
H602ETCA
5
H601PVMB
Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM
......
11
A32
Normal
......
35
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.
Configure the basic attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
Are you sure to add the SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute basic media-ip 10.13.4.116
signal-ip 10
.13.4.116 signal-port 5555 transfer udp primary-proxy-ip1 10.13.4.110
primary-pr
oxy-port 5555 secondary-proxy-ip1 10.13.4.120 secondary-proxy-port 5555
profile-index 0
4.
Configure the optional attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute optional phone-context +86755
5.
Query the configured attributes of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display if-sip attribute config
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
Signalling IP
10.13.4.116
Signalling Port
5555
Media IP
10.13.4.116
Transfer Mode
UDP
Primary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.110
Primary Proxy IP 2
Primary Proxy Port
5555
Secondary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.120
Secondary Proxy IP 2
Secondary Proxy Port
5555
Proxy address mode
IP
Profile Index
0:NoProfile
Primary Proxy Domain Name
Secondary Proxy Domain Name Home Domain Name
Description
MG Domain Name
Phone Context
+86755
Register URI
Conference Factory URI
------------------------------------------------------------
6.
(Optional) Configure the ringing mode of the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#ringmode add 0 test cadencering 2 initialring 4
7.
Reset the SIP interface.
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset the SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#
Resetting SIP interface 0 succeeded
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
CAUTION
Resetting the SIP interface interrupts the services. Therefore, exercise caution when
you run this command.
8.
(Optional) Configure system parameters and overseas parameters.
To facilitate providing the voice service, the system parameters and overseas
parameters must be configured so that they are consistent with the parameters in actual
application. By default, the preceding parameters comply with the standard and no
configuration is required.
If you need to modify the parameters according to the actual application, run the
system parameters and oversea parameters commands to configure the parameters.
9.
Configure the SIP PSTN user data.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#sippstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 telno
83110000
This operation will take several minutes, please
wait...
huawei(config-esl-user)
#
Command processing completed. 32 user data added successfully
10. (Optional) Configure the SIP PSTN port attribute (enable the VQE function).
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 AGC enable AGCLevel
15 SNS enable SNS-Level
20
Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully
NOTE
If you need to configure other SIP PSTN port attributes, see "7.11 Configuring PSTN Port
Attributes."
11. Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, phone1 to phone32 should be able to communicate with each other.
7.6 Configuring the Emergency Standalone Function Based
on the H.248 Protocol
With the emergency standalone function, users under the same VAG can still communicate with
each other even if the UA5000 using the H.248 loses communication with the media gateway
controller (MGC).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Prerequisite
The H.248 protocol is used, voice service users have been configured on a media gateway (MG)
interface, and these users can communicate with each other. For details about how to configure
a user, see 7.2 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service (Independent Upstream).
Context
l
Internal call emergency standalone: When the UA5000 loses communication with the
MGC, the UA5000 independently controls the internal users under the same MG interface
so that the users can communicate with each other normally without the control of the MGC.
l
Emergency channel: When the UA5000 loses communication with the MGC, users of the
UA5000 can dial external phone numbers that are in the digitmap for emergency calls. For
example, when the UA5000 loses communication with the MGC, in case of a fire, users of
the UA5000 can dial the fire emergency call, namely, 119.
Precaution
After the emergency standalone function is enabled, the UA5000 cannot identify the duplicate
phone numbers. Therefore, users need to ensure the uniqueness of the configured phone
numbers. Otherwise, the emergency standalone function will fail.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the emergency standalone functions.
Step 2 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the configuration of emergency
standalone functions.
Step 3 (Optional) Run the standalone parameters command to set the parameters of a VAG emergency
standalone timer.
Step 4 (Optional) Run the display standalone parameters command to query the parameters of the
VAG emergency standalone timer.
Step 5 Run the digitmap set command to configure an emergency standalone digitmap for internal
calls.
Step 6 Run the display digitmap command to query the emergency standalone digitmap for internal
calls.
Step 7 (Optional) Run the standalone charge-parameters command to configure the parameters of a
server for emergency standalone bill services.
Step 8 (Optional) Run the display standalone charge-parameters command to query the parameters
of the server for emergency standalone bill services.
----End
Example
Table 7-8 provides the data plan for configuring the emergency standalone function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Table 7-8 Data plan for configuring the emergency standalone function
Category
Item
Data
MG interface
mgid
1
Emergency
standalone
parameters
para index
11: The device supports not only internal calls but
also emergency calls.
dialtoneval
15
ringval
60
busytoneval
50
Phone digitmap
1234xxxx
Emergency call
digitmap
110|119|999
To configure the emergency standalone function for the 32 plain old telephone service (POTS)
users under the board that is in slot 0/12, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 1
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#mg-software parameter 11 3
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display mg-software parameter 11
------------------------------------------------Interface Id:1
para index:11 value:3
------------------------------------------------APPENDIX:
------------------------------------------------Interface soft parameter name:
11: Stand alone support
0 : None
1 : Inner
2 : Emergency
3 : Both
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#standalone parameters dialtone 15 ring 60 busytone 50
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display standalone parameters
-------------------------------------------------------------------------System stand alone para of timer for dial tone :15 (s)
System stand alone para of timer for busy tone :50 (s)
System stand alone para of timer for ring
:60 (s)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-h248-1)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency 110|119|999
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display digitmap
--------------------------------------------------------------------------Inner digitmap
: 1234xxxx
Emergency digitmap
: 110|119|999
Urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict)
: Dualdial digitmap for card service
: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.7 Configuring the Standalone Function Based on the SIP
Protocol
With the standalone function, users under the same user agent can still communicate with each
other even if the UA5000 using the SIP loses communication with the IP multimedia subsystem
(IMS).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Prerequisite
The SIP protocol is used, voice service users have been configured on a SIP interface, and these
users can communicate with each other. For details about how to configure a user, see 7.4
Configuration Example of a SIP PSTN Service in Independent Upstream Mode.
Context
The principle of the standalone function is as follows: When the UA5000 loses communication
with the IMS, the UA5000 independently controls the internal users within the same user agent
so that the users can communicate with each other normally.
In the system running the SIP protocol, the local normal digitmap is adopted for the standalone
function. The system does not need inner digitmap in SIP mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface sip command to enter SIP interface mode.
Step 2 Run the if-sip attribute optional proxy-check-mode command to set the proxy detection mode
of an SIP interface to option or register.
NOTE
Only in the proxy detection mode of option or register, the communication fail with the IMS can activate the
standalone function in time.
Step 3 Run the display if-sip attribute command to query the attributes of the SIP interface.
Step 4 Run the mg-software parameter 2 1 command to enable the standalone function on the SIP
interface.
Step 5 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the standalone function on the SIP
interface.
----End
Example
To configure the standalone function for the plain old telephone service (POTS) users under SIP
interface 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute optional proxy-check-mode option
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display if-sip attribute config
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
Signalling IP
10.13.4.116
Signalling Port
5555
Media IP
10.13.4.116
Transfer Mode
UDP
Primary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.110
Primary Proxy IP 2
Primary Proxy Port
5555
Secondary Proxy IP 1
10.13.4.120
Secondary Proxy IP 2
Secondary Proxy Port
5555
Proxy Address Mode
IP
SIPProfile Index
0:Customizing_0/1
Service logic Index
0:Default
Server Address DHCP Option
0:None
Primary Proxy Domain Name
-
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Secondary Proxy Domain Name
Home Domain Name
huawei
Description
MG Domain Name
Phone Context
+86755
Register URI
Conference Factory URI
Subscribe to UA-Profile
enable
Subscribe to REG-STATE
disable
Subscribe to MWI
disable
SDP negotiation mode
remote
Mode of supporting proxy dual-homing dualhome
Proxy detection mode
option
Proxy refresh mode
-----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-sip-0)#mg-software parameter 2 1
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display mg-software parameter 2
------------------------------------------------MGID:0
para index:2
value:1
------------------------------------------------APPENDIX:
------------------------------------------------Interface software parameter name:
2 : SAL Support
0: No
1: Yes
7.8 (Optional) Configuring System Parameters
Global system parameters such as overseas version flag and message waiting indication (MWI)
mode need to be configured to ensure that user terminals respond in compliance with local
standards.
Context
Table 7-9 lists the voice over IP (VoIP)-related system parameters of the UA5000. For details
about all the system parameters and their meanings, see the system parameters command
reference.
Table 7-9 VoIP-related system parameters of the UA5000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
0
Indicates the howler tone
sending flag.
1: Sending the howler tone.
1
Indicates the overseas version
flag.
0: China.
2
Indicates the conformance test
flag.
0: The conformance test is
disabled.
3
Indicates the initial ringing stop
flag.
0: The initial ringing stop signal
is not issued.
4
Indicates the system self-test
flag.
1: Ports are reset selectively.
5
Indicates the call restriction flag
when the CPU is overloaded.
0: Calls are not restricted when
the CPU is overloaded.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
6
Indicates the call waiting tone
flag.
0: The media resource server
(MRS) of the media gateway
controller (MGC) issues the call
waiting tone.
7
Indicates the MWI mode.
0: The high voltage mode is used.
10
Indicates whether supports the
local receive and send UDP port
ID to be different from the peer
UDP.
0: Not support.
11
Indicates the media stream
forwarding mode within the
same device.
0: Media streams are forwarded
within the device.
12
Indicates the source of the
howler tone.
0: Field programmable gate array
(FPGA). That is, the FPGA plays
the howler tone.
13
TEI check cycle.
5 min.
14
Indicates the plain old
telephone service (POTS) GTC
performance statistics function.
1: The POTS GTC performance
statistics function is enabled.
54
The alarm switch of A/B line
power.
0: No alarm will be generated
when A wire/B wire touches the
220 V power cable.
55
Indicates the length of the port
calls defined minute(V5).
0 min.
60
Indicates the waiting time to
activate the ISDN.
0: Do not enable this function.
78
Whether allow the board
autoload when the version of
board is higher than the version
of system's packet.
0: Not allow.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the system parameters command to configure system parameters.
Step 2 Run the display system parameters command to verify that the configured system parameters
are the same as those defined in the data plan.
----End
Example
To set system parameter 7 (MWI mode) to 1 (FSK with ringing), do as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
huawei(config)#system parameters 7 1
huawei(config)#display system parameters 7
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameter name index: 7
Parameter value: 1
Mean: The mode of voicemail, 0:high voltage, 1:FSK and ring, 2:FSK no ring
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.9 Configuring the MG PSTN Subscriber Data
When the system uses the H.248 or MGCP protocol, after the MG interface is configured
successfully, you can add PSTN subscribers on the MG interface by configuring the PSTN
subscriber data. Thus, the function of the communication between PSTN subscribers can be
implemented.
Prerequisite
l
The UA5000 must communicate properly with the MGC.
l
The subscriber data on the MGC must be configured properly.
l
Perform this operation to configure POTS subscriber data, such as the following:
Context
– Terminal priority
– Telephone number
– Terminal ID
l
Perform this operation to configure the attributes of a POTS port, such as the following:
– Subscriber attributes
– Attributes of the calling number format
– Impedance and attributes of the current
– 16KC/12KC attributes
– Polarity reversed pulse attributes
– Power-off duration attributes
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the esl user command to enter the ESL mode.
Step 2 Run the mgpstnuser add or mgpstnuser batadd command to add POTS subscribers.
Step 3 Run the display mgpstnuser command to query the information about the POTS subscribers.
Step 4 Run the pstnport attribute set or pstnport attribute batset command to set the attributes of
the PSTN port.
Step 5 Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the attributes of the PSTN port.
----End
Example
The following example shows how to add 32 POTS subscribers to shelf 0/slot 11. In this example,
the mgid is 0, and all the subscribers support polarity reversed charging.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 step 1 terminalid 100
This operation will take several minutes, please wait...
huawei(config-esl-user)#
Command processing completed. 32 user data added successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11/0 0/11/31
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID
TelNo
Priority TID
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 0
Cat3
A100
0 / 11 / 1 0
Cat3
A101
0 / 11 / 2 0
Cat3
A102
0 / 11 / 3 0
Cat3
A103
0 / 11 / 4 0
Cat3
A104
0 / 11 / 5 0
Cat3
A105
0 / 11 / 6 0
Cat3
A106
0 / 11 / 7 0
Cat3
A107
0 / 11 / 8 0
Cat3
A108
0 / 11 / 9 0
Cat3
A109
0 / 11 / 10 0
Cat3
A110
0 / 11 / 11 0
Cat3
A111
0 / 11 / 12 0
Cat3
A112
0 / 11 / 13 0
Cat3
A113
0 / 11 / 14 0
Cat3
A114
0 / 11 / 15 0
Cat3
A115
0 / 11 / 16 0
Cat3
A116
0 / 11 / 17 0
Cat3
A117
0 / 11 / 18 0
Cat3
A118
0 / 11 / 19 0
Cat3
A119
0 / 11 / 20 0
Cat3
A120
0 / 11 / 21 0
Cat3
A121
0 / 11 / 22 0
Cat3
A122
0 / 11 / 23 0
Cat3
A123
0 / 11 / 24 0
Cat3
A124
0 / 11 / 25 0
Cat3
A125
0 / 11 / 26 0
Cat3
A126
0 / 11 / 27 0
Cat3
A127
0 / 11 / 28 0
Cat3
A128
0 / 11 / 29 0
Cat3
A129
0 / 11 / 30 0
Cat3
A130
0 / 11 / 31 0
Cat3
A131
-------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport attribute batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 polarity-reverse
support
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/11
------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port Gain(db)
Dial-Mode
Polarity-Reverse User-Type
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 1 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 2 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 3 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 4 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 5 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 6 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 7 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 8 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 9 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 10 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 11 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 12 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 13 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 14 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 15 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 16 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 17 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 18 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 19 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
0 / 11 / 20 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 21 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 22 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 23 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 24 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 25 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 26 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 27 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 28 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 29 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 30 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
0 / 11 / 31 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#board reset 0/11
Are you sure to reset board? (y/n)[n]:y
NOTE
At the start and end of a call, the UA5000 shows the start time and the end time based on the polarity
reversal of the subscriber line. The billing terminal that has the polarity reversal charging function, such
as a charging telephone set, implements the polarity reversal charging function according to the start time
and the end time of the call.
Related Operation
Table 7-10 lists the related operations for configuring the POTS subscriber data.
Table 7-10 Related operations for configuring the POTS subscriber data
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a POTS subscriber or
delete POTS subscribers in
batches
mgpstnuser del/mgpstnuser
batdel
-
Modify POTS subscriber
data
mgpstnuser modify
-
Query the information about
a POTS port to which the
subscriber is connected
display mgpstnuser
Query information, such as
port ID, MG ID, terminal
ID, and telephone number
corresponding to the
subscriber.
Query the type and status of a
POTS port and the service
types on it
display port state
Query information, such as
the type, status, and service
type of the port.
Terminate/Reset the POTS
port service
endservice/undo endservice
Terminating/Resetting the
POTS port service affects
the ongoing call. Run this
command with caution.
Terminating the POTS port
service may fail when the
system is busy.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Configure the attributes of a
POTS port or configure the
attributes of POTS service
ports in batches
pstnport attribute set/
pstnport attribute batset
-
Query the attributes of a
POTS port
display pstnport attribute
-
Configure the caller number
format on a POTS service
port or configure the caller
number format on the POTS
service ports in batches
pstnport clip set/pstnport
clip batset
-
Display the caller number
format on a POTS service
port
display pstnport clip
-
Configure the impedance and
the attributes of the current on
a POTS service port or
configure the impedance and
the attributes of the current on
POTS service ports in batches
pstnport electric set/
pstnport electric batset
-
Query the impedance and the
attributes of the current on a
POTS service port
display pstnport electric
-
Configure the KC attributes
of a POTS port or configure
the KC attributes of POTS
ports in batches
pstnport kc set/pstnport kc
batset
After configuring the KC
attributes, reset the board to
validate the settings.
Query the KC attributes of a
POTS service port
display pstnport kc
-
Configure the polarity
reversal attributes for a POTS
port or configure the polarity
reversal attributes for POTS
ports in batches
pstnport reversepole_pulse
set/pstnport
reversepole_pulse batset
After configuring the
polarity reversal attributes,
reset the board to validate
the settings.
Query the polarity reversal
attributes of POTS ports
display pstnport
reversepole_pulse
-
Configure the power-off
duration of a POTS
subscriber or configure the
power-off duration of POTS
subscribers in batches
pstnport timer set/pstnport
timer batset
-
Query the power-off duration
of a POTS subscriber
display pstnport timer
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
7.10 Configuring the SIP PSTN User Data
When the system protocol is Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), users can add a PSTN user to a
SIP interface by configuring the PSTN user data to implement the call function of the PSTN
user after the SIP interface is configured successfully.
Prerequisite
l
The UA5000 can communicate with the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) properly.
l
The user data on the IMS has been configured correctly.
Context
Configuring the PSTN user data consists of the following two parts:
l
Add the PSTN user (mandatory).
l
Configure the PSTN user attributes (optional, the configuration is required only when the
default configuration is inconsistent with the actual application).
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the esl user command to enter extend signaling link (ESL) user mode.
Step 2 Run the sippstnuser add command to add a single SIP PSTN user or run the sippstnuser
batadd command to add multiple SIP PSTN users in batches. A SIP user group can be also
specified for the SIP PSTN users when the users are added.
NOTE
Use the sipusergroup add command to create the SIP user group before using the group.
Step 3 Run the display sippstnuser command query the settings of the SIP PSTN user(s).
Step 4 (Optional) Run the pstnport attribute set command to configure the attributes of a single SIP
PSTN port or run the pstnport attribute batset command to configure the attributes of multiple
SIP PSTN ports in batches.
Step 5 (Optional) Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the attributes of a SIP PSTN
port or multiple SIP PSTN ports.
Step 6 (Optional) Run the sippstnuser rightflag set command to locally configure the service rights
flag of a SIP PSTN user.
NOTE
Users can use the auto-reverse-polarity parameter to enable the polarity reversal charging function for an
emergency call in a payphone service.
Step 7 (Optional) Run the display sippstnuser rightflag command to query the local service rights
flag of the SIP PSTN user.
Step 8 (Optional) Run the sippstnuser servicedata set command to configure the service data of an
account of the SIP PSTN user.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Step 9 (Optional) Run the display sippstnuser servicedata command to query the service data of an
account of the SIP PSTN user.
----End
Example
Assume that:
l
The SIP interface ID is 0.
l
Add 32 PSTN users in slot 0/11 in batches. Ensure that the phone numbers of these users
range from 83110000 to 83110031, the call priority of these users is cat2, and all the users
support the polarity reversal charging. In addition, the user with phone number 83110000
can enable the polarity reversal charging function for an emergency call in a payphone
service.
To configure the SIP PSTN user data, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#sippstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 telno 83110000
priority
cat2
This operation will take several minutes, please wait...
huawei(config-esl-user)#
Command processing completed. 32 user data added successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display sippstnuser 0/11
----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P
MGID
TelNo
Priority UserGroupID
----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 /11/0
0
83110000
cat2
0 /11/1
0
83110001
cat2
0 /11/2
0
83110002
cat2
0 /11/3
0
83110003
cat2
0 /11/4
0
83110004
cat2
0 /11/5
0
83110005
cat2
0 /11/6
0
83110006
cat2
0 /11/7
0
83110007
cat2
0 /11/8
0
83110008
cat2
0 /11/9
0
83110009
cat2
0 /11/10
0
83110010
cat2
0 /11/11
0
83110011
cat2
0 /11/12
0
83110012
cat2
0 /11/13
0
83110013
cat2
0 /11/14
0
83110014
cat2
0 /11/15
0
83110015
cat2
0 /11/16
0
83110016
cat2
0 /11/17
0
83110017
cat2
0 /11/18
0
83110018
cat2
0 /11/19
0
83110019
cat2
0 /11/20
0
83110020
cat2
0 /11/21
0
83110021
cat2
0 /11/22
0
83110022
cat2
0 /11/23
0
83110023
cat2
0 /11/24
0
83110024
cat2
0 /11/25
0
83110025
cat2
0 /11/26
0
83110026
cat2
0 /11/27
0
83110027
cat2
0 /11/28
0
83110028
cat2
0 /11/29
0
83110029
cat2
0 /11/30
0
83110030
cat2
0 /11/31
0
83110031
cat2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport attribute batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 polarity-reverse
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
support
Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/11
---------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
:
0/11/ 0
Gain(db)
: High gain
Dial-Mode
: DTMF-Pulse-Both
Polarity-Reverse
: Supported
User-Type
: DEL
Dsp-Para-Template
: Support port line lock
: Support
Support-Bell-ANS
: Disable
Support-detect-ANS-single-tone : Disable
---------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
:
0/11/ 1
Gain(db)
: High gain
Dial-Mode
: DTMF-Pulse-Both
Polarity-Reverse
: Supported
User-Type
: DEL
Dsp-Para-Template
: Support port line lock
: Support
Support-Bell-ANS
: Disable
Support-detect-ANS-single-tone : Disable
---------------------------------------------------......
---------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
:
0/11/31
Gain(db)
: High gain
Dial-Mode
: DTMF-Pulse-Both
Polarity-Reverse
: Supported
User-Type
: DEL
Dsp-Para-Template
: Support port line lock
: Support
Support-Bell-ANS
: Disable
Support-detect-ANS-single-tone : Disable
---------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#sippstnuser rightflag set 0/11/0 auto-reverse-polarity
enable
huawei(config-esl-user)#display sippstnuser rightflag 0/11/0
-----------------------------Call hold
: Disable
Three Party
: Disable
Conference
: Disable
Call transfer : Disable
Call waiting
: Disable
MCID
: Disable
MWI
: Disable
Anonymous Call : Disable
Auto reverse-polarity : Enable
------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 7-11 lists the related operations for configuring the SIP PSTN user data.
Table 7-11 Related operations for configuring the SIP PSTN user data
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Delete a PSTN user
sippstnuser del
Delete PSTN users in batches
sippstnuser batdel
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
To...
Run the Command...
Modify the PSTN user data
sippstnuser modify
Terminate the service on the PSTN
port
endservice
Restart the service on the PSTN
port
undo endservice
7.11 Configuring PSTN Port Attributes
This topic describes how to configure PSTN port attributes so that the PSTN port can meet the
requirements of the actual application.
Context
When the PSTN port attributes cannot meet the requirements of the actual application, the
UA5000 supports configuring the following attributes of the PSTN port:
l
Basic attributes (including the polarity-reversing attribute)
l
Mode of caller identification display (CLIP)
l
DSP gain
l
Impedance and current
l
16 KC/12 KC
l
Polarity-reversing pulse
l
Power-off interval
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the esl user command to enter the ESL user mode.
Step 2 Run the pstnport attribute batset or pstnport attribute set command to configure the basic
attributes of the PSTN port.
Step 3 Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the basic attributes of the PSTN port.
Step 4 Run the pstnport clip batset or pstnport clip set command to configure the CLIP mode of the
PSTN port.
Step 5 Run the display pstnport clip command to query the CLIP mode of the PSTN port.
Step 6 Run the pstnport dsp-gain batset or pstnport dsp-gain set command to configure the DSP
gain of the PSTN port.
Step 7 Run the display pstnport dsp-gain command to query the DSP gain of the PSTN port.
Step 8 Run the pstnport electric batset or pstnport electric set command to configure the electrical
attributes of the PSTN port.
Step 9 Run the display pstnport electric command to query the electrical attributes of the PSTN port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Step 10 Run the pstnport kc batset or pstnport kc set command to configure the 16 KC/12 KC attribute
of the PSTN port.
Step 11 Run the display pstnport kc command to query the 16 KC/12 KC attribute of the PSTN port.
Step 12 Run the pstnport reversepole_pulse batset or pstnport reversepole_pulse set command to
configure the polarity-reversing pulse attribute of the PSTN port.
Step 13 Run the display pstnport reversepole_pulse command to query the polarity-reversing pulse
attribute of the PSTN port.
Step 14 Run the pstnport timer batset or pstnport timer set command to configure the power-off
interval of the PSTN port.
Step 15 Run the display pstnport timer command to query the power-off interval of the PSTN port.
----End
Example
Assume that:
l
The dial-up mode is DTMF-only.
l
The parameter of voice gain is 3.
l
The polarity-reversing attribute is supported.
l
The user type is ECPBX.
To configure the attributes of PSTN port 0/11/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport attribute set 0/11/0 dial-mode DTMF-only voiceg
ain 3 polarity-reverse support usertype ECPBX
PSTN port set completed
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/11/0
---------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
:
0/11/ 0
Gain(db)
: Tx gain 3, Rx gain-3.5
Dial-Mode
: DTMF-only
Polarity-Reverse
: Supported
User-Type
: Earth Calling PBX
Dsp-Para-Template
: Support port line lock
: Support
Support-Bell-ANS
: Disable
Support-detect-ANS-single-tone : Disable
----------------------------------------------------
7.12 Configuring the QoS IP Precedence
Configuring the QoS IP precedence means configuring the different QoS IP precedences for the
signaling, media, and maintenance packets to meet different requirements for the delay and jitter
of different services.
Prerequisite
l
The ToS/DSCP strategy on the UA5000 must be the same as the ToS/DSCP strategy
configured on the router at the upper layer.
l
The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Related Concept
l
Precedence tagging: It is a strategy to re-tag the precedence of a packet that matches the
access control list. The tagged precedence is located in the related precedence fields.
l
ToS (type of service) precedence: It is the ToS sub-field (bits 4 to 7 of the ToS field) carried
by the ToS field in the IP header.
Figure 7-11 shows the ToS field in the IP header. The fields are described as follows:
1.
Precedence: 3 bits. It indicates the IP precedence.
2.
Delay (D): 1 bit. It indicates the minimum delay. When the ToS value is set to 8 (in decimal
notation) or 1000 (in binary notation), the delay is the minimum.
3.
Throughput (T): 1 bit. It indicates the maximum throughput. When the ToS value is set to
4 (in decimal notation) or 0100 (in binary notation), the throughput is the maximum.
4.
Reliability (R): 1 bit. It indicates the maximum reliability. When the ToS value is set to 2
(in decimal notation) or 0010 (in binary notation), the reliability is the maximum.
5.
Cost (C): 1 bit. It indicates the minimum cost, that is, the router of the lower cost should
be selected. When the ToS value is set to 1 (in decimal notation) or 0001 (in binary notation),
the cost is the minimum.
Figure 7-11 ToS field of the IP header
3
4
5
6
Precedence D
1
T
R
C
0
bit 0
4
Version
2
7
8
Not used
16
IHL
31
ToS
Total length
NOTE
If the ToS value of an IP packet is set to 0 (in decimal notation) or 0000 (in binary notation), the packet is
for common service.
l
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) precedence: It is defined by the differentiated
services (DS) field of the IP header. The DS field uses the ToS octet in the IP header. Six
bits of the ToS octet is used and the other two bits are reserved and must be set as 0. Figure
7-12 shows the DS field of the IP header.
Figure 7-12 DS field of the IP header
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Not used
DSCP
bit 0
4
Version
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
8
IHL
16
DS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Total length
144
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Context
l
The traditional IP network uses the best effort (BE) mode in the transmission of the packets
carrying various services. The BE mode can meet the requirements of the non-realtime
services such as file transfer, web page browsing and e-mail transfer. The realtime services,
however, demand low delay and jitter. The BE mode cannot meet the increasing demand
of the subscribers. To solve the problem, you must distinguish the priorities for signaling,
media, and maintenance packets, and set different QoS IP priorities for the signaling, media,
and maintenance packets.
l
Before changing the QoS IP strategy, run the qos ip command to set the ToS or DSCP value
as none. Otherwise, changing the QoS IP strategy is not allowed, and the system displays
an error prompt.
l
To modify a QoS IP strategy, the interface corresponding to the IP address must be in the
closed or not-started state.
l
After configuring the IP addresses, you can configure the ToS/DSCP tag. If the MG
interface is configured, you must disable the MG interface to configure the ToS/DSCP tag.
Otherwise, configuring the ToS/DSCP tag is not allowed, and the system displays an error
prompt.
l
Procedure (TOS)
Procedure
l
1.
Run the qos ip ip_address strategy tos command to set the QoS IP strategy to TOS.
2.
Run the qos ip ip_address tos command to configure the ToS precedence for different
service types.
3.
Run the display qos ip command to query the QoS IP strategy.
Procedure (DSCP)
1.
Run the qos ip ip_address strategy dscp command to set the QoS IP strategy to
DSCP.
2.
Run the qos ip ip_address dscp command to configure the DSCP precedence for
different service types.
3.
Run the display qos ip command to query the QoS IP strategy.
----End
Example
The following example shows how to configure the QoS IP strategy as tos for the UA5000.
Table 7-12 provides the data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy.
Table 7-12 Data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
ip_address
10.10.10.2
strategy
tos
media_precedence
2
media_tos
3
signalling_precedence
3
signalling_tos
5
maintain_precedence
2
maintain_tos
5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
huawei(config)#display qos ip
{ <cr>|ip_address<I><X.X.X.X> }:
Command:
display qos ip
Eth:
IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2
QOSIP Strategy.......: NONE
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos
huawei(config)#display qos ip
{ <cr>|ip_address<I><X.X.X.X> }:
Command:
display qos ip
Eth:
IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2
QOSIP Strategy.......: ToS
Media Precedence.....: 6
Media ToS............: 8
Signaling Precedence.: 7
Signaling ToS........: 2
Maintain Precedence..: 7
Maintain ToS.........: 2
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 tos media 2 3 signaling 3 5 maintain 2 5
huawei(config)#display qos ip
{ <cr>|ip_address<I><X.X.X.X> }:
Command:
display qos ip
Eth:
IPAddress............:
QOSIP Strategy.......:
Media Precedence.....:
Media ToS............:
Signaling Precedence.:
Signaling ToS........:
Maintain Precedence..:
Maintain ToS.........:
10.10.10.2
ToS
2
3
3
5
2
5
The following example shows how to configure the QoS IP strategy as dscp for the UA5000.
Table 7-13 provides the data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy.
Table 7-13 Data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy-2
Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
ip_address
10.10.10.2
strategy
dscp
media_dscp
34
signalling_dscp
56
maintain_dscp
56
-
-
huawei(config)#display qos ip
{ <cr>|ip_address<I><X.X.X.X> }:
Command:
display qos ip
Eth:
IPAddress............:
QOSIP Strategy.......:
Media Precedence.....:
Media ToS............:
Signaling Precedence.:
Signaling ToS........:
Maintain Precedence..:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
10.10.10.2
ToS
2
3
3
5
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Maintain ToS.........: 5
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy dscp
huawei(config)#display qos ip
{ <cr>|ip_address<I><X.X.X.X> }:
Command:
display qos ip
IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2
QOSIP Strategy.......: DSCP
Media DSCP...........: 46
Signaling DSCP.......: 26
Maintain DSCP........: 26
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 dscp media 34 signaling 56 maintain 56
huawei(config)#display qos ip
{ <cr>|ip_address<I><X.X.X.X> }:
Command:
display qos ip
IPAddress............:
QOSIP Strategy.......:
Media DSCP...........:
Signaling DSCP.......:
Maintain DSCP........:
10.10.10.2
DSCP
34
56
56
7.13 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority
Configuring the QoS VLAN priorities means configuring the different QoS VLAN priorities for
the signaling, media, and maintenance packets. Thus, the QoS priorities of the service traffic
streams can be controlled according to the VLAN priorities.
Prerequisite
The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.
Context
You can configure different VLAN priorities for signaling, media, and maintenance packets
when configuring an IP address.
NOTE
An IP address is bound only with the VLAN ID instead of the VLAN priority. That is, different types of
packets from one IP address can have different VLAN priorities.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the qos vlan ip_address priority command to set VLAN priorities for different service
types.
Step 2 Run the display qos vlan command to query the QOS VLAN settings.
----End
Example
To set the QoS VLAN priority of the IP address 10.10.10.4 to the default value, do as follows:
huawei(config)#qos vlan 10.10.10.4 priority default
huawei(config)#display qos vlan 10.10.10.4
IPAddress............: 10.10.10.4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
VlanID...............:
Media Priority.......:
Signaling Priority...:
Maintain Priority....:
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
1001
6
3
5
7.14 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP
Address
Separating the signaling IP address from the media IP address means configuring two different
IP addresses as the media IP address and signaling IP address. Thus, the media stream and
signaling stream are transmitted over different paths on the network.
Prerequisite
The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.
Precaution
l
To distinguish the paths for the signaling stream and the media stream and use different
QoS strategies, you need to configure different IP addresses for the signaling stream and
the media stream.
l
After modifying the configuration of MG interface, reset the MG interface to make the
modification take effect.
l
When the system protocol is H.248:
Procedure
l
l
1.
In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface
mode.
2.
Run the if-h248 attribute mg-media-ip command to add a media IP address for the
MG interface.
3.
Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the attributes of the MG
interface. Then, check whether the media IP address is configured correctly.
When the system protocol is MGCP:
1.
In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface
mode.
2.
Run the if-mgcp attribute command to add a media IP address for the MG interface.
3.
Run the display if-mgcp attribute command to query the attributes of the MG
interface. Then, check whether the media IP address is configured correctly.
When the system protocol is SIP:
1.
In the global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter the MG interface
mode.
2.
Run the if-sip attribute basic command to add a media IP address for the MG
interface.
3.
Run the display if-sip attribute command to query the attributes of the MG interface.
Then, check whether the media IP address is configured correctly.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
Example
NOTE
Here only gives the example when the system protocol is H.248 because the configure when the system is
MGCP or SIP is similar to that of H.248.
To configure the media IP address of MG interface 0 to 10.10.10.4, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute
--------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
H248version Negotiated Originally
1
Profile Negotiation Para
enable
Profile
1:Resv1("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Transmode
HeartBeatTimer(s)
HeartBeatRetransTimes
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
MG signalling IP
MG signalling Port
MG media IP
MIDType
DeviceName
Text
UDP
60
3
60
10.10.10.2
2944
10.10.10.4
IP4_ADDR
-
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC IP:10.10.20.2
Active MGC
MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC IP:Standby MGC
MGC Domain Name:---------------------------------------------------------------------
7.15 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced Function
Enabling the voice quality enhanced function includes enabling the automatic gain adjustment
and background noise suppression functions so that the voice service is of better quality when
there is noise.
Prerequisite
l
The UA5000 must work in the normal state.
l
The maintenance terminal must be logged in to the UA5000 successfully and the
UA5000 must be maintained normally.
Context
The voice quality enhancements (VQE) include two functions: automatic gain adjustment and
background noise suppression.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Automatic gain adjustment: During the VoIP call, this function helps to prevent the call
quality from be affected by the sudden change of the noise energy. When the noise energy
changes suddenly, the gain is adjusted automatically so that noise energy is adjusted
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
smoothly. This prevents the discomfort of the listener caused by the sudden change of the
noise energy.
l
Background noise suppression: During the VoIP call, the noise energy can be reduced to
improve the comfort and the clarity of the call.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the pstnport vqe set command or the pstnport vqe batset command to configure the VQE
attributes of the PSTN port.
NOTE
l pstnport vqe set is to configure the VQE of a single PSTN port.
l pstnport vqe batsetis to configure the VQE of PSTN ports in batch.
Step 2 Run the display pstnport vqe command to query the VQE attributes of the PSTN port.
----End
Example
To enable the automatic gain adjustment, set the automatic gain adjustment parameter as 15 (that
is -24dBm0), enable the background noise suppression, and set the background noise suppression
parameter as 20 dB for PSTN port 0/6/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe set 0/6/0 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable
sns-level 20
PSTN port set completed
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/6/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
AGC enable
AGC value (dbm0)
SNS enable
SNS value (db)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 6 / 0 enable
-24
enable
20
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Assume the following:
l
The automatic gain adjustment is enabled.
l
The automatic gain adjustment parameter is set as 15 (that is -24dBm0).
l
The background noise suppression is enabled.
l
The background noise suppression parameter is set as 20 dB.
To configure the VQE attributes for PSTN ports 0/6/0 to 0/6/4 in batches, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/6/0 0/6/4 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns
enable sns-Level 20
Command processing completed. 5 user data modified successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/6
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
AGC enable
AGC value (dbm0)
SNS enable
SNS value (db)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 6 / 0
enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 6 / 1
enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 6 / 2
enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 6 / 3
enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 6 / 4
enable
-24
enable
20
0 / 6 / 5
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 6
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 7
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 8
disable
-22
disable
12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service
0 / 6 / 9
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 10
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 11
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 12
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 13
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 14
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 15
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 16
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 17
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 18
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 19
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 20
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 21
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 22
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 23
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 24
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 25
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 26
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 27
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 28
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 29
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 30
disable
-22
disable
12
0 / 6 / 31
disable
-22
disable
12
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8
8 Configuring the VAG Service
Configuring the VAG Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the VAG service includes the application of the VAG service and the process for
configuring the VAG on the UA5000.
8.1 Introduction to the VAG Service
Virtual access gateway (VAG) means that a physical AG is simulated as multiple virtual AGs.
8.2 Configuration Example of the VAG Service
This topic describes how to configure and verify the VAG service by creating two MG interfaces
on the UA5000 and then configuring PSTN subscribers on the two MG interfaces.
8.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAG
This topic describes how to configure the mode of generating terminal IDs (TIDs) of users of
all the types of the VAG, including the terminal prefix and TID profile. The TID profile defines
the mode of generating the ID of the terminal except the terminal prefix. The ID of a user terminal
is a combination of the terminal prefix and the character string generated by the TID profile.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8 Configuring the VAG Service
8.1 Introduction to the VAG Service
Virtual access gateway (VAG) means that a physical AG is simulated as multiple virtual AGs.
Service Description
An AG supports different IP interfaces and each interface is used independently to realize the
VAG feature.
In the VAG service, an AG can be used by several carriers to improve the device utilization, to
facilitate the management and charging, and thus to meet the requirements of the carrier.
For more information about the features of VAG, see "VAG" in the Feature Description.
Service Specifications
An AG supports a maximum of 8 VAGs.
8.2 Configuration Example of the VAG Service
This topic describes how to configure and verify the VAG service by creating two MG interfaces
on the UA5000 and then configuring PSTN subscribers on the two MG interfaces.
Prerequisite
l
The IP address of the service network port and the subscribers must be configured
successfully. The subscribers must be able to call each other. For the procedure for
configuring the subscribers, see "7.2 Configuration Example of the MG PSTN Service
(Independent Upstream)."
l
System parameters must be configured according to "7.2 Configuration Example of the
MG PSTN Service (Independent Upstream)."
l
The service board is normal.
Context
The VAG simulates a physical AG device into multiple virtual AG devices. The system
implements the VAG feature by supporting multiple IP ports on one physical AG device and
using each IP port independently.
Networking
Figure 8-1 shows the example network of the VAG service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the A32 service board as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8 Configuring the VAG Service
Figure 8-1 Example network of the VAG service
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Router
10.10.10.1/24
H.248
0/11 0/12
P
V
M
B
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
P
V
M
B
A A
3 3
2 2
Phone 1 Phone 32
Phone 33 Phone 64
VAG1
VAG2
Data Plan
l
Table 8-1 provides the data plan for configuring the VAG 2 on the PVMB control board.
For the data plan for configuring VAG 1, see "7.2 Configuration Example of the MG
PSTN Service (Independent Upstream)."
l
In the preceding figure, MG 1 stands for VAG 1, and MG 2 stands for VAG 2.
Table 8-1 Data plan for configuring the VAG2 on PVMB
Data Type
Item
Data
MG interface data
mgid
1
code
text
protocol
H.248
transfer
UDP
port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Data Type
IP addresses
Telephone numbers
8 Configuring the VAG Service
Item
Data
Whether the MG holds
ongoing calls when the
connection between MGC and
MG is broken
Yes
start-negotiate-version
2
Signaling IP address of MG
interface 1 on the UA5000
10.10.10.3/24
Media IP address of MG
interface 1 on the UA5000
10.10.10.5/24
Default gateway of MG
interface 1 on the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Phone 33-phone 64
MG interface: 1
Shelf ID/slot ID: 0/12
Telephone numbers:
12340033-12340064
Context
Virtual Access Gateway (VAG) is a feature that enables a physical AG to support multiple
VAGs. The physical AG supports multiple IP interfaces, and assigns the IP interfaces for
dedicated use to realize the VAG feature.
Precaution
l
The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters
configured on the MGC.
l
The cadence ring tone and initial ring tone must meet the local standard.
l
For the procedure for configuring the data of VAG 1, see "7.2 Configuration Example of
the MG PSTN Service (Independent Upstream)."
l
To configure the data of VAG 2, do as follows.
Procedure
1.
Add a service board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/12 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12
huawei(config)#display board 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status
Sub0
Sub1
Online/Offline
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
PWX2
Normal
1
PWX2
Normal
2
3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
4
5
......
12
......
35
8 Configuring the VAG Service
H601PVMB
H601PVMB
Standby_normal
H602ETCA
Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM
A32
Normal
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
Configure the attributes for the MG interface of VAG 2.
huawei(config)#interface h248 1
Are you sure to add MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.3 mgport 2944
code text transfer udp mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip
10.10.10.5 start-negotiate-version 2
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display if-h248 attribute
--------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
1
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
H248version Negotiated Originally
2
Profile Negotiation Para
disable
Profile
0:NoProfile("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Transmode
HeartBeatTimer(s)
HeartBeatRetransTimes
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
MG signalling IP
MG signalling Port
MG media IP
MIDType
DeviceName
Text
UDP
60
3
60
10.10.10.3
2944
10.10.10.5
IP4_ADDR
-
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC IP:10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC IP:Standby MGC
MGC Domain Name:---------------------------------------------------------------------
3.
Configure the digitmap for internal calls on the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx
4.
Enable the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#
Reset MG interface 1 success!
5.
Query whether the MG interface is in the normal state.
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#quit
huawei(config)#display if-h248 all
------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName
------------------------------------------------------------------------1
UDP
Normal 2944
10.10.10.3
2944
10.10.20.1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.
Configure the telephone numbers of the subscribers.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/12/0 0/12/31 1 terminalid 32
telno 12340033
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/12
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID
TelNo
Priority TID
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8 Configuring the VAG Service
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 12 / 0 0
Cat3
A32
0 / 12 / 1 0
Cat3
A33
0 / 12 / 2 0
Cat3
A34
0 / 12 / 3 0
Cat3
A35
0 / 12 / 4 0
Cat3
A36
0 / 12 / 5 0
Cat3
A37
0 / 12 / 6 0
Cat3
A38
0 / 12 / 7 0
Cat3
A39
0 / 12 / 8 0
Cat3
A40
0 / 12 / 9 0
Cat3
A41
0 / 12 / 10 0
Cat3
A42
0 / 12 / 11 0
Cat3
A43
0 / 12 / 12 0
Cat3
A44
0 / 12 / 13 0
Cat3
A45
0 / 12 / 14 0
Cat3
A46
0 / 12 / 15 0
Cat3
A47
0 / 12 / 16 0
Cat3
A48
0 / 12 / 17 0
Cat3
A49
0 / 12 / 18 0
Cat3
A50
0 / 12 / 19 0
Cat3
A51
0 / 12 / 20 0
Cat3
A52
0 / 12 / 21 0
Cat3
A53
0 / 12 / 22 0
Cat3
A54
0 / 12 / 23 0
Cat3
A55
0 / 12 / 24 0
Cat3
A56
0 / 12 / 25 0
Cat3
A57
0 / 12 / 26 0
Cat3
A58
0 / 12 / 27 0
Cat3
A59
0 / 12 / 28 0
Cat3
A60
0 / 12 / 29 0
Cat3
A61
0 / 12 / 30 0
Cat3
A62
0 / 12 / 31 0
Cat3
A63
-------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
7.
Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
1.
When MG interface 1 communicates properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone 1-phone
32 should be able to call each other.
2.
When MG interface 2 communicates properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone 33phone 64 should be able to call each other.
3.
When MG interfaces 1 and 2 communicate properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone
1-phone 64 should be able to call each other.
4.
After disabling MG interface 1 by running the shutdown graceful command, the results
should be as follows:
l Subscribers of phone 1-phone 32 should not be able to call each other.
l Subscribers of phone 33-phone 64 should be able to call each other.
l Subscribers of phone 1-phone 32 and phone 33-phone 64 should not be able to call each
other.
This indicates that the configuration of each VAG is independent, and the configuration is
valid only to the subscribers of the VAG.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8 Configuring the VAG Service
8.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAG
This topic describes how to configure the mode of generating terminal IDs (TIDs) of users of
all the types of the VAG, including the terminal prefix and TID profile. The TID profile defines
the mode of generating the ID of the terminal except the terminal prefix. The ID of a user terminal
is a combination of the terminal prefix and the character string generated by the TID profile.
Prerequisite
The MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
l
The system has 19 common TID profiles with the TID indexes of 0-18. When the default
TID profiles in the system cannot meet the current requirement, you can add the userdefined TID profile manually as required.
l
The TID profile format string should consist of at least one fixed format "%u" or one unfixed
format "%0nu". "n" represents the numeral that ranges from 0 to 10. "%u" means that the
length of the parameter to be printed is unlimited, and "%0nu" means that the length of the
parameter to be printed is n. The format allows the security character string at the beginning
and the end.
l
The parameter list consists of at least one keyword. The keywords are separated by "," and
support the addition algorithm. The deviation of addition ranges from 0 to 0x40000000.
The keywords include the following:
– F: Indicates the shelf ID.
– S: Indicates the slot ID.
– P: Indicates the port ID.
– B: Indicates the B channel.
– G: Indicates the general permanent TID.
– R: Indicates the RTP virtual TID.
l
When a PSTN subscriber, an ISDN PRA subscriber or an ISDN BRA subscriber is added,
the TID matching each type of the subscriber is output based on the format and the terminal
prefix of the matching TID profile.
For example, if the matching TID profile format of the PSTN subscriber is %02u/%02u/
%02u, the terminal prefix of the TID profile is aln, and the location of the PSTN subscriber
is 0/11/0, the TID of the PSTN subscriber is aln00/11/00
.
l
You can run the display tid-format command to query the TID profile bound to users of
all the types on the current MG interface, and then run the display tid-template command
to query the format of the TID profile.
l
The format of the TID profile of the VAG and the format of the TID profile of the SoftSwitch
must be consistent.
l
The index and name of the added profile must be different from the index and name of the
existing profiles in the system.
Precaution
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8 Configuring the VAG Service
l
If terminals of a type exist on an interface and the interface is not disabled, the prefix of
terminals of this type cannot be modified.
l
If terminals of a type exist on an interface, the index of the TID profile corresponding to
the terminals of this type cannot be modified.
l
The system supports 64 TID profiles. The TID profiles with indexes from 0 to 31 are
reserved for the system, and the TID profiles with indexes from 32 to 63 can be customized.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display tid-template command to query the TID profile of the system.
Step 2 When the default TID profile in the system cannot meet the requirements, run the tid-template
add command to add the required TID profile. When the default TID profile in the system can
meet the requirements, go to Step 3.
Step 3 Enter MG interface mode.
l
If the system protocol is H.248, run the interface h248 command to enter H248 mode.
l
If the system protocol is MGCP, run the interface mgcp command to enter MGCP mode.
Step 4 Configure the TID profiles and terminal prefixes of subscribers of all the types of the current
VAG.
l In H248 mode, run the tid-format pstn command to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the PSTN subscriber.
l In H248 mode, run the tid-format bra command to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the ISDN BRA subscriber.
l In H248 mode, run the tid-format pracommand to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the ISDN PRA subscriber.
l In H248 mode, run the tid-format rtp command to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the RTP terminal.
l In H248 mode, run the tid-format r2 command to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the R2 subscriber.
l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format pstn command to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the ISDN subscriber.
l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format pra command to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the ISDN PRA subscriber.
l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format bra command to configure the TID profile and terminal
prefix of the ISDN BRA subscriber.
----End
Example
Assume the following:
l
The index of the TID profile is 36.
l
The length of the printing parameter is not limited.
l
The parameter list is shelf ID + 1, slot ID +1, and port ID + 1.
l
The name of the TID profile is CustomTemplate.
l
The terminal prefix is A.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8 Configuring the VAG Service
To configure the TID profile in H248 mode for PSTN subscriber on port 0/15/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display tid-template all
------------------------------------------------Index
Name
------------------------------------------------0
Rtp_Delamination
1
Rtp_No_Delamination
2
General_No_Delamination
3
Aln_Not_Fixed_1
4
Aln_Fixed_1
5
Aln_Not_Fixed_0
6
Aln_Fixed_0
7
Aln_BT
8
Bra_Not_Fixed_1
9
Bra_Fixed_1
10
Bra_Not_Fixed_0
11
Bra_Fixed_0
12
Bra_BT
13
Trunk_Not_Fixed_1
14
Trunk_Fixed_1
15
Trunk_Not_Fixed_0
16
Trunk_Fixed_0
17
Trunk_BT
18
Rtp_Fixed_5u
------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#tid-template add 36 format %u/%u/%u parameter-list f+1,s+1,p+1
name
CustomTemplate
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#tid-format pstn template 36 prefix A
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display tid-format
-------------------------------user-type template-index prefix
-------------------------------rtp
1
A
pstn
36
A
bra
2
A
pra
2
A
r2
2
A
-------------------------------huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser add 0/10/0 0
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/10/0
{ <cr>|endframeid/slotid/portid<S><Length 1-15> }:
Command:
display mgpstnuser 0/10/0
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID
TelNo
Priority TID
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 10 / 0 0
Cat3
A1/11/1
-------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 1 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
Related Operation
Table 8-2 lists the related operations for configuring the TID profile of the VAG interface.
Table 8-2 Related operations for configuring the TID profile of the VAG interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete the user-defined TID
profile
tid-template delete
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
8 Configuring the VAG Service
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Modify the user-defined TID
profile
tid-template_modify
-
Modify the prefix of the user
terminal
H.248:
tid-format
MGCP:
Run this command to modify
the terminal prefix of the user
terminal. If terminals of a
certain type exist on an
interface and the interface is
not disabled, the prefix of
terminals of this type cannot
be modified.
tid-format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based
on the H.248 Protocol
About This Chapter
This topic describes the application of the ISDN technology and how to configure the VoIP
ISDN service on the UA5000 running the H.248 protocol.
9.1 Introduction to a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248 Protocol
The UA5000 can provide integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access (BRA)
and primary rate access (PRA) services for users based on the H.248 protocol. ISDN provides
an end-to-end (E2E) digital connection and supports multiple types of voice and non-voice
telecommunication services. The configuration of a voice over IP (VoIP) ISDN service based
on the H.248 protocol is described.
9.2 Configuration Example of a P2P ISDN BRA Service Based on the H.248 Protocol
In this example, point-to-point (P2P) integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access
(BRA) services based on the H.248 protocol are provided using a digital subscriber line
(DSL) service board. An ISDN BRA user can communicate with other ISDN BRA users and
plain old telephone service (POTS) users.
9.3 Configuration Example of a P2MP ISDN BRA Service Based on the H.248 Protocol
In this example, point-to-multipoint (P2MP) integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic
rate access (BRA) services based on the H.248 protocol are provided using a digital subscriber
line (DSL) service board. An ISDN BRA user can communicate with other ISDN BRA users
and plain old telephone service (POTS) users.
9.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When the EDTB Service Board Is Used)
This topic describes how to configure the ISDN PRA service through the EDTB service board.
After the configuration, ISDN PRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN PRA subscribers
and POTS subscribers can call each other.
9.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol Stack
The signaling transport (SIGTRAN) protocol supports the transmission of traditional switched
circuit network (SCN) signaling over the IP network through protocol adaptation and
transmission.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
9.1 Introduction to a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
The UA5000 can provide integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access (BRA)
and primary rate access (PRA) services for users based on the H.248 protocol. ISDN provides
an end-to-end (E2E) digital connection and supports multiple types of voice and non-voice
telecommunication services. The configuration of a voice over IP (VoIP) ISDN service based
on the H.248 protocol is described.
Service Description
Definition of ISDN by the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
(CCITT): Integrated services digital network (ISDN) is a communication network evolved from
integrated digital network (IDN) and provides the E2E digital connection to support multiple
telecommunication services involving the voice and non-voice services. Users can access the
network through a group of network interfaces.
ISDN provides the following two types of services:
l
Basic rate interface (BRI): It provides a rate of 144 kbit/s, and provides two B channels
and one D channel. The B channels are used for bearing services and the D channel is used
for transmitting call control signaling and operation, administration and maintenance
(OAM) signaling.
l
Primary rate interface (PRI): The PRI interface provides a data rate of 2.048 Mbit/s and 30
B channels and 1 D channel. The rates of the B channel and D channel are both 64 kbit/s.
In the upstream direction, the UA5000 accesses ISDN services to the next generation network
(NGN) or local exchange (LE) by using an IP or V5 network.
In the IP network based on the H.248 protocol, the UA5000 adapts ISDN signaling and then
transmits it to the MGC using the signaling transport (SIGTRAN) protocol. Under the control
of the MGC, the UA5000 sends the packet ISDN traffic streams to the NGN, implementing the
VoIP ISDN service.
Service Specifications
The UA5000 provides an ISDN BRA service for users by using the DSL, DSLE/DSLD board,
and provides an ISDN PRA service for users by using the PVMB, PVMD, or EDTB board.
Table 9-1 lists the number of ISDN BRA ports provided by each board.
Table 9-1 Number of ISDN BRA ports provided by each board
Board
Ports
DSL
8 ISDN BRA ports
DSLE/DSLD
16 ISDN BRA ports
Table 9-2 lists the number of ISDN PRA ports provided by each board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Table 9-2 Number of ISDN PRA ports provided by each board
Board
Ports
PVMB
l H601PVMB: 4 E1 ports, namely, 4 ISDN PRA ports
l H612PVMB: 8 E1 ports, namely, 8 ISDN PRA ports
PVMD
4 E1 ports, namely, 4 ISDN PRA ports
EDTB
16 E1 ports, namely, 16 ISDN PRA ports
9.2 Configuration Example of a P2P ISDN BRA Service
Based on the H.248 Protocol
In this example, point-to-point (P2P) integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access
(BRA) services based on the H.248 protocol are provided using a digital subscriber line
(DSL) service board. An ISDN BRA user can communicate with other ISDN BRA users and
plain old telephone service (POTS) users.
Prerequisite
l
A local IP address has been configured in the IP address pool.
l
System parameters and media gateway (MG) interface attributes have been configured
successfully. The PSTN user data on the MG interface has been configured successfully
and the PSTN users can communicate with each other. For detailed operations, see 7
Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service.
l
ISDN digital phones support the P2P function and they have been connected properly.
l
The data on the MGC has been configured properly.
Networking
Figure 9-1 shows an example network of the P2P ISDN BRA service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the DSL and A32 service boards as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Figure 9-1 Example network of the P2P ISDN BRA service
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Router
10.10.10.1/24
H.248
I
P
M
B
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
I
P
M
B
P
V
M
B
0/8
0/11
D
S
L
D
S
L
P
V
M
B
PBX
A
3
2
PBX
ISDN phone A ISDN phone B
Phone A
Data Plan
Table 9-3 provides the data plan for configuring the P2P ISDN BRA service.
Table 9-3 Data plan for configuring the P2P ISDN BRA service
Category
Item
Data
MG interface data
MG ID
0
Code
text
Protocol
H.248
Port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Domain name
UA5000.com
Whether the termination ID
on the MG interface supports
the layering configuration
Not supported
Terminal ID
0, 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Category
Item
Data
IP address
IP address of MG 0 on the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
Default gateway of MG 0 on
the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/2
IUA link ID
15
IUA link set ID
1
Local port ID
1401
Peer port ID
1400
IUA interface ID
8
DSL board
Subrack ID/Slot ID
0/8 and 0/11
ISDN BRA port
Subrack ID/Slot ID/Port ID
0/8/0 and 0/11/0
Working mode
P2P
IUA link parameter
Context
l
One port can be connected to only one terminal.
l
The terminal equipment identifiers (TEIs) of the ISDN digital phones must be 0.
l
If the ISDN digital phone is not provided with local power, the braport attribute batset
frameid/slotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid rpower yes or braport attribute set
frameid/slotid/portid rpower yes command must be executed on the UA5000 to enable the
remote power.
l
Ensure that the parameters of the MG interface are the same as those configured on the
MGC.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 9-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Figure 9-2 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN service
Start
Add service boards
Configure the working
mode of ISDN BRA port
Configure an IUA link
set and an IUA link
(Optional) Configure
SCTP parameters
Configure the
SIGTRAN protocol
Configure ISDN
subscriber data
Save the configuration
data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a DSL board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 dsl
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 dsl
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
0 frame 8 slot board has been confirmed
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
0 frame 11 slot board has been confirmed
Step 2 (Optional) Query the attributes of ISDN BRA ports.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/8
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P
Remote-power Work-mode BAD
BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/8/0
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/8/1
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/8/2
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/8/3
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/8/4
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/8/5
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/8/6
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/8/7
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/11
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
F /S /P
Remote-power Work-mode Bad
BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active
----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/11/0
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/11/1
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/11/2
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/11/3
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/11/4
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/11/5
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/11/6
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
0/11/7
No
p2mp
disable
30
enable
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Configure the working mode of the ports.
huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/8/0 work-mode p2p
The board(s) may be reset before the configuration works , are you sure to
reset the board(s) when executing this command?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/11/0 work-mode p2p
The board(s) may be reset before the configuration works , are you sure to
reset the board(s) when executing this command?(y/n)[n]:y
Step 4 Add a link set and links, and query the configuration information about the link set and the links.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 1401 10.10.10.2 1400 10.10.20.1
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute
---------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo
: 15
LinksetNo
: 1
Local prot
: 1401
Local IP address
: 10.10.10.2
Remote port
: 1400
Remote IP address 1
: 10.10.20.1
Remote IP address 2
: InStreamNum
: 33
OutStreamNum
: 33
---------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state
------------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId
------------------------------------------------------------------------15
active
unlock
uncongest
1
3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Add ISDN BRA users and configure the data.
huawei(config-sigtran)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser add 0/8/0 0 1 8 terminalid 0
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser add 0/11/0 0 1 10 terminalid 2
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/8/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P MGID
LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo
Priority TID
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 8/ 0 0
1
8
No
Cat3
A0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/11/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P MGID
LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo
Priority TID
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 11/ 0 0
1
8
No
Cat3
A2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 6 Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Result
1.
The ISDN BRA ports are activated.
huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/8/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID
ProtocolID
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 8/0 BRA 2B+D
Active
AutoBlk InstSvc MG
0
A0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/11/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID
ProtocolID
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 11/0 BRA 2B+D
Active
StartSvc InstSvc MG
0
A2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
The working mode of the ISDN BRA ports is P2P.
huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/8/0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P
Remote-power Work-mode Bad
BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active
----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 8/0
No
p2p
disable
30
enable
----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/11/0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P
Remote-power Work-mode Bad
BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active
----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/11/0
No
p2p
disable
30
enable
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.
P2P ISDN BRA users ISDN phone A and ISDN phone B can communicate with each other
normally. P2P ISDN BRA users and POTS user Phone A can communicate with each other
normally. The ports for the P2P ISDN BRA service are always activated.
9.3 Configuration Example of a P2MP ISDN BRA Service
Based on the H.248 Protocol
In this example, point-to-multipoint (P2MP) integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic
rate access (BRA) services based on the H.248 protocol are provided using a digital subscriber
line (DSL) service board. An ISDN BRA user can communicate with other ISDN BRA users
and plain old telephone service (POTS) users.
Prerequisite
l
A local IP address has been configured in the IP address pool.
l
System parameters and media gateway (MG) interface attributes have been configured
successfully. The PSTN user data on the MG interface has been configured successfully
and the PSTN users can communicate with each other. For detailed operations, see 7
Configuring the VoIP PSTN Service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
l
One NT1 with power supply and two ISDN digital phones are available, and the ISDN
digital phones have been connected properly.
l
The data on the MGC has been configured properly.
Networking
Figure 9-3 shows an example network of the P2MP ISDN BRA service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the A32 and DSL service boards as an example.
Figure 9-3 Example network of the P2MP ISDN BRA service
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Router
10.10.10.1/24
H.248
0/15
I
P
M
B
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
I
P
M
B
P
V
M
B
P
V
M
B
A
3
2
D
S
L
NT1
Phone A
ISDN phone
ISDN phone
Data Plan
Table 9-4 provides the data plan for configuring the P2MP ISDN BRA service.
Table 9-4 Data plan for configuring the P2MP ISDN BRA service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Category
Item
Data
MG interface data
MG ID
0
Code
text
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Category
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Item
Data
Protocol
H.248
Port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
IP address
IUA link parameter
ISDN BRA port
Domain name
UA5000.com
Terminal ID
0 and 1
IP address of MG 0 on the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
Default gateway of MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/24
IUA link set ID
1
IUA link ID
15
Local port ID
9900
Peer port ID
1400
Port ID
0/15/0 and 0/15/1
Interface ID
8
Context
Ensure that the parameters of the MG interface are the same as those configured on the MGC.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 9-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Figure 9-4 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN service
Start
Add a DSL board
configure the working
mode of ISDN BRA port
Configure an IUA link
set and an IUA link
(Optional) Configure
SCTP parameters
Configure the
SIGTRAN protocol
Add an ISDN BRA
subscriber and
configure the data
Save the configuration
data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a DSL board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/15 dsl
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/15
0 frame 15 slot board confirms successfully
huawei(config)#display board 0
-------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline
-------------------------------------------------------0
H602PWX0
Normal
1
H602PWX0
Normal
2
3
4
H601PVMB
Active_normal
H601ETCB H601ETCB
5
H601PVMB
Standby_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB
......
15
DSL
Normal
......
35
--------------------------------------------------------
Step 2 Add a link set and links.
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 9900 10.10.10.2 1400 10.10.20.1
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
---------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo
: 15
LinksetNo
: 1
Local prot
: 9900
Local IP address
: 10.10.10.2
Remote port
: 1400
Remote IP address 1
: 10.10.20.1
Remote IP address 2
: InStreamNum
: 33
OutStreamNum
: 33
---------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state
-------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId
-------------------------------------------------------------15
active
unlock
uncongest
1
3
--------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Add ISDN BRA users and configure the data.
huawei(config-sigtran)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser batadd 0/15/0 0/15/1 0 1 8 terminalid 0
huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/15
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID
ProtocolID
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/15/0 BRA 2B+D
Deactive StartSvc InstSvc MG
0
A0
0/15/1 BRA 2B+D
Deactive StartSvc InstSvc MG
0
A2
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/15
----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P MGID
LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo
Priority TID
----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/15/ 0 0
1
8
No
Cat3
A0
0/15/ 1 0
1
9
No
Cat3
A2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/15
Command:
display braport attribute 0/15
-------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P
Remote-power Work-mode
BAD
BADDelay(s) Keep-L1-active
-------------------------------------------------------------------------0/15/0
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
0/15/1
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
0/15/2
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
0/15/3
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
0/15/4
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
0/15/5
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
0/15/6
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
0/15/7
No
p2mp
disable 30
enable
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
ISDN BRA users can communicate with each other normally, and ISDN BRA users and POTS
user Phone A can communicate with each other normally.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
9.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When
the EDTB Service Board Is Used)
This topic describes how to configure the ISDN PRA service through the EDTB service board.
After the configuration, ISDN PRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN PRA subscribers
and POTS subscribers can call each other.
Prerequisite
l
The system parameters, the MG interface attributes, and the PSTN subscribers must be
configured successfully. For the operation procedure, see "7 Configuring the VoIP PSTN
Service."
l
The data on the MGC must be configured properly.
l
Several PBX subscribers must be configured.
Context
The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters
configured on the MGC.
Networking
Figure 9-5 shows the example network of the ISDN PRA service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the EDTB service board as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Figure 9-5 Example network of the ISDN PRA service
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Router
10.10.10.1/24
Router
FE/GE
0/13
I I P P
P P V V
M M M M
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
E
D
UA5000
T
B
B B B B
PBX
Phone A
Phone N
Phone N+1
Data Plan
Table 9-5 provides the data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service.
Table 9-5 Data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service
Data Type
Item
Data
MG interface data
mgid
0
code
text
protocol
H.248
port
MG: 2945
MGC: 2944
IP addresses
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
domainname
UA5000.com
terminalid
0, 1
MG interface 0 on the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Data Type
IUA link parameters
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Item
Data
Default gateway of the MG
interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
The IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/2
IUA link set number
2
IUA link number
1
Local port number
1402
Peer port number
1404
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 9-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN PRA service.
Figure 9-6 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN PRA service
Start
Add an EDTB
board
Set the working mode
of the EDTB board
Add a link set and a
link
(Optional) Configure
SCTP parameters
Configure the
SIGTRAN protocol
Add an ISDN PRA
subscriber and
configure the data
Save the configuration
data
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EDTB board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/13 h601edtb
0 frame 13 slot board add successfully
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13
0 frame 13 slot board confirms successfully
huawei(config)#display board 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
H602PWX0
Normal
1
H602PWX0
Normal
2
3
4
H601PVMB
Active_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB
5
H601PVMB
Standby_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB
......
13
H601EDTB
Normal
......
35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 2 Set the working mode of the EDTB board.
huawei(config)#interface edt 0/13
huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#runmode indep
huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#quit
Step 3 Add a link set and a link.
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 2
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 2 1402 10.10.10.2 1404 10.10.20.1
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute
-----------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo
: 1
LinksetNo
: 2
Local port
: 1402
Local IP address
: 10.10.10.2
Remote port
: 1404
Remote IP address 1
: 10.10.20.1
Remote IP address 2
: InStreamNum
: 33
OutStreamNum
: 33
-----------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state
----------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState
LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId
----------------------------------------------------------------1
active
unlock
uncongest
3
9
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Add an ISDN PRA subscriber and configure the data.
huawei(config-sigtran)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgprauser add 0/13/0 0 2 10 terminalid 0
huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/13/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState
ServiceType
SvcState
-------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 13 / 0
E1
Failed
VOIP_PRA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgprauser 0/13
---------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
F/S/P
0/13/0
TerminalID
A0
LinkSetNo
2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
InterfaceID
10
Uni-report
1(0-enable 1-disable)
Auto-return-to-service-limit 20
Active-mask
255:255:255:255
User Priority is
cat3
---------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 1 port(s) are configured MG PRA user data
Step 5 Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
ISDN PRA subscribers should be able to call subscribers who do not belong to the same PBX,
and subscribers who belong to one PBX should be able to call each other.
9.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol Stack
The signaling transport (SIGTRAN) protocol supports the transmission of traditional switched
circuit network (SCN) signaling over the IP network through protocol adaptation and
transmission.
l
The SIGTRAN protocol, which is applied to the ISDN services of the UA5000, contains
the MAC, IP, SCTP and IUA protocols.
l
Generally, you need not configure the SCTP protocol parameters.
l
Parameters localipaddr, remoteipaddr, localport, and remoteport are used to set up an
IUA link between the UA5000 and the MGC. localport on the UA5000 must be the same
as remoteport on the MGC. remoteport on the UA5000 must be the same as localport
on the MGC.
l
In the case of any special requirements, namely, the default parameters of the system cannot
meet the requirements, run the sctp protocol(H.248 protocol) or sctp protocol(SIP
protocol) command to change the SCTP parameter.
NOTE
After the SCTP parameter is changed, run the iua-link reset command to reset the IUA link to make
the configuration take effect.
l
If the SIGTRAN protocol is used, parameters localipaddr, remoteipaddr, localport, and
remoteport are used to identify an SCTP association uniquely.
l
The UA5000 supports a maximum of eight links and eight link sets.
Related Concept
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
SIGTRAN protocol stack: The SIGTRAN protocol stack includes two layers of protocols:
transmission and adaptation. The transmission protocol is SCTP/IP and the adaptation
protocol can be M2UA (for MTP2 subscribers) or IUA (for Q. 921 subscribers). Figure
9-7 shows the model of the SIGTRAN protocol.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Figure 9-7 Model of the SIGTRAN protocol
M3UA
M2UA
IUA
M2PA
V5UA
SUA
adaptation adaptation adaptation adaptation adaptation adaptation
layer
layer
layer
layer
layer
......
layer
SCTP
IP
MAC
M3UA: MTP3 User Adaptation Layer
IP: Internet Protocol
M2PA: MTP2 Peer Adaptation Layer
IUA: ISDN Q. 921 User Adaptation Layer
SCTP: Stream Control Transmission Protocol SUA: SCCP User Adaptation Layer
M2UA: MTP2 User Adaptation Layer
MAC: Media Access Control
V5UA: V5 User Adaptation Layer
l
SCTP: The SCTP protocol is a connection-oriented protocol. The basic function of SCTP
is to provide reliable transmission for the messages between the UA5000 and the MGC.
SCTP functions based on the association between the two terminals of SCTP. SCTP can
be regarded as a transmission layer whose upper layer is the SCTP subscriber and the lower
layer is the IP network.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 9-8 shows the flowchart for configuring the SIGTRAN protocol stack.
Figure 9-8 Flowchart for configuring the SIGTRAN protocol stack
Start
Configure an IUA link set
Configure an IUA link
(Optional) Configure SCTP
parameters
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the sigtran command to enter the sigtran mode.
Step 2 Run the iua-linkset add command to add an IUA link set.
Step 3 Run the display iua-linkset state command to query the state of the IUA link set. Run the
display iua-linkset attribute command to query the attributes of the IUA link set.
Step 4 Run the iua-link add command to add an IUA link to the IUA link set.
Step 5 Run the display iua-link state command to query the state of the IUA link. Run the display
iua-link attribute command to query the attributes of the IUA link.
Step 6 (Optional) In the H248 mode, Run the sctp protocol command to configure the parameters of
the SCTP protocol.
Step 7 (Optional) In the H248 mode, Run the display sctp protocol command to query the parameters
of the SCTP protocol.
Step 8 (Optional) In the SIP mode, Run the sctp protocol command to configure the parameters of the
SCTP protocol.
Step 9 (Optional) In the SIP mode, Run the display sctp protocol command to query the parameters
of the SCTP protocol.
----End
Example
To configure the SIGTRAN protocol stack, do as follows:
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 8 mgid 0
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-linkset state
----------------------------------------LinksetNo
LinkNum
LinksetState
----------------------------------------8
0
down
----------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-linkset attribute
---------------------------------------------------------------------------LinksetNo
MgId
Pendingtime TrafficMode
Client/Server
UseTxtIf
---------------------------------------------------------------------------8
0
4
override
server
integer
---------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 8 1401 10.10.1.1 1400 10.10.2.1
NOTE
l In the SIGTRAN protocol, localipaddr, localport, remoteipaddr, and remoteport can uniquely identify
an SCTP association.
l A UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight links and eight link sets.
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state
-------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId
-------------------------------------------------------1
active
unlock
uncongest
4
6
-------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo
: 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the H.248
Protocol
LinksetNo
: 8
Local port
: 1401
Local IP address
: 10.10.1.1
Remote port
: 1400
Remote IP address 1
: 10.10.2.1
Remote IP address 2
: InStreamNum
: 33
OutStreamNum
: 33
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based
on the SIP Protocol
About This Chapter
This topic describes the procedure for configuring the voice over IP (VoIP) ISDN service (based
on SIP) on the UA5000.
10.1 (Only in Integrated Upstream Mode) Configuring the VLAN Upstream Interface of the
IPM
If the network is integrated upstream mode, you must configure the VLAN upstream interface
of the IPM first to make sure that the VoIP service can be transferred to the IP network through
the IPM control board.
10.2 Configuring the Working mode of the PVM Control Board
When configuring the VoIP service, you need configure the working mode of the PVM control
board according to the actual networking mode.
10.3 Configuring a SIP Interface
The UA5000 communicates with the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) by using a Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface to exchange data between the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) network and the IP network and provide the voice over IP (VoIP) service based
on the IMS.
10.4 Configuring a SIP ISDN User
After a media gateway (MG) interface is configured, an integrated services digital network
(ISDN) user can be added to this interface for SIP ISDN services.
10.5 Configuration Example of an ISDN BRA Service Based on the SIP Protocol
In this example, point-to-point integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access
(BRA) services are provided using a digital subscriber line (DSL) service board. An ISDN BRA
user can communicate with other ISDN BRA users and plain old telephone service (POTS)
users.
10.6 Configuration Example of an ISDN PRA Service Based on the SIP Protocol
In this example, integrated services digital network (ISDN) users are connected to the
UA5000 by using an ISDN primary rate interface (PRI).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
10.1 (Only in Integrated Upstream Mode) Configuring the
VLAN Upstream Interface of the IPM
If the network is integrated upstream mode, you must configure the VLAN upstream interface
of the IPM first to make sure that the VoIP service can be transferred to the IP network through
the IPM control board.
Context
l
The PVM control board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0 and Inner_FE1 to communicate with
FE ports on the IPMB control board. In this case, the PVM control board uses the IPM
control board for upstream.
l
For the H601IPMD board, the inner FE port 2 and port 3 are taken for communication with
the PVM board.
l
For the IPMB board and H612 IPMD board, the inner FE port 6 and port 7 are taken for
communication with the PVM board.
l
IPMB board and PVMB board are taken as examples in this task. The GE interface 0 is
used as the upstream port.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the vlan command to add the upstream VLAN.
Step 2 Run the port vlan command to add the FE ports 6 and 7 and IP uplink port 0 into this upstream
VLAN.
Step 3 Run the interface vlanif command to enter the vlanif mode of the upstream VLAN.
Step 4 Run the ip address command to specify the IP address for the upstream VLAN interface.
Step 5 Run the vlan command to add the upstream vlan for the NMS packets.
Step 6 Run the port vlan command to add the FE ports 6 and 7 and IP uplink port 0 into this upstream
vlan for the NMS packets.
Step 7 Run the interface vlanif command to enter the vlanif mode of the upstream vlan for the NMS
packets.
Step 8 Run the ip address command to specify the IP address for the upstream VLAN interface for the
NMS packets.
----End
Example
To configure the VLAN upstream interface of the IPM.
l
Assume that the IP of the upstream interface is 10.10.10.2, VLAN of the upstream interface
is 1001. the IP of upstream interface for the NMS packets is 10.10.20.1, VLAN of upstream
interface for the NMS packets is 1002.
huawei(config)#vlan 1001 standard
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 0
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 7
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1001
huawei(config-if-vlanif1001)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0
huawei(config)#vlan 1002 standard
huawei(config)#port vlan 1002 0/2 0
huawei(config)#port vlan 1002 0/2 6
huawei(config)#port vlan 1002 0/2 7
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1002
huawei(config-if-vlanif1002)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0
10.2 Configuring the Working mode of the PVM Control
Board
When configuring the VoIP service, you need configure the working mode of the PVM control
board according to the actual networking mode.
Context
l
In the integrated networking mode, the services on the PVM are transmitted upstream to
the IP network through the IPM control board.
l
In the independent networking mode, the PVM control board provides services
independently, and the voice service is transmitted upstream through the ETH1 port on the
PVM board.
l
If in the integrated networking mode, run the working mode integrated command to
configure the working mode of the PVM board to integrated.
l
If in the independent networking mode, run the working mode alone command to
configure the working mode of the PVM board to alone.
Procedure
----End
Example
To configure the working mode of the PVM control board to integrated.
huawei(config)#working mode integrated
If switch working mode from alone to integrated,ETH0 will be service port and
ETH1 will be outband port,Are you sure?(y/n)[n]:y
10.3 Configuring a SIP Interface
The UA5000 communicates with the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) by using a Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface to exchange data between the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) network and the IP network and provide the voice over IP (VoIP) service based
on the IMS.
For details, see 6 Configuring the SIP Interface.
10.4 Configuring a SIP ISDN User
After a media gateway (MG) interface is configured, an integrated services digital network
(ISDN) user can be added to this interface for SIP ISDN services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
10.4.1 Configuring SIP ISDN BRA User Data
After the data of an integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access (BRA) user
under a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface is configured, the ISDN BRA user can access
the network to use ISDN BRA services.
Prerequisite
The service board has been installed in a specified slot and is functioning properly.
NOTE
Users can run the display board command to query the board status.
l If the status is Normal, the board is functioning properly.
l If the status is Auto_find, run the board confirm command to confirm this board.
l If the status is Failed, resolve this issue according to Service Board Is in the Failed State described in
the Maintenance Guide.
The working mode of the ISDN BRA port has been configured based on the site requirements.
If the working mode has not been configured, configure it by referring to 10.4.5 (Optional)
Configuring the Attributes of an ISDN BRA Port.
Default Configuration
Table 10-1 lists the default settings for the attributes of a SIP ISDN BRA user. The settings can
be changed based on the site requirements.
Table 10-1 Default settings for the attributes of a SIP ISDN BRA user
Item
Default Setting
User priority
cat3 (common user)
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the esl user command to enter extend signaling link (ESL) user mode.
Step 2 Run the sipbrauser add or sipbrauser batadd command to add a SIP ISDN BRA user or
multiple SIP ISDN BRA users in batches. A SIP user group can be also specified for a SIP ISDN
BRA user when this user is added.
Step 3 Run the display sipbrauser command to query the settings of the SIP ISDN BRA user(s).
----End
Example
Assume that the user priority is cat3, and phone number is 83110001. To add an ISDN BRA
user (with such configurations) under port 0/8/0 connected to media gateway (MG) interface 0,
do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#sipbrauser add 0/8/0 0 priority cat3 telno 83110001
Command processing is completed. User data has been added successfully
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
huawei(config-esl-user)#display sipbrauser 0/8/0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P
MGID
TelNo
Priority UserGroupID
----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/8/0
0
83110001
cat3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.4.2 Configuring SIP ISDN PRA User Data
After the data of an integrated services digital network (ISDN) primary rate access (PRA) user
under a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) interface is configured, the ISDN PRA user can access
the network to use ISDN PRA services.
Prerequisite
The service board has been configured in a specified slot and is functioning properly.
NOTE
Users can run the display board command to query the board status.
l If the status is Normal, the board is functioning properly.
l If the status is Auto_find, run the board confirm command to confirm the board.
l If the status is Failed, resolve this issue according to Service Board Is in the Failed State described in
the Maintenance Guide.
Default Configuration
Table 10-2 lists the default settings for the attributes of a SIP ISDN PRA user. The settings can
be changed based on the site requirements.
Table 10-2 Default settings for the attributes of a SIP ISDN PRA user
Item
Default Setting
User priority
cat3 (common user)
User network interface (UNI) fault reporting
function for the ISDN PRA user
Disabled
Mask for enabling the sub-channel of the
ISDN PRA user
255.255.255.255
Threshold for the number of auto recoveries
from deterioration faults
20
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the esl user command to enter extend signaling link (ESL) user mode.
Step 2 Run the sipprauser add command to add a SIP ISDN PRA user. A SIP user group can be also
specified for a SIP ISDN PRA user when this user is added.
Step 3 Run the display sipprauser command to query the settings of the SIP ISDN PRA user(s).
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Example
Assume that the user priority is cat3, phone number is 83110001, user group ID is 0, UNI alarm
reporting function is enabled, and threshold for the number of auto recoveries from L1
deterioration faults is 30. To add an ISDN PRA user (with such configurations) under port
0/10/0 connected to media gateway (MG) interface 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#sipprauser add 0/10/0 0 telno 83110001 priority cat3 unireport enable
usergroupid 0 auto-return-to-service-limit 30
Command processing is completed. User data has been added successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display sipprauser 0/10/0
---------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
0/10/0
MG ID
0
TelNo
83110001
Priority
cat3
Active-Mask
255.255.255.255
UNI Report
Enable
Auto return to service limit 30
User group ID
0
----------------------------------------------------------
10.4.3 (Optional) Configuring System Parameters
Global system parameters such as overseas version flag and message waiting indication (MWI)
mode need to be configured to ensure that user terminals respond in compliance with local
standards.
Context
Table 10-3 lists the voice over IP (VoIP)-related system parameters of the UA5000. For details
about all the system parameters and their meanings, see the system parameters command
reference.
Table 10-3 VoIP-related system parameters of the UA5000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
0
Indicates the howler tone
sending flag.
1: Sending the howler tone.
1
Indicates the overseas version
flag.
0: China.
2
Indicates the conformance test
flag.
0: The conformance test is
disabled.
3
Indicates the initial ringing stop
flag.
0: The initial ringing stop signal
is not issued.
4
Indicates the system self-test
flag.
1: Ports are reset selectively.
5
Indicates the call restriction flag
when the CPU is overloaded.
0: Calls are not restricted when
the CPU is overloaded.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Parameter
Description
Default Setting
6
Indicates the call waiting tone
flag.
0: The media resource server
(MRS) of the media gateway
controller (MGC) issues the call
waiting tone.
7
Indicates the MWI mode.
0: The high voltage mode is used.
10
Indicates whether supports the
local receive and send UDP port
ID to be different from the peer
UDP.
0: Not support.
11
Indicates the media stream
forwarding mode within the
same device.
0: Media streams are forwarded
within the device.
12
Indicates the source of the
howler tone.
0: Field programmable gate array
(FPGA). That is, the FPGA plays
the howler tone.
13
TEI check cycle.
5 min.
14
Indicates the plain old
telephone service (POTS) GTC
performance statistics function.
1: The POTS GTC performance
statistics function is enabled.
54
The alarm switch of A/B line
power.
0: No alarm will be generated
when A wire/B wire touches the
220 V power cable.
55
Indicates the length of the port
calls defined minute(V5).
0 min.
60
Indicates the waiting time to
activate the ISDN.
0: Do not enable this function.
78
Whether allow the board
autoload when the version of
board is higher than the version
of system's packet.
0: Not allow.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the system parameters command to configure system parameters.
Step 2 Run the display system parameters command to verify that the configured system parameters
are the same as those defined in the data plan.
----End
Example
To set system parameter 7 (MWI mode) to 1 (FSK with ringing), do as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
huawei(config)#system parameters 7 1
huawei(config)#display system parameters 7
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameter name index: 7
Parameter value: 1
Mean: The mode of voicemail, 0:high voltage, 1:FSK and ring, 2:FSK no ring
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.4.4 (Optional) Configuring the Overseas Parameters
By default, the overseas parameters are configured according to the Chinese standards. In the
actual service configuration, the attributes such as the upper and lower thresholds of the flashhooking duration can be configured according to the local standards to ensure that the response
of the user terminal complies with the local standards.
Context
See oversea parameters for the detailed information of the overseas parameters supported by
the UA5000.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the oversea parameters command to configure the overseas parameters.
Step 2 Run the display oversea parameters command to check whether the overseas parameters are
the same as those in the data plan.
----End
Example
To set the upper flash-hooking threshold (overseas feature parameter 3) to 800 ms (in compliance
with the Hong Kong standard) and the lower flash-hooking threshold (overseas feature parameter
4) to 100 ms (in compliance with the Hong Kong standard), do as follows:
huawei(config)#oversea parameters 3 800
huawei(config)#oversea parameters 4 100
10.4.5 (Optional) Configuring the Attributes of an ISDN BRA Port
The attributes (such as the remote power supply mode and working mode) of an integrated
services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access (BRA) port can be configured to meet site
requirements.
Default Configuration
Table 10-4 lists the default settings for the attributes of an ISDN BRA port. The settings can be
changed based on the site requirements.
Table 10-4 Default settings for the attributes of an ISDN BRA port
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Default Setting
Remote power supply mode
Disabled
Port working mode
p2mp
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Item
Default Setting
Automatic deactivation mode
Disabled
Automatic deactivation delay
30s
L1 always activated mode
Enabled
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the esl user command to enter extend signaling link (ESL) user mode.
Step 2 Run the braport attribute set command to configure the parameters of an ISDN BRA port.
For details about the braport attribute set command, see its parameter description.
Step 3 Run the display braport attribute command to query the settings of the ISDN BRA port.
----End
Example
To set the working mode of ISDN BRA port 0/8/0 to p2mp and enable the remote power supply,
do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/8/0 work-mode p2mp rpower yes
huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/8/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P
Remote-power Work-mode
BAD
BADDelay(s) Keep-L1-active
-------------------------------------------------------------------------0/8/00
Yes
p2mp
disable 30
enable
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.4.6 (Optional) Configuring the Attributes of an E1 Port
The attributes of an E1 port can be configured to meet the requirements of an ISDN PRA service.
Context
The attributes that can be configured for an E1 port include the signaling mode and cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) function of the E1 port.
Default Configuration
Table 10-5 lists the default settings for the attributes of an E1 port. The settings can be changed
based on the site requirements.
Table 10-5 Default settings for the attributes of an E1 port
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Default Setting
Signaling mode
Common channel signaling (CCS)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Item
Default Setting
CRC function
Disabled
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface edt command to enter EDT interface mode.
Step 2 (Optional) Run the e1port signal command to set the signaling mode of an E1 port.
Step 3 (Optional) Run the crc4 command to configure the CRC function on the port.
Step 4 Run the display port mode command to query the settings of the port.
----End
Example
To enable the CRC function and allow the CCS transmission on port 0 on the EDTB board in
E1 mode, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface edt 0/10
huawei(config-if-edt-0/10)#e1port signal 0 ccs
Set offline signal mode successfully
huawei(config-if-edt-0/10)#crc4 0 on
Configure offline CRC mode successfully
huawei(config-if-edt-0/10)#display port mode
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Signalling CRC4
Impedance Service flag-interval-index
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 CCS
Enable
75
1 CCS
Disable
75
2 CCS
Disable
75
3 CCS
Disable
75
4 CCS
Disable
75
5 CCS
Disable
75
6 CCS
Disable
75
7 CCS
Disable
75
8 CCS
Disable
75
9 CCS
Disable
75
10 CCS
Disable
75
11 CCS
Disable
75
12 CCS
Disable
75
13 CCS
Disable
75
14 CCS
Disable
75
15 CCS
Disable
75
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.5 Configuration Example of an ISDN BRA Service Based
on the SIP Protocol
In this example, point-to-point integrated services digital network (ISDN) basic rate access
(BRA) services are provided using a digital subscriber line (DSL) service board. An ISDN BRA
user can communicate with other ISDN BRA users and plain old telephone service (POTS)
users.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Service Requirements
l
Three POTS phones (phone 1, phone 2, and phone 3) are configured. Phone 1 is connected
to a private branch exchange (PBX) and its number is 83110001. Phone 2 and phone 3 are
connected to NT1 and they share the number of 83110002. They three need to communicate
with each other and also with other voice service users on the public switched telephone
network (PSTN).
l
The PBX is connected to the UA5000 by using an ISDN BRI port.
l
The UA5000 communicates with the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) based on the Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP).
l
The PBX user (phone 1) has been configured.
l
NT1 has been connected properly and is functioning properly.
l
A DSLD board has been installed in a specified slot.
l
A SIP interface has been configured. For details about how to configure a SIP interface,
see Configuring a SIP Interface.
l
The ISDN BRA user data corresponding to the SIP interface has been configured in the
IMS.
Prerequisite
Networking
Figure 10-1 shows an example network for configuring the ISDN BRA service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Figure 10-1 Example network for configuring the ISDN BRA service
IMS
Router
FE/GE
0/8
UA5000
P P
V V
M M
D
S
L
D D
D
PBX
NT1
Phone 1
Phone 2
Phone 3
Data Plan
Table 10-6 provides the data plan for configuring the ISDN BRA service based on the SIP
protocol.
Table 10-6 Data plan for configuring the ISDN BRA service based on the SIP protocol
Item
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Data
SIP interface
Interface ID
0
DSLD board
Slot that houses the
board
0/8
ISDN BRA user
(phone 1) data
User port ID
0/8/0
User phone
number
83110001
User priority
Cat2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
ISDN BRA user
(phone 2 and phone 3)
data
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
User port ID
0/8/1
User phone
number
83110002
User priority
Cat2
Procedure
Step 1 Add a DSLD board.
Add the DSLD board in slot 0/8 according to the data plan.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 h601dsld
Frame 0 slot 8 board added successfully
Step 2 Confirm the DSLD board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
0 frame 8 slot board has been confirmed
Step 3 Set the working modes of ISDN BRA ports.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/8/0 work-mode p2p
huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/8/1 work-mode p2mp
Step 4 Configure the ISDN BRA user data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#sipbrauser
Command processing is completed.
huawei(config-esl-user)#sipbrauser
Command processing is completed.
add 0/8/0
User data
add 0/8/1
User data
0 priority cat2 telno 83110001
has been added successfully
0 priority cat2 telno 83110002
has been added successfully
Step 5 Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the interface data and ISDN BRA user data corresponding to the SIP interface are
configured in the IMS, and all the voice service users are configured on the PBX, verify that the
ISDN BRA service is provided normally. In normal cases, phone 1 can communicate with phone
2 or 3.
10.6 Configuration Example of an ISDN PRA Service Based
on the SIP Protocol
In this example, integrated services digital network (ISDN) users are connected to the
UA5000 by using an ISDN primary rate interface (PRI).
Service Requirements
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Thirty plain old telephone service (POTS) phones (phone 1 through phone 30) are
configured for enterprise user huawei. The 30 POTS phones are connected to the same
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
private branch exchange (PBX). Phone 1 through phone 30 need to communicate with each
other.
l
The PBX is connected to the UA5000 by using an ISDN PRI interface. The PRI interface
provides a data rate of 2.048 Mbit/s and 30 B channels and 1 D channel. The rates of the
B channel and D channel are both 64 kbit/s.
l
The UA5000 communicates with the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) based on the Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP).
l
PBX users (phone 1 through phone 30) have been configured and they can communicate
with each other normally.
l
E1 board EDTB has been installed in a specified slot.
l
A SIP interface has been configured. For details about how to configure a SIP interface,
see Configuring a SIP Interface.
l
The ISDN PRA user data corresponding to the SIP interface has been configured in the
IMS.
Prerequisite
Networking
Figure 10-2 shows an example network for configuring the ISDN PRA service.
Figure 10-2 Example network for configuring the ISDN PRA service
IMS
Router
FE/GE
UA5000
0/10
P P
V V
M M
E
D
T
B
D D
PBX
Phone 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Phone 30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
10 Configuring a VoIP ISDN Service Based on the SIP
Protocol
Data Plan
Table 10-7 provides the data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service based on the SIP
protocol.
Table 10-7 Data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service based on the SIP protocol
Item
Data
SIP interface
Interface ID
0
E1 board EDTB
Slot that houses the
board
0/10
Data of the ISDN PRA
user
User port ID
0/10/0
User phone
number
28780000
User priority
Cat2
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EDTB board.
Add the EDTB board in slot 0/10 according to the data plan.
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 H601EDTB
Step 2 Confirm the EDTB board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10
Step 3 Configure the ISDN PRA user data.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#sipprauser add 0/10/0 0 priority cat2 telno 28780000
Step 4 Save the data.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the interface data and ISDN PRA user data corresponding to the SIP interface are
configured in the IMS, and all the voice service users are configured on the PBX, verify that the
ISDN PRA service is provided normally. In normal cases, phone 1 through phone 30 can
communicate with each other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
Configuring the FoIP Service
About This Chapter
This topic describes how to configure the Fax over Internet Protocol (FoIP) service based on the
H.248/MGCP/SIP protocol to transmit the traditional fax service over the IP network.
Application Context
FoIP is a widely used fax service mode on the IP network or between the IP network and the
traditional PSTN network.
The FoIP service is provided through the voice service board, such as the A32, ASL, or CSRB
board.
11.1 Configuring the FoIP Service (Based on the H.248 or MGCP Protocol)
This topic describes how to configure the FoIP service based on the H.248 or MGCP protocol.
11.2 Configuring an FoIP Service Based on the SIP Protocol
A fax over IP (FoIP) service based on the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) can be configured.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
11.1 Configuring the FoIP Service (Based on the H.248 or
MGCP Protocol)
This topic describes how to configure the FoIP service based on the H.248 or MGCP protocol.
Prerequisite
l
The VoIP service must be configured.
l
The voice service port used by the FoIP service and the voice service on the port must be
in the normal state.
Context
The FoIP service can be classified according to the following two methods:
l
When the FoIP service is classified by coding/decoding mode, it can be transparent
transmission fax (using the G.711 coding) or T.38 fax (using the T.38 coding).
l
When the FoIP service is classified by whether the MGC participates in determining the
coding/decoding mode, it can be softswitch-controlled fax or softswitch fax (the MG
determines which coding/decoding mode to use).
Data Plan
It is recommended that you plan the working mode of the fax on the entire next generation
network (NGN) before configuring the data so that the working mode on the entire network is
consistent.
The items involved in the FoIP service are as follows.
Table 11-1 Items involved in the FoIP service
Item
Option
Remarks
Role of the MGC
Controlled by the
softswitch
The MG negotiates a coding/decoding mode
with the MGC through signaling.
Selfswitch
The MG itself determines the coding/decoding
mode.
Transparent
transmission
The G.711 coding is used.
T.38
The T.38 coding is used.
V2
The fax/modem uses the V2 flow.
V3
The fax/modem uses the V3 flow.
V5
The fax/modem uses the V5 flow.
Coding/Decoding
mode
Negotiation flow
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
The UA5000 provides the tranmode parameter, which supports the following values (each of
the values represents a fax mode that is a combination of certain choices listed in the preceding
table):
l
0: Refers to the V2 transparent transmission mode. If the softswitch supports only the V2
flow and the G.711 coding is used, the fax mode is configured to V2 transparent
transmission when the UA5000 is interconnected with the softswitch.
l
1: Refers to the V2 T.38 mode. If the softswitch supports only the V2 flow and the T.38
coding is used, the fax mode is configured to V2 T.38 when the UA5000 is interconnected
with the softswitch.
l
2: Refers to the V3 flow (classified into transparent transmission mode and T.38 mode).
The softswitch determines whether the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode is
used. If the softswitch and the peer MG support the V3 flow, the V3 flow can be used to
improve the fax intelligence.
l
3: Refers to the selfswitch transparent transmission mode. If the softswitch does not support
the fax, the UA5000 receives and transmits the fax, and the fax coding mode is G.711, the
selfswitch transparent transmission mode is used.
l
4: Refers to the V5 flow (classified into transparent transmission mode and T.38 mode).
The softswitch determines whether the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode is
used. If the softswitch supports the V5 flow and the peer MG supports only V2, V3, or V5
flow, the V5 flow can be used.
l
5: Refers to the selfswitch T.38 mode. If the softswitch does not support the fax, the UA5000
receives and transmits the fax, and the fax coding mode is T.38, the selfswitch T.38 mode
is used.
Default Configuration
By default, the V3 flow is configured for the FoIP service mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure fax parameters.
In global config mode, run the fax parameters command to configure fax parameters.
l tranmode: Configure the transmission mode according to the preceding data preparation.
l is-port+2: When the fax transmission mode is configured to V2 T.38, this parameter is
mandatory and it must be the same as the parameter of the T.38 fax port configured on the
peer MG. If the faxes are in the same VAG, the configuration of the T.38 fax ports can be
different. If the faxes are in different VAGs, the operations of port ID plus 2 should be the
same. That is, both port IDs are plus 2 or neither of the port IDs is plus 2.
l packet-interval-10ms: Refers to whether the 10-ms packetization function is enabled. By
default, the 10-ms packetization function is disabled. In addition to the 20-ms G.711
transparent transmission, the fax transparent transmission function is added with the 10-ms
G.711 transparent transmission. This reduces delay, improves the performance of transparent
transmission, and reduces the impact of packet loss on the transmission of the modem service
data.
l rfc2198-start-mode: Refers to whether the RFC2198 redundancy function is enabled. By
default, the RFC2198 redundancy function is disabled. If this function is enabled, when the
network quality is poor, the signals are sent in the redundancy mode. This can ensure the
quality of service (QoS).
l transevent: Refers to the transmission mode of the fax and modem events.
ControlledByMGC indicates that the fax and modem events are transmitted upstream to the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
softswitch through the singaling stream, and then the softswitch transmits the events.
RFC2833 indicates that the fax and modem events are transmitted through the media stream
in the RFC2833 coding mode.
l vbd-codec: Refers to the codec mode of the voice-band data (VBD). This parameter is valid
when the transmission mode of the fax service is configured to the auto-switch transparent
transmission mode. The codec mode of the VBD can be G.711A or G.711U.
l vbd-payload-type: Refers to the payload type of the VBD. This parameter is valid when the
transmission mode of the fax service is configured to the auto-switch transparent transmission
mode. The payload type can be static or dynamic. The configuration of this parameter must
be the same as the configuration of the parameter of the interconnected upper-layer device.
Step 2 Configure fax training parameters (optional only in the T.38 fax mode).
In global config mode, run the dsp attribute command to configure fax training parameters.
l train-rate: Refers to the maximum fax training rate, which is optional. This parameter is
valid only when the T.38 fax training mode is the local training. When you configure this
parameter, ensure that the value of this parameter is not greater than the maximum fax rate
supported by the DSP. If the fax machine supports rate decrease, when the network quality
is poor, you can reduce the fax training rate.
l train-mode: Refers to the fax training mode, which is optional. The following two
configurations are involved:
– Peer-to-peer training: In this mode, the rate training signals need to the sent to the peer
end.
– Local training: In this mode, the MG terminates and generates training signals.
Step 3 (Optional) Configure modem parameters. When you configure the high-speed or high/low-speed
selfswitch fax, you need to configure modem parameters.
If the network quality is good and both the MGC and fax machine support the high-speed fax,
the data can be transmitted in the high-speed fax mode. The UA5000 supports the high-speed
fax function through the MoIP transparent transmission. If you need to configure the high/lowspeed selfswitch fax, you need to configure the MGC so that the MGC supports the high/lowspeed fax.
NOTE
The fax transmission mode of the UA5000 cannot be configured to the selfswitch transparent transmission
mode or the selfswitch T.38 mode.
Run the modem parameters command to configure modem parameters.
l tranmode: Refers to the transmission mode of the modem. This parameter must be
configured to transparent transmission when you configure the high-speed fax. By default,
it is configured to transparent transmission. Currently, the device does not support the relay
mode.
l eventmode: Refers to the report mode of the modem event. When you configure the high/
low-speed selfswitch fax, you need to configure the report mode of the modem event to direct.
l For the configuration of other parameters, see "Configure fax parameters."
----End
Example
To configure the V2 transparent transmission flow for the FoIP, do as follows:
huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 3
huawei(config)#display fax parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Transfers Mode
:Self Switch Thoroughly
T38 Fax Port
:RTP Port
Packet-interval-10ms
:Disable
RFC2198 Startup Mode
:Disable RFC2198
TransEvent
:Controlled-by-MGC
Vbd-codec
:G.711A
Vbd-payload-type
:Static
----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display dsp attribute
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate
:V17
Fax Train Mode
:Remote Train
DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:135
DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:2
DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:2
DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:135
DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:2
DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:60
DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db)
:0
DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db)
:0
DSP code type
:G.711A
RTCP package send interval time(ms)
:5000
Severe Degrade Threshold(periods)
:400
Support VQM
:Disable
DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms)
:20
DSP echo check
:Open
DSP silence reduce
:Close
DSP need statistics or not
:No
DSP Packet Lose Compensate
:Close
DSP clearmode payload value
:99
Support RTCP XR
:Disable
T30 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax
:3
T4 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax
:3
Fax V8 Negotiate
:Enable
DSP VBD payload value
:102
DSP G.726-16k payload value
:103
DSP G.726-24k payload value
:104
DSP G.726-32k payload value
:101
DSP G.726-40k payload value
:105
DSP 2198 payload value
:96
DSP 2833 payload value
:97
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.2 Configuring an FoIP Service Based on the SIP Protocol
A fax over IP (FoIP) service based on the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) can be configured.
Prerequisite
l
A voice over IP (VoIP) service based on the SIP protocol has been configured.
l
The voice service port used by the FoIP service and the voice service on the port are running
properly.
Context
The FoIP service can be classified into the following two modes according to the fax coding:
l
Transparent transmission fax: In this mode, the G.711 coding is used.
l
T.38 fax: In this mode, the T.38 coding is used.
During the application of the fax service, the FoIP service can be classified into the following
two modes according to the role of the SIP signaling in the transmission control process:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
l
Negotiation mode: In this mode, the SIP signaling is involved in the transmission control
process.
l
Selfswitch mode: In this mode, the SIP signaling is not involved in the transmission control
process.
Data Plan
The working mode of the fax on the entire next generation network (NGN) is recommended to
be planned before the data is configured so that the working mode on the entire network is the
same.
The items involved in the FoIP service are as follows.
Table 11-2 Items involved in the FoIP service
Item
Option
Remarks
Coding/Decoding
negotiation mode
Negotiation
The coding/decoding mode needs to be
negotiated using the SIP signaling.
Selfswitch
The MG determines which coding/
decoding mode is used.
Transparent
transmission
The G.711 coding is used.
T.38
The T.38 coding is used.
Coding/Decoding mode
Default Configuration
Table 11-3 lists the default configuration of the flows of the FoIP service.
Table 11-3 Default configuration of the flows of the FoIP service
Item
Option
Coding/Decoding negotiation mode
Negotiation
Coding/Decoding mode
Transparent transmission
Procedure
Step 1 Configure public fax and modem parameters.
1.
In global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter SIP mode.
2.
In SIP mode, run the fax-modem parameters negomode command to configure the
coding/decoding negotiation mode. Configure other parameters based on site requirements.
l negomode: Involves the selfswitch mode and negotiation mode. The default mode is
the negotiation mode.
l rtp-interval: Indicates the packetization duration in fax/modem transparent
transmission mode. When users need to specify the packetization duration in fax/modem
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
transparent transmission mode, use this parameter. The default value is 1, namely, 10
ms.
– 0: The corresponding time is 5 ms
– 1: The corresponding time is 10 ms
– 2: The corresponding time is 20 ms
– 3: The corresponding time is 30 ms
l vbd-codec: Refers to the codec mode of the voice-band data (VBD). This parameter is
valid when the transmission mode of the fax service is configured to the auto-switch
transparent transmission mode. The codec mode of the VBD can be G.711A or G.711U.
l vbd-pt-type: Indicates the payload type of voice band data (VBD). This parameter is
valid when the transmission mode of the fax service is set to the selfswitch transparent
transmission mode. The payload type can be static or dynamic. Ensure the configuration
of this parameter is the same as that on the interconnected upper-layer device.
l vbd-attribute-type: Indicates the type of attribute a when the negotiation is enabled
for the VBD. This parameter is valid when the transmission mode of the fax service is
set to the selfswitch transparent transmission mode. When users need to set the type of
attribute a for the VBD, use this parameter. The default value is v.152.
– v.152: v.152 mode
– chinatelecom: China Telecom mode
– extchinatelecom: extended China Telecom mode
– ietf: IETF mode
3.
(Optional) In SIP mode, run the rfc2198 set command to configure the parameters of the
RFC2198 redundancy transmission on the SIP interface.
l rfc2198-negomode: Indicates the negotiation startup mode of the RFC2198 redundancy
transmission. The default value is no-initiative-start.
– negostart: active negotiation startup
– fixedstart: fixed negotiation startup
– no-initiative-start: non-active negotiation startup
l rfc2198-startmode: Indicates the startup mode of RFC2198. The default value is
ordinary2198.
– smart2198: smart RFC2198 (The automatic RFC2198 redundancy transmission is
enabled when packet loss occurs on the network.)
– ordinary2198: common RFC2198
l rfc2198-2833: Indicates the RFC2833 function of the RFC2198 redundancy
transmission. The options are enable and disable. The default value is disable.
l rfc2198-vbd: Indicates the VBD function of the RFC2198 redundancy transmission.
The options are enable and disable. The default value is enable.
l rfc2198-voice: Indicates the voice service function of the RFC2198 redundancy
transmission. The options are enable and disable. The default value is disable.
4.
(Optional) In SIP mode, run the rfc2833 set command to configure the parameters of the
RFC2833 redundancy transmission on the SIP interface.
l rfc2833-negomode: Indicates the negotiation startup mode of the RFC2833 redundancy
transmission. The default value is no-initiative-start.
– negostart: active negotiation startup
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
– fixedstart: fixed negotiation startup
– no-initiative-start: non-active negotiation startup
l rfc2833-fax-modem: Indicates the fax/modem event function of the RFC2833
redundancy transmission. The options are enable and disable. The default value is
enable.
l rfc2833-flashhook: Indicates the hook flash event function of the RFC2833 redundancy
transmission. The options are enable and disable. The default value is disable.
l rfc2833-dtmf: Indicates the dual tone multiple frequency (DTMF) function of the
RFC2833 redundancy transmission. The options are enable and disable. The default
value is enable.
Step 2 Configure the fax coding/decoding mode.
In SIP mode, run the fax parameters command to configure the fax transmission mode.
transmode: Indicates the transmission mode. If this parameter is set to 0, it is the transparent
transmission mode and the coding mode is G.711. If this parameter is set to 1, it is the T.38
mode, dedicated coding mode for the fax service. The default value is 0.
----End
Example
To configure SIP VAG 0 to implement the FoIP service in the selfswitch transparent
transmission, do as follow:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#fax-modem parameters negomode self-switch
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#fax parameters transmode 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display fax-modem parameters
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
:0
Nego-mode
:self-switch
Rtp-interval
:10ms
Vbd-codec
:G.711A
Vbd-pt-type
:static
Vbd-attribute-type
:v.152
------------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display fax parameters
--------------------------------------MGID
Transmode
--------------------------------------0
Thoroughly
--------------------------------------huawei(config-if-sip-0)#quit
huawei(config)#display dsp attribute
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate
:V17
Fax Train Mode
:Remote Train
DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:135
DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:2
DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms)
:2
DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:135
DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:2
DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms)
:60
DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db)
:0
DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db)
:0
DSP code type
:G.711A
RTCP package send interval time(ms)
:5000
Severe Degrade Threshold(periods)
:400
Support VQM
:Disable
DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms)
:20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
11 Configuring the FoIP Service
DSP echo check
:Open
DSP silence reduce
:Close
DSP need statistics or not
:No
DSP Packet Lose Compensate
:Close
DSP clearmode payload value
:100
Support RTCP XR
:Disable
T30 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax
:3
T4 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax
:3
Fax V8 Negotiate
:Enable
DSP VBD payload value
:102
DSP G.726-16k payload value
:103
DSP G.726-24k payload value
:104
DSP G.726-32k payload value
:101
DSP G.726-40k payload value
:105
DSP 2198 payload value
:96
DSP 2833 payload value
:97
DSP AutoVBD
:Host Control
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
12
12 Configuring the MoIP Service
Configuring the MoIP Service
About This Chapter
This topic describes how to configure the Modem over Internet Protocol (MoIP) service based
on the H.248/MGCP/SIP protocol to transmit the traditional narrowband modem service over
the IP network.
Application Context
MoIP is a widely used modem service mode on the IP network or between the IP network and
the traditional PSTN network.
The MoIP service is provided through the voice service board, such as the A32, ASL, or CSRB
board.
12.1 Configuring the MoIP Service (Based on the H.248 or MGCP Protocol)
This topic describes how to configure the MoIP service based on the H.248/MGCP protocol to
transmit the traditional narrowband modem service over the IP network.
12.2 Configuring an MoIP Service Based on the SIP Protocol
A modem over IP (MoIP) service based on the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) can be
configured. After the configuration, the traditional narrowband modem services can be
transmitted over an IP network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
12 Configuring the MoIP Service
12.1 Configuring the MoIP Service (Based on the H.248 or
MGCP Protocol)
This topic describes how to configure the MoIP service based on the H.248/MGCP protocol to
transmit the traditional narrowband modem service over the IP network.
Prerequisite
l
The data on the MGC side must be configured correctly.
l
The voice service must be configured before the MoIP service is configured and the
subscribers must communicate with each other normally because the MoIP service is based
on the voice service.
Context
There are two transmission modes.
l
One is transparent transmission mode. In the transparent transmission mode, the signals
from the modem are processed as common RTP data through the G.711 coding/decoding.
That is, the media gateway does not process the signals and the signals modulated by the
modem are transparently transmitted on the IP network through the VoIP channel.
l
The other is relay mode.
The report mode of the modem event includes the delay mode and the direct mode.
l
Direct mode: The UA5000 reports the modem event to the MGC immediately after
receiving the event related to the modem.
l
Delay mode: The UA5000 does not report the modem event immediately after receiving
the event related to the modem. Instead, the UA5000 waits for a period until the timer
expires and no fax event V21flag is reported. Then, the UA5000 reports the modem event
to the MGC. In this manner, the low-speed transmission (that is displayed as fax mode on
the host) can be used when the negotiation of the high-speed transmission (that is displayed
as modem mode on the host) of the high-speed fax fails.
Configuring the MoIP service involves configuring the report mode of the modem event and the
transmission mode of the modem. By default, the transmission mode of the modem is negotiation
transparent transmission. When you configure the MoIP service, you only need to adjust the
transmission mode because the UA5000 supports only the modem service in the transparent
transmission mode currently. Therefore, you need not configure the transmission mode of the
modem generally.
Data Plan
It is recommended that you plan the working mode of the fax on the entire next generation
network (NGN) before configuring the data so that the working mode on the entire network is
consistent.
The Primary item involved in the MoIP service is as shown in Table 12-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
12 Configuring the MoIP Service
Table 12-1 Primary item involved in the MoIP service
Item
Option
Report mode of the modem event
Direct mode
Delay mode
Procedure
Step 1 Run the modem parameters command to configure the report mode of the modem event. By
default, the value is Direct. Configure other parameters according to the requirement.
For the detailed parameter description, see "Configuring the Modem Parameter."
----End
Example
The UA5000 communicates with MGC through the H.248 protocol. To configure the
transmission mode to transparent transmission and the report mode of the modem to delay, do
as follows:
huawei(config)#modem parameters eventmode Delay
huawei(config)#save
12.2 Configuring an MoIP Service Based on the SIP Protocol
A modem over IP (MoIP) service based on the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) can be
configured. After the configuration, the traditional narrowband modem services can be
transmitted over an IP network.
Prerequisite
l
The communication between the UA5000 and the IMS is in the normal state.
l
The voice service port used by the MoIP service and the voice service on the port are running
properly.
Context
There are two transmission modes. The UA5000 supports only the modem service in the
transparent transmission mode currently.
l
One is transparent transmission mode. In the transparent transmission mode, the signals
from the modem are processed as common RTP data using the G.711 coding/decoding.
That is, the IMS does not process the signals and the signals modulated by the modem are
transparently transmitted on the IMS network through the VoIP channel.
l
The other is redundancy mode, also called relay mode.
The coding/decoding negotiation mode involves the selfswitch mode and the negotiation mode.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
In negotiation mode, the UA5000 needs to negotiate with the IMS server for the coding/
decoding mode using the signaling.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
l
12 Configuring the MoIP Service
In selfswitch mode, the UA5000 determines which coding/decoding mode is used.
Configuring the MoIP service involves configuring the coding/decoding negotiation mode and
the transmission mode of the modem. By default, the transmission mode of the modem is
negotiation transparent transmission. When configuring the MoIP service, users only need to
adjust the transmission mode because the UA5000 supports only the modem service in the
transparent transmission mode currently. Therefore, users do not need to configure the
transmission mode of the modem.
Data Plan
The working mode of the fax on the entire next generation network (NGN) is recommended to
be planned before the data is configured so that the working mode on the entire network is the
same.
Table 12-2 lists the main item involved in the MoIP service.
Table 12-2 Main item involved in the MoIP service
Item
Option
Remarks
Coding/Decoding
negotiation mode
Negotiation
The coding/decoding mode needs to be
negotiated using the SIP signaling.
Selfswitch
The MG determines which coding/
decoding mode is used.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface sip command to enter SIP mode.
Step 2 (Optional) Configure modem parameters.
1.
(Optional) Run the fax-modem parameters negomode command to configure the coding/
decoding negotiation mode. The default mode is the negotiation mode. Configure other
parameters based on site requirements.
2.
(Optional) Run the rfc2198 set command to configure RFC2198 redundancy transmission
parameters of a SIP interface.
3.
(Optional) Run the rfc2833 set command to configure RFC2833 redundancy transmission
parameters of a SIP interface.
For details about parameter description, see Configuring Public Fax and Modem
Parameters.
----End
Example
The UA5000 adopts the SIP protocol to provide the MoIP service. To configure the coding/
decoding negotiation mode to selfswitch, do as follows:
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#fax-modem parameters negomode self-switch
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
Configuring the R2 Access Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the R2 access service includes the application of the R2 technology and the process
for configuring the R2 access service on the UA5000.
13.1 Introduction to the R2 Access Service
A signaling system (SS) is an important part of the communication network. It is a tool for the
nodes in the communication network to exchange information. The inter-office signaling
includes the channel associated signaling (CAS) and common channel signaling (CCS). The R2
signaling is a common CAS.
13.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access Service
This topic describes how to configure the R2 access service on the UA5000-1 through the
signaling mode and the basic parameters of R2 profile of the E1 port on the EDTB board of the
UA5000-1.
13.3 Adding an R2 Profile
You can define an R2 signaling with certain characteristics as an R2 profile. The R2 profile
index can be referenced by the MG R2 subscribers. That is, the R2 profile is valid for the MG
R2 subscribers who reference this profile.
13.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 Profile
Configure the R2 profile data, including the R2 address receiving attributes, R2 address sending
attributes, R2 profile attributes, R2 line signaling attributes, and register signaling attributes.
13.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration File
You can integrate the R2 signaling conversion tables into a script file. Then, configure the R2
signaling conversion table of the UA5000 by loading the script file.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
13.1 Introduction to the R2 Access Service
A signaling system (SS) is an important part of the communication network. It is a tool for the
nodes in the communication network to exchange information. The inter-office signaling
includes the channel associated signaling (CAS) and common channel signaling (CCS). The R2
signaling is a common CAS.
Service Description
To unify the inter-office signaling, the ITU-T makes recommendations for signaling and finally
forms the signaling systems 1 to 7, R1 signaling, and R2 signaling in succession. Among them,
SS1 to SS5, R1, and R2 are CAS. R2 is a common CAS. Generally, different countries define
their own national standard for CAS according to the ITU-T recommendations. For example,
China defines Signaling No. 1, which is different from the standard R2 to a certain extent.
The description of each signaling is as follows:
l
CAS
The signaling information is transmitted within the voice channel. The inter-office
signaling of the CAS signaling consists of line signaling (supervisory signals) and register
signaling (with control function).
l
R2 signaling
It is a type of CAS. The R2 signaling can be used in international and national networks.
Signaling No. 1, used in China, is a subset of the R2 signaling. The R2 signaling consists
of line signaling and register signaling.
l
Line signaling
It controls the transmission path between switches or the transmission path inside a switch.
During a call, the line signaling is used to set up, maintain, release, and monitor the selected
route. The line signaling can be forward or backward and is categorized into analog line
signaling and digital line signaling. Currently, only the digital R2 line signaling is provided
for the switching and wireless overseas products. The digital line signaling is fixedly
transmitted through timeslot 16 of each 30/32-channel pulse code modulation (PCM).
l
Register signaling
It provides the address and other information required for call routing and related call
processing. The register signaling is used to send and request for the caller and called
numbers, as well as sending caller subscriber type, called subscriber state, and call service
type. The register signaling complies with the multiple frequency control (MFC) principle.
It is transmitted in the voice channel and it occupies the voice channel resources. It is
transmitted before the call is set up, but it cannot be transmitted during a call session.
l
Forward signaling and backward signaling
– Forward signaling is sent from the calling office to the called office.
– Backward signaling is sent from the called office to the calling office.
Service Specifications
The UA5000 provides the R2 access service through the EDTB board. Table 13-1 lists the
number of ports provided by the EDTB board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
Table 13-1 Number of ports provided by the EDTB board
Board Type
Number of Ports
Remarks
EDTB
16
16-port E1 service board
13.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access Service
This topic describes how to configure the R2 access service on the UA5000-1 through the
signaling mode and the basic parameters of R2 profile of the E1 port on the EDTB board of the
UA5000-1.
Prerequisite
l
The UA5000-1 must support the R2 CAS and the PBX user must be configured on
UA5000-1.
l
The data of phone D must be configured properly on the UA5000-2.
l
The PBX must support the R2 CAS. The PBX must be configured properly. Phones A, B
and C must communicate with each other properly.
l
The physical connection between the PBX and the UA5000-1 must be correct.
Context
In the R2 CAS configuration, a large amount of data is configured through the script file provided
by Huawei according to the signaling standard of a specific country (such as CAS conversion
table). Therefore, you need not configure this part of the data. This section provides a simplified
configuration example to make you familiar with the flowchart for configuring the R2 access
service.
Networking
Figure 13-1 shows the example network of the R2 access service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
Figure 13-1 Example network of the R2 access service
MGC
H.248
H.248
UA5000-1
R2
UA5000-2
E1
PBX
Phone A
Phone B
Phone C
Phone D
NOTE
The UA5000 converts the R2 CAS into the H.248 messages, and then reports the messages to the MGC.
At the same time, the UA5000 receives the H.248 messages and converts them into the R2 CAS. In this
way, the MGC that uses H.248 and the PBXs or the switches that use the R2 CAS can communicate with
each other.
Data Plan
Table 13-2 provides the data plan for configuring the R2 access service.
Table 13-2 Data plan for configuring the R2 access service
Item
Data
Item
Data
R2 profile index
0
R2 profile name
Argentina
R2 signaling type
Argentina R2
signaling
Shelf ID/slot ID/port
ID of the MG R2
subscribers
0/7/2
mgid
0
start-terminalid
0
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 13-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the R2 access service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
Figure 13-2 Flowchart for configuring the R2 access service
Start
Add an EDTB board
Set the working mode
of the EDTB board
Set the signaling
mode of the E1 port
Add an R2 profile
Configure the
R2 address
receiving
attributes
Configure the
R2 address
sending
attributes
Configure the
R2 profile
attributes
Configure the R2
profile data
Configure the
R2 line
signaling
attributes
Configure the
R2 interregister
signaling
attributes
Add an R2 subscriber
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add and confirm an EDTB board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 h601edtb
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
Step 2 Set the working mode of the EDTB board.
huawei(config)#interface edt 0/7
huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#runmode indep
Step 3 Set the signaling mode of the E1 port.
huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#e1port signal 2 cas
huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#display port mode
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Signalling CRC4
Impedance Service flag-interval-index
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
0 CCS
Disable
75
1 CCS
Disable
75
2 CAS
Disable
75
3 CCS
Disable
75
4 CCS
Disable
75
5 CCS
Disable
75
6 CCS
Disable
75
7 CCS
Disable
75
8 CCS
Disable
75
9 CCS
Disable
75
10 CCS
Disable
75
11 CCS
Disable
75
12 CCS
Disable
75
13 CCS
Disable
75
14 CCS
Disable
75
15 CCS
Disable
75
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Query the version and type of the R2 signaling.
huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#quit
huawei(config)#display r2 signaling-type
--------------------------------------------------------R2 signaling-type
--------------------------------------------------------file version:
100
signaling-type:
0 - Standard_R2
1 - Brazil_R2
2 - Argentina_R2
3-15: Extend_R2
---------------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Add an R2 profile.
huawei(config)#r2 profile 0
Are you sure to add r2 profile?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-r2-0)#
Step 6 Configure the R2 profile.
huawei(config-r2-0)#profile attribute name brazil signaling-type 2
Step 7 Query the details of the R2 profile.
huawei(config-r2-0)#display profile detail
--------------------------------------------------------R2 signaling profile
--------------------------------------------------------index:
0
name:
brazil
signaling-type:
2
--------------------------------------------------------R2 line-signaling attribute
--------------------------------------------------------type(0:L1B,1:L2B,2:L3B,3:PULSE):
1
wait-seize-ack-time(ms):
5000
wait-answer-time(s):
300
wait-clear-forward-time(ms):
200
wait-protect-time(ms):
200
--------------------------------------------------------R2 register-signaling attribute
--------------------------------------------------------type(0:MFC,1:PULSE,2:DTMF,3:MFP,4:DPMFP):0
signal-send-voltage(dBm):
13
back-pulse-time(ms):
150
dtmf-send-time(ms):
68
dtmf-send-interval(ms):
68
no-cid-permit(yes/no):
yes
number-max-interval(s):
50
signal-keep-max-time(s):
15
receive-number-max-interval(s):
50
signal-stop-permit-time(s):
15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
wait-caller-category-time(s):
50
wait-Bsignal-time(s):
50
number-send-mode(0:immediate,1:delay):
1
calling-number-max-length:
12
compelling-sequence-keepalive-time(ms): 40000
send-pulse-signal(yes/no):
no
--------------------------------------------------------R2 address-receive attribute
--------------------------------------------------------DI:
yes
SI:
yes
SC:
yes
ES:
no
CC:
no
DISC:
no
NAC:
no
SP:
no
RCPS:
1
RCCP:
1
--------------------------------------------------------R2 address-send attribute
--------------------------------------------------------DI:
yes
SI:
yes
SC:
yes
ES:
no
CC:
no
DISC:
no
NAC:
no
SP:
no
---------------------------------------------------------
Step 8 Add a media gateway (MG) R2 subscriber.
huawei(config-r2-0)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgr2user add 0/7/2 0 0 start-terminalid 0
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgr2user state 0/7/2
---------------------------------------------F / S/ P/ TS
ServiceState
TerminalID
---------------------------------------------0/ 7/ 2/ 0
Fault
0
0/ 7/ 2/ 1
Fault
1
0/ 7/ 2/ 2
Fault
2
0/ 7/ 2/ 3
Fault
3
0/ 7/ 2/ 4
Fault
4
0/ 7/ 2/ 5
Fault
5
0/ 7/ 2/ 6
Fault
6
0/ 7/ 2/ 7
Fault
7
0/ 7/ 2/ 8
Fault
8
0/ 7/ 2/ 9
Fault
9
0/ 7/ 2/ 10
Fault
10
0/ 7/ 2/ 11
Fault
11
0/ 7/ 2/ 12
Fault
12
0/ 7/ 2/ 13
Fault
13
0/ 7/ 2/ 14
Fault
14
0/ 7/ 2/ 15
Fault
15
0/ 7/ 2/ 16
Fault
16
0/ 7/ 2/ 17
Fault
17
0/ 7/ 2/ 18
Fault
18
0/ 7/ 2/ 19
Fault
19
0/ 7/ 2/ 20
Fault
20
0/ 7/ 2/ 21
Fault
21
0/ 7/ 2/ 22
Fault
22
0/ 7/ 2/ 23
Fault
23
0/ 7/ 2/ 24
Fault
24
0/ 7/ 2/ 25
Fault
25
0/ 7/ 2/ 26
Fault
26
0/ 7/ 2/ 27
Fault
27
0/ 7/ 2/ 28
Fault
28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
0/ 7/ 2/ 29
Fault
29
0/ 7/ 2/ 30
Fault
30
0/ 7/ 2/ 31
Fault
31
---------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/7/2
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState
ServiceType
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 2
E1
Normal
MGR2
---------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
Any one phone among phones A, B, and C should be able to communicate with phone D.
13.3 Adding an R2 Profile
You can define an R2 signaling with certain characteristics as an R2 profile. The R2 profile
index can be referenced by the MG R2 subscribers. That is, the R2 profile is valid for the MG
R2 subscribers who reference this profile.
Context
You can add a maximum of 16 R2 profiles with the signaling type that ranges from 0 to 15. The
signaling types are defined as follows:
l
0: Standard_R2
l
1: Brazil_R2
l
2: Argentina_R2
l
3–15: Subscriber self-defined R2
NOTE
By default, in the case of the R2 profiles that range from 0 to 15, the values of the following four tables
are default values. The four tables are register signaling attribute table, line signaling attribute table, address
sending attribute table, and address receiving attribute table.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the r2 profile command to add an R2 profile.
Step 2 Run the display r2 profile command to query the attributes of the R2 profile.
----End
Example
To add an R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2
Are you sure to add r2 profile?(y/n)[n]: y
huawei(config-r2-2)#display r2 profile
--------------------------------------------------------R2 signalling profile
--------------------------------------------------------index:
2
name:
standard r2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
signalling-type:
0
---------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 13-3 lists the related operations for adding an R2 profile.
Table 13-3 Related operations for adding an R2 profile
To...
Run the Command...
In...
Delete an R2 profile
undo r2 profile
Global config mode
Modify the attributes of an
R2 profile
profile attribute
R2 mode
Query the basic information
about all R2 profiles that
have been configured
display r2 profile all
Global config mode
Query the general attributes
of an R2 profile
display profile detail
R2 mode
13.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 Profile
Configure the R2 profile data, including the R2 address receiving attributes, R2 address sending
attributes, R2 profile attributes, R2 line signaling attributes, and register signaling attributes.
NOTE
When you configure the adaptation data of the R2 profile, if a parameter in the signaling standard of a
country is the same as the default parameter defined by the UA5000, the parameter need not be changed.
If a parameter in the signaling standard of a country is different from the default parameter defined by the
UA5000, the parameter need be changed accordingly.
13.4.1 Configuring the R2 Address Receiving Attributes
Configuring the R2 address receiving attributes means configuring the address receiving
attributes in the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 address receiving attributes. Perform the
following operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.
Step 2 Run the address-receive attribute command to configure the R2 address receiving attributes.
Step 3 Run the display address-receive command to query the R2 address receiving attributes.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
Example
To set ES to yes in the address receiving table of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2
huawei(config-r2-2)#address-receive attribute ES yes
huawei(config-r2-2)#display address-receive
--------------------------------------------------------------------------R2 address-receive attribute
--------------------------------------------------------------------------index:
2
DI:
yes
SI:
yes
SC:
yes
ES:
yes
CC:
no
DISC:
no
NAC:
no
SP:
no
RCPS:
1
RCCP:
1
---------------------------------------------------------
13.4.2 Configuring the R2 Address Sending Attributes
Configuring the R2 address sending attributes means configuring the address sending attributes
in the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the attributes. Perform the following operation to
configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.
Step 2 Run the address-send attribute command to configure the R2 address sending table.
Step 3 Run the display address-send command to query the R2 address sending attributes.
----End
Example
To set SI as no in the address sending table of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2
huawei(config-r2-2)#address-send attribute si no
huawei(config-r2-2)#display address-send
--------------------------------------------------------------------------R2 address-send attribute
--------------------------------------------------------------------------index:
2
DI:
yes
SI:
no
SC:
yes
ES:
no
CC:
no
DISC:
no
NAC:
no
SP:
no
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
13.4.3 Configuring the R2 Profile Attributes
Configure or modify the basic information about the R2 profile so that the parameters in the R2
profile meet the requirements of the subscribers.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 profile attributes. Perform the following
operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.
Step 2 Run the profile attribute command to configure the attributes of the R2 profile.
Step 3 Run the display r2 profile command to query the attributes of the R2 profile.
----End
Example
To modify the R2 profile with index 2 so that the name of the profile is Argentina and the
signaling type is 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2
huawei(config-r2-2)#profile attribute name Argentina signalling-type 2
huawei(config-r2-2)#display r2 profile
--------------------------------------------------------------------------R2 signaling profile
--------------------------------------------------------------------------index:
2
name:
Argentina
signalling-type:
2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.4.4 Configuring the R2 Line Signaling Attributes
Configuring the R2 line signaling attributes means configuring the line signaling attributes in
the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 line signaling attributes. Perform the following
operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet your requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.
Step 2 In global config mode, run the line-signaling attribute command to configure the R2 line
signaling attributes.
Step 3 In the global config mode, run the display line-signaling attribute command to query the R2
line signaling attributes.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
Example
Assume the following:
l
type: L2B
l
wait-seize-ack-time: 3500 ms
l
wait-answer-time: 260s
l
wait-clear-forward-time: 1000 ms
l
wait-protect-time: 1000 ms
To modify the line signaling attributes of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2
huawei(config-r2-2)#line-signaling attribute type 1 wait-seize-ack-time 3500
wait-answer-time 260 wait-clear-forward-time 1000 wait-protect-time 1000
huawei(config-r2-2)#display line-signaling attribute
--------------------------------------------------------R2 line-signaling attribute
--------------------------------------------------------index:
2
type(0:L1B,1:L2B,2:L3B,3:PULSE):
1
wait-seize-ack-time(ms):
3500
wait-answer-time(s):
260
wait-clear-forward-time(ms):
1000
wait-protect-time(ms):
1000
---------------------------------------------------------
13.4.5 Configuring the R2 Register Signaling Attributes
Configuring the R2 register signaling attributes means configuring the register signaling
attributes in the adaptation data of the R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 register signaling attributes. Perform the
following operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.
Step 2 Run the register-signaling attribute command to configure the attributes of the R2 register
signaling.
Step 3 Run the display register-signaling attribute command to query the attributes of the R2 register
signaling.
----End
Example
Assume the following:
l
incoming-type: 0
l
outgoing-type: 0
l
signal-send-voltage: 20 dBm
l
back-pulse-time: 150 ms
To modify the line signaling attributes of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2
huawei(config-r2-2)#register-signaling attribute incoming-type 0 outgoing-type 0
signal-send-voltage 20 back-pulse-time 150
huawei(config-r2-2)#display register-signaling attribute
--------------------------------------------------------R2 register-signaling attribute
--------------------------------------------------------index:
2
incoming-type(0:MFC,1:PULSE,2:DTMF,3:MFP,4:DPMFP):0
outgoing-type(0:MFC,1:PULSE,2:DTMF,3:MFP,4:DPMFP):0
signal-send-voltage(dBm):
20
back-pulse-time(ms):
150
dtmf-send-time(ms):
68
dtmf-send-interval(ms):
68
no-cid-permit(yes/no):
yes
number-max-interval(s):
50
signal-keep-max-time(s):
15
receive-number-max-interval(s):
50
signal-stop-permit-time(s):
15
wait-caller-category-time(s):
50
wait-Bsignal-time(s):
50
number-send-mode(0:immediate,1:delay):
1
calling-number-max-length:
12
compelling-sequence-keepalive-time(ms):
40000
send-pulse-signal:
no
---------------------------------------------------------
13.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration File
You can integrate the R2 signaling conversion tables into a script file. Then, configure the R2
signaling conversion table of the UA5000 by loading the script file.
Context
To convert R2 signaling to adapt to the standards of different countries, you must configure the
mapping table between the physical signals and the logical signals. This mapping table is named
the R2 signaling conversion table, which consists of the following four subtables:
l
Line signaling report conversion table
l
Line signaling delivery conversion table
l
Line signaling delivery conversion table
l
Register signaling delivery conversion table
Huawei produces a script file by collecting all man machine language (MML) commands used
for configuring the R2 signaling conversion table according to the signaling standard of your
country. You can load the script file to complete the configuration of the R2 signaling conversion
table on site.
l
You can select only one loading mode among Xmodem, TFTP, SFTP, and FTP.
l
During the loading, running information and other prompts are displayed, indicating the
loading progress, loading result, and failure cause in the case of a failure.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the load r2-signaling-file command to load the R2 signaling configuration file.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
13 Configuring the R2 Access Service
Example
To load an R2 signaling configuration file through TFTP, do as follows:
huawei#load r2-signaling-file tftp 10.11.117.170 r2signalingtype.efs
During the file load, the R2 signaling adaptation data will be modified and
all the being services will be interrupted
Please ensure the file is correct,and please save it after load complete
Are you sure to load this file? (y/n)[n]:y
Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress
Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure
and unpredictable result
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
Configuring the V5 Voice Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the V5 voice service includes the application of the V5 technology and the process
for configuring the V5 voice service on the UA5000.
14.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice Service
The V5 interface is designed for the access network (AN) development and is located between
the local exchange (LE) and the AN. The interface changes the analog connection between the
exchange and the access device to a standard digital connection.
14.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service
This topic describes how to configure a V5 interface and the V5 voice subscriber data on the
UA5000. In this way, the voice service is transmitted upstream to the exchange for processing
so that the voice subscribers can call each other.
14.3 Configuring a PSTN Subscriber
After configuring the v5 interface, configure the public switched telephone network (PSTN)
subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the PSTN subscribers can call each other.
14.4 Configuring an ISDN Subscriber
After configuring the V5 interface, configure the ISDN subscriber data on the V5 interface so
that the UA5000 can support the ISDN BRA and ISDN PRA access services.
14.5 Blocking a V5 Service Port
You can block a V5 service port by blocking the shelf number/slot number/port number, V5
interface ID + L3 address, or V5 interface ID + EF address.
14.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service Port
You can configure the loopback for a V5 service port and locate the subscriber line faults or
network transmission faults based on the voice quality.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
14.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice Service
The V5 interface is designed for the access network (AN) development and is located between
the local exchange (LE) and the AN. The interface changes the analog connection between the
exchange and the access device to a standard digital connection.
Service Description
When the PVMB or PVMD board functions as the narrowband control board, the UA5000
supports the V5 interface and is compatible with the optical line terminal (OLT). The OLT is a
narrowband access device. The UA5000 provides the V5 voice service by connecting to the
PSTN switch through the V5 interface.
Service Specifications
The V5 interface is a standard interface between the access network (AN) and the local exchange
(LE). The V5 interface includes the V5.1 and V5.2 interfaces.
l
A V5.1 interface manages only one 2048 kbit/s link, and it does not have the line
concentration capability.
l
When the V5.1 protocol is used for configuring the narrowband subscriber, a maximum of
30 narrowband subscribers can be added. TS16 and the timeslots that are configured as Cchannels are skipped when the V5.1 timeslots increase. When you add the PSTN
subscribers in batches, the system automatically searches for the PSTN ports within a
specified range and adds the PSTN subscribers one by one. The layer 3 addresses and
telephone numbers of the added PSTN subscribers increase by the set step value. The
default step is 1.
l
A V5.2 interface manages 1-16 2048 kbit/s links, and it has the line concentration capability.
l
For configuring the narrowband subscribers, the link timeslot is allocated as follows:
– When the 5.1 protocol is used, one narrowband subscriber constantly occupies one
timeslot.
– When the 5.2 protocol is used, no link timeslot is occupied. The V5.2 timeslot is
allocated dynamically after the subscriber picks up the phone.
The ring modes of the PSTN subscriber are controlled by the LE, whereas the ring tones are
configured on the UA5000. Therefore, a ring mapping must be created between the ring modes
and the ring tones. One mapping is applied to one V5 interface. If you do not create a ring
mapping, the default ring tones are used.
If the C&C08 switch functions as the LE, you need not set the ring mapping, because the ring
modes set on the C&C08 switch are the same as the ring tones set on the UA5000.
Currently, the following three types of ring-stop modes are supported:
l
a:b
– a: ring duration
– b: stop duration
l
a:b:c:d
– a: ring duration
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
– b: stop duration
– c: ring duration
– d: stop duration
l
a:b:c:d:e:f
– a: ring duration
– b: stop duration
– c: ring duration
– d: stop duration
– e: ring duration
– f: stop duration
14.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service
This topic describes how to configure a V5 interface and the V5 voice subscriber data on the
UA5000. In this way, the voice service is transmitted upstream to the exchange for processing
so that the voice subscribers can call each other.
Context
The V5 parameters must be the same on the AN and the LE.
NOTE
For the cascaded interfaces, the AN_V5 interface is the upper-level interface of the LE_V5. Therefore, the
parameter upperv5id of the LE_V5 must be configured. The AN_V5 interface does not have an upperlevel V5 interface, and it is not required to configure this parameter.
Networking
Figure 14-1 shows the example network of the V5 voice service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the A32 service board as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
Figure 14-1 Example network of the V5 voice service
LE
V5 link1
UA5000
V5 link2
P
V
M
B
P
V
M
B
0/13
A
3
2
Phone A
Phone B
Data Plan
Table 14-1 provides the data plan for configuring the V5 voice service.
Table 14-1 Data for configuring the V5 voice service
Data Type
Item
Data
V5 interface
Interface ID
0
Protocol version
V5.2
Interface type
AN_V5
Interface variable
0
ID of the PSTN C channel
0
ID of the logical C channel
0/4/0: 0
0/5/0: It need not be
specified.
Number of the timeslot
occupied by the physical C
channel
0/4/0: 16
Protection group type
0/4/0: protection group I
active
0/5/0: 16
0/5/0: protection group I
standby
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Narrowband service board
Slot of A32 board
0/13
Subscriber
PSTN subscribers
L3 address: 8, 9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Data Type
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
Item
Data
Telephone numbers:
12340000-12340001
Ring
User-defined ring
Ring duration: 0 ms
Peer parameter
0
Cadence ring mode
0: normal ring
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 14-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the V5 voice service.
Figure 14-2 Flowchart for configuring the V5 voice service
Query the status of
the V5 interface
Start
(Optional) Set E1
port CRC4
Add a slave shelf
(Optional Set E1
port impedance
Add an inter-shelf
link
Add a V5 interface
Confirm the boards
Set the V5 interface
attributes
Load softwares to
the boards
Add 2M V5 links
Query the status of
the boards
Configure logic C
channels
Add narrowband
service boards
Reset the V5
interface
Configure subscriber
data
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
NOTE
The steps in dashed line frames are for adding a slave shelf. If there is no slave shelf on the UA5000, skip the
steps.
Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Configure CRC4 for the E1 port.
NOTE
The configuration must be same as the configuration on the LE side. Otherwise, the CRC4 may fail.
huawei(config)#interface pvm 0/4
huawei(config-if-pvm-0/4)#crc4 0
Step 2 (Optional) Configure the impedance attributes of the E1 port.
huawei(config-if-pvm-0/4)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport electric set 0/13/0 impedance 2 current 6
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
Step 3 Add a V5 interface.
huawei(config)#interface v5 0
Are you sure to add V5 interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#
Step 4 Configure the V5 interface attributes.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#if-v5 attribute an_v5 v52 0 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------IF ID
IF type
Superior IF ID
IF Desc
0
AN_V5
-1
Protocol Version
Variable Code
PSTN C-channel ID
V5.2
0
0
Start link identification:
Timed starting In restarting In re-provisioning In link restoration
no
no
no
no
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Add links.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#link add 0/4/0 1
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#link add 0/5/0 2
Step 6 Configure physical C channels.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#c-channel add 0/4/0 tsno 16 1:protc1_act 0
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#c-channel add 0/5/0 tsno 16 2:protc1_std
Step 7 Reset the V5 interface.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset V5 interface?(y/n)[n]:y
This operation will take some time,please wait ......
Step 8 Configure the ringing mode.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#ringmode add 0 128
Step 9 Configure a user-defined ringing mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
NOTE
You can change the 16 user-defined ringing modes to the required ringing modes, but you cannot add a
ringing mode.
In the global config mode, run the user defined-ring modify command to change a user-defined ringing
mode.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#quit
huawei(config)#user defined-ring modify 0 para1 0
Step 10 Add a A32 board and confirm it.
huawei(config)#board add 0/13 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13
Step 11 Configure the subscriber data.
huawei(config)#narrow user
huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/0 0 8 telno 12340000
huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/1 0 9 telno 12340001
Step 12 Save the data.
huawei(config-narrow-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
1.
Verify whether the V5 interface attributes are configured successfully.
huawei(config)#interface v5 0
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#display if-v5 state
-------------------------------------------------------------------------V5 interface state: Interface
normal
V5 interface ID
value
0
0
Primary link ID
number
1
2
V5 interface type
Current variable
AN_V5
Secondary link ID
V5 Interface link
2
Starting link
identification:
Interface timed starting
: no
no
Start after re-provisioning: no
no
start in interface starting :
Start after link restoration:
States of protocol data links under V5
protocol
PSTN protocol data link state
:
normal
Control protocol data link state
:
normal
BCC protocol data link state
:
normal
Link control protocol data link state :
normal
Protection protocol data link 1 state :
normal
Protection protocol data link 2 state :
unusable
Data link
Data link
Data link
Data link
Data link
Data link
Logic C-
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
channel:
C-channel
type
0
ACT
Bearer
protocol:
C-channel
ISDN_F
0
0
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
frame/slot/port/TS
Protection group
0
GROUP1-
/4
/0
/16
PSTN CTRL BCC PROTECT LINKCTRL ISDN_Ds ISDN_P
1
1
1
1
Standby physical Cchannel:
Serial No. frame/slot/port/TS
type
0
0
/5
/0
/16
STD
1
0
0
Protection group
GROUP1-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
Verify whether the E1 link is normal.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#display link state
-------------------------------------------------------------------------ID. CRC4 Link FSM
Local LID state
-------------------------------------------------------------------------1
yes Link fault
Link ID not requested
2
no
Link fault
Link ID not requested
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
14.3 Configuring a PSTN Subscriber
After configuring the v5 interface, configure the public switched telephone network (PSTN)
subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the PSTN subscribers can call each other.
Prerequisite
The V5 interface must be configured properly. For details, see "14.2 Configuration Example
of the V5 Voice Service."
Procedure
Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.
Step 2 Run the pstnuser add command to add a PSTN subscriber or run the pstnuser batadd command
to add the PSTN subscribers in batches.
Step 3 Run the display user data command to query the PSTN subscriber data.
Step 4 Run the pstnport attribute set command to set the PSTN port attributes.
Step 5 Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the PSTN port attributes.
----End
Example
The following example describes how to configure a PSTN subscriber. Table 14-2 provides the
data plan for configuring a PSTN subscriber.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
Table 14-2 Data plan for configuring a PSTN subscriber
Data Type
Item
Data
A32 board
Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID
0/13/0
V5 interface
V5 interface ID
0
PSTN subscriber
L3 address
8
Telephone number
12340000
Supports polarity reversal
Support
PSTN port
huawei(config)#narrow user
huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/0 0 8 telno 12340000
huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/13/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
V5ID
L3_Addr
V5.1 Ts
Telephone Number
-----------------------------------------------------------------0 / 13 / 0
0
8
12340000
-----------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnport attribute set 0/13/0 polarity-reverse support
huawei(config-narrow-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/13/0
------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port Gain(db)
Dial-Mode
Polarity-Reverse User-Type
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 10 / 0 High gain
DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported
DEL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
14.4 Configuring an ISDN Subscriber
After configuring the V5 interface, configure the ISDN subscriber data on the V5 interface so
that the UA5000 can support the ISDN BRA and ISDN PRA access services.
Prerequisite
l
The V5 interface parameters must be configured properly. For details, see "14.2
Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service."
l
The ISDN port group number must be added. To add the ISDN port group number, run the
isdn-channel add command.
l
The procedure for configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber is as follows:
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1.
Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.
2.
Run the brauser add command to add an ISDN BRA subscriber or run the brauser
batadd command to add the ISDN BRA subscribers in batches.
3.
Run the display user data command to query the ISDN BRA subscriber data.
The procedure for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber is as follows:
1.
Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.
2.
Run the prauser add command to add an ISDN PRA subscriber.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
3.
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
Run the display user data command to query the ISDN PRA subscriber data.
----End
Example
The following example describes how to configure an ISDN BRA subscriber. Table 14-3
provides the data plan configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber.
Table 14-3 Data plan for configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber
Data Type
Item
Data
DSL board
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/15
V5 interface
V5 interface ID
0
ISDN BRA subscriber
EF address
0
ISDN port group number
0
Telephone number
12345678
huawei(config)#narrow user
huawei(config-narrow-user)#brauser add 0/15/0 0 0 0 telno 12345678
huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/15/0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port V5ID
EF_Addr PortGrpNo R.Pwr V51Ts1/2 Telephone Number
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 15 / 0
0
0
0
No
12345678
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following example describes how to configure an ISDN PRA subscriber. Table 14-4
provides the data plan for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber.
Table 14-4 Data plan for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber
Data Type
Item
Data
EDTB board
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/5
V5 interface
V5 interface ID
0
ISDN PRA subscriber
EF address
0
ISDN port group number
0
Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID
0/5/2
E1 port
huawei(config)#narrow user
huawei(config-narrow-user)#prauser add 0/5/2 0 0 0
huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/5/2
-----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port V5ID EFAddr PortGrpNo ServiceType
-----------------------------------------------------------------0 / 5 / 2
0
0
0
PRA
------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
14.5 Blocking a V5 Service Port
You can block a V5 service port by blocking the shelf number/slot number/port number, V5
interface ID + L3 address, or V5 interface ID + EF address.
Precaution
If any subscriber is already added to a V5 service port, performing such an operation may
interrupt the ongoing call on that port.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the Narrow user mode.
Step 2 Run the block command to block the V5 service port.
----End
Example
To block the V5 port with the v5id of 1 and the L3 address (namely, the available protocol
address on the V5 port) of 11234, do as follows:
huawei(config)#narrow user
huawei(config-narrow-user)#block delay 1 l3 1234
Related Operation
To...
Run the Command...
Unblock the V5 port
undo block
Loop back the V5 port
loop
14.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service Port
You can configure the loopback for a V5 service port and locate the subscriber line faults or
network transmission faults based on the voice quality.
Prerequisite
The parameters related to the V5 interface must be configured. For details, see "14.2
Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service."
Context
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The local loopback can be performed on the V5 service port after the offhook. That is, the
subscribers of the port can hear only their own voice after they take the phone off the hook.
The subscribers can check the line status based on the voice quality.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
14 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
l
The remote loopback can be performed on the V5 service port after the conversation starts.
That is, the subscriber of the port cannot hear any voice, and the subscribers of the peer
end hear their own voice. The subscriber of the peer end can check the network transmission
status based on the voice quality.
l
The loopback tag is removed when the V5 service port is faulty, recovered, and reset.
l
During the loopback, the subscriber data cannot be changed or deleted.
l
A conversation does not affect the loopback tag of the V5 service port.
Precaution
The loopback cannot be performed when the V5 service port is faulty or the timeslot is not
occupied.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.
Step 2 Run the loop command to perform the loopback on the V5 service port.
----End
Example
To perform the remote loopback on the V5 service port with the ID 1 and the 13 address (namely,
the available protocol address on the V5 port) 1234, do as follows:
huawei(config)#narrow user
huawei(config-narrow-user)#loop remote 1 l3 1234
Related Operation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Block the V5 port
block
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
15
15 Configuring the DDI Service
Configuring the DDI Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the direct dialing in (DDI) service includes the application of the DDI technology
and the process for configuring the DDI service on the UA5000.
15.1 Introduction to the DDI Service
In the DDI service, the call can be connected to the extension directly without the two-stage
dialing and the assistance of an operator.
15.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service
This topic describes how to configure the DDI service by adding a CDI board to the UA5000
and then configuring the DDI subscribers on the MG interface. The DDI subscriber to which
each port corresponds is an intra-group subscriber. Thus, outer-group subscriber A can call intragroup subscriber B without the two-stage dialing.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
15 Configuring the DDI Service
15.1 Introduction to the DDI Service
In the DDI service, the call can be connected to the extension directly without the two-stage
dialing and the assistance of an operator.
Service Description
You can connect the UA5000 to an enterprise PBX through an analog trunk interface provided
by a CDI board, as shown in Figure 15-1. In this way, the UA5000 realizes the DDI service.
An outer-group subscriber can dial the access code of the enterprise (PBX pilot number) + PBX
extension number to call an intra-group subscriber through DDI. Hence, no two-stage dialing
or operator assistance is involved in this process.
The UA5000 provides a channel for directly calling the PBX through the CDI board. The
UA5000 also provides an emergency channel. The UA5000 VoIP subscribers can call the PSTN
subscribers through the emergency channels provided by the CDI board in the case of network
failure (such as physical line failure or disconnection from the MGC), as shown in Figure
15-1.
Figure 15-1 DDI service application
MGC
Appserver
NMS
Enterprise 2
UA5000
UA5000
Enterprise 1
PBX
Service Specifications
The UA5000 supports the DDI service only when it uses the H. 248 protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
15 Configuring the DDI Service
15.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service
This topic describes how to configure the DDI service by adding a CDI board to the UA5000
and then configuring the DDI subscribers on the MG interface. The DDI subscriber to which
each port corresponds is an intra-group subscriber. Thus, outer-group subscriber A can call intragroup subscriber B without the two-stage dialing.
Prerequisite
l
The data on the MGC must be configured.
l
The MG data must be configured correctly and the MG must be in the normal state.
Precaution
You can set certain ports on the CDI board as DDI channels and other ports as emergency
channels. You cannot, however, set a port as a DDI channel and an emergency channel at the
same time.
Networking
The UA5000 provides the voice services through the voice access ports on the ASL boards. The
voice signals are processed by the PVMB board, and then transmitted to the upper layer network.
Figure 15-2 shows the example network of the DDI service.
Figure 15-2 Example network of the DDI service
MGC
UA5000
P P
V V
M M
B B
A
P P
C
A
S
V V
M M
D
S
I
L
L
B B
UA5000
PBX
Phone A
Phone B
Data Plan
Table 15-1 provides the data plan for configuring the DDI service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
15 Configuring the DDI Service
Table 15-1 Data plan for configuring the DDI service
Item
Data
Remarks
MG1 signaling of the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
-
MG1 media IP address of the
UA5000
10.10.10.4/24
-
Gateway of the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
The default gateway for
upstream transmission
MGC
10.10.20.1/24
-
MGC port: 2944
-
MG ID: 0
-
Code: text
-
Protocol: H.248
-
Transfer: udp
-
MG port: 2944
-
start-negotiate-version
2
MG
Context
l
The terminal ID of the DDI user must be the same as the ID configured on the MGC.
l
If the MG interface does not support the terminal layer configuration, the terminal IDs of
the DDI users must be numbered within the MG interface.
l
If the MG interface supports the terminal layer configuration, you need not set a terminal
ID because the system generates a protocol address automatically.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 15-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the DDI service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
15 Configuring the DDI Service
Figure 15-3 Flowchart for configuring the DDI service
Start
Add a CDI board
Configure the attributes
of the CDI port
Configure the DDI
subscriber data
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a CDI board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 cdi
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
Step 2 Add and configure the MG interface data.
NOTE
For the procedure for configuring an MG interface, see 5 Configuring the MG Interface.
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mg-media-ip1 10.10.10
.4 primary-mgc-ip1 10.10.20.1 mgport 2944 primary-mgc-port 2944 code text transfer
udp start-negotiate-version 2
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
Step 3 (Optional) Query the status of the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
2
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
1:("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
MG signalling IP
10.10.10.2
MG signalling Port
2944
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
MG media IP1
MG media IP2
MIDType
DeviceName
15 Configuring the DDI Service
10.10.10.4
IP4_ADDR
-
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC IP:10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC IP:Standby MGC
MGC Domain Name:------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
Step 4 Add and configure the DDI subscriber data.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgddiuser add 0/11/0 0 151
huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/11/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------F / S/ P Type State
SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------0/11/0
CDI Idle
StartService InstSvc
MG
0
151
-------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
Step 5 (Optional) Configure the attributes of the DDI port.
huawei(config)#cdi
huawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/11/0 dialmode PULSE
huawei(config-cdi)#quit
Step 6 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
The DDI service configuration of subscriber A and subscriber B is complete. Subscriber A should
be able to call subscriber B by dialing the access code (PBX pilot number) of the company +
PBX extension number of subscriber B.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
About This Chapter
This topic describes the function and application of the SDL board and how to configure the
TDM G.SHDSL service on the SDL board on the UA5000.
16.1 Introduction to the TDM G.SHDSL Service
The UA5000 provides different TDM G.SHDSL services, including the N x 64 k (N ranges from
1 to 32) data service and E1 access service through the SDL/SDLE board.
16.2 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service (with Data Interface Extended)
This topic describes how to configure the TDM G.SHDSL service through the connection of the
SHDSL modem that provides the V.35 interface to the SDL board. In this manner, the data
interface is extended, which is used in private networks, such as post offices, banks, and tax
offices.
16.3 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service (with the E1 Port Extended)
This topic describes how to configure the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port extended.
Both the SDL and SDLE boards support the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port extended.
This section considers the SDLE board as an example.
16.4 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service (with the ISDN PRA Extended)
This topic describes how to configure the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN primary rate
adaptation (PRA) extended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
16.1 Introduction to the TDM G.SHDSL Service
The UA5000 provides different TDM G.SHDSL services, including the N x 64 k (N ranges from
1 to 32) data service and E1 access service through the SDL/SDLE board.
Service Description
The UA5000 provides the N x 64 k (N ranges from 1 to 32) data services and E1 services through
the SDL/SDLE board. The service data is sent through SPCs, which are set up between G.SHDSL
ports on the SDL/SDLE board and other service ports.
The SDL/SDLE board supports two types of SPCs: intra-board SPCs and inter-board SPCs.
l
An intra-board SPC is set up between G.SHDSL ports, E1 ports, or a G.SHDSL port and
an E1 port on one SDL/SDLE board.
l
An inter-board SPC is set up between a port on one SDL/SDLE board and a G.SHDSL port
on the other SDL/SDLE board, or between a port on one SDL/SDLE board and an E1 port
on the PVMB, PVMD, or EDTB board.
Service Specifications
The SDL/SDLE board can work in the common mode or the transmission mode.
l
The SDL board provides four G.SHDSL ports and four E1 ports.
l
The SDLE board provides eight G.SHDSL ports and eight E1 ports.
The G.SHDSL ports provided by the SDL/SDLE board work in the FE1 or V.35 mode to extend
the transmission distance of the E1 or V.35 services.
According to the service mode, the limitations on the setup of the SPC on the SDL board are as
follows:
l
The intra-SDL SPC supports a maximum of 32 timeslots. Both the start timeslot and end
timeslot of the SPC use the minimum timeslots.
l
The inter-SDL SPC supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. Both the start timeslot and end
timeslot of the SPC use the minimum timeslots.
l
If the inter-SDL SPC service is configured, the system clock must be used.
l
When you set up the SPC from the PVM/EDTB board to the SDL board:
– The SPC from the E1 port to the V.35 port supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. The
start timeslot of the SPC is timeslot 3 of the port and the end timeslot of the SPC is
timeslot 0 of the port.
– The SPC from the E1 port to the FE1 port supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. The
start timeslot of the SPC is timeslot 1 of the port and the end timeslot of the SPC is
timeslot 1 of the port.
16.2 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service
(with Data Interface Extended)
This topic describes how to configure the TDM G.SHDSL service through the connection of the
SHDSL modem that provides the V.35 interface to the SDL board. In this manner, the data
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
interface is extended, which is used in private networks, such as post offices, banks, and tax
offices.
Networking
Figure 16-1 shows the example network for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the
data interface extended.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the SDL service board as an example.
Figure 16-1 Example network for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the data
interface extended
DDN
PP
V V SPC
MM
BB
0/8
S
D
L
SHDSL modem
V.35
Router
Enterprise LAN
In the preceding example network, the data of the V.35 interface is converged through the
establishment of the soft permanent connection (SPC) between the SDL board and the PVM
board. Then, the data is transmitted upstream to the DDN node through the E1 port. In this
manner, the data is switched and converged to the peer end of the local area network (LAN).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Data Plan
Table 16-1 provides the data plan for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the data
interface extended.
Table 16-1 Data plan for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the data interface
extended
Port/Device
Item
Data
Remarks
SDL board
Shelf ID/Slot ID
0/8
-
Running mode
normal
Common
Clock source
system
System clock
Port ID
4
Only ports 4-7 are
SHDSL ports.
Clock mode
V.35 clock
-
Service type
normal
Normal
Connection type
an-spc
Internal SPC
Start shelf ID/Slot
ID/Port ID/Channel
ID
0/8/4/1
When the port is the
G.SHDSL port, the
channel ID cannot be
0.
End shelf ID/Slot ID/
Port ID/Channel ID
0/4/2/1
The SPC between the
SHDSL port and the
E1 port on the PVM
board needs to be
established.
Number of channels
10
-
SHDSL port
SPC
Context
l
When you configure the TDM G.SHDSL service with the data interface extended, the
running mode of the SDL board must be the common mode.
l
When you run the spc add an-spc command to configure the timeslot range of the SPC,
note that the timeslot of the SPC must be within the rate range of the G.SHDSL port. For
example, if the configured port rate is 10 x 64 kbit/s, you can configure the timeslot range
of the SPC within the range of 0-9 because the rate of one timeslot is 64 kbit/s.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 16-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service on the SDL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Figure 16-2 Flowchart for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service on the SDL board
Start
Add the board
Confirm the board
Configure the running
mode of the board
Configure the
clock of the board
Configure the port
Establish the SPC
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an SDL board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 sdl
Step 2 Confirm the SDL board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
Step 3 Configure the running mode of the board.
huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#runmode normal clock system
Step 4 Configure the clock source of the board.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#clock source system
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display clock config
-----------------------------------------------Board's clock source: System clock
------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Step 5 Configure SHDSL port 0/8/4.
l Query the configuration information about the SHDSL port. If workmode is configured to
V35, you need not change runmode.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config
-------------Port
Frame
-------------0
PCM31
1
PCM31
2
PCM31
3
PCM31
---------------------------------Port
Workmode Submode
Active
---------------------------------4
V35
syn
Allow
5
FE1
PCM31
Allow
6
FE1
PCM31
Allow
7
FE1
PCM31
Allow
----------------------------------
l Query the configuration information about the SHDSL port. If workmode is configured to
FE1, you need to change runmode to V.35.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config
-------------Port
Frame
-------------0
PCM31
1
PCM31
2
PCM31
3
PCM31
---------------------------------Port
Workmode Submode
Active
---------------------------------4
FE1
PCM31
Allow
5
FE1
PCM31
Allow
6
FE1
PCM31
Allow
7
FE1
PCM31
Allow
---------------------------------huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#shdslport modify 4 runmode V35
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Step 6 Query the timeslot usage of the port. (The timeslot of each port is not used before the
establishment of the SPC.)
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display timeslot
---------------------------------------------------------|
0--7
|
8--15 | 16--23 | 24--31 |
---------------------------------------------------------FE1 line 0
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
FE1 line 1
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
FE1 line 2
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
FE1 line 3
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 0 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
---------------------------------------------------------'0'-Not used;
'1'-Used
---------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#quit
Step 7 Establish the SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/4/1 end 0/4/2/1 10 normal
huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display timeslot
---------------------------------------------------------|
0--7
|
8--15 | 16--23 | 24--31 |
---------------------------------------------------------FE1 line 0
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
FE1 line 1
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
FE1 line 2
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
FE1 line 3
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 0 | 01111111 | 11100000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
SHDSL line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
---------------------------------------------------------'0'-Not used;
'1'-Used
---------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#quit
Step 8 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save data
----End
Result
After the configuration is successful, the user in the enterprise LAN that is connected to the
router and the user in the enterprise LAN on the DDN network side can communicate with each
other.
16.3 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service
(with the E1 Port Extended)
This topic describes how to configure the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port extended.
Both the SDL and SDLE boards support the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port extended.
This section considers the SDLE board as an example.
Networking
Figure 16-3 shows the example network for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the
E1 port extended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the SDLE service board as an example.
Figure 16-3 Example network for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port
extended
DDN
0/8
PP
VV
MM
BB
S
D
L
E
SHDSL modem
E1
Router
In the preceding networking, the uplink E1 port is not connected to the TDM system. Instead,
the data is directly transmitted upstream through the SDLE board. The downlink port on the
SDLE board is connected to the modem, the modem provides the E1 port, and the E1 port is
directly connected to the router, thus implementing the E1 port extension.
Data Plan
Table 16-2 provides the data plan for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port
extended.
Table 16-2 Data plan for configuring the common SDL service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port/Device
Item
Data
Remarks
SDLE board
Shelf ID/Slot ID
0/8
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Port/Device
SHDSL port
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Item
Data
Remarks
Running mode
transport
Indicates the
transport mode. To
extend the E1 port,
the run mode must be
configured to
transport.
Clock source
Line clock 0
The E1 line clock on
port 0/8/0 is used.
Port ID
8
Only ports 8-15 are
SHDSL ports.
Clock mode
E1 clock
The modem that is
connected to the
SHDSL port
provides the E1 port.
Therefore, the E1
line clock must be
configured on the
SHDSL port.
Context
When you configure the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port extended, the running mode
of the SDLE board must be the transport mode.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 16-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port
extended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Figure 16-4 Flowchart for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port extended
Start
Add an SDLE board
Confirm the
SDLE board
Configure the running
mode of the board
Configure the
clock of the board
Configure the port
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an SDLE board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 H611SDLE
Step 2 Confirm the SDLE board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
Step 3 Configure the running mode of the board.
huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#runmode transport clock line 0
Step 4 Configure the clock source of the board.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#clock source line 0
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display clock config
-----------------------------------------------Board's clock source: FE1 line 0 clock
------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Configure SHDSL port 0/11/8.
l Query the configuration information about the SHDSL port. If workmode is configured to
FE1, you need not change runmode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config
-------------Port
Frame
-------------0
PCM31
1
PCM31
2
PCM31
3
PCM31
4
PCM31
5
PCM31
6
PCM31
7
PCM31
---------------------------------Port
Workmode Submode
Active
---------------------------------8
FE1
PCM31
Allow
9
FE1
PCM31
Allow
10
FE1
PCM31
Allow
11
FE1
PCM31
Allow
12
FE1
PCM31
Allow
13
FE1
PCM31
Allow
14
FE1
PCM31
Allow
15
FE1
PCM31
Allow
----------------------------------
l Query the configuration information about the SHDSL port. If workmode is configured to
V35, you need to change runmode to FE1.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config
-------------Port
Frame
-------------0
PCM31
1
PCM31
2
PCM31
3
PCM31
4
PCM31
5
PCM31
6
PCM31
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
7
PCM31
---------------------------------Port
Workmode Submode
Active
---------------------------------8
V35
syn
Allow
9
FE1
PCM31
Allow
10
FE1
PCM31
Allow
11
FE1
PCM31
Allow
12
FE1
PCM31
Allow
13
FE1
PCM31
Allow
14
FE1
PCM31
Allow
15
FE1
PCM31
Allow
---------------------------------huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#shdslport modify 8 runmode fe1
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#quit
Step 6 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration is complete, the Router which accessed the DDN network before accesses
the UA5000 now. In this manner, the TDM G.SHDSL service with the E1 port extended can be
implemented. After a terminal user is connected to the router, the terminal user can communicate
with the user on the DDN network.
16.4 Configuration Example of the TDM G.SHDSL Service
(with the ISDN PRA Extended)
This topic describes how to configure the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN primary rate
adaptation (PRA) extended.
Networking
Figure 16-5 shows the example network for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the
ISDN PRA extended.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the SDLE service board as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Figure 16-5 Example network for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN PRA
extended
MGC
0/8
P P HighV V speed
M M HW
BB
S
D
L
E
SHDSL modem
E1
PBX
In the preceding network, the uplink E1 port on the SDLE board is connected to the PVM board
through the HW on the backplane. The E1 signals, however, are not transmitted to the TDM
system of the PVM board but are directly transmitted upstream to the PSTN or ISDN network.
The downlink port on the SDLE board is connected to the modem, the modem provides the E1
port, and the E1 port is directly connected to the PBX, thus implementing the ISDN PRA
extension.
NOTE
The SDLE board must work in the service mode.
Data Plan
Table 16-3 provides the data plan for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN
PRA extended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Table 16-3 Data plan for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN PRA extended
Port/Device
Item
Data
Remarks
SDLE board
Shelf ID/Slot ID
0/8
-
Running mode
service
To implement the
ISDN PRA
extension, the
running mode must
be configured to
service mode.
Clock source
Line clock 0
The E1 line clock on
port 0/8/0 is used.
Port ID
0/8/8
Only ports 8-15 are
SHDSL ports.
Clock mode
E1 clock
The modem that is
connected to the
SHDSL port
provides the E1 port.
Therefore, the E1
line clock must be
configured on the
SHDSL port.
Port ID
0/8/0
-
MGID
0
Ensure that the data
of the MG interface is
configured.
terminalid
0
-
IUA link set ID
0
Ensure that the IUA
link set is added.
IUA link ID
1
Ensure that the IUA
link is added.
SHDSL port
Data of the PRA user
Context
When you configure the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN PRA extended, the running
mode of the SDLE board must be configured to service mode.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 16-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN
PRA extended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Figure 16-6 Flowchart for configuring the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN PRA
extended
Start
Add an SDLE board
Confirm the
SDLE board
Configure the running
mode of the board
Configure the
clock of the board
Configure the
SHDSL port
Configure the
PRA port
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an SDLE board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 H611SDLE
Step 2 Confirm the SDLE board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
Step 3 Configure the running mode of the board.
huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#runmode service clock line 0
Step 4 Configure the clock source of the board.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#clock source line 0
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display clock config
-----------------------------------------------Board's clock source: FE1 line 0 clock
------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
Step 5 Configure SHDSL port 0/8/8.
l Query the configuration information of the SHDSL port. If workmode is configured to
FE1, you need not change runmode.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config
-------------Port
Frame
-------------0
PCM31
1
PCM31
2
PCM31
3
PCM31
4
PCM31
5
PCM31
6
PCM31
7
PCM31
---------------------------------Port
Workmode Submode
Active
---------------------------------8
FE1
PCM31
Allow
9
FE1
PCM31
Allow
10
FE1
PCM31
Allow
11
FE1
PCM31
Allow
12
FE1
PCM31
Allow
13
FE1
PCM31
Allow
14
FE1
PCM31
Allow
15
FE1
PCM31
Allow
----------------------------------
l Query the configuration information of the SHDSL port. If workmode is configured to
V35, you need to change runmode to FE1.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config
-------------Port
Frame
-------------0
PCM31
1
PCM31
2
PCM31
3
PCM31
4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
16 Configuring the TDM G.SHDSL Service
PCM31
5
PCM31
6
PCM31
7
PCM31
---------------------------------Port
Workmode Submode
Active
---------------------------------8
V35
syn
Allow
9
FE1
PCM31
Allow
10
FE1
PCM31
Allow
11
FE1
PCM31
Allow
12
FE1
PCM31
Allow
13
FE1
PCM31
Allow
14
FE1
PCM31
Allow
15
FE1
PCM31
Allow
---------------------------------huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#shdslport modify 8 runmode fe1
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#quit
Step 6 Configure the PRA user.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgprauser add 0/8/8 0 0 10 terminalid 0
Step 7 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the TDM G.SHDSL service with the ISDN PRA extended can be
implemented though the E1 link between the SHDSL modem and the PBX. After a POTS
subscriber is connected to the PBX, the subscriber can call the subscribers on the PSTN network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
17
17 Configuring the MTA Service
Configuring the MTA Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the multifunctional terminal adapter (MTA) service includes the application of the
MTA technology and the process for configuring the MTA service on the UA5000.
17.1 Introduction to the MTA Service
The UA5000 supports accessing the subscriber data service through the multifunctional terminal
adapter (MTA).
17.2 Configuration Example of the MTA Service
This topic describes how to add the MTA on port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 on the UA5000 so that
subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 can exchange data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
17 Configuring the MTA Service
17.1 Introduction to the MTA Service
The UA5000 supports accessing the subscriber data service through the multifunctional terminal
adapter (MTA).
Service Description
The UA5000 provides the following ports through the MTA:
l
64 kbit/s and 128 kbit/s rate synchronous ports
l
2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, and 19.2 kbit/s sub-rate synchronous or asynchronous ports
In this way, the UA5000 provides the data terminal subscribers with the physical communication
channels between the data terminal subscribers and the DDN network or other data terminal
subscribers.
Service Specifications
The MTA is connected to the DSL board through the 2B1Q interface. On the subscriber side,
the MTA provides one V.35/V.24 compatible port and two V.24 ports. The three ports can work
only in the DCE mode.
l
V.35/V.24 compatible port (port 0): It is a DB25 socket, which directly provides the V.24
port (or the DCE-DTE cross over cable can be used). The port supports the synchronous
rate of 64 kbit/s, and the synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/
s, and 2.4 kbit/s. The port functions as a V.35 port through the V.35 transit cable, and
supports the rates of 128 kbit/s and 64 kbit/s.
l
V.24 ports (ports 1 and 2) are RJ45 socket (8-pin RJ-45 socket). The ports function as the
V.24 ports through the RJ45-DB25 transit cable. The ports support the synchronous rate
of 64 kbit/s, and the synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s,
and 2.4 kbit/s. The rate of 19.2 kbit/s is not recommended for port 2 (refer to the X.50
protocol).
The data devices that are connected directly to the MTA must have the standard V.24/RS-232
serial ports, or the V.35 serial ports. The devices include the following:
l
Router
l
PC
l
Front end processor
l
Other data terminal equipment (DTE)
17.2 Configuration Example of the MTA Service
This topic describes how to add the MTA on port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 on the UA5000 so that
subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 can exchange data.
Prerequisite
Bit 2 of the DIP switch on the MTA must be set to ON so that port 0 on the MTA works in the
V.24 mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
17 Configuring the MTA Service
Precaution
l
Before connecting a DTE, make sure that the port type, the DIP switches, and the cable are
correct. Otherwise, the ports on the UA5000 and the DTE may be damaged.
l
The power of the MTA must map the MTA.
Networking
Figure 17-1 shows the example network of the MTA service.
Figure 17-1 Example network of the MTA service
LE
E1/V5
UA5000
0/8
0/11
P P
D
D
A A
V V
M M
S
S
S S
L
L
L L
B B
MTA
MTA
Computer A
Computer B
Data Plan
Table 17-1 provides the data plan for configuring the MTA service.
Table 17-1 Data plan for configuring the MTA service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Data Type
Item
Data
DSL board
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/8, 0/11
MTA port
Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID
0/8/0, 0/11/0
DSL board
Channel number
0
Rate of channel 0
19200 bit/s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Data Type
SPC
17 Configuring the MTA Service
Item
Data
Asynchronous word length of
channel 0
10
Synchronous or asynchronous
selection of the channel
asyn
Application type
Common application
SPC type
Internal SPC
Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/
channel ID
0/8/0/0
End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/
channel ID
0/11/0/0
Total number of channels
1
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 17-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MTA service.
Figure 17-2 Flowchart for configuring the MTA service
Start
Add an MTA
Modify the attributes
of the MTA
Query the settings
of the MTA channels
Set up an SPC
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an MTA.
huawei(config)#mta add 0/8/0
huawei(config)#display mta
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
17 Configuring the MTA Service
Frame/Slot/Port status
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
0 /8/0
Normal
Syn 4.8K
Unavail
Unavail
------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1 MTA, 1 normal, 0 fault, 0 unknown
------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 2 Modify the attributes of the MTA.
huawei(config)#mta modify 0/8/0 channelNo 0 asyn_len 10 mode asyn rate 19200
Step 3 Query the settings of the MTA channels.
huawei(config)#display mta 0/8/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
mmunication status
protocol
0
/8
/0
Normal
X.50 S bit loop
Channel 0:
Mode:Asyn
Rate:19.2K
Port type:DCE Clock type:Internal mode
Signal phase: Data receive In-phase
Data send In-phase
Clock receive Inphase Clock send In-phase
Data length:10 B channel: B1 Involve phase:Sequence phase
Channel 1: Unavailable
Channel 2: Unavailable
Step 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure the other MTA on port 0/11/0.
Step 5 Set up an SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 normal
----End
Result
Connect the two MTAs to two computers, and set the baud rate of the HyperTerminal to 19200
bit/s and do not set any flow control. The computers can send data to the MTAs and receive data
from the MTAs through the serial ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18
18 Configuring the VFB Service
Configuring the VFB Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the VFB service includes the application of the VFB technology and the process
for configuring the VFB service on the UA5000.
18.1 Introduction to the VFB Service
The UA5000 supports the audio telephone service through the VFB board.
18.2 Configuration Example of the VFB Audio Private Line Service
This topic describes how to configure two VFB boards on the UA5000 to set up an SPC between
port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0 are
connected through a private line.
18.3 Configuration Example of the Party Line Service
This topic describes how to configure the party line service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18 Configuring the VFB Service
18.1 Introduction to the VFB Service
The UA5000 supports the audio telephone service through the VFB board.
Service Description
The UA5000 transmits voice or data services over the voice frequency (VF) channel on a private
network. The audio private line service can be implemented through the VFB board or the ATI
board. For detailed configuration on the ATI board, see "19.2 Configuration Example of the
ATI Audio Private Line Service."
Service Specifications
l
The UA5000 provides point-to-point VF channels. You can connect a VF telephone or
modem to each end of the channel to implement the private line interconnection of the voice
or data services.
l
The UA5000 supports the private line service over a party line through the VFB board.
18.2 Configuration Example of the VFB Audio Private Line
Service
This topic describes how to configure two VFB boards on the UA5000 to set up an SPC between
port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0 are
connected through a private line.
Networking
Figure 18-1 shows the example network for configuring the VFB audio private line service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the VFB service board as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18 Configuring the VFB Service
Figure 18-1 Example network for configuring the VFB audio private line service
UA5000
0/8
0/12
P P
V
V
V V
F
F
B
B
M M
B B
VF
telephone
VF
telephone
Data Plan
Table 18-1 provides the data plan for configuring the VFB audio private line service.
Table 18-1 Data plan for configuring the VFB audio private line service
Data Type
Item
Data
Remarks
VFB board
Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID
0/8/0, 0/12/0
-
VFB port
Working mode
2line
2-wire port
Rx gain
-6 dB
-
Tx gain
+5 dB
-
Application type
normal
Common
application
SPC type
an-spc
Internal SPC
Start shelf ID/slot ID/
port ID/channel ID
0/8/0/0
-
End shelf ID/slot ID/
port ID/channel ID
0/12/0/0
-
Total number of
channels
1
-
SPC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18 Configuring the VFB Service
Context
l
When changing the working mode of the VFB port, you must delete the SPC that is set up
on the port.
l
When modifying other attributes on the VFB port, you need not delete the SPC that is set
up on the port.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 18-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the VFB audio private line service.
Figure 18-2 Flowchart for configuring the VFB audio private line service
Start
Add VFB boards
Confirm the VFB
boards
Configure the VFB
port attributes
Set up an SPC
QoS qualified?
No
Modify the VFB
port attributes
Yes
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add two VFB boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 VFB
huawei(config)#board add 0/12 VFB
Step 2 Confirm the two VFB boards.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18 Configuring the VFB Service
Step 3 Configure the VFB port attributes.
huawei(config)#vfb
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 mode 2line receivegain 5 transmitgain
9
huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0
-----------------------------------------Port Mode
Resistance Receive Transmit
-----------------------------------------0
Two line 600
-6dB
+5dB
-----------------------------------------huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/12/0 mode 2line receivegain 5 transmitgain
9
huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/12/0
-----------------------------------------Port Mode
Resistance Receive Transmit
-----------------------------------------0
Two line 600
-6dB
+5dB
-----------------------------------------huawei(config-vfb)#quit
Step 4 Set up an SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/12/0/0 1 normal
Step 5 (Optional) If the quality of the service can not meet the requirement, modify the VFB port
attributes.
After the SPC is set up, the subscribers that are connected to the two ports can call each other.
1.
If the voice of the peer end is very low, increase the Rx gain of the local end or the Tx gain
of the peer end.
huawei(config)#vfb
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 receivegain 6
huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0
-------------------------------------------------------Port Mode
Resistance Receive Transmit Name
-------------------------------------------------------0
Two line 600
-5dB
+5dB
--------------------------------------------------------
2.
If the voice of the peer end is very high and is distorted, decrease the Rx gain of the local
end or the Tx gain of the peer end.
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 receivegain 4
huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0
------------------------------------------------------Port Mode
Resistance Receive Transmit Name
-------------------------------------------------------0
Two line 600
-7dB
+5dB
--------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
Subscribers connected to the two VFB boards should be able to call each other.
18.3 Configuration Example of the Party Line Service
This topic describes how to configure the party line service.
Context
The party line system refers to the railway scheduling phone system, which consists of the
scheduling home telephone, transmission channel (including other necessary devices), and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18 Configuring the VFB Service
extension telephones. On the railway private line network, the party line service refers to the
scheduling line service, which is addressed as transportation scheduling service, goods train
scheduling service, or wireless train scheduling service. All these scheduling line services are
implemented through a 64-kbit/s transmission channel.
Prerequisite
The PVM control board must be configured with the Miro daughter board.
Service Requirements
l
The phones in the same railway station can make party line calls to each other, such as
VF_Phone1 and VF_Phone2 in the following network.
l
The phones in different railway stations can also make party line calls to each other, such
as VF_Phone1 and VF_Phone2 under UA5000_1 and VF_Phone3 under UA5000_2 in the
following network.
Networking
Figure 18-3
E1
0/4
0/7
P P
V V
M M
UA5000_1
SDH
VF_Phone1
E1
0/4
P P
V V
M M
V
F
B
VF_Phone2
0/7
V
F
B
UA5000_2
VF_Phone3
Data Plan
Table 18-2 provides the data plan for configuring the party line service.
Table 18-2 Data plan for configuring the party line service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port/Device
Item
Data
Remarks
UA5000_1
Port/Channel ID of
VF_Phone1
0/7/0/0
The channel ID of the
POTS user can only
be 0.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Port/Device
UA5000_2
18 Configuring the VFB Service
Item
Data
Remarks
Port/Channel ID of
VF_Phone2
0/7/1/0
The channel ID of the
POTS user can only
be 0.
Timeslot/Channel ID
of the E1 port
0/4/1/1
The channel ID of the
E1 port can not be 0.
Party line group
0
-
Port/Channel ID of
VF_Phone3
0/7/0/0
The channel ID of the
POTS user can only
be 0.
Timeslot/Channel ID
of the E1 port
0/4/1/1
The channel ID of the
E1 port can not be 0.
Party line group
0
-
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 18-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the party line service.
Figure 18-4 Flowchart for configuring the party line service
Start
Add the VFB board
Confirm the VFB board
Add the SPC and add
the subscriiber to the
party line group
Save the data
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18 Configuring the VFB Service
Procedure
l
Configure the data of UA5000_1.
1.
Add and confirm the VFB board.
As shown in the preceding figure, the board is in slot 0/7.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 VFB
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
2.
Establish an SPC and add VF_Phone1 and VF_Phone2 to party line group 0.
In this example, the party line group ID is 0, VF_Phone1 corresponds to port 0/7/0,
and VF_Phone2 corresponds to port 0/7/1.
NOTE
The party line phones are connected to ports on the VFB board and therefore the start channel
ID can only be set to 0.
huawei(config)#spc add conf-spc start 0/7/0/0 conf-Group 0
huawei(config)#spc add conf-spc start 0/7/1/0 conf-Group 0
3.
Establish an SPC and add port 1 on the PVM board of UA5000_1 to party line group
0.
NOTE
l To achieve the communication between the VFB users under the two UA5000s, add one
E1 timeslot of the PVM board of each UA5000 to the party line group.
l Here,the E1 port is added to the party line group, so the channel ID cannot be 0.
huawei(config)#spc add conf-spc start 0/4/0/1 conf-Group 0
4.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save data
l
Configure the data of UA5000_2.
1.
Add and confirm the VFB board.
As shown in the preceding figure, the board is in slot 0/7.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 VFB
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
2.
Establish an SPC and add VF_Phone3 to party line group 0.
VF_Phone1 corresponds to port 0/7/0.
NOTE
The party line phones are connected to ports on the VFB board and therefore the start channel
ID can only be set to 0.
huawei(config)#spc add conf-spc start 0/7/0/0 conf-Group 0
3.
Establish an SPC and add port 1 on the PVM board of UA5000_2 to party line group
0.
NOTE
l To achieve the communication between the VFB users under the two UA5000s, add one
E1 timeslot of the PVM board of each UA5000 to the party line group.
l Here,the E1 port is added to the party line group, so the channel ID cannot be 0.
huawei(config)#spc add conf-spc start 0/4/0/1 conf-Group 0
4.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save data
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
18 Configuring the VFB Service
Result
VF_Phone1, VF_Phone2, and VF_Phone3 can communicate with each other after taking the
phone off the hook.
Configuration File
The configuration scripts for UA5000_1 are as follows:
board add 0/7 VFB
board confirm 0/7
spc add conf-spc start 0/7/0/0 conf-Group 0
spc add conf-spc start 0/7/1/0 conf-Group 0
spc add conf-spc start 0/4/0/1 conf-Group 0
save data
The configuration scripts for UA5000_2 are as follows:
board add 0/7 VFB
board confirm 0/7
spc add conf-spc start 0/7/0/0 conf-Group 0
spc add conf-spc start 0/4/0/1 conf-Group 0
save data
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19
19 Configuring the ATI Service
Configuring the ATI Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the ATI service includes the application of the ATI and the process for configuring
the ATI service on the UA5000.
19.1 Introduction to the ATI Service
The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission of the E&M signalings and the 2-wire/4-wire
VF signals through the ATI board.
19.2 Configuration Example of the ATI Audio Private Line Service
This topic describes how to configure the ATI audio private line service. In this example, two
ATI boards are added on the UA5000, ATI ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 are configured to 2-wire
subscriber line, and an internal SPC is established between ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 (the connection
type of the SPC is common SPC). In this manner, the ATI audio private line service is supported
between ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0.
19.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the E&M Trunk Interface
This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, and set up an SPC between
port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0. The SPC type is the private line. Thus, subscribers connected to port
0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 can communicate with each other after taking the phones off the hook.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19 Configuring the ATI Service
19.1 Introduction to the ATI Service
The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission of the E&M signalings and the 2-wire/4-wire
VF signals through the ATI board.
Service Description
The signaling channel and voice channel of the E&M trunk interface are separate. Therefore,
when the E&M trunk interface is supported, a port includes the signaling line (E line and M line)
and the voice frequency (VF) line. Where,
l
l
The signaling line can be configured to support the Bell IV-type or V-type interface through
DIP switch settings.
The VF line can be configured to support the 4-wire or 2-wire interface through the DIP
switch settings.
Service Specifications
The ATI board provides six 2-wire/4-wire E&M trunk interfaces. Each interface of an ATI board
provides the 2-wire/4-wire VF line or the 1E1M signaling line. When the E&M signaling line
is not used, the 2-wire/4-wire VF line can be used separately for transmitting VF signals.
19.2 Configuration Example of the ATI Audio Private Line
Service
This topic describes how to configure the ATI audio private line service. In this example, two
ATI boards are added on the UA5000, ATI ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 are configured to 2-wire
subscriber line, and an internal SPC is established between ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 (the connection
type of the SPC is common SPC). In this manner, the ATI audio private line service is supported
between ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0.
Networking
Figure 19-1 shows the example network for configuring the ATI audio private line service.
Figure 19-1 Example network for configuring the ATI audio private line service
UA5000
P
V
M
B
P
V
M
B
0/7
0/13
A
T
I
A
T
I
2/4-wire audio
interface
Audio modem A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2/4-wire audio
interface
Audio modem B
274
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19 Configuring the ATI Service
Data Plan
Table 19-1 provides the data plan for configuring the ATI audio private line service
Table 19-1 Data plan for configuring the ATI audio private line service
Interface/Board
Item
Data
Remarks
ATI board
Shelf ID/Slot ID corresponding to
modem A
0/7
-
Shelf ID/Slot ID corresponding to
modem B
0/13
-
Subscriber line mode
2wire
2-wire
Rx gain
-6 dB
-
Tx gain
-2.5 dB
-
Service type
normal
Common
Connection type
an-spc
Internal SPC
Start shelf ID/Slot ID/Port ID/
Channel ID
0/7/0/0
For the ATI
port, the
channel ID can
only be 0.
End shelf ID/Slot ID/Port ID/
Channel ID
0/13/0/0
For the ATI
port, the
channel ID can
only be 0.
Number of channels
1
For the ATI
port, the
number of
channels can
only be 1.
Audio interface
SPC
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 19-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ATI audio private line service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19 Configuring the ATI Service
Figure 19-2 Flowchart for configuring the ATI audio private line service
Start
Add ATI boards
Confirm the ATI boards
Configure the attribute
of the ATI port
Establish the SPC
Is the QoS
qualified?
No
Modify the attribute of
the ATI port
Yes
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add ATI boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 ati
huawei(config)#board add 0/13 ati
Step 2 Confirm the ATI boards.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13
Step 3 Configure the attribute of the ATI port corresponding to modem A.
huawei(config)#ati
huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/7/0 recvgain 28 transgain 9 userline 2Wire
Step 4 Configure the attribute of the ATI port corresponding to modem B.
huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/13/0 recvgain 28 transgain 9 userline
2Wire
huawei(config-ati)#quit
Step 5 Establish the SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/7/0/0 end 0/13/0/0 1 normal
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19 Configuring the ATI Service
Result
The terminals are connected to the two modems. Then, the terminals can communicate with each
other through the private line.
19.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the
E&M Trunk Interface
This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, and set up an SPC between
port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0. The SPC type is the private line. Thus, subscribers connected to port
0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 can communicate with each other after taking the phones off the hook.
Networking
Figure 19-3 shows the example network for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk
interface.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the ATI service board as an example.
Figure 19-3 Example network for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk interface
UA5000
P
V
M
B
P
V
M
B
0/7
0/13
A
T
I
A
T
I
PCMMUX/PBX
Telephone A
Telephone B
Data Plan
Table 19-2 provides the data plan for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19 Configuring the ATI Service
Table 19-2 Data plan for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk service
Data Type
Item
Data
Remarks
ATI board
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/7, 0/13
-
E&M interface
Subscriber line mode
4wire
4-wire
Rx gain
-10 dB
-
Tx gain
+5 dB
-
E&M working mode
1E1M
-
Application type
em-signal
EM signalling
application
SPC type
private
Private line
Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID
0/7/0/0
For the ATI
port, the
channel ID can
only be 0.
End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID
0/13/0
For the ATI
port, the
channel ID can
only be 0.
Total number of channels
1
For the ATI
port, the
number of
channels can
only be 1.
SPC
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 19-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19 Configuring the ATI Service
Figure 19-4 Flowchart for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk interface
Start
Add ATI boards
Confirm the ATI boards
Configure the attribute
of the ATI port
Establish the SPC
No
Is the QoS
qualified?
Modify the attribute of
the ATI port
Yes
End
Context
l
Currently, the ATI board supports only the 1E1M mode.
l
After the EM mode and the subscriber line mode are changed, the corresponding DIP
switches on the board need to be adjusted.
– The EM mode is implemented through DIP switches SW3-SW8. Currently, the ATI
board supports only the 1E1M mode. Therefore, this section describes only the ON/
OFF relationship between the 1E1M mode and the DIP switches. The following table
lists the ON/OFF relationship between the 1E1M mode and the DIP switches.
SW3SW8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1E1M
mode
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
– The subscriber line mode is implemented through DIP switches SW9-SW14. The
following table lists the ON/OFF relationship between the subscriber line mode and the
DIP switches.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
19 Configuring the ATI Service
SW9-SW14
1
2
3
4
2-wire audio
port
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
4-wire audio
port
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Procedure
Step 1 Add ATI boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 ati
huawei(config)#board add 0/13 ati
Step 2 Confirm the ATI boards.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13
Step 3 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber A is connected.
huawei(config)#ati
huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/7/0 recvgain 20 transgain 24 userline
4Wire workmode 1E1M
Step 4 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber B is connected.
huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/13/0 recvgain 20 transgain 24 userline
4Wire
workmode 1E1M
Step 5 Set up an SPC
huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/7/0/0 end 0/13/0/0 1 em-signal
----End
Result
l
After subscriber A takes the phone off the hook, subscriber B hears the ringing tone and
subscriber A hears the ring back tone.
l
After subscriber B takes the phone off the hook, subscriber A and subscriber B can talk
with each other over the phone.
l
After one subscriber disconnects the call, the other subscriber hears the busy tone.
l
When the service bearer channel between the two subscribers becomes faulty, the
subscriber who takes the phone off the hook hears the busy tone.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
20
20 Configuring the CDI Service
Configuring the CDI Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the CDI service includes the function application of the CDI board and the process
for configuring the CDI service through the CDI board on the UA5000.
20.1 Introduction to the CDI Service
The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission between the analog subscriber ports through
the CDI board.
20.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension Service
This topic describes how to configure the CDI board and ASL board on the UA5000, and set up
an SPC between the CDI board and the ASL board. The SPC type is Z-extension. Thus, the
subscriber connected to the ASL board can be connected to a port on the CDI board through the
SPC.
20.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway Service
This topic describes how to configure the PBX-Bothway service to set up a private SPC between
the ports on two CDI boards. Thus, the bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2 subscribers
is implemented.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
20 Configuring the CDI Service
20.1 Introduction to the CDI Service
The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission between the analog subscriber ports through
the CDI board.
Service Description
The CDI board implements the transparent extension of the POTS port (Z interface) of the
connected LE between the CDI port and the ASL port through the following ways:
l
Digital/Analog conversion
l
Transparent transmission
l
Host signaling processing
Z interface is an analog phone interface. In the access network, Z interface extension service is
applicable to the following two scenarios:
l
The V5 interface is not enabled for interconnection with the LE in the network. There is a
certain market demand for the analog phone service.
l
The analog phone of one LE is connected to another LE through the Z interface extension
without changing the charging mode. This can save the toll charge.
Service Specifications
l
The CDI board is connected to the analog line. The CDI port functions as an analog phone.
l
The CDI board supports the following services:
– Z interface extension
– PBX-bothway
– E1-direct dialing in (E1-DDI)
l
The Rx gain of the CDI board ranges from -22.5 dB to -3 dB. The Tx gain ranges from -8.5
dB to +13 dB. The adjustment step is 0.5 dB.
20.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension
Service
This topic describes how to configure the CDI board and ASL board on the UA5000, and set up
an SPC between the CDI board and the ASL board. The SPC type is Z-extension. Thus, the
subscriber connected to the ASL board can be connected to a port on the CDI board through the
SPC.
Networking
The CDI board is connected to subscriber B of the PBX through the Z interface. Subscriber A
is connected to a port on the CDI board through a private SPC. In this way, the Z interface
extension function is realized. Figure 20-1 shows the example network of the Z interface
extension.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
20 Configuring the CDI Service
Figure 20-1 Example network of the Z interface extension
LE
0/8
UA5000
0/11
P P
C
A
A
V V
M M
D
S
S
I
L
L
B B
Z interface
PBX
Phone B
Phone C
Phone A
Data Plan
Table 20-1 provides the data plan for configuring the Z interface extension.
Table 20-1 Data plan for configuring the Z interface extension
Data Type
Item
Data
Remarks
CDI board
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/8
-
ASL board
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/11
-
CDI port
Shelf ID/slot ID/port
ID
0/8/0
-
Rx gain
-7 dB
-
Tx gain
-5 dB
-
Dial-up mode
DTMF
Dual tone
Supports delayed
dialing
no
Not supported
Working mode
DDI
-
Ringing
Normal
-
Application type
Z-extension
Z interface extension
SPC type
private
Only private line can
be supported
SPC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Data Type
20 Configuring the CDI Service
Item
Data
Remarks
Start shelf ID/slot ID/
port ID/channel ID
0/8/0/0
-
End shelf ID/slot ID/
port ID/channel ID
0/11/0/0
-
Total number of
channels
1
Only one B channel
can be occupied.
Context
The CDI port supports only the private SPC.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 20-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the Z interface extension.
Figure 20-2 Flowchart for configuring the Z interface extension
Start
Add CDI boards
Confirm CDI boards
Configure the attributes
of the CDI port
Set up an SPC
QoS qualified?
No
Modify the attributes
of the CDI port
Yes
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a CDI board and an ASL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
20 Configuring the CDI Service
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 cdi
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 asl
Step 2 Confirm the CDI board and the ASL board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
Step 3 Modify the attributes of the CDI port.
huawei(config)#cdi
huawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/8/0 recvgain 31 transgain 7 dialmode DTMF
delaydial no workmode DDI ringmode 4
huawei(config-cdi)#quit
Step 4 Set up an SPC
huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 z-extension
----End
Result
When subscriber C dials the number of subscriber A, the phone of subscriber B should ring.
That is, the phone of subscriber B functions as the phone of subscriber A.
20.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway Service
This topic describes how to configure the PBX-Bothway service to set up a private SPC between
the ports on two CDI boards. Thus, the bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2 subscribers
is implemented.
Networking
One CDI board (in slot 0/8) is connected to PBX-1 through a twisted pair (Z interface). The
other CDI board (in slot 0/11) is connected to PBX-2 through a twisted pair (Z interface). Figure
20-3 shows the example network for configuring the PBX-bothway service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board
is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control
is not described here.
This example considers the CDI service board as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
20 Configuring the CDI Service
Figure 20-3 Example network for configuring the PBX-bothway service
0/8
UA5000
P
0/11
P
A C
C
A
A
V V
M M
S D
D
S
S
L
I
L L
B B
I
Z interface
Z interface
PBX-1
PBX-2
Data Plan
Table 20-2 provides the data plan for configuring the PBX-bothway service.
Table 20-2 Data plan for configuring the PBX-bothway service
Data Type
Item
Data
Remarks
CDI board
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/8, 0/11
-
SPC
Application type
PBX-bothway
PBX-bothway
connection
SPC type
private
Private line type
Start shelf ID/slot ID/
port ID/channel ID
0/8/0/0
-
End Shelf ID/slot ID/
port ID/channel ID
0/11/0/0
-
Total number of
channels
1
Only one B channel
is occupied.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 20-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the CDI service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
20 Configuring the CDI Service
Figure 20-4 Flowchart for configuring the CDI service
Start
Add CDI boards
Confirm CDI boards
Configure the attributes
of the CDI port
Set up an SPC
QoS qualified?
No
Modify the attributes
of the CDI port
Yes
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a CDI board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 cdi
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 cdi
Step 2 Confirm the CDI board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
Step 3 Set up an SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 PBX-bothway
Step 4 If the service quality cannot meet the requirement, you need to change port attributes.
----End
Result
A private SPC is set up between the ports on the two CDI boards. PBXs should be able to initiate
calls between each other. In this way, the PBX-bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2
subscribers is implemented. In addition, the service quality can meet the requirement.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
Configuring the Sub-rate Service
About This Chapter
This topic describes how to configure the sub-rate (SRX) service on a single-NE or cross-NE
network.
Sub-rate
In the data communication system, especially on the DDN network, the communication rate that
is smaller than 64 kbit/s is called sub-rate.
l
The circuits of each sub-rate are multiplexed to the 64-kbit/s digital channel. The
multiplexing of the sub-rates complies with ITU-T X.50.
l
In the application, the sub-rate service provides the synchronous/asynchronous V.24
physical layer channel with low rate. In this manner, the bandwidth usage of the system is
high. Therefore, the sub-rate service is commonly used on the electricity private network
or the railway private network.
l
The sub-rate service is a method of implementing sub-rate, which is supported by the SRX
board. The SRX board supports the multiplexing/demultiplexing of a maximum of five
sub-rate services to a 64-kbit/s service.
X.50 Protocol
The X.50 protocol is used to multiplex/demultiplex the physical layer data channel. The
procedure is as follows: The sub-rate is multiplexed to the 64-kbit/s physical channel, the data
is transmitted, and then the sub-rate channel is demultiplexed after the data is transmitted to the
destination.
The X.50 protocol has two versions, namely, DIVISION3 and DIVISION2, corresponding to
the structures of twenty 8-bit envelopes and eighty 8-bit envelopes. The UA5000 uses
DIVISION3. Table 21-1 shows the envelope structure of DIVISION3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
Table 21-1 Envelope structure of DIVISION3
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Phase 4
Phase 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The sequence of sending envelopes is from 1 to 20 and the envelopes are divided into five phases
by row. When two sub-rates are interconnected, ensure that the timeslots, phases, and envelopes
of the two sub-rates are the same. Otherwise, the operation fails.
By default, an envelope corresponds to a 2.4-kbit/s sub-rate channel and the combination of
multiple envelopes can form different sub-rate channels, such as 4.8-kbit/s sub-rate channel, 9.6kbit/s sub-rate channel, 19.2-kbit/s sub-rate channel, and 48-kbit/s sub-rate channel.
V.24 Interface
The V.24 interface is the RS232 interface, of the DB25 type, which is used for data
communication for the rate that is smaller than 64 kbit/s.
21.1 Configuring the Single-NE Sub-Rate Service
This topic describes how to configure the sub-rate service in the UA5000 cross-NE networking
mode.
21.2 Configuring the Cross-NE Sub-Rate Service
This topic describes how to configure the sub-rate service in the UA5000 cross-NE networking
mode.
21.3 Configuration Example of the Single-NE Sub-Rate Service
This topic describes how to configure the single-NE sub-rate service and transmit the sub-rate
service on the electricity private network.
21.4 Configuration Example of the Cross-NE Sub-Rate Service
This topic describes how to configure the cross-NE sub-rate service and transmit the sub-rate
service on the railway private network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
21.1 Configuring the Single-NE Sub-Rate Service
This topic describes how to configure the sub-rate service in the UA5000 cross-NE networking
mode.
Application Context
The sub-rate service is commonly used on the electricity private network and railway private
network to transmit certain services whose data traffic is light but that has high requirements on
stability and security. The single-NE sub-rate service refers to the service on a network wherein
two sub-rate end users are connected to the same UA5000. Therefore, in the single-NE
networking mode, the two sub-rate end users must be within the management range of the same
UA5000.
Precautions
When configuring the SPC, ensure that the settings of the channel and attributes of the local end
are the same as the settings of the channel and attributes of the peer end. For example, if the
channel ID of one end is 0/6/0/0 and the peer end is in slot 0/7, the port and channel of the peer
end must be 0, namely, the channel ID of the peer end is 0/7/0/0. In addition, the sub-rate, normal
phase, isolating phase, synchronization, asynchronization, and multiplexing protocol of the local
end must be the same as these settings of the peer end.
Data Plan
Before configuring the single-NE sub-rate service, you need to plan the data for the items listed
in Table 21-2.
Table 21-2 Data plan for configuring the single-NE sub-rate service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Device
Item
Remarks
UA5000
SRX port and channel ID
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as that of the
peer end, for details, see
"Precautions".
Multiplexing protocol type of the
SRX board
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as that of the
peer end.
Sub-rate of the SRX board
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as that of the
peer end.
Working mode of the SRX board
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as that of the
peer end.
Asynchronous character length of
the SRX board
Set this parameter when the working
mode is the asynchronous mode.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Device
SRX user
terminal
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
Item
Remarks
Phase mode of the SRX port
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as that of the
peer end.
Block mode of the SRX port
-
Multiplexing protocol type
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as that of the
peer end.
Transmission rate
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as that of the
peer end.
Procedure
21.1.1 Configuring the SRX Board
This topic describes how to configure the SRX board. When you configure the single-NE subrate service, you need to configure two SRX boards.
Precaution
The configurations, such as port ID, channel ID, board attribute, and port attribute of the two
SRX boards on which the sub-rate is supported must be the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add two SRX boards.
Step 2 Run the board confirm command to confirm the two SRX boards.
Step 3 Run the interface srx command to enter the SRX mode.
Step 4 (Optional) Run the board set command to set the asynchronous character length, multiplexing
protocol type, sub-rate number, and working mode of the two SRX boards.
NOTE
You can run the display rate template command to query the details about the sub-rate profile.
Step 5 (Optional) Run the port set command to set the attributes of the port on the SRX board, including
the phase mode and the block mode.
----End
Example
To add SRX board in slot 0/8, set the working mode of the board to asynchronous, the
asynchronous character length to 5, the sub-rate profile to 1, and the multiplexing protocol to
twenty 8-bit packets envelopes of the X.50 protocol (S bit = 1), and the phase mode of ports
0/8/0 to isolating and the block mode to unblocked, do as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 SRX
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
huawei(config)#interface srx 0/8
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#board set syn-mode 1 protocol 3 rate-id 1 asyn-length 5
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#port set 0 blockmode unblocked phasemode interval
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#quit
21.1.2 Configuring the SPC
This topic describes how to configure the SPC. After configuring the SRX boards and the SRX
port attributes, you need to configure the internal SPC between two SRX ports to implement the
sub-rate service.
Precaution
When configuring the SPC, ensure that the settings of the channel and attributes of the local end
are the same as the settings of the channel and attributes of the peer end. For example, if the
channel ID of one end is 0/6/0/0 and the peer end is in slot 0/7, the port and channel of the peer
end must be 0, namely, the channel ID of the peer end is 0/7/0/0. In addition, the sub-rate, normal
phase, isolating phase, synchronization, asynchronization, and multiplexing protocol of the local
end must be the same as these settings of the peer end.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the spc add an-spc command to configure the internal SPC between two SRX ports.
NOTE
For the SRX port, the start and end channel IDs are always 0, the number of channels (channelnum) can
only be set to 1, and the application type can only be set to normal.
----End
Example
To configure the internal SPC between the SRX port 0/8/0 and 0/9/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/9/0/0 1 normal
21.2 Configuring the Cross-NE Sub-Rate Service
This topic describes how to configure the sub-rate service in the UA5000 cross-NE networking
mode.
Application Context
The sub-rate service is commonly used on the electricity private network and railway private
network to transmit certain services whose data traffic is light but that has high requirements on
stability and security. The cross-NE sub-rate service refers to the service in a network wherein
two SRX end users are connected to different UA5000s. This service is used in the scenario
wherein the two SRX end users are far away from each other.An internal SPC between the
PVM and the SRX board is established in each of the two UA5000s. The two UA5000s are
connected to each other through the E1 line of the PVM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
Precautions
When configuring the SPC, ensure that the settings of the channel and attributes of the local end
are the same as the settings of the channel and attributes of the peer end. For example, if the
channel ID of one end is 0/6/0/0 and the peer end is in slot 0/7, the port and channel of the peer
end must be 0, namely, the channel ID of the peer end is 0/7/0/0. In addition, the sub-rate, normal
phase, isolating phase, synchronization, asynchronization, and multiplexing protocol of the local
end must be the same as these settings of the peer end.
Data Plan
Before configuring the cross-NE sub-rate service, you need to plan the data for the items listed
in Table 21-3.
NOTE
The data of the two UA5000 is same. Therefore, the data of one UA5000 is described here.
Table 21-3 Data plan for configuring the Cross-NE sub-rate service
Device
Item
Remarks
UA5000
SRX port and channel ID
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value of
the peer end.
Multiplexing protocol type of the
SRX board
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value
the peer end.
Sub-rate of the SRX board
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value
the peer end.
Working mode of the SRX board
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value
the peer end.
Asynchronous character length of
the SRX board
Set this parameter when the working
mode is the asynchronous mode.
Phase mode of the SRX port
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value
the peer end.
Block mode of the SRX port
-
PVM E1 port and channel ID
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value of
the peer E1 port and channel.
Multiplexing protocol type
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value
the SRX board.
SRX user
terminal
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Device
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
Item
Remarks
Transmission rate
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value
the SRX board.
Procedure
21.2.1 Configuring the SRX Board
This topic describes how to configure the SRX board. Before configuring the cross-NE sub-rate
service, you need to configure the SRX boards and the SRX port attributes of two UA5000s.
Precaution
The configurations, such as port ID, channel ID, board attribute, and port attribute of the two
SRX boards on which the sub-rate is supported must be the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SRX board of one UA5000.
1.
Run the board add command to add an SRX board.
2.
Run the board confirm command to confirm the SRX board.
3.
Run the board set command to set the asynchronous character length, multiplexing
protocol type, sub-rate number, and working mode of the SRX board.
NOTE
You can run the display rate template command to query the details about the sub-rate profile.
4.
Run the port set command to set the port attributes of the SRX board, including the phase
mode and the block mode.
Step 2 Configure the SRX board of the other UA5000.
The settings of the two UA5000s are the same. Note: The configurations of the SRX boards and
the attributes of the SRX ports of the UA5000s must be the same.
----End
Example
To add SRX board in slot 0/8, set the working mode of the board to asynchronous, the
asynchronous character length to 5, the sub-rate profile to 1, and the multiplexing protocol to
twenty 8-bit packets envelopes of the X.50 protocol (S bit = 1), and the phase mode of ports
0/8/0 to isolating and the block mode to unblocked, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 SRX
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
huawei(config)#interface srx 0/8
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#board set syn-mode 1 protocol 3 rate-id 1 asyn-length 5
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#port set 0 blockmode unblocked phasemode interval
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#quit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
21.2.2 Configuring the SPC
This topic describes how to configure the SPC. After configuring the SRX boards and the SRX
port attributes, you need to configure the internal SPC between the SRX port and the E1 port on
the PVM board to implement the sub-rate service.
Precaution
l
Ensure that the start port and attribute of the SPC of the local device are consistent with
the end port and attribute of the SPC channel of the peer device. For example, if the local
end uses channel 0/6/0/0 and the peer end is slot 0/7, the peer end must use channel 0/7/0/0.
In addition, the configurations of the E1 port and attribute of the SPCs on the two devices
must be consistent.
l
On the two UA5000 devices, the port attribute and the timeslot of the E1 port in the SPC
must be consistent.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the spc add an-spc command to configure the internal SPC between the SRX port and the
E1 port on the PVM board.
NOTE
For the sub-rate port, the start channel ID is always 0 and the number of channels (channelnum) can only
be set to 1. For the E1 port, the channel ID can only be 1.
----End
Example
To configure the internal SPC between the SRX port 0/8/0 and the E1 port 0/4/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/4/1/1 1 normal
21.3 Configuration Example of the Single-NE Sub-Rate
Service
This topic describes how to configure the single-NE sub-rate service and transmit the sub-rate
service on the electricity private network.
Service Requirements
On the electricity private network, the temperature data of one site is stored in PC_2. The
temperature data of this site needs to be transmitted to PC_1 of the center site of this area so that
the center site can monitor the temperature and humidity of the minor sites in real time.
Implementation method: Connect two PCs to two SRX boards of the same UA5000 because the
two electricity sites can be managed by one UA5000. The data is transmitted over the internal
SPC established between the two SRX boards.
Figure 21-1 shows the example network for configuring the single-NE sub-rate service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
Figure 21-1 Example network for configuring the single-NE sub-rate service
0/8 0/9
UA5000
P P
V V
M M
S S
R R
X X
Sub-rate modem
Sub-rate modem
PC_1
PC_2
Procedure
Step 1 Add and confirm the SRX boards.
The two boards are in slots 0/8 and 0/9.
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
add 0/8
add 0/9
confirm
confirm
SRX
SRX
0/8
0/9
Step 2 Configure the SRX boards and the SRX port attributes.
Set the working mode of the board to Asynchronous, the asynchronous character length to 5,
the sub-rate profile to 1, and the multiplexing protocol to twenty 8-bit packets envelopes of the
X.50 protocol (S bit = 1).
Set the phase mode of ports 0/8/0 and 0/9/0 to isolating and the block mode to unblocked.
huawei(config)#interface srx 0/8
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#board set syn-mode 1
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#port set 0 blockmode
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#quit
huawei(config)#interface srx 0/9
huawei(config-if-srx-0/9)#board set syn-mode 1
huawei(config-if-srx-0/9)#port set 0 blockmode
huawei(config-if-srx-0/9)#quit
protocol 3 rate-id 1 asyn-length 5
unblocked phasemode interval
protocol 3 rate-id 1 asyn-length 5
unblocked phasemode interval
Step 3 Establish the internal SPC between the two SRX boards.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/9/0/0 1 normal
Step 4 Save the data.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
huawei(config)#save data
----End
Result
The data of PC_2 can be transmitted to PC_1 in real time.
Configuration File
board add 0/8 SRX
board add 0/9 SRX
board confirm 0/8
board confirm 0/9
interface srx 0/8
board set syn-mode 1
port set 0 blockmode
quit
interface srx 0/9
board set syn-mode 1
port set 0 blockmode
quit
spc add an-spc start
save data
protocol 3 rate-id 1 asyn-length 5
blocked phasemode interval
protocol 3 rate-id 1 asyn-length 5
blocked phasemode interval
0/8/0/0 end 0/9/0/0 1 normal
21.4 Configuration Example of the Cross-NE Sub-Rate
Service
This topic describes how to configure the cross-NE sub-rate service and transmit the sub-rate
service on the railway private network.
Service Requirements
On the railway private network, the temperature data of a railway section is stored in PC_2. The
temperature data of this railway section needs to be transmitted to PC_1 of the center site of this
railway section so that the center site can monitor the temperature of this railway section.
Implementation method: The two PCs must be connected to the SRX boards of two different
UA5000s because this railway section is so far from the center site that a UA5000 can not manage
them. The two UA500s are connected to each other through the E1 line from the PVM board.
In this manner, the data is transmitted through the internal SPC established between the SRX
board and the PVM board.
Figure 21-2 shows the example network for configuring the cross-NE sub-rate service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
Figure 21-2 Example network for configuring the cross-NE sub-rate service
E1
0/4
UA5000_1
P P
V V
M M
SDH
0/8
S
R
X
E1
0/4
P P
V V
M M
Sub-rate modem
PC_1
0/8
S
R
X
UA5000_2
Sub-rate modem
PC_2
Procedure
l
Configure the data of UA5000_1.
1.
Add and confirm the SRX boards.
The SRX board is in slot 0/8.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 SRX
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
2.
Configure the SRX boards and the SRX port attributes.
Set the working mode of the board to asynchronous, the asynchronous character length
to 5, the sub-rate profile to 1, and the multiplexing protocol to twenty 8-bit packets
envelopes of the X.50 protocol (S bit = 1).
Set the phase mode of port 0/8/0 to Isolating and the block mode to unblocked.
huawei(config)#interface srx 0/8
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#board set syn-mode 1 protocol 3 rate-id 1 asynlength 5
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#port set 0 blockmode unblocked phasemode
interval
huawei(config-if-srx-0/8)#quit
3.
Establish the internal SPC between the SRX port and the E1 port on the PVM board.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/4/0/1 1 normal
4.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save data
l
Configure the data of UA5000_2.
The configuration procedure of UA5000_2 is the same as that of UA5000_1 and the detailed
operation is not described here any more. Note that the settings of the SRX board, the SRX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
21 Configuring the Sub-rate Service
port attributes, the SRX port/channel and the E1 timeslot of the internal SPC of UA5000_2
must be the same as the corresponding settings of UA5000_1.
----End
Result
The data of PC_2 can be transmitted to PC_1 of the center site in real time.
Configuration File
NOTE
Only the configuration scripts for UA5000_1 are provides here because the configuration procedure of the
UA5000_2 is the same as the configuration of UA5000_1.
board add 0/8 SRX
board confirm 0/8
interface srx 0/8
board set syn-mode 1 protocol 3 rate-id 1 asyn-length 5
port set 0 blockmode blocked phasemode interval
quit
spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/4/0/0 1 normal
save data
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous
Data Transmission Service Implemented
Through the DDU2 Board
About This Chapter
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the single network element (NE) and cross-NE
networking modes.
Context
The DDU2 board is used in the private line service to support the 64 kbit/s synchronous
narrowband data transmission service.
The DDU2 board provides two 64 kbit/s ports for synchronous data transmission.
22.1 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service Implemented Through
the DDU2 Board in the Single NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the UA5000 single NE networking mode.
22.2 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service Implemented Through
the DDU2 Board in the Cross-NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the UA5000 cross-NE networking mode.
22.3 Configuration Example of the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service
Implemented Through the DDU2 Board in the Single NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the single NE networking mode.
22.4 Configuration Example of the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission Service
Implemented Through the DDU2 Board in the Cross-NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the cross-NE networking mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
22.1 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data
Transmission Service Implemented Through the DDU2
Board in the Single NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the UA5000 single NE networking mode.
Application Context
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service implemented through the DDU2 board is
a private line service that is commonly carried on the private line network. The data traffic of
this service is light but the service has high requirement on stability and security. The 64 kbit/s
synchronous data transmission service implemented through the DDU2 board in the single NE
networking mode refers to the service on a network wherein two DDU2 end users are connected
to the same UA5000. Therefore, in the single NE networking mode, the two DDU2 end users
must be within the management range of the same UA5000.
Precautions
The type of the configured semi-permanent connection (SPC) must be internal SPC. In addition,
the channel and the attribute configurations of the local end must be the same as the channel and
the attribute configurations of the peer end. For example, if the channel ID of one end is 0/6/0/0
and the peer end is in slot 0/7, the port and channel of the peer end must be 0, namely, the channel
ID of the peer end is 0/7/0/0. For the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service, the start
and end channel IDs must be 0.
Data Plan
Before configuring the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service implemented through
the DDU2 board in the single NE networking mode, you need to plan the data for the items listed
in Table 22-1.
Table 22-1 Data plan for configuring the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the single NE networking mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Device
Item
Remarks
UA5000
DDU2 port and channel ID
Ensure that the value of this
parameter is the same as the value of
the peer port and channel.
DDU2 user
terminal
Transmission rate
The minimum supported rate is 64
kbit/s.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
Procedure
22.1.1 Configuring the DDU2 Board
This topic describes how to configure the DDU2 board. Before configuring the 64 kbit/s
synchronous data transmission service implemented through the DDU2 board in the single NE
networking mode, you need to configure two DDU2 boards.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add two DDU2 boards.
NOTE
The DDU2 board is not supported on the TSS slot.
Step 2 Run the board confirm command to confirm the added two DDU2 boards.
----End
Example
To add DDU2 board in slot 0/10 and confirm this board, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 DDU
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10
22.1.2 Configuring the SPC
This topic describes how to configure the SPC. After configuring the DDU2 boards, you need
to configure the internal SPC for the two DDU2 ports to implement the 64 kbit/s data
transmission service through the DDU2 board.
Precaution
The type of the configured semi-permanent connection (SPC) must be internal SPC. In addition,
the channel and the attribute configurations of the local end must be the same as the channel and
the attribute configurations of the peer end. For example, if the channel ID of one end is 0/6/0/0
and the peer end is in slot 0/7, the port and channel of the peer end must be 0, namely, the channel
ID of the peer end is 0/7/0/0. For the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service, the start
and end channel IDs must be 0.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the spc add an-spc command to configure the internal SPC between the two DDU2 boards.
NOTE
For the data users of the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service, the start and end channel IDs are
always 0, the value of channelnum can only be set to 1, and the application type can only be set to normal.
----End
Example
To configure the internal SPC between the DDU2 port 0/8/0 and 0/9/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/9/0/0 1 normal
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
22.2 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data
Transmission Service Implemented Through the DDU2
Board in the Cross-NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the UA5000 cross-NE networking mode.
Application Context
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service implemented through the DDU2 board is
a private line service that is commonly carried on the private line network. The data traffic of
this service is light but the service has high requirement on stability and security. The 64 kbit/s
synchronous data transmission service implemented through the DDU2 board in the cross-NE
networking mode refers to the service on a network wherein two DDU2 end users are connected
to different UA5000s. This service is used in the scenario wherein the two DDU2 end users are
far away from each other. An internal SPC channel between the PVM and the DDU2 board is
established in each of the two UA5000s. The two UA5000s are connected to each other through
the E1 line of the PVM board.
Precautions
The type of the configured semi-permanent connection (SPC) must be internal SPC. In addition,
the channel and the attribute configurations of the local end must be the same as the channel and
the attribute configurations of the peer end. For example, if the channel ID of one end is 0/6/0/0
and the peer end is in slot 0/7, the port and channel of the peer end must be 0, namely, the channel
ID of the peer end is 0/7/0/0. For the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service, the start
and end channel IDs must be 0.
Data Plan
Before configuring the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service implemented through
the DDU2 board in the cross-NE networking mode, you need to plan the data for the items listed
in Table 22-2.
Table 22-2 Data plan for configuring the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the cross-NE networking mode
Device
Item
Remarks
UA5000
DDU2 port and channel ID
-
PVM E1 port and channel ID
-
Transmission rate
The minimum supported rate is 64
kbit/s.
DDU2 user
terminal
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
Procedure
22.2.1 Configuring the DDU2 Board
This topic describes how to configure the DDU2 board. Before configuring the 64 kbit/s
synchronous data transmission service implemented through the DDU2 board in the cross-NE
networking mode, you need to configure the DDU2 boards.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add the DDU2 board on the two UA5000 devices.
Step 2 Run the board confirm command to confirm the added DDU2 board on the two UA5000
devices.
----End
Example
To add DDU2 board in slot 0/10 and confirm this board, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 DDU
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10
22.2.2 Configuring the SPC
This topic describes how to configure the SPC. After configuring the DDU2 board, you need to
configure the internal SPC between each of the two DDU2 ports and the E1 port on the PVM
board to implement the 64 kbit/s data transmission service through the DDU2 board.
Precaution
Ensure that the start channel of the SPC channel of the local end are consistent with the end
channel of the SPC channel of the peer end. For example, if the channel ID of one end is 0/6/0/0
and the peer end is in slot 0/7, the port and channel of the peer end must be 0, namely, the channel
ID of the peer end is 0/7/0/0. In addition, the configurations of the E1 port of the SPC channels
on the two devices must be consistent.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the spc add an-spc command to configure the internal SPC between the DDU2 port and
the E1 port.
NOTE
For the data users of the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service, the start and end channel IDs are
always 0, the value of channelnum can only be set to 1, and the application type can only be set to normal.
----End
Example
To configure the internal SPC between the DDU2 port 0/8/0 and the E1 port 0/4/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/4/1/1 1 normal
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
22.3 Configuration Example of the 64 kbit/s Synchronous
Data Transmission Service Implemented Through the
DDU2 Board in the Single NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the single NE networking mode.
Service Requirements
l
In a private network, there is a requirement for transmitting control signals between the
remote monitoring point and the monitoring center.
l
Implementation method: Connect two PCs to two DDU2 boards of the same UA5000
because the remote monitoring point is near to the monitoring center. The control signals
are transmitted through the internal SPC established between the two DDU2 boards.
l
In the following network, PC_1 represents the PC in the monitoring center and PC_2
represents the PC in the remote monitoring point.
Figure 22-1 shows the example network of the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the single NE networking mode.
Figure 22-1 Example network of the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the single NE networking mode
0/10 0/11
P P
V V
M M
UA5000
D
D
U
2
D
D
U
2
Synchronous 64 kbit/s modem
PC_1
Synchronous 64 kbit/s modem
PC_2
Procedure
Step 1 Add and confirm the DDU2 boards.
The two boards are in slots 0/10 and 0/11.
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 DDU
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 DDU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
Step 2 Establish the internal SPC between the two DDU2 boards.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/10/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 normal
Step 3 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save data
----End
Result
This indicates that PC_1 and PC_2 can transmit control signals.
Configuration File
board add 0/10 DDU
board add 0/11 DDU
board confirm 0/10
board confirm 0/11
spc add an-spc start 0/10/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 normal
save data
22.4 Configuration Example of the 64 kbit/s Synchronous
Data Transmission Service Implemented Through the
DDU2 Board in the Cross-NE Networking Mode
This topic describes how to configure the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the cross-NE networking mode.
Service Requirements
l
In a private network, there is a requirement for transmitting control signals between the
remote monitoring point and the monitoring center.
l
Implementation method: The two PCs must be connected to the DDU2 boards of two
different UA5000s because the remote monitoring point is far from the monitoring center.
The two UA500s are connected to each other through the E1 line from the PVM board. In
this manner, the data is transmitted through the internal SPC established between the DDU2
board and the PVM board.
l
In the following network, PC_1 represents the PC in the monitoring center and PC_2
represents the PC in the remote monitoring point.
Figure 22-2 shows the example network of the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the cross-NE networking mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
22 Configuring the 64 kbit/s Synchronous Data Transmission
Service Implemented Through the DDU2 Board
Figure 22-2 Example network of the 64 kbit/s synchronous data transmission service
implemented through the DDU2 board in the cross-NE networking mode
E1
0/4
UA5000_1
SDH
E1
0/10
P P
V V
M M
D
D
U
2
0/4
P P
V V
M M
Synchronous 64 kbit/s modem
PC_1
0/10
D
D
U
2
UA5000_2
Synchronous 64 kbit/s modem
PC_2
Procedure
l
Configure the data of UA5000_1.
1.
Add and confirm the DDU2 board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 DDU
uawei(config)#board confirm 0/10
2.
Establish the internal SPC between the DDU2 port and the E1 port on the PVM board.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/10/0/0 end 0/4/0/1 1 normal
3.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save data
l
Configure the data of UA5000_2.
The configuration procedure of UA5000_2 is the same as that of UA5000_1 and the detailed
operation is not described here any more. Note that the configuration of the channel ID of
the DDU2 port and the timeslot of the E1 port of the internal SPC on UA5000_2 must be
consistent with the configuration on UA5000_1.
----End
Result
The PC_1 and PC_2 can transmit control signals.
Configuration File
NOTE
Only the configuration scripts for UA5000_1 are provided here because the configuration procedure of
UA5000_2 is the same as the configuration of UA5000_1.
board add 0/10 DDU
board confirm 0/10
spc add an-spc start 0/10/0/0 end 0/4/0/1 1 normal
save data
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
23
23 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent
Transmission
Configuration Example of the U Interface
Transparent Transmission
In this example, the UA5000 is configured with two DSL boards. One DSL board is connected
to the DDN node machine through the U interface. The services on the U interface are transmitted
transparently to the terminal that is connected to the other DSL board through the SPC. Thus,
the transmission distance of the DDN node machine can be extended.
Context
l
Only the PVMD supports U interface transparent transmission, whereas the PVMB does
not support U interface transparent transmission.
l
The port on the DSL board that is connected to the network must work in the MNT mode,
whereas the port on the DSL board that is connected to the subscriber must work in the
MLT mode.
Networking
Figure 23-1 shows the example network for configuring the U interface transparent
transmission.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
23 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent
Transmission
Figure 23-1 Example network for configuring the U interface transparent transmission
DDN node
U interface
0/8
UA5000
0/11
P P
A
D
D
A A
V V
M M
S S
S
S S
L
L
L L
D D
L
U interface
Customer A
Data Plan
Table 23-1 provides the data plan for configuring the U interface transparent transmission.
Table 23-1 Data plan for configuring the U interface transparent transmission
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port or Device
Item
Data
DSL board connected to the
network
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/8
DSL board connected to the
subscriber
Shelf ID/slot ID
0/11
SPC
Application type
normal
SPC type
an-spc
Start shelf ID/slot ID/port
ID/channel ID
0/8/0/0
End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/
channel ID
0/11/0/0
Total number of channels
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Port or Device
23 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent
Transmission
Item
Data
Subtype of the start port
MNT
Subtype of the end port
MLT
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 23-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the U interface transparent transmission.
Figure 23-2 Flowchart for configuring the U interface transparent transmission
Start
Add boards
Confirm the boards
Configure an SPC
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add two DSL boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 dsl
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 dsl
Step 2 Confirm the DSL boards.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
Step 3 Configure an SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 2 normal startportsubtype
mnt endportsubtype mlt
Step 4 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
23 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent
Transmission
Result
The DSL board helps to extend the transmission distance of the U interface of the DDN node
machine. This ensures that the coverage of the services is extended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
Configuration Example of the PHS
Service
This topic describes how to configure the personal handyphone system (PHS) service on the
UA5000 on the FTTx network.
Prerequisite
l
The OLT must be configured so that it can automatically discover the UA5000 and can
register for the UA5000.
l
The device must be connected properly, the board must be inserted in the corresponding
slot, and the board must work in the normal state.
Service Requirements
After the PHS service network is reconstructed according to the following networking plan, the
PHS service is not affected.
Networking
Figure 24-1 shows the example network for configuring the PHS service.
Figure 24-1 Example network for configuring the PHS service
OLT
PON access
Splitter
PON uplink
PON uplink
PS 1
U interface
E1
PHS MG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
CSC
UA5000
MA5616
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
CS
PS N
312
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
The MA5616 receives the service from the PHS base station through the DSLD board and
transmits the service to the UA5000 transparently, then the UA5000 transparently transmits and
converges the service and sends the signals of the base station to the cell site controller (CSC)
for processing through the U interface of the DSL board. In this manner, the UA5000 carries
and transmits the PHS service.
Data Plan
l
Table 24-1 provides the data plan for configuring the PHS service on the OLT.
l
Table 24-2 provides the data plan for configuring the PHS service on the UA5000.
l
Table 24-3 provides the data plan for configuring the PHS service on the MA5616.
Table 24-1 Data plan for configuring the PHS service on the OLT
Item
Data
Clock VLAN
14
Service VLAN
13
IP address of the L3 interface
10.13.1.100/24
PON access port
0/8/3
GE access port
0/2/0
Table 24-2 Data plan for configuring the PSH service on the UA5000 (convergence side)
Item
Data
Host configuration
Service IP address
10.13.1.101/24
Uplink port
0/4/1 (GE Optical port)
IUA link configuration
IUA link set ID
0
IUA link ID
0
Local port ID
11000
Local IP address
10.13.1.101
Peer port ID
12000
Peer IP address
10.13.1.102
SPC configuration
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
Item
Data
Shelf/slot/port/timeslot of the DSLD board
0/6/0/0
0/6/1/0
0/6/2/0
0/6/3/0
Local port ID
16400, 16408, 16416, and 16424
Local IP address
10.13.1.101
Peer port ID
57600, 57608, 57616, and 57624
Peer IP address
10.13.1.102
Type of the SPC starting port
MNT
Coding type of the DSP channel
5
RTP (UDP) packetization interval of the DSP
channel
10 ms
RTP payload type of the DSP channel
99
NOTE
The value must be the same as that of the MA5616.
Clock configuration
Clock VLAN
14
IP address of the L3 interface
20.20.20.10/24
Peer IP address of the L3 interface for
receiving clock packets
20.20.20.20/24
Table 24-3 Data plan for configuring the PHS service on the MA5616
Item
Data
Host configuration
Service VLAN
13
IP address of the L3 interface
10.13.1.102/24
Uplink port
0/0/0 (PON port)
Configuration of the IUA link
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
IUA link set ID
0
IUA link ID
0
Local port ID
12000
Local IP address
10.13.1.102
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
Item
Data
Peer port ID
11000
Peer IP address
10.13.1.101
SPC configuration
Shelf/slot/port/timeslot of the DSLD board
0/2/0/0
0/2/1/0
0/2/2/0
0/2/3/0
Peer port ID
16400, 16408, 16416, and 16424
Peer IP address
10.13.1.101
Local port ID
57600, 57608, 57616, and 57624
Local IP address
10.13.1.102
Type of the SPC starting port
MLT
Coding/Decoding type of a DSP
clearmode coding mode
RTP payload type of the DSP channel
99
NOTE
The value must be the same as that of the UA5000.
Clock configuration
Clock VLAN
14
Board where the adaptive clock source is
located
0/2
IP address of the L3 interface for receiving
ACM clock packets
20.20.20.20/24
Peer IP address of the L3 interface for sending
clock packets
20.20.20.10/24
Context
l
The cable from the transfer board of the DSL board on the UA5000 side is connected to
the CSC. The cable sequence on the CSC side must be blue, orange, green, and brown. The
cable sequence on the UA5000 side must be the same as the cable sequence on the CSC
side.
l
The cable from the transfer board of the DSLD board on the MA5616 side is connected to
the cell site (CS). The cable sequence on the CS side must be blue, orange, green, and
brown. The cable sequence on the UA5000 side must be the same as the cable sequence
on the CS side.
l
Ensure that the cable sequence on the CS side is the same as the cable sequence on the CSC
side. Otherwise, the following fault may occur: The calling party can make phone calls but
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
cannot hear the ring-back tone and the communication fails on both ends when the called
party picks up the phone off the hook.
l
After the IP addresses of the three devices are configured based on the networking, ensure
that the network is accessible. If the network fails, modify the gateway or VLAN
configuration to ensure the connectivity of the network.
Configuration Flowchart
l
Figure 24-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the PHS service on the OLT.
l
Figure 24-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the PHS service on the UA5000.
l
Figure 24-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the PHS service on the MA5616.
Figure 24-2 Flowchart for configuring the PHS service on the OLT
Start
Create a service VLAN
and clock VLAN
Configure the IP address
of the VLAN L3 interface
Create service ports
Add GE uplink port to
the clock VLAN
Disable the unicast
suppression on the GE port
Save the data
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
Figure 24-3 Flowchart for configuring the PHS service on the UA5000
Start
Configure the
service IP address
Add a link set and links
Set up IP SPCs
Configure the clock source
Save the data
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
Figure 24-4 Flowchart for configuring the PHS service on the MA5616
Start
Configure the attributes
of the BRA port
Add a link set and links
Configure the
DSP parameter
Set up IP SPCs
Create a service VLAN and
configure its L3 interface
Configure the clock source
Add the uplink
port to the VLAN
Save the data
Configure media and
signaling IP addresses
End
Procedure
l
The procedure for configuring the PHS service on the OLT is as follows:
1.
Configure the MA5616 data on the OLT side.
(1) Create a service VLAN and clock VLAN.
huawei(config)#vlan 13 to 14 smart
(2) Configure the IP address of the VLAN L3 interface.
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 13
huawei(config-if-vlanif13)#ip address 10.13.1.100 24
huawei(config-if-vlanif13)#quit
(3) Create service ports.
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 13 epon 0/8/3 ont 1 multi-service
user-vlan 13
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 14 epon 0/8/3 ont 1 multi-service
user-vlan 14
2.
Configure the UA5000 data on the OLT side.
(1) Configure the service VLAN to the native VLAN of the uplink port.
huawei(config)#port vlan 13 0/2 0
huawei(config)#interface giu 0/2
huawei(config-if-giu-0/2)#native-vlan 0 vlan 13
huawei(config-if-giu-0/2)#quit
(2) Add GE uplink port to the clock VLAN.
huawei(config)#port vlan 14 0/2 0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
(3) Disable the unicast suppression on the uplink port.
huawei(config)#interface giu 0/2
huawei(config-if-giu-0/2)#undo traffic-suppress 0 unicast
huawei(config-if-giu-0/2)#quit
3.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
l
The procedure for configuring the PHS service on the UA5000 is as follows:
1.
Configure the service IP address.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.13.1.101 submask 255.255.255.0
gateway 10.13.1.100
huawei(interface-eth)#quit
2.
Configure the DSP parameter.
huawei(config)#dsp attribute clearmode-payload 99
RTP payload type of the DSP channel is 99.*/
3.
/*The value of the
Add a link set and links.
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 0
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 0 0 11000 10.13.1.101 12000
10.13.1.102
huawei(config-sigtran)#quit
4.
Set up IP SPCs and configure DSP channel parameters.
huawei(config)#spc
57600 2 0 1000 mnt
huawei(config)#spc
57608 2 0 1001 mnt
huawei(config)#spc
57616 2 0 1002 mnt
huawei(config)#spc
57624 2 0 1003 mnt
huawei(config)#spc
interval 10ms
huawei(config)#spc
interval 10ms
huawei(config)#spc
interval 10ms
huawei(config)#spc
interval 10ms
5.
add ip-spc start 0/6/0/0 10.13.1.101 16400 10.13.1.102
add ip-spc start 0/6/1/0 10.13.1.101 16408 10.13.1.102
add ip-spc start 0/6/2/0 10.13.1.101 16416 10.13.1.102
add ip-spc start 0/6/3/0 10.13.1.101 16424 10.13.1.102
dsp-channel connectid 0 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacketdsp-channel connectid 1 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacketdsp-channel connectid 2 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacketdsp-channel connectid 3 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacket-
Configure the clock source.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 20.20.20.10 255.255.255.0 20.20.20.1
vlan_tag 14
/*Configure the IP address of the clock interface.*/
huawei(interface-eth)#quit
huawei(config)#clock source 0 gpon 0/4/1
/*Configure the line
clock.*/
huawei(config)#clock-trans add 20.20.20.10 14 20.20.20.20
/*The clock
IP address of the MA5616 is 20.20.20.20.*/
huawei(config)#clock priority 0
6.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
l
The procedure for configuring the PHS service on the MA5616 is as follows:
1.
Configure the attributes of the BRA port.
huawei(config)#braport
huawei(config-braport)#braport attribute batset 0/2/0 0/2/7 activemode
stable-active
/*Configure the L1 activation mode of the BRA port to
stable-active.*/
2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Configure the DSP parameter.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
huawei(config)#dsp attribute payload-type clearmode-payload 99
value of the RTP payload type of the DSP channel is 99.*/
3.
/*The
Create a service VLAN and configure its L3 interface.
huawei(config)#vlan 13
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 13
huawei(config-if-vlanif13)#ip address 10.13.1.10 24
4.
Add the uplink port to the VLAN.
huawei(config)#port vlan 13 0/0 0
5.
Configure media and signaling IP addresses.
huawei(config)#voip
huawei(config)#ip address media 10.13.1.102 10.13.1.100
huawei(config)#ip address signaling 10.13.1.102
6.
Add a link set and links.
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 0 cs-mode client
/*Set the link
set mode to the client mode.*/
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 0 0 12000 10.13.1.102 11000
10.13.1.101
huawei(config-sigtran)#quit
7.
Set up IP SPCs and configure DSP channel parameters.
huawei(config)#spc
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc add 0/2/0/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port
57600 remote-ip 10.13.1.101 remote-port 16400 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1000
portsubtype mlt
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc add 0/2/1/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port
57608 remote-ip 10.13.1.101 remote-port 16408 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1001
portsubtype mlt
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc add 0/2/2/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port
57616 remote-ip 10.13.1.101 remote-port 16416 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1002
portsubtype mlt
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc add 0/2/3/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port
57624 remote-ip 10.13.1.101 remote-port 16424 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1003
portsubtype mlt
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc dsp-para connectid 0 codec 4
/*Configure the
coding/decoding type of the DSP channel to clearmode coding.*/
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc dsp-para connectid 1 codec 4
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc dsp-para connectid 2 codec 4
huawei(config-spc)#ipspc dsp-para connectid 3 codec 4
huawei(config-spc)#quit
8.
Configure the clock source.
huawei(config)#vlan 14
/*Indicates the VLAN for carrying
clock packets.*/
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 14
huawei(config-if-vlanif14)#ip address 20.20.20.20 24
huawei(config-if-vlanif14)#quit
huawei(config)#port vlan 14 0/0 0
huawei(config)#acm-clock-ip 20.20.20.20 0/2
/*Configure the IP address
that receives ACM clock packets.*/
huawei(config)#clock source 0 acm-clock 0/2
/*The ACM clock functions
as the clock reference source.*/
huawei(config)#clock priority system 0
9.
Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
After the MA5616 generates the clock source recovery alarm, you can run the display clock
source command to query the status of the clock source of the UA5000. If the following
information is displayed, it indicates that the clock of the UA5000 is synchronized with the
clock of the MA5616 normally.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
huawei#display clock source
------------------------------------------------------------------------Index
config
type
source
state
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
YES
acm
0/ 4
Normal
1
NO
--/ -/ --2
NO
--/ -/ --3
NO
--/ -/ --4
NO
--/ -/ --5
NO
--/ -/ --6
NO
--/ -/ --7
NO
--/ -/ --8
NO
--/ -/ --9
NO
--/ -/ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
l
The local fixed-line call, local mobile call, long-distance call, and certain special telecom
call services (such as the 114, the phone number query service and 10000, the customer
service hotline service, provided by China Telecom), through the PHS phone can be made
normally and the communication quality is good. In addition, short messages can be sent
between the PSH phone and the mobile phone.
Configuration File
The configuration script on the OLT is as follows:
vlan 13 to 14 smart
interface vlanif 13
ip address 10.13.1.100 24
quit
service-port vlan 13 epon 0/8/3 ont 1 multi-service user-vlan 13
service-port vlan 14 epon 0/8/3 ont 1 multi-service user-vlan 14
interface giu 0/2
native-vlan 0 vlan 13
quit
port vlan 14 0/2 0
interface giu 0/2
undo traffic-suppress 0 unicast
quit
save data
The configuration script on the UA5000 is as follows:
interface eth
ip address 10.13.1.101 submask 255.255.255.0 gateway 10.13.1.100
quit
sigtran
iua-linkset add 0
iua-link add 0 0 11000 10.13.1.101 12000 10.13.1.102
quit
spc add ip-spc start 0/6/0/0 10.13.1.101 16400 10.13.1.102 57600 2 0 1000
spc add ip-spc start 0/6/1/0 10.13.1.101 16408 10.13.1.102 57608 2 0 1001
spc add ip-spc start 0/6/2/0 10.13.1.101 16416 10.13.1.102 57616 2 0 1002
spc add ip-spc start 0/6/3/0 10.13.1.101 16424 10.13.1.102 57624 2 0 1003
spc dsp-channel connectid 0 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacket-interval 10ms
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
mnt
mnt
mnt
mnt
321
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
24 Configuration Example of the PHS Service
spc dsp-channel connectid 1 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacket-interval 10ms
spc dsp-channel connectid 2 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacket-interval 10ms
spc dsp-channel connectid 3 dsp-voice-code 5 dsp-rtppacket-interval 10ms
interface eth
ip address 20.20.20.10 255.255.255.0 20.20.20.1 vlan_tag 14
quit
clock source 0 0/4/1
clock-trans add 20.20.20.10 14 20.20.20.20
save
The configuration script on the MA5616 is as follows:
braport
huawei(config-braport)#braport attribute batset 0/2/0 0/2/7 activemode stableactive
dsp attribute payload-type clearmode-payload 99
vlan 13
interface vlanif 13
ip address 10.13.1.10 24
port vlan 13 0/0 0
voip
ip address media 10.13.1.102 10.13.1.100
ip address signaling 10.13.1.102
sigtran
iua-linkset add 0 cs-mode client
iua-link add 0 0 12000 10.13.1.102 11000 10.13.1.101
quit
spc
ipspc add 0/2/0/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port 57600 remote-ip 10.13.1.101
remote-port 16400 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1000 portsubtype mlt
ipspc add 0/2/1/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port 57608 remote-ip 10.13.1.101
remote-port 16408 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1001 portsubtype mlt
ipspc add 0/2/2/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port 57616 remote-ip 10.13.1.101
remote-port 16416 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1002 portsubtype mlt
ipspc add 0/2/3/0 local-ip 10.13.1.102 local-port 57624 remote-ip 10.13.1.101
remote-port 16424 linksetno 0 interfaceid 1003 portsubtype mlt
ipspc dsp-para connectid 0 codec 4
ipspc dsp-para connectid 1 codec 4
ipspc dsp-para connectid 2 codec 4
ipspc dsp-para connectid 3 codec 4
quit
vlan 14
interface vlanif 14
ip address 20.20.20.20 24
quit
port vlan 14 0/0 0
acm-clock-ip 20.20.20.20 0/2
clock source 0 acm-clock 0/2
save data
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
Configuring the EPON Upstream
Transmission
About This Chapter
This topic describes the Ethernet passive optical network (EPON) technology and how to
configure the EPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN.
25.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream Transmission
EPON can transmit the converged data, video, and voice over the optical fiber.
25.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream Transmission
This topic describes how to implement the EPON upstream transmission of the UA5000
MiniMSAN by configuring the EP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000
MiniMSAN and OLT form an EPON.
25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A Board
The EP1A provides one EPON uplink port and one FE/GE adaptive electrical port. By querying
the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the type, adaptive mode, rate,
working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the EP1A board.
25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A Board
By querying the statistics of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the transmitted frames,
received frames, and error frames. Thus, this helps you to detect and locate the faults of the ports
on the EP1A board in time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
25.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream Transmission
EPON can transmit the converged data, video, and voice over the optical fiber.
Service Description
Passive optical network (PON) is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) network, consisting of the optical
line terminal (OLT), optical network unit (ONU), and passive optical splitter (POS).
EPON, a type of the PON technology, has the common features, such as the high bandwidth,
wide coverage, flexible networking, and passive network nodes. EPON overcomes the
disadvantages of the Ethernet which lacks operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
measures. EPON can improve the network bandwidth and performance, and save the
maintenance cost.
The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports the EPON upstream transmission. The UA5000
MiniMSAN that works as an ONU can use the wide coverage, flexible networking, and low
maintenance cost provided by the EPON network. The UA5000 MiniMSAN works with the
OLT to provide high-bandwidth access for subscribers. At the same time, it helps increase the
density of subscribers at the OLT end.
Service Specifications
The UA5000 MiniMSAN provides the EPON upstream transmission through the EP1A board.
The detailed specifications are as follows:
l
Supports one EPON uplink port with the upstream and downstream rates 1.25 Gbit/s.
l
Supports the transmission distance of a maximum of 20 km.
25.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream
Transmission
This topic describes how to implement the EPON upstream transmission of the UA5000
MiniMSAN by configuring the EP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000
MiniMSAN and OLT form an EPON.
Prerequisite
l
The network devices and the lines must be in the normal state.
l
When the PVM board adopts the independent upstream transmission mode, the ETH1 port
on the PVM board and the FE port on the EP1A board must be connected through a network
cable.
Networking
Figure 25-1 shows the example network of the EPON upstream transmission service.
Connect the EPON port on the EP1A board in slot 0/3 of the UA5000 MiniMSAN to the splitter
through an optical fiber. Thus, the connection between the UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT is set
up.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
Figure 25-1 Example network of the EPON upstream transmission service
Router
OLT
Optical
spllitter
0/3 EPON 0/7
Optical
spllitter
EPON
I P E
P V P
1
MMA
AA
3 3
2 2
HABM shelf
EPON
UA5000 MiniMSAN_B
PBX
Phone
Phone
ISDN BRA
Phone
UA5000 MiniMSAN_A
NT1
ISDN BRA
Phone
Phone
Phone
Data Plan
Table 25-1 provides the data plan for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service.
NOTE
The following table provides only the data plan of the VoIP service of the EP1A board. For the data plans
of services such as P2P ISDN BRA and P2MP ISDN BRA, see "9.2 Configuration Example of a P2P
ISDN BRA Service Based on the H.248 Protocol" and "9.3 Configuration Example of a P2MP ISDN
BRA Service Based on the H.248 Protocol" respectively.
Table 25-1 Data plan for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Category
Item
Data
UA5000
MiniMSAN_A
The EP1A board: provides the EPON port to
interconnect to the upper-layer OLT
Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/3
MG interface data
mgid
0
code
text
protocol
H.248
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Category
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
Item
Data
tranfer
UDP
port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
IP address
Telephone number
configuration
start-negotiate-version
2
The signaling IP address of MG 0 of the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
The media IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000
10.10.10.4/24
The default gateway of MG 0 of the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
The IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Phone1–Phone32
Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/7
Telephone number:
12340001–12340032
terminal id
0–31. Terminals 0–31
correspond with
telephone numbers
12340001–12340032.
ToS strategy
IP priority and ToS priority
The default system
value
Voice enhancing
function
The function of automatic gain adjustment of
the PSTN port
Supported
The parameter value of automatic gain
adjustment of the PSTN port
15 (-24 dbm0)
The function of the spectral noise suppression
(SNS) of the PSTN port
Supported
The parameter value of the SNS of the PSTN
port
20 (20 dB)
Context
l
You need to add the EP1A board if the UA5000 MiniMSAN needs the EPON upstream
transmission. After the EP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can
implement the EPON upstream transmission through the EPON uplink port on the EP1A
board.
l
When the UA5000 MiniMSAN implements the upstream transmission through the EP1A
board, the UA5000 MiniMSAN supports only the IP services, such as VoIP, FoIP, MoIP,
and ISDN.
l
This document describes only the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. For the
configuration on the OLT, see the related guide. For example, if the OLT is the MA5680T
of Huawei, see the MA5680T Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
l
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
The configurations on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_B and UA5000 MiniMSAN_A are the
same. This topic considers the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_A as an example.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 25-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service.
Figure 25-2 Flowchart for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service
Start
Add an EP1A board
Confirm the EP1A
board
Configure the
service
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EP1A board.
You can add the EP1A board offline on the CLI, and then insert the EP1A board. You can also
insert the EP1A board into the shelf, and then add the EP1A board on the CLI.
huawei(config)#board add 0/3 h601ep1a
Step 2 Confirm the EP1A board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/3
After the EP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the EPON
upstream transmission through the EPON uplink port on the EP1A board.
Step 3 Configure the service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
NOTE
l For the configuration of the ISDN service, see "9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the
H.248 Protocol."
l For the configuration of the FoIP and MoIP services, see "11 Configuring the FoIP Service" and "12
Configuring the MoIP Service."
The slot positions for the PVM and service boards on the UA5000 MiniMSAN are different from the slot
positions described in the topics for reference. Configure the UA5000 MiniMSAN according to the
parameters that are actually used.
The following configuration procedure considers configuring the VoIP service as an example.
1.
Set the IP address of the service network port.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway
10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0
/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port,
whereas the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway of the current service network
port on
the device are inconsistent with the requirement of the actual data plan, run
this command to modify
the configuration./
/If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run
the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to
the IP address pool./
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Eth:
IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2
SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0
GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1
MacIndex............: 0
MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57
VlanID .............: 1001
IPAddress ..........:
SubMask.............:
GateWay.............:
MacIndex............:
MacAddress..........:
VlanID .............:
2.
10.10.10.4
255.255.255.0
10.10.10.1
0
00-E0-FC-44-16-57
--
Configure the QoS IP strategy.
huawei(interface-eth)#quit
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos
3.
Configure the working mode of the PVM board to the independent networking mode.
In the independent networking mode, the PVM control board provides services
independently.
huawei(config)#working mode alone
4.
Add an A32 service board and confirm the board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
huawei(config)#display board 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status
Sub0
Sub1
Online/Offline
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
PWX2
Normal
1
2
H601PVMB
Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM
3
H601EP1A
Normal
4
5
6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
7
A32
Normal
8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.
Configure the attributes of the MG interface.
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code
text
transfer udp primary-mgc-ip1 10.10.20.1 primary-mgc-port 2944 mg-media-ip1
10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248
attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
2
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
1:
("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
MG signalling IP
10.10.10.2
MG signalling Port
2944
MG media IP1
10.10.10.4
MG media IP2
MIDType
IP4_ADDR
DeviceName
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC IP:
10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Domain
Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC
IP:Standby MGC
MGC Domain
Name:-------------------------------------------------
6.
Set the H.248 protocol parameter. (Enable the three-way handshake signal function of the
H.248 protocol stack.)
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl true
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack
tr
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
------------------------------------------------three way handshake
:
true
longtimer(units: ms)
:
30000
MG provisional response timer(units: ms) :
8000
MGC provisional response timer(units: ms):
8000
MG originated pending limit
:
5
MGC originated pending limit
:
5
retransfailoption
: max retransfer
times
maxretranstimes
:
7
retransmode
:
auto
maxretranstimerval(units: ms)
:
4000
minretranstimerval(units: ms)
:
1000
-------------------------------------------------
7.
Reset the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
8.
Query whether the MG interface is normal.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
huawei(config)#display if-h248
all
---------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
TransMode State
MGPort MGIP
MGCPort MGCIP/
DomainName
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
UDP
Normal
2944
10.10.10. 2
2944
10.10.20.1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.
Configure subscriber telephone numbers.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/7/0 0/7/31 0 terminalid 0
telno 12340001
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/7
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID
TelNo
Priority TID
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 0
12340001
Cat3
A0
0 / 7 / 1 0
12340002
Cat3
A1
0 / 7 / 2 0
12340003
Cat3
A2
0 / 7 / 3 0
12340004
Cat3
A3
0 / 7 / 4 0
12340005
Cat3
A4
0 / 7 / 5 0
12340006
Cat3
A5
0 / 7 / 6 0
12340007
Cat3
A6
0 / 7 / 7 0
12340008
Cat3
A7
0 / 7 / 8 0
12340009
Cat3
A8
0 / 7 / 9 0
12340010
Cat3
A9
0 / 7 / 10 0
12340011
Cat3
A10
0 / 7 / 11 0
12340012
Cat3
A11
0 / 7 / 12 0
12340013
Cat3
A12
0 / 7 / 13 0
12340014
Cat3
A13
0 / 7 / 14 0
12340015
Cat3
A14
0 / 7 / 15 0
12340016
Cat3
A15
0 / 7 / 16 0
12340017
Cat3
A16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
0 / 7 / 17 0
12340018
Cat3
A17
0 / 7 / 18 0
12340019
Cat3
A18
0 / 7 / 19 0
12340020
Cat3
A19
0 / 7 / 20 0
12340021
Cat3
A20
0 / 7 / 21 0
12340022
Cat3
A21
0 / 7 / 22 0
12340023
Cat3
A22
0 / 7 / 23 0
12340024
Cat3
A23
0 / 7 / 24 0
12340025
Cat3
A24
0 / 7 / 25 0
12340026
Cat3
A25
0 / 7 / 26 0
12340027
Cat3
A26
0 / 7 / 27 0
12340028
Cat3
A27
0 / 7 / 28 0
12340029
Cat3
A28
0 / 7 / 29 0
12340030
Cat3
A29
0 / 7 / 30 0
12340031
Cat3
A30
0 / 7 / 31 0
12340032
Cat3
A31
-------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
10. Enable the voice enhancing function.
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/7/0 0/7/31 agc enable
agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20
Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/7
------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable
SNS value(db)
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 1 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 2 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 3 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 4 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 5 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 6 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 7 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 8 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 9 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 10 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 11 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 12 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 13 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 14 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 15 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 16 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 17 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 18 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 19 enable
15
enable
20
---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ---huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
Step 4 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the following functions:
l
The UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT can exchange data in the EPON mode.
l
The subscribers configured on the UA5000 MiniMSAN service boards can call each other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A Board
The EP1A provides one EPON uplink port and one FE/GE adaptive electrical port. By querying
the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the type, adaptive mode, rate,
working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the EP1A board.
Context
When you query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, the system displays "-" for the
status of the item that the port does not support.
l
The PON port does not support the port impedance, MDI, port rate, and port mode. The
system displays "-" for the status of these items.
l
The GE/FE adaptive electrical port does not support the port impedance. The system
displays "-" for the status of this item.
Precaution
The EP1A board supports two ports: the EPON uplink port and FE/GE adaptive electrical port.
The EPON uplink port corresponds to the logical number 0, and the FE/GE adaptive electrical
port corresponds to the logical number 1. When you query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A
board and enter a logical number that is greater than 1, the system prompts an error.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface epon command to enter the EPON mode.
Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board.
----End
Example
To query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface epon 0/3
huawei(config-if-epon-0/3)#display port state all
----------------------------------------------------------------------Port PortType Impedance MDI
Speed(Mbps) Duplex
Active
Link
----------------------------------------------------------------------0
EPON
ACTIVE
UP
1
GE ELC
AUTO
100
FULL
ACTIVE
UP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A Board
By querying the statistics of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the transmitted frames,
received frames, and error frames. Thus, this helps you to detect and locate the faults of the ports
on the EP1A board in time.
Context
The EP1A board supports two ports: the EPON uplink port and FE/GE adaptive electrical port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
25 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
If the result of the queried statistical item is 0x00, it indicates that the port does not receive
frames of this type, or the port does not carry any traffic currently.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface epon command to enter the EPON mode.
Step 2 Run the display port statistic command to query the statistics of the EPON port.
----End
Example
To query the statistics of the port on the EP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface epon 0/3
huawei(config-if-epon-0/3)#display port statistic all
Number of transmitted frames of PON port
Number of received frames of PON port
Number of received FEC error frames of PON port
Number of received HEC error frames of PON port
Number of discard frames of PON port in send direction
Number of discard frames of UNI port in send direction
Number of transmitted frames of UNI port
Number of received frames of UNI port
Number of received error frames of UNI port
=0x0cef7d90
=0x0b913fed
=0x00
=0x00
=0x00
=0x00
=0x039
=0x01228f6d
=0x00
Related Operation
Table 25-2 lists the related operation for querying the statistics about the port on the EP1A
board.
Table 25-2 Related operation for querying the statistics about the port on the EP1A board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Clear the statistics of the ports on the EP1A
board
reset port statistic
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
Configuring the GPON Upstream
Transmission
About This Chapter
This topic describes the gigabit-capable passive optical network (GPON) technology and
describes how to configure the GPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN.
26.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream Transmission
GPON is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) broadband optical transmission system. It can transmit
data of any type.
26.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream Transmission
This topic describes how to implement the GPON upstream transmission of the UA5000
MiniMSAN by configuring the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000
MiniMSAN and OLT form a GPON.
26.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A Board
The GP1A board provides one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing electrical port, one
100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports. By querying the attributes of
the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the type, impedance, auto-sensing mode, rate, working
mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the GP1A board.
26.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A Board
By querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the information about
each port on the board. This helps you to detect and locate the faults of the port on the GP1A
board in time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
26.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream Transmission
GPON is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) broadband optical transmission system. It can transmit
data of any type.
Service Description
Passive optical network (PON) is a P2MP network, consisting of the optical line terminal (OLT),
optical network unit (ONU), and passive optical splitter (POS).
GPON is defined in the ITU-T Recommendations G.984.x. It supports downstream rates of 1.2
Gbit/s and 2.4 Gbit/s, and upstream rates of 155 Mbit/s, 622 Mbit/s, 1.2 Gbit/s, and 2.4 Gbit/s.
To meet the requirements of the users for the multiple networking modes, the UA5000
MiniMSAN provides the GPON uplink port to form a GPON network with the OLT. The
UA5000 MiniMSAN that works as an ONU can use the wide coverage, flexible networking,
and low maintenance cost provided by the GPON network. The UA5000 MiniMSAN works
with the OLT to provide high-bandwidth access for subscribers. At the same time, it helps
increase the density of subscribers at the OLT end.
For details about the GPON upstream transmission, see "GPON Upstream Transmission" in
"Feature Description".
Service Specifications
The UA5000 MiniMSAN provides the GPON upstream transmission through the GP1A board.
The detailed specifications are as follows:
l
The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports one GPON uplink port with a downstream rate of 2.488
Gbit/s and an upstream rate of 1.244 Gbit/s.
l
The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports eight transmission containers (T-CONTs) with 32 GEM
ports.
l
The OLT manages and configures the services on the PON board of the UA5000
MiniMSAN through the optical network termination management and control interface
(OMCI). That is, the OLT manages the UA5000 MiniMSAN as an ONT. The OLT does
not manage the existing services of the UA5000.
26.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream
Transmission
This topic describes how to implement the GPON upstream transmission of the UA5000
MiniMSAN by configuring the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000
MiniMSAN and OLT form a GPON.
Prerequisite
l
The network devices and the lines must be in the normal state.
l
When the PVM board adopts the independent upstream transmission mode, the ETH1 port
on the PVM board and the FE port on the GP1A board must be connected through a network
cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
Networking
Figure 26-1 shows the example network of the GPON upstream transmission service.
Use the optical fiber to connect the GPON port on the GP1A board in slot 0/3 of the UA5000
MiniMSAN to the optical splitter to set up the connection with the OLT.
Figure 26-1 Example network of the GPON upstream transmission service
DDN
MGC
OLT
Optical
Splitter
Optical
Splitter
GPON
UA5000
MiniMSAN_B
PBX
Phone
0/3 GPON 0/7
I P G
P V P
1
MMA
AA
3 3
2 2
HABM Shelf
GPON
UA5000
MiniMSAN_A
NT1
Phone ISDN BRA ISDN BRA
Phone
Phone
Phone
Phone
Data Plan
Table 26-1 provides the data plan for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service.
NOTE
The following table provides only the data plan of the VoIP service. For the data plans of other services
such as the P2P ISDN BRA and P2MP ISDN BRA, see 9.2 Configuration Example of a P2P ISDN BRA
Service Based on the H.248 Protocol and 9.3 Configuration Example of a P2MP ISDN BRA Service
Based on the H.248 Protocol respectively.
In the case of the HABM shelf, the GP1A board can be inserted in slot 3. In the case of other high-density
shelves, the GP1A board can be inserted in slot 6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
Table 26-1 Data plan for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service
Category
Item
Data
UA5000
MiniMSAN_A
The GP1A board: provides the GPON port to
interconnect with the upper-layer OLT
Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/3
MG interface data
mgid
0
code
text
protocol
H.248
tranfer
UDP
port
MG: 2944
MGC: 2944
IP Address
Telephone number
configuration
start-negotiate-version
2
The signaling IP address of MG 0 of the
UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
The media IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000
10.10.10.4/24
The default gateway of MG 0 of the UA5000
10.10.10.1/24
IP address of the MGC
10.10.20.1/24
Phone1-Phone32
Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/7
Telephone number:
12340001-12340032
terminal id
0-31. Terminals 0-31
correspond with
telephone numbers
12340001-12340032
ToS strategy
IP priority and ToS priority
The default system
value
Voice enhancing
function
The function of automatic gain adjustment of
the PSTN port
Supported
The value of automatic gain adjustment of the
PSTN port
15 (-24 dbm0)
The SNS function of the PSTN port
Supported
The SNS value of the PSTN port
20 (20 db)
Context
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
You need to add the GP1A board if the UA5000 MiniMSAN needs the GPON upstream
transmission. After the GP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
implement the GPON upstream transmission through the GPON uplink port on the GP1A
board.
l
When the UA5000 MiniMSAN implements the upstream transmission through the GP1A
board, it supports not only the IP services, such as VoIP, FoIP, MoIP, and ISDN, but also
the POTS such as V5.
l
This document describes only the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. For the
configuration on the OLT, see the related guide. For example, if the OLT is the MA5680T
of Huawei, see the MA5680T Configuration Guide.
l
The configurations on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_B and UA5000 MiniMSAN_A are the
same. This topic considers the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_A as an example.
l
The ONT (that is, the UA5000 MiniMSAN) must register on the OLT before the
configuration.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 26-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service.
Figure 26-2 Flowchart for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service
Start
Add a GP1A board
Confirm the GP1A board
Configure the service
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a GP1A board.
You can add the GP1A board offline on the CLI, and then insert the GP1A board. You can also
insert the GP1A board into the shelf, and then add the GP1A board on the CLI.
huawei(config)#board add 0/3 h601gp1a
Step 2 Confirm the GP1A board.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
After the GP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the GPON
upstream transmission through the GPON uplink port on the GP1A board.
Step 3 Configure the service.
NOTE
l For the configuration of the ISDN service, see 9 Configuring the VoIP ISDN Service Based on the
H.248 Protocol.
l For the configurations of the FoIP and MoIP services, see 11 Configuring the FoIP Service and 12
Configuring the MoIP Service.
The slot positions for the PVM and service boards on the UA5000 MiniMSAN are different from the slot
positions described in the topics for reference. Configure the UA5000 MiniMSAN according to the
parameters that are actually used.
The following configuration procedure considers configuring the VoIP service as an example.
1.
Set the IP address of service network port.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway
10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0
/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port,
whereas the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are inconsistent with the
requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the
configuration./
/If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run
the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to
the IP address pool./
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Eth:
IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2
SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0
GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1
MacIndex............: 0
MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57
VlanID .............: 1001
IPAddress ..........:
SubMask.............:
GateWay.............:
MacIndex............:
MacAddress..........:
VlanID .............:
2.
10.10.10.4
255.255.255.0
10.10.10.1
0
00-E0-FC-44-16-57
--
Configure the QoS IP strategy.
huawei(interface-eth)#quit
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none
huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos
3.
Configure the working mode of the PVM board as alone.
In this independent networking mode, the PVM control board provides services
independently.
huawei(config)#working mode alone
4.
Add an A32 service board, and confirm the board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
huawei(config)#display board 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status
Sub0
Sub1
Online/Offline
------------------------------------------------------------------------0
PWX2
Normal
1
2
H601PVMB
Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
3
H601GP1A
Normal
4
5
6
7
A32
Normal
8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.
Configure the attributes of the MG interface.
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code
text
transfer udp primary-mgc-ip1 10.10.20.1 primary-mgc-port 2944 mg-media-ip1
10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248
attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
0
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
2
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
1:
("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transmode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
MG signalling IP
10.10.10.2
MG signalling Port
2944
MG media IP1
10.10.10.4
MG media IP2
MIDType
IP4_ADDR
DeviceName
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2944
MGC IP:
10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Domain
Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC
IP:Standby MGC
MGC Domain
Name:-------------------------------------------------
6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Set the H.248 protocol parameter. (Enable the three-way handshake signal function of the
H.248 protocol stack.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl true
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack
tr
------------------------------------------------three way handshake
:
true
longtimer(units: ms)
:
30000
MG provisional response timer(units: ms) :
8000
MGC provisional response timer(units: ms):
8000
MG originated pending limit
:
5
MGC originated pending limit
:
5
retransfailoption
: max retransfer
times
maxretranstimes
:
7
retransmode
:
auto
maxretranstimerval(units: ms)
:
4000
minretranstimerval(units: ms)
:
1000
-------------------------------------------------
7.
Reset the MG interface.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
8.
Query whether the MG interface is normal.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
huawei(config)#display if-h248
all
---------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID
TransMode State
MGPort MGIP
MGCPort MGCIP/
DomainName
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
UDP
Normal
2944
10.10.10. 2
2944
10.10.20.1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.
Configure the subscriber telephone numbers.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/7/0 0/7/31 0 terminalid 0
telno 12340001
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/7
-------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID
TelNo
Priority TID
-------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 0
12340001
Cat3
A0
0 / 7 / 1 0
12340002
Cat3
A1
0 / 7 / 2 0
12340003
Cat3
A2
0 / 7 / 3 0
12340004
Cat3
A3
0 / 7 / 4 0
12340005
Cat3
A4
0 / 7 / 5 0
12340006
Cat3
A5
0 / 7 / 6 0
12340007
Cat3
A6
0 / 7 / 7 0
12340008
Cat3
A7
0 / 7 / 8 0
12340009
Cat3
A8
0 / 7 / 9 0
12340010
Cat3
A9
0 / 7 / 10 0
12340011
Cat3
A10
0 / 7 / 11 0
12340012
Cat3
A11
0 / 7 / 12 0
12340013
Cat3
A12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
0 / 7 / 13 0
12340014
Cat3
A13
0 / 7 / 14 0
12340015
Cat3
A14
0 / 7 / 15 0
12340016
Cat3
A15
0 / 7 / 16 0
12340017
Cat3
A16
0 / 7 / 17 0
12340018
Cat3
A17
0 / 7 / 18 0
12340019
Cat3
A18
0 / 7 / 19 0
12340020
Cat3
A19
0 / 7 / 20 0
12340021
Cat3
A20
0 / 7 / 21 0
12340022
Cat3
A21
0 / 7 / 22 0
12340023
Cat3
A22
0 / 7 / 23 0
12340024
Cat3
A23
0 / 7 / 24 0
12340025
Cat3
A24
0 / 7 / 25 0
12340026
Cat3
A25
0 / 7 / 26 0
12340027
Cat3
A26
0 / 7 / 27 0
12340028
Cat3
A27
0 / 7 / 28 0
12340029
Cat3
A28
0 / 7 / 29 0
12340030
Cat3
A29
0 / 7 / 30 0
12340031
Cat3
A30
0 / 7 / 31 0
12340032
Cat3
A31
-------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
10. Enable the voice enhancing function.
huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/7/0 0/7/31 agc enable
agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20
Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully
huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/7
------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable
SNS value(db)
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 1 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 2 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 3 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 4 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 5 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 6 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 7 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 8 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 9 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 10 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 11 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 12 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 13 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 14 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 15 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 16 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 17 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 18 enable
15
enable
20
0 / 7 / 19 enable
15
enable
20
---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ---huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
Step 4 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can perform the following functions:
l
The UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT can transmit data in the GPON mode.
l
The subscribers configured on the service boards of the UA5000 MiniMSAN can call each
other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
26.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A Board
The GP1A board provides one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing electrical port, one
100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports. By querying the attributes of
the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the type, impedance, auto-sensing mode, rate, working
mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the GP1A board.
Context
When you query the attributes of the port on the GP1A board, the system displays "-" for the
item that the port does not support.
l
The PON port does not support the port impedance, MDI, port rate, and port mode. The
system displays "-" for these items.
l
The 100M electrical port does not support the port impedance. The system displays "-"for
this item.
l
The GE/FE auto-sensing electrical port and 100M optical port does not support the port
impedance and MDI. The system displays "-" for the two items.
l
The E1 port does not support the MDI, port rate, and port mode. The system displays "-"
for these items.
Table 26-2 lists the port types corresponding to the IDs of the ports on the GP1A board.
Table 26-2 Port types corresponding to IDs of the ports on the GP1A board
Port Description
Port ID
PON port
0
GE/FE auto-sensing electrical port
1
100M electrical port
2
100M optical port
3-4
E1 port
5-8
Precaution
The GP1A board supports nine ports. When you query the attributes of the port on the GP1A
board, the system displays an error, if you enter a logical number greater than 8.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface gpon command to enter the GPON mode.
Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the attributes of the port on the GP1A board.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
Example
To query the port attributes of the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3
huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port state all
----------------------------------------------------------------------Port PortType Impedance MDI
Speed(Mbps) Duplex
Active
Link
----------------------------------------------------------------------0
GPON
ACTIVE
UP
1
GE
AUTO
HALF
ACTIVE
UP
2
FE ELC
AUTO
AUTO
HALF
ACTIVE
UP
3
FE OPT
100
FULL
ACTIVE
UP
4
FE OPT
100
FULL
ACTIVE
UP
5
E1
75
ACTIVE
UP
6
E1
75
ACTIVE
UP
7
E1
75
ACTIVE
UP
8
E1
75
ACTIVE
UP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
26.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A Board
By querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the information about
each port on the board. This helps you to detect and locate the faults of the port on the GP1A
board in time.
Context
The GP1A board supports nine ports. They are one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing
electrical port, one 100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports.
If the result of the queried statistical item is 0x0, it indicates that the port does not receive frames
of this type, or the port does not carry any traffic currently.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface gpon command to enter the GPON mode.
Step 2 Run the display port statistic command to query the statistics of the GPON port.
----End
Example
To query the statistics of the E1 port group on the GP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do
as follows:
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3
huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port statistic e1port-group
port5:
Number of GEM frames of E1 port
=0x0
Number of E1 channels from TGMAC
=0x0
Number of E1 channels to TGMAC
=0xb278
port6:
Number of GEM frames of E1 port
=0x0
Number of E1 channels from TGMAC
=0x0
Number of E1 channels to TGMAC
=0xdf7a
port7:
Number of GEM frames of E1 port
=0x0
Number of E1 channels from TGMAC
=0x0
Number of E1 channels to TGMAC
=0x117d
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
26 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
port8:
Number of GEM frames of E1 port
Number of E1 channels from TGMAC
Number of E1 channels to TGMAC
=0x0
=0x0
=0xab7f
To query the statistics of the Ethernet port group on the GP1A board of the UA5000
MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3
huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port statistic ethport-group
port0:
Number of transmitted frames of PON port
=0x0
Number of received frames of PON port
=0x0
Number of discard frames of PON port in send direction
=0x0
port1:
Number of transmitted frames of UNI port
=0x0
Number of received frames of UNI port
=0x0
Number of discard frames of UNI port in send direction
=0x0
port2:
Number of transmitted frames of FE port
=0x0
Number of received frames of FE port
=0x0
Number of discard frames of FE port in send direction
=0x0
port3:
Number of transmitted frames of FE optics port
=0x0
Number of received frames of FE optics port
=0x0
Number of discard frames of FE optics port in send direction =0x0
port4:
Number of transmitted frames of FE optics port
=0x0
Number of received frames of FE optics port
=0x0
Number of discard frames of FE optics port in send direction =0x0
Related Operation
Table 26-3 lists the related operation for querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board.
Table 26-3 Related operation for querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Clear the statistics of the port on the GP1A
board
reset port statistic
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Configuring the Remote Subtending
About This Chapter
Configuring the remote subtending includes the description of the remote subtending networking
and the process for configuring the remote subtending through different boards on the
UA5000.
27.1 Introduction to Remote Cascading
The remote cascading facilitates the flexible networking of the UA5000, and the capacity
expansion of the UA5000.
27.2 Configuration Example of a Remote Cascaded RSU Subrack
In this example, the UA5000 is cascaded with the remote RSU using the EDTB board. The
cascading topology using E1 lines increases the service transmission distance and expands the
capacity for access users.
27.3 Configuration Example of a Remote Cascaded PV8 Subrack
In this example, the UA5000 is cascaded with the remote PV8 subrack using the EDTB board
and the remote PV8 subrack is cascaded with an RSP. This cascading topology increases the
service transmission distance and expands the capacity for access users.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
27.1 Introduction to Remote Cascading
The remote cascading facilitates the flexible networking of the UA5000, and the capacity
expansion of the UA5000.
Service Description
The UA5000 supports two cascading modes, namely, RSU cascading and PV8+RSP cascading.
RSU cascading: In the local office, the UA5000 enables users to cascade remote subracks
through the E1 ports on the PVMB or PVMD board, or through the E1 ports on the EDTB board,
expanding the capacity of the UA5000. The remote subrack uses the RSU4 or RSU8 board as
the control board. The local office and the remote office are connected using E1 lines over the
multi-service transport platform (MSTP) or synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH).
PV8+RSP cascading: In the local office, the UA5000 enables users to cascade remote PV8
subracks through the E1 ports on the PVMD or EDTB board, and the remote PV8 subracks can
be cascaded with RSP subracks, expanding the capacity of the UA5000. The local office and
the remote office are connected using the E1 lines over the MSTP or SDH.
NOTE
The PV8 subrack supports both PV8 and PV4 main control board.
27.2 Configuration Example of a Remote Cascaded RSU
Subrack
In this example, the UA5000 is cascaded with the remote RSU using the EDTB board. The
cascading topology using E1 lines increases the service transmission distance and expands the
capacity for access users.
Prerequisite
l
Data has been correctly configured on the media gateway controller (MGC).
l
E1 lines have been connected properly.
l
The media gateway (MG) interface has been configured. For details about how to configure
an MG interface, see 5 Configuring the MG Interface.
l
The RSU subrack has been configured with RSU and A32 boards.
Context
EDTB boards can be installed in slots 6-17 in the HABA or HABD subrack, slots 12-17 in the
HABC subrack, or slots 6-11 in the HABL subrack. Each subrack can be configured with a
maximum of six EDTB boards in six consecutive slots.
Networking
Figure 27-1 shows an E1-based cascading network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Figure 27-1 E1-based cascading network
MGC
H.248
E1
SDH
LAN Switch
FE/GE
E1
P P E E
UA5000
A A
V V D D
3 3
M MT T
2 2
B B B B
E1
MSTP
E1
E1
R R
S S
U U
8 8
A A A A
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
Phone 1
Phone 128
Data Plan
Table 27-1 provides the data plan for configuring an E1-based cascading network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Table 27-1 Data plan for configuring an E1-based cascading network
Category
Item
Data
IP address
IP address/Subnet mask of MG 0 on
the UA5000
10.10.10.2/255.255.255.0
IP address/Subnet mask of the default
gateway for MG 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.1/255.255.255.0
IP address/Subnet mask of the MGC
10.10.20.1/255.255.255.0
MG ID
0
Code
text
Protocol
UDP
MG port ID
2944
MGC port ID
2944
Terminal layering function
The terminal layering
function is not supported.
The terminal ID ranges from
0 to 127.
Phone 1-Phone 128
Subrack ID/Slot ID/Port ID:
1/9/0-1/12/31
Parameters of an
MG interface
Phone number
allocation
Phone number:
12340001-12340128
EDTB board
Subrack ID/Slot ID
0/6 and 0/7
Remote RSU
subrack
Subrack ID
1
Subrack type
RSU_HAFS_30(HABD)
RSU board
Subrack ID/Slot ID
1/4 and 1/5
Context
l
Ensure that the parameters of the MG interface are the same as those configured on the
MGC.
l
The EDTB board is working in independent mode (the default working mode in the system).
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 27-2 shows the flowchart for configuring a cascading network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Figure 27-2 Flowchart for configuring a cascading network
Start
Add EDTB boards
Confirm the EDTB boards
Add remote service shelf
Add inter-shelf links
Add subscribers to
slave service shelf
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add EDTB boards.
huawei(config)#board batadd 0/6 0/7 h601EDTB
Step 2 Confirm the EDTB boards.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/6
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
Step 3 Add a remote subrack.
huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#quit
huawei(config)#frame add 1
FrameType:
0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA)
2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL)
4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC)
6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM)
8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB)
10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD)
12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE)
14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA)
16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL)
18 : RSUG_ONU04A
20 : PV8_HUBT(HUBT)
22 : PV8_15(HDB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD)
MAIN_H602HABD(HABD)
MAIN_H601HABO(HABO)
SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE)
SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA)
SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_30(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_12(HABC)
RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO)
RSUG_ONU08A
PV8_19(HCB)
PV8_14(HIB)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
24 : PV8_12(HFB)
26 : PV8_6A(HMB)
28 : UAM_V (HUBM)
30 : UAFM_V(HUBE)
32 : UAMB_V(HUBB)
34 : ONUF01D100_V(HUBL)
36 : RSP_19(HCB)
38 : RSP_14(HIB)
40 : RSP_10(HGB)
42 : RSP_6B(HLB)
44 : UAS_R (HUBS)
46 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
48 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
50 : VRSP_12(HABA)
52 : HWTA(HIB_1)
54 : HWTA(HIB_3)
Please select frame type (0 ~ 54):13
Frame add successfully
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PV8_10(HGB)
PV8_6B(HLB)
UAS_V (HUBS)
UAFS_V(HUBF)
ONU60A_V(HUBO)
ONUF10DV100_V(HUBN)
RSP_15(HDB)
RSP_12(HFB)
RSP_6A(HMB)
UAM_R (HUBM)
UAFM_R(HUBE)
UAMB_R(HUBB)
ONUF01D100_R(HUBL)
VRSP_18(HABA)
HWTA(HIB_2)
Step 4 Configure the links between subracks.
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
0/6/0 end 1/4/0
0/6/1 end 1/4/1
0/6/2 end 1/4/2
0/6/3 end 1/4/3
0/6/4 end 1/4/4
0/6/5 end 1/4/5
0/6/6 end 1/4/6
0/6/7 end 1/4/7
0/6/8 end 1/5/0
0/6/9 end 1/5/1
0/6/10 end 1/5/2
0/6/11 end 1/5/3
0/6/12 end 1/5/4
0/6/13 end 1/5/5
0/6/14 end 1/5/6
0/6/15 end 1/5/7
Step 5 Query the links between subracks.
huawei(config)#display frame link
-------------------------------------------------------Record UpBoardName Frame/Slot/Port DownBoardName Frame/Slot/Port
-------------------------------------------------------1
H601EDTB
0 /6/0
RSU8
1 /4 /0
2
H601EDTB
0 /6/1
RSU8
1 /4 /1
3
H601EDTB
0 /6/2
RSU8
1 /4 /2
4
H601EDTB
0 /6/3
RSU8
1 /4 /3
5
H601EDTB
0 /6/4
RSU8
1 /4 /4
6
H601EDTB
0 /6/5
RSU8
1 /4 /5
7
H601EDTB
0 /6/6
RSU8
1 /4 /6
8
H601EDTB
0 /6/7
RSU8
1 /4 /7
9
H601EDTB
0 /6/8
RSU8
1 /5 /0
10
H601EDTB
0 /6/9
RSU8
1 /5 /1
11
H601EDTB
0 /6/10
RSU8
1 /5 /2
12
H601EDTB
0 /6/11
RSU8
1 /5 /3
13
H601EDTB
0 /6/12
RSU8
1 /5 /4
14
H601EDTB
0 /6/13
RSU8
1 /5 /5
15
H601EDTB
0 /6/14
RSU8
1 /5 /6
16
H601EDTB
0 /6/15
RSU8
1 /5 /7
--------------------------------------------------------
Step 6 Query the status of the ports on the boards cascaded between subracks.
huawei(config)#display port state 0/6
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
PortType PortState
ServiceType
SvcState
-------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 6 / 0
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 1
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 2
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 3
E1
Normal
RSU
-
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
0 / 6 / 4
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 5
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 6
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 7
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 8
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 9
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 10
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 11
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 12
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 13
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 14
E1
Normal
RSU
0 / 6 / 15
E1
Normal
RSU
-------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display port state 1/4
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
PortType PortState
ServiceType
SvcState
-------------------------------------------------------------------------1 / 4 / 0
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 4 / 1
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 4 / 2
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 4 / 3
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 4 / 4
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 4 / 5
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 4 / 6
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 4 / 7
E1
Normal
RSU
-------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display port state 1/5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
PortType PortState
ServiceType
SvcState
-------------------------------------------------------------------------1 / 5 / 0
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 5 / 1
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 5 / 2
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 5 / 3
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 5 / 4
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 5 / 5
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 5 / 6
E1
Normal
RSU
1 / 5 / 7
E1
Normal
RSU
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 7 Add and confirm service boards in the slave subrack.
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
batadd 0/9 0/12 a32
confirm 0/9
confirm 0/10
confirm 0/11
confirm 0/12
Step 8 Add remote users.
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 1/9/0 1/12/31 0 terminalid 0 telno
12340001
----End
Result
Users with phone numbers 12340001-12340128 can communicate with each other normally.
27.3 Configuration Example of a Remote Cascaded PV8
Subrack
In this example, the UA5000 is cascaded with the remote PV8 subrack using the EDTB board
and the remote PV8 subrack is cascaded with an RSP. This cascading topology increases the
service transmission distance and expands the capacity for access users.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Prerequisite
l
Data has been correctly configured on the media gateway controller (MGC).
l
E1 lines have been connected properly.
l
The media gateway (MG) interface has been configured. For details about how to configure
an MG interface, see 5 Configuring the MG Interface.
l
The PV8 subrack has been configured with PV8/PV4 and A32 boards and the RSP subrack
has been configured with RSP and A32 boards.
Context
EDTB boards can be installed in slots 6-17 in the HABA or HABD subrack, slots 12-17 in the
HABC subrack, or slots 6-11 in the HABL subrack. Each subrack can be configured with a
maximum of six EDTB boards in six consecutive slots.
Networking
Figure 27-3 shows an E1-based cascading network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Figure 27-3 E1-based cascading network
H.248
MGC
E1
LAN Switch
SDH
FE/GE
E1
UA5000
P P E E
A A
V V D D
3 3
M MT T
2 2
D D B B
E1
MSTP
E1
E1
P P
V V
8 8
HW
R R A A A A
S S 3 3 3 3
P P 2 2 2 2
Phone 1
Phone 128
Data Plan
Table 27-2 provides the data plan for configuring an E1-based cascading network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Table 27-2 Data plan for configuring an E1-based cascading network
Category
Item
Data
IP address
IP address/Subnet mask of MG 0 on
the UA5000
10.10.10.2/255.255.255.0
IP address/Subnet mask of the default
gateway for MG 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.1/255.255.255.0
IP address/Subnet mask of the MGC
10.10.20.1/255.255.255.0
MG ID
0
Code
text
Protocol
UDP
MG port ID
2944
MGC port ID
2944
Terminal layering function
The terminal layering
function is not supported.
The terminal ID ranges from
0 to 127.
Phone 1-Phone 128
Subrack ID/Slot ID/Port ID:
1/11/0-1/14/31
Parameters of an
MG interface
Phone number
allocation
Phone number:
12340001-12340128
EDTB board
Subrack ID/Slot ID
0/6 and 0/7
Remote PV8
subrack
Subrack ID
1
Subrack type
PV8_10(HGB)
PV8 board
Subrack ID/Slot ID
1/9 and 1/10
Remote RSP
subrack
Subrack ID
2
Subrack type
RSP_14(HIB)
RSP board
Subrack ID/Slot ID
2/9 and 2/10
Context
l
Ensure that the parameters of the MG interface are the same as those configured on the
MGC.
l
The EDTB board is working in independent mode (the default working mode in the system).
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 27-4 shows the flowchart for configuring a cascading network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
Figure 27-4 Flowchart for configuring a cascading network
Start
Add EDTB boards
Confirm the EDTB boards
Add the PV8 subrack
Add inter-rack links
Add the RSP subrack
Add inter-rack links
Add inter-rack connects
Add subcribers to slave
service subrack
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add EDTB boards.
huawei(config)#board batadd 0/6 0/7 h601EDTB
Step 2 Confirm the EDTB boards.
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/6
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
Step 3 Add a PV8 subrack.
huawei(config)#frame add 1
FrameType:
0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA)
2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL)
4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1 : MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD)
3 : MAIN_H602HABD(HABD)
5 : MAIN_H601HABO(HABO)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM)
8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB)
10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD)
12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE)
14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA)
16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL)
18 : RSUG_ONU04A
20 : PV8_HUBT(HUBT)
22 : PV8_15(HDB)
24 : PV8_12(HFB)
26 : PV8_6A(HMB)
28 : UAM_V (HUBM)
30 : UAFM_V(HUBE)
32 : UAMB_V(HUBB)
34 : ONUF01D100_V(HUBL)
36 : RSP_19(HCB)
38 : RSP_14(HIB)
40 : RSP_10(HGB)
42 : RSP_6B(HLB)
44 : UAS_R (HUBS)
46 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
48 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
50 : VRSP_12(HABA)
52 : HWTA(HIB_1)
54 : HWTA(HIB_3)
Please select frame type (0 ~ 54):25
Frame add successfully
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE)
SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA)
SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_30(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_12(HABC)
RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO)
RSUG_ONU08A
PV8_19(HCB)
PV8_14(HIB)
PV8_10(HGB)
PV8_6B(HLB)
UAS_V (HUBS)
UAFS_V(HUBF)
ONU60A_V(HUBO)
ONUF10DV100_V(HUBN)
RSP_15(HDB)
RSP_12(HFB)
RSP_6A(HMB)
UAM_R (HUBM)
UAFM_R(HUBE)
UAMB_R(HUBB)
ONUF01D100_R(HUBL)
VRSP_18(HABA)
HWTA(HIB_2)
Step 4 Configure the links between the master subrack and the PV8 slave subrack.
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
0/6/0 end 1/9/0
0/6/1 end 1/9/1
0/6/2 end 1/9/2
0/6/3 end 1/9/3
0/6/4 end 1/9/4
0/6/5 end 1/9/5
0/6/6 end 1/9/6
0/6/7 end 1/9/7
0/6/8 end 1/10/0
0/6/9 end 1/10/1
0/6/10 end 1/10/2
0/6/11 end 1/10/3
0/6/12 end 1/10/4
0/6/13 end 1/10/5
0/6/14 end 1/10/6
0/6/15 end 1/10/7
Step 5 Add an RSP subrack.
huawei(config)#frame add 2
FrameType:
0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA)
2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL)
4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC)
6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM)
8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB)
10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD)
12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE)
14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA)
16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL)
18 : RSUG_ONU04A
20 : PV8_HUBT(HUBT)
22 : PV8_15(HDB)
24 : PV8_12(HFB)
26 : PV8_6A(HMB)
28 : UAM_V (HUBM)
30 : UAFM_V(HUBE)
32 : UAMB_V(HUBB)
34 : ONUF01D100_V(HUBL)
36 : RSP_19(HCB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD)
MAIN_H602HABD(HABD)
MAIN_H601HABO(HABO)
SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE)
SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA)
SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_30(HABD)
RSU_HAFS_12(HABC)
RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO)
RSUG_ONU08A
PV8_19(HCB)
PV8_14(HIB)
PV8_10(HGB)
PV8_6B(HLB)
UAS_V (HUBS)
UAFS_V(HUBF)
ONU60A_V(HUBO)
ONUF10DV100_V(HUBN)
RSP_15(HDB)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
38 : RSP_14(HIB)
40 : RSP_10(HGB)
42 : RSP_6B(HLB)
44 : UAS_R (HUBS)
46 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
48 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
50 : VRSP_12(HABA)
52 : HWTA(HIB_1)
54 : HWTA(HIB_3)
Please select frame type (0 ~ 54):38
Frame add successfully
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
RSP_12(HFB)
RSP_6A(HMB)
UAM_R (HUBM)
UAFM_R(HUBE)
UAMB_R(HUBB)
ONUF01D100_R(HUBL)
VRSP_18(HABA)
HWTA(HIB_2)
Step 6 Configure the links between the PV8 subrack and the RSP subrack.
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
huawei(config)#frame
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
link
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
start
1/9/16
1/9/17
1/9/18
1/9/19
1/9/20
1/9/21
1/9/22
1/9/23
end
end
end
end
end
end
end
end
2/9/0
2/9/1
2/9/2
2/9/3
2/9/4
2/9/5
2/9/6
2/9/7
Step 7 Verify that the links between subracks are functioning properly.
huawei(config)#display frame link
---------------------------------------------------------------------Record UpBoardName Frame/Slot/Port DownBoardName Frame/Slot/Port
---------------------------------------------------------------------0
H601EDTB
0 /6 /0
PV8
1 /9 /0
1
H601EDTB
0 /6 /1
PV8
1 /9 /1
2
H601EDTB
0 /6 /2
PV8
1 /9 /2
3
H601EDTB
0 /6 /3
PV8
1 /9 /3
4
H601EDTB
0 /6 /4
PV8
1 /9 /4
5
H601EDTB
0 /6 /5
PV8
1 /9 /5
6
H601EDTB
0 /6 /6
PV8
1 /9 /6
7
H601EDTB
0 /6 /7
PV8
1 /9 /7
8
H601EDTB
0 /6 /8
PV8
1 /10/0
9
H601EDTB
0 /6 /9
PV8
1 /10/1
10
H601EDTB
0 /6 /10
PV8
1 /10/2
11
H601EDTB
0 /6 /11
PV8
1 /10/3
12
H601EDTB
0 /6 /12
PV8
1 /10/4
13
H601EDTB
0 /6 /13
PV8
1 /10/5
14
H601EDTB
0 /6 /14
PV8
1 /10/6
15
H601EDTB
0 /6 /15
PV8
1 /10/7
16
PV8
1 /9 /16
RSP
2 /9 /0
17
PV8
1 /9 /17
RSP
2 /9 /1
18
PV8
1 /9 /18
RSP
2 /9 /2
19
PV8
1 /9 /19
RSP
2 /9 /3
20
PV8
1 /9 /20
RSP
2 /9 /4
21
PV8
1 /9 /21
RSP
2 /9 /5
22
PV8
1 /9 /22
RSP
2 /9 /6
23
PV8
1 /9 /23
RSP
2 /9 /7
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 8 Connect subracks.
huawei(config)#frame connect 0 1
huawei(config)#frame connect 1 2
Step 9 Add and confirm service boards in the slave subrack.
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
huawei(config)#board
batadd 2/11 2/14 a32
confirm 2/11
confirm 2/12
confirm 2/13
confirm 2/14
Step 10 Add remote users.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
27 Configuring the Remote Subtending
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 2/11/0 2/14/31 0 terminalid 0 telno
12340001
----End
Result
Users with phone numbers 12340001-12340128 can communicate with each other normally and
also with other users on the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
28
28 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service
Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the QoS of the voice service includes the application of the QoS technology and
the process for configuring the QoS test of the voice service on the UA5000.
28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoS
The quality of service (QoS) provides subscriber services with end-to-end quality assurance by
a set of measurement indexes, such as service availability, throughput, time delay, jitter, and
loss rate.
28.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test Task
This topic describes how to start a passive QoS test task on the UA5000 to monitor the actual
service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
28 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service
28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoS
The quality of service (QoS) provides subscriber services with end-to-end quality assurance by
a set of measurement indexes, such as service availability, throughput, time delay, jitter, and
loss rate.
Service Description
The UA5000 provides the function of the QoS test. The UA5000 can work with the EMS to test
the quality of the IP network, or start the QoS test by itself. The UA5000 can add an 802.1Q/
802.1p or a type of service (ToS) label to the upstream packet. The upper layer device in the IP
network can take proper measures according to the label to ensure the QoS of the voice service.
l
Passive QoS test: After receiving the test command from the EMS or the host, the
UA5000 collects all QoS messages of appropriate sessions. The messages are reported to
the EMS through a test port at the scheduled time.
l
The differences between the active and passive tests are as follows:
– In the active test, the call is set up automatically and the QoS information is recorded.
– In the passive test, the QoS information is recorded only when there are calls that meet
the requirements.
l
In the QoS passive test, the UA5000 command line and the EMS are independent of each
other. The EMS can start the test task without running the UA5000 command line. The
UA5000 command line can, however, forcibly stop the test task started by the EMS.
Service Specifications
l
The UA5000 supports the active and passive QoS tests.
l
The UA5000 supports a maximum of 16 passive QoS tests concurrently.
28.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test Task
This topic describes how to start a passive QoS test task on the UA5000 to monitor the actual
service.
Prerequisite
Before a QoS test is started, the following parameters must be set:
l
IP address of the peer device used in the test
l
Start time of the test
l
Interval for reporting the test result to the EMS
Data Plan
Table 28-1 provides the data plan for starting a QoS test at the local end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
28 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service
Table 28-1 Data plan for starting a QoS test at the local end
Item
Data
Loop delay
200 ms
Jitter
20 ms
Packet loss ratio
1%
IP address of the peer device
10.10.20.20
Index of the task
1
Context
To start a QoS test task on the UA5000, run the qos-rtptest command. The test result is not
reported to the EMS.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the QoS alarm threshold parameters.
huawei(config)#qos threshold loopdelay 200 jitter 20 packetlost 1
Step 2 Start the QoS test task on the UA5000.
huawei(config)#qos-rtptest 1 10.10.20.20
----End
Result
The QoS test task for 10.10.20.20 is started. When the QoS parameters exceed the thresholds,
the QoS alarms are generated. To verify the configuration of the QoS test task, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display qos-rtptest all
Task Index : 1
Task Execution Time (sec) : 0
Peer Address : 10.10.20.20
Duration (sec) :3600
Tick (sec) : 60
TaskMode : COMMAND
InPkts : 0
OutPkts : 0
InOctets : 0
OutOctets : 0
InDropPkts : 0
MaxDropRate (percent) : 0,
Port :-/-/MinDropRate (percent) : 0,
Port :-/-/MaxJitter (millisec) : 0,
Port :-/-/MinJitter (millisec) : 0,
Port :-/-/MaxLoopDelay (millisec) : 0,
Port :-/-/MinLoopDelay (millisec) : 0,
Port :-/-/-
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
29
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
Configuring the Security of the Voice
Service
About This Chapter
Configuring the security of the voice service includes the registration process of the device and
the configuration process of the UA5000 device authentication.
29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Security
To prevent illegal MGs from registering with the MGC, the UA5000 supports the registration
of the MG with the MGC in the authentication mode on the MG interface through the H.248
protocol, MGCP protocol, or SIP protocol. If the SIP protocol is used, the MGC is the proxy
server.
29.2 Configuring the Device Authentication
This topic describes how to configure the authentication parameters of the MG interface on the
UA5000 to implement the device authentication function when the H.248 or HGCP protocol is
used.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Security
To prevent illegal MGs from registering with the MGC, the UA5000 supports the registration
of the MG with the MGC in the authentication mode on the MG interface through the H.248
protocol, MGCP protocol, or SIP protocol. If the SIP protocol is used, the MGC is the proxy
server.
Service Description
The purpose of authentication is to verify the validity of users and networks. The same
authentication algorithm is used on the MG and the MGC separately. Then, the calculation results
on the MG and the MGC are compared on either side. If the calculation results are the same, it
indicates that the authentication is successful. If the calculation results are different, it indicates
that the authentication fails.
29.2 Configuring the Device Authentication
This topic describes how to configure the authentication parameters of the MG interface on the
UA5000 to implement the device authentication function when the H.248 or HGCP protocol is
used.
29.2.1 Configuring the Device Authentication (the H.248 Protocol)
When the H.248 protocol is used, you can configure the UA5000 device authentication by
configuring the registration mode of the MG interface, the MG interface to support the device
authentication, authentication initial key, and authentication gateway ID of the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l
The MG interface must be added successfully.
l
The encryption type, initial key, and DH authentication MG ID must be configured on the
MGC. The parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters
configured on the MGC.
Context
When the MGC is the SoftX3000 of Huawei, the authentication MG ID must be a string with
more than eight digits, and the initial key must be a string with more than eight and less than 16
digits.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the display mg-software parameter 4 command to query the registration mode used by
the MG interface.
l To register all the subscribers under the MG interface, use the wildcard registration mode.
l To register a single subscriber under the MG interface, use the single endpoint registration
mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
Step 3 If the query result is different from the planned registration mode, run the mg-software
parameter 4 command to set the registration mode of the MG interface. If the query result is
the same as the planned registration mode, proceed to Step 4.
Step 4 Run the mg-software parameter 6 0 command to set the MG interface to support the device
authentication.
Step 5 Run the auth command to set the authentication MG ID and initial key.
Step 6 Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters.
Step 7 Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.
----End
Example
The following example describes how to configure the authentication for the UA5000. Table
29-1 provides the data plan for configuring the device authentication parameters.
Table 29-1 Data plan for configuring the device authentication parameters (through the H.248
protocol)
Item
Data
Item
Data
MG interface ID
0
Whether to use the
wildcard for
registration
Yes
Authentication MG
ID
UA5000
Initial key
0123456789ABCDE
F
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 4
------------------------------------------------Interface Id:0
para index:4
value:0
------------------------------------------------APPENDIX:
------------------------------------------------Interface software parameter name:
4: Whether MG register to MGC with wildcard
0: Yes
1: No
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 6 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#auth auth_mgid ua5000 initial_key 0123456789ABCDEF
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display auth
[AUTH_PARA config]
Initial Key
: 0123456789ABCDEF
Auth MGid
: UA5000
Algorithm
: MD5
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
29.2.2 Configuring the Device Authentication (the MGCP Protocol)
When the MGCP protocol is used, you can configure the UA5000 device authentication by
configuring the registration mode of the MG interface, authentication initial key, and
authentication gateway ID of the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l
The MG interface must be added successfully.
l
The encryption type, initial key, and DH authentication MG ID must be configured on the
MGC. The parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters
configured on the MGC.
l
When the MGC is the SoftX3000 of Huawei, the authentication MG ID must be a string
with more than eight digits, and the initial key must be a string with more than eight and
less than 16 digits.
l
In the case of single endpoint registration, the UA5000 supports only the passive
authentication mode and does not support the active authentication mode.
l
Active authentication mode
Context
Procedure
NOTE
When the UA5000 uses the MGCP protocol and the MGC need not authenticate the subscribers of
the UA5000, select the passive authentication mode.
l
1.
In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface
mode.
2.
Run the mg-software parameter 4 0 command to select the wildcard registration
mode.
3.
Run the auth command to set the active authentication mode, and set the
authentication MG ID and initial key.
4.
Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters.
5.
Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.
Passive authentication mode
1.
In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface
mode.
2.
To register all the subscribers under the MG interface, run the mg-software
parameter 4 0 command to select the wildcard registration mode. To register a single
subscriber, proceed to Step 3.
3.
Run the auth command to set the passive authentication mode, and set the
authentication key.
4.
Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters.
5.
Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
Example
The following example describes how to configure the active authentication mode for the
UA5000. Table 29-2 provides the data plan for configuring the active authentication mode.
Table 29-2 Data plan for configuring the active authentication mode (through the MGCP
protocol)
Item
Data
Item
Data
MG interface ID
0
Whether to use the
wildcard for registration
Yes
Authentication MG
ID
UA5000
Initial key
0123456789ABCDEF
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 4 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#auth mode2 auth_mgid
UA5000 initial_key 0123456789ABCDEF
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display auth
active request authentication mode config:
Initial Key
: 123456789ABCDEF
Auth MGid
: UA5000
Algorithm
: MD5
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
The following example describes how to configure the passive authentication mode for
theUA5000. Table 29-3 provides the data plan for configuring the passive authentication mode.
Table 29-3 Data plan for configuring the passive authentication mode (through the MGCP
protocol)
Item
Data
Item
Data
MG interface ID
0
Whether to use the
wildcard for
registration
Yes
Initial key
0123456789ABCDEF
-
-
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 4 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#auth mode1 key 0123456789ABCDEF
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display auth
passive respond authentication mode config:
Auth Key
: 123456789ABCDEF
Algorithm
: MD5
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#
Reset MG interface 0 success!
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
29.2.3 Configuring Device Authentication (SIP Protocol)
When the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is used, the voice service of the UA5000 supports
the authentication for a SIP interface, SIP user group, and single user in user name+password
or user name+HA1 mode.
Prerequisite
l
A SIP interface has been added successfully.
l
The authentication information has been configured on the proxy server. Ensure that the
parameters of the MG interface are the same as those configured on the UA5000.
l
Perform the authentication for a SIP interface.
Procedure
l
l
1.
In global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter SIP mode.
2.
Run the sip-auth-parameter command to configure the security authentication
information.
3.
Run the display sip auth command to query the security authentication information.
4.
Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.
Perform the authentication for a SIP user group.
1.
In global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter SIP mode.
2.
Run the sipusergroup auth set command to configure the security authentication
information.
3.
Run the display sipusergroup command to query the security authentication
information.
Perform the authentication for a single user.
1.
In global config mode, run the esl user command to enter extend signaling link (ESL)
user mode.
2.
According to the service type, run the sippstnuser servicedata set command or the
sipbrauser auth set command or the sipprauser auth set command to configure the
security authentication information.
3.
Run the display sippstnuser servicedata command or the display sipbrauser
authinfo command or the display sipprauser authinfo command to query the
security authentication information.
----End
Example
Assume that the security authentication mode is password, user name is huawei, and password
is 123456789. To configure such authentication information for SIP interface 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#sip-auth-parameter auth-mode interface password-mode
password
User Name(<=64 chars, "-" indicates deletion):huawei
User Password(<=64 chars, "-" indicates deletion):
**Input password here/
The configuration will take effect after resetting the interface
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
/
368
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
29 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#
Resetting SIP interface 0 succeeded
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display sip-auth running
-----------------------------------------------------------MGID
0
Auth Mode
interface
Password-mode
password
Auth-username
huawei
Auth-password
******
------------------------------------------------------------
Assume that the security authentication mode is password, user name is huawei, and password
is huawei123. To configure such authentication information for SIP user group 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#sipusergroup auth set 0 password-mode password
Enter the user name (<=64 characters; "-" indicates deletion):huawei
Enter the user password (<=64 characters; "-" indicates deletion):
**Input password here/
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#display sipusergroup 0
-----------------------------------------------------------UsergroupID
: 0
Usergroup-name
: xian
URI
: 9
Register-uri-mode
: Alone
Precinctmode
: Remote
Subscribe-ua-profile-flag : Disable
State
: RBlock
Password-mode
: Password
Auth-username
: huawei
Auth-password
: ******
------------------------------------------------------------
/
Assume that the user name is huawei and password is huawei123. To configure such
authentication information for a public switched telephone network (PSTN) user under port
0/9/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#sippstnuser servicedata set 0/9/0 auth-username huawei
auth-password
huawei123
huawei(config-esl-user)#display sippstnuser servicedata 0/9/0
-----------------------------F /S /P
: 0/9 /0
centrexno
: centrexprefix
: hotlinenum
: cfbnum
: cfunum
: cfnrnum
: centrexflag
: 0 (0 Directly dial, 1 dual dial )
mwimode
: 0 (0 Relay send,1 immediately send, 2 Union send)
hottime(s)
: 100 (Defualt value: 100)
dialtone
: 0 (0:Ordinary tone,1:Special tone, 2:MWI tone)
cfnrtime(s)
: 100 (Defualt value: 100)
auth-username
: huawei
auth-password
: ******
------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
Configuring the Reliability of the Voice
Service
About This Chapter
UA5000 provides the assurance function of the reliable voice service. Configuring the reliability
of the voice service includes the application of the technology of the voice service reliability
and the process for configuring the voice service reliability of the UA5000.
30.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Reliability
The reliability of the UA5000 voice service is implemented through features such as dual
homing, standalone, emergency channel, and separation of the signaling stream and the media
stream.
30.2 Configuring the Dual Homing
Dual-homing is a disaster recovery mechanism to provide communication during emergency
situations when the softswitch device is down or an unexpected disaster occurs (such as fire in
the equipment room, disconnection of cables connected to the equipment room, and abnormal
power supply).
30.3 Configuring the Standalone Service
Configure the standalone service of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the
MGC/IMS, the UA5000 processes the services of the internal subscribers on the same MG
interface or the same user agent so that they can call each other without the support of the MGC/
IMS. The UA5000 supports the standalone service when it uses the H.248 protocol or the SIP
protocol.
30.4 Configuring the IUA Joint Switchover
In the case that H.248 is used and the transmission mode of the MG interface is the Stream
Control Transfer Protocol (SCTP), the IUA link is switched when the UA5000 performs the
MGC switchover by running the mgc switch(h248) command. This implements the IUA joint
switchover to ensure the reliability of the service.
30.5 Configuring an Emergency Channel
Configure an emergency channel of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the
MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that matches the
emergency digitmap.
30.6 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling Stream and the Media Stream
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
This topic describes how to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP address for the
VAG to separate the signaling stream from the media stream.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
30.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Reliability
The reliability of the UA5000 voice service is implemented through features such as dual
homing, standalone, emergency channel, and separation of the signaling stream and the media
stream.
Service Description
The details about the reliability of the UA5000 voice service are as follows:
l
Dual homing
– Based on the H.248/MGCP protocol
One UA5000 can register with two MGCs when the H.248 protocol is used or one
UA5000 can register with three MGCs when the MGCP protocol is used. When the
primary MGC is faulty and cannot communicate with the UA5000, the services are
switched to a secondary MGC.
The dual homing of the UA5000 is implemented by heartbeat detection. Figure 30-1
shows the heartbeat detection and the switchover process.
Figure 30-1 Heartbeat detection and switchover process
UA5000
MGC1
MGC2
(1) Notify (it/ito)
Heatbeat lost
(2) ServiceChange
(Method=Failover, Reason=909)
(3) Reply
Registration on MGC2 succeeds
Registration on MGC2 fails
(4) ServiceChange
(Method=Disconnected, Reason=909)
(5) Reply
Table 30-1describes the heartbeat detection and the switchover process.
Table 30-1 Description of the heartbeat detection and the switchover process
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
No.
Description
(1)
The UA5000 sends several consecutive heartbeat detection
messages, namely the Notify (it/ito) messages but fails to receive
any response. This indicates that the primary MGC (MGC1) is
faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
No.
Description
(2)
The UA5000 sends a registration request message ServiceChange
(Method = Failover, Reason = 909) to the MGC2 according to the
preset order in the MGC list.
(3)
If the UA5000 receives a response Reply from the MGC2, it
indicates that the registration on the MGC2 is successful and the
process is complete. If the UA5000 fails to receive a response from
the MGC2 after sending several consecutive ServiceChange
messages, it indicates that the registration on the MGC2 fails.
(4)
If there is another MGC in the secondary MGC list, the UA5000
repeats step 2 and step 3 for the next MGC. If there is no other
secondary MGC, the UA5000 sends the registration message
ServiceChange (Method = Disconnected, Reason = 909 (close to
MGC fault) to the original primary MGC (MGC 1) based on the
avalanche mechanism for preventing the reset after a random delay.
(5)
If the UA5000 receives the response Reply from the MGC1, the
communication between the UA5000 and the MGC1 is restored and
the process is complete. If the UA5000 fails to receive a response
after sending several consecutive ServiceChange requests to the
MGC1, the registration on the MGC1 fails and the UA5000
proceeds with step 2.
– Based on the SIP protocol
One UA5000 supports the registration of the SIP interface with two proxy servers
(Proxy1 and Proxy2). When the active proxy server is down, the MG continues running
by switching the service to the standby proxy server.
l
Internal call standalone
When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers on the same MG
interface can call each other. The MG interface is supported by the UA5000 instead of the
MGC.
l
Emergency channel
When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial
the external phone numbers that are listed in the digitmap as emergency call phone numbers.
For example, in the case of a fire, you can dial the fire emergency number, such as 911 in
the United States.
l
Separation of the signaling stream and the media stream
Each VAG can be configured with independent signaling IP address and media stream IP
address, and can be configured in different VLANs. You can separate the control and the
transmission by separating the signaling stream from the media stream to enhance the
reliability of the voice service. The H.248 protocol supports this feature.
30.2 Configuring the Dual Homing
Dual-homing is a disaster recovery mechanism to provide communication during emergency
situations when the softswitch device is down or an unexpected disaster occurs (such as fire in
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
the equipment room, disconnection of cables connected to the equipment room, and abnormal
power supply).
30.2.1 Configuring the Dual Homing (the H.248 Protocol)
Configuring the dual homing means registering one UA5000 with two MGCs. When one MGC
is faulty and cannot support the communication, the UA5000 automatically switches to the other
MGC.
Prerequisite
l
The MG interface must be added successfully.
l
In the MG interface attributes, MGC1 and MGC2 must be configured.
l
On the MGCs, the data for interconnecting to the UA5000 must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the MG interface to support dual
homing.
----End
Example
To configure MG interface 0 on the UA5000 to support the dual homing but not support the
automatic switchover, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 2 1
30.2.2 Configuring the Dual Homing (the MGCP Protocol)
Configuring the dual homing means registering one UA5000 with two MGCs. When one MGC
is faulty and cannot communicate with the MG, the UA5000 automatically switches to the other
MGC.
Prerequisite
The MG interface must be added successfully.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to enable the function of the heartbeat message.
Step 3 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the MG interface to support dual
homing.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
Example
To configure the MG interface (with ID 0) on the UA5000 to support dual homing through
heartbeat detection, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 3 1
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 2 0
30.2.3 Configuring the Dual Homing (Based On SIP)
This topic describes how to configure the SIP-based dual homing. After you configure the mutual
backup for two MGCs that are in different physical locations, one MGC can take over all the
services carried on the other MGC if the other MGC is faulty. This ensures reliable
communication of the network in case of emergency.
Context
The UA5000 supports configuring the SIP interface on two proxy servers (Proxy1 and Proxy2),
where, Proxy1 functions as the primary proxy server. When Proxy1 fails, the MG can switch to
Proxy2 to continue working.
Prerequisite
l
The data for interconnecting with the SIP interface must be configured in the IMS.
l
The IP address (signaling IP address or media IP address) of the SIP interface must exist
in the corresponding IP address pool when the IP address of the SIP interface is configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface sip command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the if-sip attribute basic command to configure the basic and mandatory attributes of the
SIP interface, including the media IP address, signaling IP address, transfer protocol, port ID,
IP address of the proxy server, domain name of the proxy server, port ID of the proxy server,
home domain name, and profile index.
Step 3 Run the reset command to reset the SIP interface to make the configuration data take effect.
----End
Example
Assume that:
l
The media IP address is 10.10.10.13.
l
The signaling IP address is 10.10.10.13.
l
The transfer protocol is UDP.
l
The port ID is 5000.
l
IP address 1 and the port ID of the primary proxy server are 10.10.10.14, and 5060
respectively.
l
IP address 1 and the port ID of the secondary proxy server are 10.10.10.15, and 5060
respectively.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
l
The home domain name is huawei.com.
l
The profile index is 1.
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
To configure the dual-homing attributes of the SIP interface with ID 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface sip 0
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute basic home-domain huawei.com media-ip
10.10.10.13 signal-ip 10.10.10.13 signal-port 5000 transfer udp primary-proxy-ip1
10.10.10.14 primary-proxy-port 5060 secondary-proxy-ip1 10.10.10.15 secondaryproxyport 5060 sipprofile-index 1
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#reset
Related Operation
Table 30-2 lists the related operation for configuring the dual homing.
Table 30-2 Related operation for configuring the dual homing
To...
Run the Command...
Query the configuration information about
the SIP interface
display if-sip attribute
30.3 Configuring the Standalone Service
Configure the standalone service of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the
MGC/IMS, the UA5000 processes the services of the internal subscribers on the same MG
interface or the same user agent so that they can call each other without the support of the MGC/
IMS. The UA5000 supports the standalone service when it uses the H.248 protocol or the SIP
protocol.
Configuration Flowchart
l
Currently, the telephone numbers configured for the standalone service cannot be checked
for repetition. When configuring the telephone numbers for the standalone service, make
sure that the telephone numbers are unique. Otherwise, the standalone service cannot be
implemented.
l
When the UA5000 uses the H.248 protocol, the telephone numbers configured on the
UA5000 must be the same as the telephone numbers configured on the MGC.
l
Figure 30-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the standalone service (H.248 protocol).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
Figure 30-2 Flowchart for configuring the standalone service (H.248 protocol)
Start
Configure voice subscriber
data
Configure service types in
standalone
(Optional) Configure
standalone timers
Configure the digitmap for
internal calls
End
NOTE
For details about how to configure the voice subscriber data (H.248 protocol), see "7 Configuring the
VoIP PSTN Service."
Figure 30-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the standalone service (SIP protocol).
Figure 30-3 Flowchart for configuring the standalone service (SIP protocol)
Start
Configure voice subscriber
data
Configure the proxy detection
mode of the SIP interface
Enable the emergency
standalone function
End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
NOTE
For details about how to configure the voice subscriber data (SIP protocol), see "7.7 Configuring the
Standalone Function Based on the SIP Protocol."
30.4 Configuring the IUA Joint Switchover
In the case that H.248 is used and the transmission mode of the MG interface is the Stream
Control Transfer Protocol (SCTP), the IUA link is switched when the UA5000 performs the
MGC switchover by running the mgc switch(h248) command. This implements the IUA joint
switchover to ensure the reliability of the service.
Context
The IUA joint switchover includes the following points:
l
The IUA link is bound to the MGC.
l
When H.248 is used, the IUA link is switched over after the MGC is switched over
successfully.
l
The system actively locks the unbound IUA link to implement the joint switchover with
H.248.
l
The IP address to be used in the example must be configured in the IP address pool by
running the ip address command.
l
The corresponding data on the MGC must be configured.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the sigtran command to enter the SIGTRAN mode.
Step 2 Run the iua-linkset add command to add an IUA link set, and then enable the joint switchover
function.
Step 3 Run the iua-link add command to add an IUA link, and then set the link priority and joint
switchover attributes.
Step 4 Run the display iua-linkset attribute command to query the attributes of the IUA link set.
Step 5 Run the display iua-link attribute command to query the IUA link attributes.
----End
Example
Assume that:
l
The number of the IUA link set is 2. The ID of the MG interface that uses H.248 is 0. The
joint switchover is enabled. The working mode of the link set is active/standby. The duration
is 20s.
l
The number of the IUA link added to the link set is 0. The ID of the local SCTP port is
6666. The IP address of the local port is 10.10.10.1. The ID of the remote SCTP port is
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
6666. IP address 1 of the remote port is 10.10.10.2. The link priority is 10. The joint
switchover with the primary MGC is enabled.
To configure the IUA joint switchover, do as follows:
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 2 mgid 0 jointly-work enable trafficMode
override pendingtime 20
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 0 2 6666 10.10.10.1 6666 10.10.10.2 priority
10 jointly-work-with primary-mgc
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-linkset attribute 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------LinksetNo Mgid
PendingTime TrafficMode C/S-Mode IID-Type IID-Map AutoLock
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2
0
20
override
server
integer 1
enable
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo
: 0
LinksetNo
: 2
Local port
: 6666
Local IP address
: 10.10.10.1
Remote port
: 6666
Remote IP address
: 10.10.10.2
Remote Ip address 2
: 255.255.255.255
Bound MGC
: primary MGC
Priority
: 10
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 30-3 lists the related operation for configuring the IUA joint switchover.
Table 30-3 Related operation for configuring the IUA joint switchover
To...
Run the Command...
Reset the IUA link
iua-link reset
30.5 Configuring an Emergency Channel
Configure an emergency channel of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the
MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that matches the
emergency digitmap.
Context
The UA5000 supports the emergency channel function only when it uses the H.248 protocol.
Service Description
Emergency call applies when the network to which the caller is connected fails. The caller is
configured with ports for emergency calls on the CDI board, and the ports are connected to the
ports for outgoing calls. These ports serve as the agent for setting up external calls. As the
resources on the ports are limited, only important and emergency numbers are configured in the
digitmap for emergency calls to ensure the connectivity of these calls.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 30-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the emergency channels.
Figure 30-4 Flowchart for configuring the emergency channels
Start
Configure voice subscriber
data
Add a CDI board
Configure attributes
for the CDI ports
Configure emergency
channels
(Optional) Configure
standalone timers
Configure digitmap for
emergency calls
Enable the emergency
call function
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add the CDI board.
Step 2 Run the board confirm command to confirm the CDI board.
Step 3 Run the cdi command to enter the CDI mode.
Step 4 Run the port attribute set command to configure the attributes for the CDI ports.
Step 5 Run the quit command to exit the CDI mode.
Step 6 Run the esl user command to enter the ESL user mode.
Step 7 Run the mgddiuser add frameid/slotid/portid emergency command to configure the port as
the port for an emergency channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
Step 8 Run the quit command to exit the ESL user mode.
Step 9 Run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 10 Run the digitmap set emergency command to set the digitmap for emergency calls.
Step 11 Run the mg-software parameter command to set the digitmap for emergency calls.
----End
Example
The following example describes how to set port 0 on the CDI board at frame 0/slot 10 as the
port of the emergency channel, and set the digitmap for emergency calls as 119|110|168xxxxx.
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 cdi
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10
huawei(config)#cdi
huawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/10/0 workmode ddi
huawei(config-cdi)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgddiuser add 0/10/0 emergency
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
huawei(config-h248-0)#digitmap set emergency 119|110|168xxxxx
huawei(config-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 11 3
30.6 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling
Stream and the Media Stream
This topic describes how to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP address for the
VAG to separate the signaling stream from the media stream.
Prerequisite
l
The system must be configured to support the H.248 protocol.
l
The IP address to be used in the example must be configured in the IP address pool. For
details of adding the IP address, see the ip address command.
Context
The signaling IP address and the media IP address of the VAG are two optional parameters in
the attributes of the MG interface. For information about the other parameters of the MG interface
attributes, see "5.6 Configuring MG Interface Attributes (the H.248 Protocol)."
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute command to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP
address so that they are different from each other.
Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the configuration of the signaling IP
address and the media IP address.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
30 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
Example
To configure MG interface 1 of the UA5000 whose signaling IP address is 10.10.10.2 and the
media IP address is 10.10.10 .4, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 1
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mg-media-ip1 10.10.10
.4
huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display if-h248 attribute
------------------------------------------------MGID
1
MG Description
MG DomainName
Protocol
H248
Start Negotiate Version
2
Profile Negotiation Parameter
Disable
Profile index
0:NoProfile("")
2833Encrypt
Codetype
Text
Transfer Mode
UDP
HeartBeatGenTimer(s)
60
HeartBeatRetransTimes
3
HeartBeatRetransTimer(s)
60
MG signalling IP
10.10.10.2
MG signalling Port
2945
MG media IP1
10.10.10.4
MG media IP2
MIDType
IP4_ADDR
DeviceName
Retrans
Enable
Active MGC
MGC Port
:2945
MGC IP1:10.10.20.1
Active MGC
MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC
MGC Port
:MGC IP1:Standby MGC
MGC Domain Name:-------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Configuring the Link Detection
About This Chapter
The UA5000 provides the function of the layer 2 link detection. Configuring the link detection
includes the application of the UA5000 link detection technology and the process for configuring
the link detection.
31.1 Introduction to the Link Detection
The link detection that the UA5000 supports includes the ARP link detection, BFD link
detection, and ETH_OAM link detection.
31.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection
This topic describes how to configure the ARP link detection on the UA5000. When the ARP
link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link
is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the
interruption lasts for several seconds).
31.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection
This topic describes how to configure the BFD link detection on the UA5000. When the BFD
link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link
is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the
interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).
31.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link Detection
This topic describes how to configure the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000. When the
ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status.
When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption
(the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
31.1 Introduction to the Link Detection
The link detection that the UA5000 supports includes the ARP link detection, BFD link
detection, and ETH_OAM link detection.
Service Description
l
An increasingly important feature of the network device is: The UA5000 is required to
quickly detect the fault in the communication between the adjacent systems or in the endto-end communication. When the device is faulty, the UA5000 can set up the alternative
channel or switch the service to other links in less time.
l
The UA5000 can use the mechanism of active/standby switchover to ensure the service
stability. Functions of the link protection on the UA5000 include the following:
– ARP link detection: After the ARP link detection is enabled, the UA5000 sends the
ARP packet to the gateway that matches the primary service IP address to detect the
link. After the UA5000 detects that the link is faulty, it performs the active/standby
switchover between the two uplink network ports. In this case, the service is switched
to the standby link to ensure the normal transmission of the service.
– BFD link detection: BFD can detect the fault in any type of channel between systems.
BFD focuses on quickly detecting the fault of the link, and ensures better QoS for
transmitting the voice, video, and VoD services. It provides subscribers with the services
featuring high reliability and high applicability, such as VoIP services and other realtime services.
– ETH_OAM link detection: ETH_OAM performs the link detection and the link
switchover protection as quickly as BFD.
Service Specifications
Service specifications of the ARP, BFD, and ETH_OAM link detections are as follows:
l
ARP link detection: It supports the detection of a single link only. The control boards that
support this feature are PVMB, and PVMD.
l
BFD link detection: It supports the detection of a single link and double links. The control
board that supports this feature is PVMD.
l
ETH_OAM link detection: It supports the detection of double links only. The control board
that supports this feature is PVMD.
31.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection
This topic describes how to configure the ARP link detection on the UA5000. When the ARP
link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link
is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the
interruption lasts for several seconds).
Prerequisite
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The networking of the UA5000 must support the ARP link detection. The networking
modes that support the ARP link detection are as follows:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
– Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configuration
of two PVM control boards
The UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The UA5000 uses the
independent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layer
device through the active network port on the PVM control board.
– Uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board
The UA5000 is configured with one PVM control board. The UA5000 transmits the
service packets upstream to the upper layer device through the network port on the PVM
control board.
NOTE
In the mode of the uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board, when
the link is faulty, the UA5000 reports only the status of the link to you and does not perform the
active/standby switchover for the uplink network port.
The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the ARP link detection.
l
The UA5000 uses PVMB, or PVMDas its control boards.
Networking
Figure 31-1 shows the example network for configuring the ARP link detection.
Use network cables to connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router.
Set up an ARP link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router.
Figure 31-1 Example network for configuring the ARP link detection
MGC
Router
ARP link
FE
UA5000
FE
P P
V V
M M
B B
0/11
A
3
2
0/4 0/5
phone1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
phone32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Data Plan
Table 31-1 provides the data plan for configuring the ARP link detection.
Table 31-1 Data plan for configuring the ARP link detection
Type
Item
Data
Detection link
group
Name of the detection link group
group1
Detection mode of the link group
single-detect
NOTE
The ARP link detection supports
only the single-link detection.
ARP detection link
Detection protocol of the link group
arp-detect
Name of the ARP detection link
Adetect
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 31-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ARP link detection.
Figure 31-2 Flowchart for configuring the ARP link detection
Start
Add a detection link group
Add an ARP detection link
Activate the detection link group
Query the status and the
configuration of the detection link
End
CAUTION
Add a detection link group before setting up an ARP detection link.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Procedure
Step 1 Add a detection link group.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode single-detect
protocol arp-detect
Step 2 Add an ARP detection link.
huawei(interface-eth)#arp-detect add Adetect detect-group group1
Step 3 Activate the detection link group.
huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group enable group1
Step 4 Query the status and the configuration of the detection link.
huawei(interface-eth)#display arp-detect state
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
State
F/S
M/S
GroupName
----------------------------------------------------------------------Adetect
Up
0/4
master
group1
----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display arp-detect configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
Tx_interval(ms) Rx_interval(ms) Multiplier
GroupName
----------------------------------------------------------------------Adetect
2000
2000
3
group1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
l
Run the display arp-detect state command to query the status of the detection link.
l
Run the display arp-detect configuration command to query the configuration of the
detection link.
l
When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform
the switchover. This shortens the duration of the service interruption (the interruption lasts
for only several seconds) on the UA5000.
31.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection
This topic describes how to configure the BFD link detection on the UA5000. When the BFD
link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link
is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the
interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).
Prerequisite
l
The networking of the UA5000 must support the BFD link detection. The networking
modes that support the BFD link detection are as follows:
– Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configuration
of two PVM control boards
The UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The UA5000 uses the
independent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layer
device through the active network port on the PVM control board. In this case, you can
configure the BFD single-link detection or the BFD double-link detection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
– Uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board
The UA5000 is configured with one PVM control board. The UA5000 transmits the
service packets upstream to the upper layer device through the network port on the PVM
control board. In this case, you can configure the BFD single-link detection.
NOTE
In the mode of the uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board, when
the link is faulty, the UA5000 reports only the status of the link to you and does not perform the
active/standby switchover for the uplink network port.
The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the BFD link detection.
l
The UA5000 uses PVMD as its control board.
Networking
Figure 31-3 shows the example network for configuring the BFD link detection.
Connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router by using network
cables. Set up a BFD link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router and a link between slot
0/5 and the router, a VRRP link is set up between the two routers..
NOTE
The following network uses the detection of double BFD links as an example. The networking and the
configuration for the detection of a single BFD link is similar to the networking and configuration for the
ARP detection. See "31.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection."
Figure 31-3 Example network for configuring the BFD link detection
MGC
Router
10.10.10.90
Router
10.10.10.94
Link 1
Link 2
FE/GE 10.10.10.70
UA5000
10.10.10.78 FE/GE
P P
V V
M M
A
3
2
D D
0/4 0/5
phone1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
0/11
phone32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Data Plan
Table 31-2 provides the data plan for configuring the BFD link detection.
Table 31-2 Data plan for configuring the BFD link detection
Type
Item
Data
Detection link
group
Name of the detection link group
group1
Detection mode of the link group
double-detect
NOTE
The BFD link detection
supports the single-link
detection or the doublelink detection. The
following uses the
double-link detection
as an example.
BFD detection link
Detection protocol of the link group
bfd
Name of the BFD detection link
Bdetect1
Bdetect2
peerip
10.10.10.94
10.10.10.90
localip
10.10.10.78
10.10.10.70
NOTE
When you configure
the BFD double-link
detection, localip must
be configured with
different IP addresses.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 31-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the BFD link detection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Figure 31-4 Flowchart for configuring the BFD link detection
Start
Enable the uplink port of
the standby control board
Add a detection link group
Add a BFD detection link
Activate the detection link group
Query the status and the
configuration of the detection link
End
CAUTION
l Add a detection link group before setting up a BFD detection link.
l Run the uplink tps on command to enable the uplink port of the standby control board before
setting up the detection for double BFD links. Otherwise, when the active link is faulty, the
services cannot be switched to the standby link.
l When you set up the detection for a single BFD link, you need not enable the port on the
standby control board.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the uplink port of the standby control board.
huawei(config)#uplink tps on
Step 2 Add a detection link group.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode double-detect
protocol bfd
Step 3 Add a BFD detection link.
huawei(interface-eth)#bfd add Bdetect1 detect-group group1 peerip 10.10.10.94
interface 0/4 discriminator 2 localip 10.10.10.78 rx-interval 50 tx-interval 50
echo on multiplier 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
huawei(interface-eth)#bfd add Bdetect2 detect-group group1 peerip 10.10.10.90
interface 0/5 discriminator 3 localip 10.10.10.70 rx-interval 50 tx-interval 50
echo on multiplier 5
Step 4 Activate the detection link group.
huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group enable group1
Step 5 Query the status and the configuration of the detection link.
huawei(interface-eth)#display bfd state
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
State
F/S
M/S
GroupName
----------------------------------------------------------------------Bdetect1
Up
0/4
master
group1
Bdetect2
Up
0/5
slave
group1
----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display bfd configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
: Bdetect1
Peer IP
: 10.10.10.94
Interface
: 0/4
Descriminator
: 2
Local IP
: 10.10.10.78
RX-interval(ms) : 50
TX-interval(ms) : 50
AcRXinterval(ms): 300
AcTXinterval(ms): 300
Multiplier
: 5
Echo
: On
GroupName
: group1
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
: Bdetect2
Peer IP
: 10.10.10.90
Interface
: 0/5
Descriminator
: 3
Local IP
: 10.10.10.70
RX-interval(ms) : 50
TX-interval(ms) : 50
AcRXinterval(ms): 300
AcTXinterval(ms): 300
Multiplier
: 5
Echo
: On
GroupName
: group1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
l
Run the display bfd state command to query the status of the detection link.
l
Run the display bfd configuration command to query the configuration of the detection
link.
l
When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform
the switchover. This ensures that the service lasts for only a few hundred milliseconds.
31.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link
Detection
This topic describes how to configure the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000. When the
ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status.
When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption
(the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Prerequisite
l
The networking of the UA5000 must support the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection. The
networking modes that support the ETH_OAM link detection are as follows:
Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configuration of
two PVM control boards. The UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The
UA5000 uses the independent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to
the upper layer device through the active network port on the PVM control board.
NOTE
The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the ETH_OAM link detection.
l
The UA5000 uses PVMD as its control board.
Networking
Figure 31-5 shows the example network for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection.
Use network cables to connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router.
Set up an ETH_OAM link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router, and an ETH_OAM
link between slot 0/5 and the router.
Figure 31-5 Example network for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection
MGC
Router
Router
Link 1
Link 2
FE/GE
FE/GE 0/11
UA5000
P P
V V
M M
D D
A
3
2
0/4 0/5
phone1
phone32
Data Plan
Table 31-3 provides the data plan for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Table 31-3 Data plan for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection
Type
Item
Data
Detection link
group
Name of the detection link group
group1
Detection mode of the link group
double-detect
NOTE
The ETH_OAM link
detection supports only
the double-link
detection.
ETH_OAM
detection link
Detection protocol of the link group
ethoam
Name of the ETH_OAM detection link
Edetect1
Edetect2
peerip
10.10.10.220
10.10.10.210
localip
10.10.10.221
10.10.10.221
NOTE
When you configure
the ETH_OAM link
detection, localip must
be configured with the
same IP addresses.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 31-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the ETH_OAM link detection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Figure 31-6 Flowchart for configuring the ETH_OAM link detection
Start
Enable the uplink port of
the standby control board
Add a detection link group
Add an ETH_OAM detection link
Activate the detection link group
Query the status and the
configuration of the detection link
End
CAUTION
l Add a detection link group before setting up an ETH_OAM detection link.
l Run the uplink tps on command to enable the uplink port of the standby control board before
setting up the ETH_OAM detection link. Otherwise, when the active link is faulty, the
services cannot be switched to the standby link.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the uplink port of the standby control board.
huawei(config)#uplink tps on
Step 2 Add a detection link group.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode double-detect
protocol ethoam
Step 3 Add an ETH_OAM detection link.
huawei(interface-eth)#ethoam add Edetect1
peerip 10.10.10.220 interface 0/4 localip
tx-interval 40 multiplier 4 mdlevel 1
huawei(interface-eth)#ethoam add Edetect2
peerip 10.10.10.210 interface 0/5 localip
tx-interval 40 multiplier 4 mdlevel 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
detect-group group1
10.10.10.221 rx-interval 30
detect-group group1
10.10.10.221 rx-interval 30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
31 Configuring the Link Detection
Step 4 Activate the detection link group.
huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group enable group1
Step 5 Query the status and the configuration of the detection link.
huawei(interface-eth)#display ethoam state
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
State
F/S
M/S
GroupName
----------------------------------------------------------------------Edetect1
Up
0/4
master
group1
Edetect2
Up
0/5
slave
group1
----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display ethoam configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
: Edetect1
Peer IP
: 10.10.10.220
Interface
: 0/4
Local IP
: 10.10.10.221
RX-interval(ms) : 30
TX-interval(ms) : 40
AcRXinterval(ms): 30
AcTXinterval(ms): 40
Multiplier
: 4
MDLevel
: 1
GroupName
: group1
----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName
: Edetect2
Peer IP
: 10.10.10.210
Interface
: 0/5
Local IP
: 10.10.10.211
RX-interval(ms) : 30
TX-interval(ms) : 40
AcRXinterval(ms): 30
AcTXinterval(ms): 40
Multiplier
: 4
MDLevel
: 1
GroupName
: group1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
l
Run the display ethoam state command to query the status of the detection link.
l
Run the display ethoam configuration command to query the configuration of the
detection link.
l
When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform
the switchover. This ensures that the service interruption lasts for only a few hundred
milliseconds.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Configuring the Environment
Monitoring
About This Chapter
This topic provides an overview of the environment monitoring and describes how to configure
the environment monitoring on the UA5000.
32.1 Introduction to the Environment Monitoring
During the environment monitoring, the environment monitoring serial port of the device is
connected to the communication serial port of the monitored device. Through the master-slave
node protocol or the access network protocol, the operator can directly monitor the environment
conditions of devices.
32.2 Configuration Example of the ESC
This topic describes how to set the analog and digital parameters of the ESC. In this example,
configuring the ESCM whose serial port type is RS232 is considered as an example. The
configuration procedures of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC are the same
as the configuration procedure of the ESCM.
32.3 Configuration Example of the Fan Monitoring
This topic describes how to configure the speed adjustment mode and the alarm switch of the
fan. Thus, the fan speed of the UA5000 can be adjusted automatically, and the fan tray of the
UA5000 can be monitored.
32.4 Configuration Example of the Power Monitoring
This topic considers the Power4875L as an example and describes how to configure its
environment monitoring parameters. The procedures for configuring the Power4875,
Power4845, and Power4820 are the same as the procedure for configuring the Power4875L.
32.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power Monitoring
This topic describes how to monitor the universal power through the ESC by using the
configuration example of the PSM-A power monitoring through the H303ESC. (The PSM-A is
one type of Emerson power and is displayed as PSMA on the CLI.)
32.6 Adding an EMU
This topic describes how to add an EMU. After connecting the EMU to the monitoring serial
port correctly, you need to add the corresponding EMU to the host system of the UA5000.
32.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
This topic describes how to set the upper and lower alarm thresholds of the analog parameters,
such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and current, or how to set the customized alarms of the
analog parameters.
32.8 Setting the ESC Digital Parameters
This topic describes how to set the alarm levels of digital parameters such as the door status
sensor, or how to configure the customized alarms of the digital parameters.
32.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm Reporting
This topic describes how to configure the reporting of all the fan alarms to the control unit.
32.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment Mode
This topic describes how to set the fan speed adjustment mode. If the fan is not in the automatic
speed adjustment mode, the flow of air is more when the temperature is low or normal.
32.11 Setting the Fan Speed
This topic describes how to set the fan speed.
32.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters
This topic describes how to set the parameters of the power shelf in the UA5000 to ensure the
normal running of the power shelf.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
32.1 Introduction to the Environment Monitoring
During the environment monitoring, the environment monitoring serial port of the device is
connected to the communication serial port of the monitored device. Through the master-slave
node protocol or the access network protocol, the operator can directly monitor the environment
conditions of devices.
Service Description
The environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, and power voltage can be monitored
to ensure that the UA5000 works stably in a suitable environment.
To perform the environment monitoring on a device, the environment monitoring functional
modules, such as the H303ESC, H304ESC, or ESCM must be provided. In addition, some
monitored devices provide the built-in monitoring modules, such as the Power4845, Power4860,
Power4875, and Power4875L. These functional modules that can implement the monitoring are
referred to as the environment monitor units (EMUs), regardless of whether they are built-in or
not.
Service Specifications
The EMU supported by the UA5000 can be classified into the following four categories:
l
Environment supervision circuit (ESC): Includes the H303ESC, H302ESC, H801ESC,
H304ESC, and ESCM. Monitors the environment parameters such as ambient temperature,
humidity, smoke, water, fire, voltage, and power through various sensors.
l
FAN: Monitors the running status of the fan and adjusts the running speed of the fan
according to the settings.
l
DIS: Refers to the power distribution unit (PDU). Divides one or two DC inputs into
multiple outputs.
l
Power: Includes the Power4820, Power4845, Power4875, Power4875L, and PSE158.
Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and power
supply through various sensors.
According to the type of the adopted power supply mode (power distribution–DC, power–AC),
the device is generally configured with power shelf EMU or PDU EMU.
When the UA5000 is connected to the corresponding EMU, bits 1 to 5 of DIP switch S1 on the
ESC of the PDU need to be switched on.
The five bits of the DIP switch define the address of the slave node for the PDU EMU to
communicate with the host of the UA5000. When all the five bits are switched on, it indicates
that the address of the slave node is 0. This is the number of the slave node of the EMU assigned
by the UA5000.
NOTE
For the hardware connections of the environment monitoring board and the settings of the DIP switch, see
"ESC board" in the UA5000 Hardware Description.
For the principles, configuration table, functions, and sensors of the environment monitoring, see
"Environment Monitoring."
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
32.2 Configuration Example of the ESC
This topic describes how to set the analog and digital parameters of the ESC. In this example,
configuring the ESCM whose serial port type is RS232 is considered as an example. The
configuration procedures of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC are the same
as the configuration procedure of the ESCM.
Prerequisite
l
The ESCM and the shelf of the UA5000 must be connected through the RS232 serial port
cable according to the serial port type of the shelf.
l
The settings of the ESCM DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.
NOTE
For the detailed settings of the DIP switch, see "ESC - Environment Monitoring."
l
When you add the EMU to the device, you must comply with the following rules:
– The system supports only one type of EMU except the ESCM.
– If the ESCM is added to the system, you can add the other EMU.
Data Plan
In this example, the serial port type is RS232. Table 32-1 provides the data plan for configuring
the ESCM.
Table 32-1 Data plan for configuring the ESCM
Item
Data
Remarks
EMU
Type: MiniESC
The ESCM is displayed as
MiniESC on the CLI.
Number: 0
-
Subnode: 30
When the RS232 serial port
is selected for the ESCM, the
slave node number must be
set to 30.
Analog parameter ID: 0
Set the analog parameter
according to the actual
requirement. The built-in
analog parameter is set to
monitor the ambient
temperature for the device
running.
Analog parameters
For the value of the
parameter and the details, see
the esc analog command.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Item
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Data
Remarks
Upper alarm threshold of
analog parameter 0: 54
When the ambient
temperature of the device
reaches or exceeds 54°C, the
host reports an alarm.
Lower alarm threshold of
analog parameter 0: 6
When the ambient
temperature of the device is
equal to or lower than 6°C,
the host reports an alarm.
Analog parameter ID: 2
The customized humidity
monitoring analog parameter
is added to monitor the
humidity of the device.
For the value of the
parameter and the details, see
the esc analog command.
Digital parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Upper alarm threshold of
analog parameter 2: 75% RH
When the humidity of the
device reaches or exceeds
75% RH, the host reports an
alarm.
Lower alarm threshold of
analog parameter 2: 5% RH
When the humidity of the
device is equal to or lower
than 5% RH, the host reports
an alarm.
Name of analog parameter 2:
humidity
-
Alarm index ID of analog
parameter 2: 2
The customized humidity
alarm of the system is used.
Unit of analog parameter 2:
% RH
-
Sensor type of analog
parameter 2: voltage type
-
Digital parameter ID: 0
Set the digital parameter
according to the actual
requirement. The monitoring
digital parameter of the MDF
is configured to monitor the
MDF status. When the MDF
is faulty, the host reports an
alarm.
Valid level of digital
parameter 0: high level
When the high level is used
to represent the valid level,
the host does not report an
alarm in case of high level.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Item
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Data
Remarks
Digital parameter ID: 1
Set the digital parameter
according to the actual
requirement. The monitoring
digital parameter of the
cabinet door is set to monitor
the cabinet door status. When
the cabinet door is open, the
host reports an alarm.
Valid level of digital
parameter 1: low level
When the low level is used to
represent the valid level, the
host does not report an alarm
in case of low level.
Context
l
The differences between the analog parameter and digital parameter are as follows:
– An analog parameter is a continuous value, such as temperature, voltage, and current.
When the analog parameter is used to monitor the interface, an analog parameter sensor
is usually used, which provides test analog parameters in real time.
– A digital parameter is a discrete value that indicates a state. A digital sensor has only
two values: normal and faulty.
l
When you set the slave node and communication baud rate, ensure that the following
conditions are met:
– When the serial port for the ESCM is RS485, the settings of the slave node ID and the
DIP switch must be consistent. The communication baud rate must be set to 19200 bit/
s.
– When the serial port for the ESCM is RS232, the slave node ID must be set to 30. The
communication baud rate must be set to 9600 bit/s.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 32-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the ESCM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Figure 32-1 Flowchart for configuring the ESCM
Start
Add an EMU
Set the analog
parameters
Set the digital
parameters
Query the ESC
environment information
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EMU.
Add the EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI), the slave node 30,
and the serial port type RS232.
huawei(config)#emu add 0 MiniESC 0 30 rs232 MiniESC
Step 2 Set the analog parameters.
huawei(config)#interface emu 0
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 54 alarm-lower-limit
6
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 2 alarm-upper-limit 75 alarm-lower-limit
5 name humidity sensor-type 0:voltage analog-alarm 2 unit %RH
Step 3 Set the digital parameters.
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 0 available-level high-level
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 1 available-level low-level
Step 4 Query the ESC environment information.
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info
EMU ID: 0
ESC environment state
---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name
State Value
AlmUpper AlmLower Unit
0 Temperature
Normal 29.000
54
6
C
1 Input_-48V_0
Normal 48.046
70
35
volt
2 Humidity
Normal 10.000
75
5
%RH
3 Normal -128.000 127
-128
---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name
State Value |ID Name
State Value
0 Wiring
Normal 1
|1 Door0
Alarm 1
2 Normal 1
|3 Normal 1
4 Normal 1
|5 Normal 1
6 Normal 1
|7 Normal 1
8 Normal 1
|9 Normal 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Step 5 Save the data.
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the ESCM works in the normal state and monitors the analog and digital
monitoring parameters set on the UA5000. When a monitoring parameter exceeds the normal
range, the host reports an alarm.
32.3 Configuration Example of the Fan Monitoring
This topic describes how to configure the speed adjustment mode and the alarm switch of the
fan. Thus, the fan speed of the UA5000 can be adjusted automatically, and the fan tray of the
UA5000 can be monitored.
Prerequisite
The hardware DIP switch of the fan tray must be set so that it is consistent with the slave node
value of the EMU. The baud rate must be set to 19200 bit/s.
Data Plan
Table 32-2 provides the data plan for configuring the fan monitoring.
Table 32-2 Data plan for configuring the fan monitoring
Item
Data
Remarks
EMU
Type: FAN
-
Number: 1
-
Subnode: 6
This parameter corresponds to the
hardware DIP switch of the fan tray,
but cannot be the same as the slave
node of the ESC.
Serial port of environment
monitoring communication: RS485
The serial port of environment
monitoring communication of the
fan tray must be set to RS485.
Fan speed adjustment mode:
automatic
In this mode, the fan speed is
adjusted according to the
temperature automatically. By
default, the fan speed adjustment
mode is automatic.
Report the alarm that the fan tray
fails to read the temperature sensor:
permit
When the fan tray fails to read the
temperature sensor, the host reports
the alarm automatically.
FAN
parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Item
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Data
Remarks
Report the alarm that the fan is
blocked: permit
When the fan is blocked, the host
reports the alarm automatically.
Report the alarm that the
temperature is very high: permit
When the temperature of the fan tray
is very high, the host reports the
alarm automatically.
Report the alarm that the power
supply is faulty: permit
When the power supply of the fan
tray is faulty, the host reports the
alarm automatically.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 32-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the fan monitoring.
Figure 32-2 Flowchart for configuring the fan monitoring
start
Add a fan tray
Set the fan speed
adjustment mode
Automatic
Manual
Set the fan speed
Set whether to report the
alarm
Query the configuration
parameters
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a fan tray.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 6 rs485
Step 2 Set whether to report the alarm.
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block permit
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#
Execute command successful
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset read_tem_fault permit
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#
Execute command successful
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset tem_high permit
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#
Execute command successful
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset fault permit
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#
Execute command successful
for the ack...
for the ack...
for the ack...
for the ack...
Step 3 Query the configuration parameters.
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter
EMU ID: 1
Fan configration parameter:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: auto timing
---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name
alarm(permit/forbid)
read temperature sensor fault
permit
fan block
permit
temperature high
permit
board fault
permit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Save the data.
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the fan tray can work in the normal state, and can adjust the fan speed
automatically. At the same time, the host reports an alarm when the fan fails to read the
temperature sensor, the fan is blocked, the temperature is very high, or the power supply is faulty.
32.4 Configuration Example of the Power Monitoring
This topic considers the Power4875L as an example and describes how to configure its
environment monitoring parameters. The procedures for configuring the Power4875,
Power4845, and Power4820 are the same as the procedure for configuring the Power4875L.
Prerequisite
l
The ESC board and host must be connected through the environment monitoring cable.
l
The settings of the ESC DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.
l
When you add the EMU to the device, you must comply with the following rules:
– The system supports only one type of EMU except the ESCM.
– If the ESCM is added to the system, you can add the other EMU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Data Plan
This example describes how to configure only the upper and lower alarm thresholds of ambient
temperature and upper and lower measurement thresholds of ambient temperature of the
Power4875L. Other parameters are set by default. For more information about the configurations
of the Power4875L parameters, see "32.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters." Table
32-3 provides the data plan for configuring the Power4875L.
Table 32-3 Data plan for configuring the Power4875L
Item
Data
Remarks
EMU
Type: Power4875L
-
Number: 2
-
Shelf ID: 0
-
Subnode: 15
This parameter corresponds
to the hardware DIP switches
of the ESC, but cannot be the
same as the slave node of the
FAN.
Name: test
-
Upper alarm threshold of
ambient temperature: 55 °C
Other analog parameters are
set by default.
Parameter configuration
Lower alarm threshold of
ambient temperature: 5°C
Upper measurement
threshold of ambient
temperature: 100°C
Lower measurement
threshold of ambient
temperature: 0°C
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 32-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the Power4875L.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Figure 32-3 Flowchart for configuring the Power4875L
Start
Add an EMU
Set the environment monitoring
parameters of the power
Query the environment monitoring
parameters of the power
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EMU.
huawei(config)#emu add 2 power4875L 0 15 rs232 test
Step 2 Set the environment monitoring parameters of the power.
huawei(config)#interface emu 2
huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#power environment temperature 55 5 100 0
This command is invalid unless in the contition of install the sensor, would
you continue? (y/n)[n]:y
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...
huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#
Execute command successful
Step 3 Query the environment monitoring parameters of the power.
huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#display power environment parameter
EMU ID: 2
power environment configration parameter
---------------------------------------------------------------------------AnalogID Name
AlmUpper AlmLower TestHigh TestLow Unit
type
0
Temperature
55
5
100
0
C
Current
1
Humidity
80
10
100
0
%R.H.
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------------------DigitalID Name
Available Level|DigitalID Name
Available Level
0
1
|
1
1
2
1
|
3
1
4
1
|
5
1
6
1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Save the data.
huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Result
After the configuration, the Power4875L can work in the normal state. At the same time, when
the ambient temperature exceeds the configured upper or lower alarm threshold of ambient
temperature, the host reports an alarm.
32.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power
Monitoring
This topic describes how to monitor the universal power through the ESC by using the
configuration example of the PSM-A power monitoring through the H303ESC. (The PSM-A is
one type of Emerson power and is displayed as PSMA on the CLI.)
Prerequisite
The settings of the H303ESC DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.
Data Plan
Table 32-4 provides the data plan for configuring the universal power monitoring.
Table 32-4 Data plan for configuring the universal power monitoring
Item
Data
Remarks
EMU
Type: H303ESC
-
Number: 0
-
Subnode: 30
The subnode of the
H303ESC is always 30.
Type: PSM-A (displayed as
PSMA on the CLI)
-
Protocol file name:
power.pwr
Use the name of the actual
loaded protocol file.
Universal power
Context
The UA5000 mainly uses the following types of the universal power:
l
Zhujiang power
l
Emerson power
l
Beijing dynamic power
l
Eltek power
l
Delta-cimic power
l
Zhongheng power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 32-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the universal power monitoring.
Figure 32-4 Flowchart for configuring the universal power monitoring
Start
Add an EMU
Load the protocol file of
the universal power
Configure the type of the
universal power
Query the ESC
environment information
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EMU.
Add the EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type H303ESC, the slave node 20, and the serial port
type RS232.
huawei(config)#emu add 0 H303ESC 0 30 rs232 H303ESC
Step 2 Load the protocol file of the universal power.
Obtain the protocol file of the universal power through the TFTP server. Then, run the following
command on the CLI with using the IP address of the actual server.
huawei(config)#load universal-power-protocol tftp 10.144.78.132 power.pwr
Step 3 Configure the type of the universal power.
huawei(config)#interface emu 0
huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#esc power powertype 1
Step 4 Query the ESC environment information.
huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#display esc power run info
huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#display esc power state
Step 5 Save the data.
huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Result
After the configuration, the H303ESC works in the normal state, and monitors the universal
power used by the UA5000. When the monitored parameter exceeds the normal range, the host
reports an alarm.
32.6 Adding an EMU
This topic describes how to add an EMU. After connecting the EMU to the monitoring serial
port correctly, you need to add the corresponding EMU to the host system of the UA5000.
Context
The EMU supported by the UA5000 can be classified into the following four categories:
l
Environment supervision circuit (ESC): Includes the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC,
H801ESC, and ESCM. Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature,
humidity, smoke, water, fire, voltage, and power through various sensors.
l
FAN: Monitors the running status of the fan and adjusts the running speed of the fan
according to the settings.
l
DIS: Refers to the power distribution unit (PDU). Divides one or two DC inputs into
multiple outputs.
l
Power: Includes the Power4820, Power4845, Power4875, Power4875L, and PSE158.
Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and power
supply through various sensors.
The serial ports of the preceding EMUs are as follows:
l
The serial port type of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, Power4820, Power4875,
Power4845, and Power4875L is RS232.
l
The serial port types of the ESCM are RS485 and RS232. Select one serial port type during
the configuration according to the type of the monitored shelf.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the emu add command to add an EMU.
Step 2 Run the display emu command to query the status of the EMU.
----End
Example
To add an EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI), the slave node 30,
and the serial port type RS232, do as follows:
huawei(config)#emu add 0 MiniESC 0 30 rs232 MiniESC
huawei(config)#display emu 0
EMU ID: 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------EMU name
: MiniESC
EMU type
: MiniESC
EMU state
: Fault
Frame ID
: 0
Subnode
: 30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
COM Port
: RS232
---------------------------------------------------------------------------NOTE
If the status of the EMU is displayed as Fault, check the following points:
l Check whether the physical connection is correct.
l Check whether the EMU type, shelf ID, subnode ID, and communication serial port are configured
correctly.
Related Operation
Table 32-5 lists the related operations for adding an EMU.
Table 32-5 Related operations for adding an EMU
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete an EMU
emu del
If the EMU in the shelf needs to be
replaced, you need to delete the
configured EMU, and then add an
EMU.
Change the EMU
name
emu modify
The EMU ID must be unique, whereas
the EMU name can be duplicate.
32.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters
This topic describes how to set the upper and lower alarm thresholds of the analog parameters,
such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and current, or how to set the customized alarms of the
analog parameters.
Prerequisite
The EMU must be added and work in the normal state.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the corresponding environment monitoring mode.
Step 2 Run the esc analog command to set the ESC analog parameters.
Step 3 Run the display esc environment info command to query the ESC system analog parameters.
----End
Example
The ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI) is used in the following example. To set the upper temperature
threshold to 55°C, and lower temperature threshold to 5°C, do as follows:
Enter the ESCM config mode.
huawei(config)#interface emu 0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Set the ESCM analog parameters as follows: set the analog parameter ID to 0, the upper
temperature threshold to 55°C, and the lower temperature threshold to 5°C
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 55 alarm-lower-limit
5
Query the ESCM system analog parameters.
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info
EMU ID: 0
ESC environment state
---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name
State Value
AlmUpper AlmLower Unit
0 Temperature
Normal 29.000
55
5
C
1 Input_-48V_0
Normal 48.046
70
35
volt
2 Humidity
Normal 10.000
75
5
%RH
3 Normal -128.000 127
-128
---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name
State Value |ID Name
State Value
0 Wiring
Normal 1
|1 Door0
Alarm 1
2 Normal 1
|3 Normal 1
4 Normal 1
|5 Normal 1
6 Normal 1
|7 Normal 1
8 Normal 1
|9 Normal 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 32-6 lists the related operations for setting the ESC analog parameters.
Table 32-6 Related operations for setting the ESC analog parameters
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the alarm information
display esc alarm
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC, and
H801ESC
Query the ESC system
configuration parameters
display esc system
parameter
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC, and
H801ESC
Query the ESC power supply
information
display esc power
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC, and
H801ESC
Query the customized alarm
information of the analog
parameters
display outside_analog
private-alarm
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC,
H801ESC, Power4875,
Power4875L, DIS, and
PSE158
32.8 Setting the ESC Digital Parameters
This topic describes how to set the alarm levels of digital parameters such as the door status
sensor, or how to configure the customized alarms of the digital parameters.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Prerequisite
The EMU must be added and work in the normal state.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the environment monitoring mode.
Step 2 Run the esc digital command to set the ESC digital parameters.
Step 3 Run the display esc environment info command to query the ESC system digital parameters.
----End
Example
The ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI) is used in the following example. To set the alarm of the door
status sensor to high level, do as follows:
Enter the ESCM config mode.
huawei(config)#interface emu 0
Set the ESCM digital parameters.
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 0 available-level high-level
Query the settings of the digital parameters.
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info
EMU ID: 0
ESC environment state
---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name
State Value
AlmUpper AlmLower Unit
0 Temperature
Normal 29.000
55
5
C
1 Input_-48V_0
Normal 48.046
70
35
volt
2 Humidity
Normal 10.000
75
0
%RH
3 Normal -128.000 127
-128
---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name
State Value |ID Name
State Value
0 Wiring
Normal 1
|1 Door0
Alarm 1
2 Normal 1
|3 Normal 1
4 Normal 1
|5 Normal 1
6 Normal 1
|7 Normal 1
8 Normal 1
|9 Normal 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 32-7 lists the related operations for setting the ESC digital parameters.
Table 32-7 Related operations for setting the ESC digital parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the alarm information
display esc alarm
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC, and
H801ESC
Query the ESC system
configuration parameters
display esc system
parameter
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC, and
H801ESC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the ESC power supply
information
display esc power
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC, and
H801ESC
Query the customized alarm
information of the digital
parameters
display outside-digital
private-alarm
Only valid for the H302ESC,
H303ESC, H304ESC,
H801ESC, Power4875,
Power4875L, DIS, and
PSE158
32.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm Reporting
This topic describes how to configure the reporting of all the fan alarms to the control unit.
Prerequisite
The EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the FAN environment monitoring mode.
Step 2 Run the fan alarmset command to configure the fan alarm reporting.
Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the fan alarm information.
----End
Example
To forbid the reporting of the fan block alarm, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 1
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block forbid
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#
Execute command successful
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter
EMU ID: 1
Fan configration parameter:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: auto timing
---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name
alarm(permit/forbid)
read temperature sensor fault
permit
fan block
forbid
temperature high
permit
board fault
permit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 32-8 lists the related operations for configuring the fan alarm reporting.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Table 32-8 Related operations for configuring the fan alarm reporting
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the running
information of a fan tray
display fan environment
info
FAN environment
monitoring mode
Query the alarm information
of a fan tray
display fan alarm
FAN environment
monitoring mode
32.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment Mode
This topic describes how to set the fan speed adjustment mode. If the fan is not in the automatic
speed adjustment mode, the flow of air is more when the temperature is low or normal.
Prerequisite
The EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.
Context
The fan tray of the UA5000 supports the following fan speed adjustment modes:
l
Automatic
l
Manual
By default, the mode is manual with the fan speed level 5. It is recommended that you change
the mode to automatic.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the FAN environment monitoring mode.
Step 2 Run the fan speed command to set the fan speed adjustment mode.
Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the set parameters.
----End
Example
To set the fan speed adjustment mode to automatic, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 1
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed mode automatic
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#
Execute command successful
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter
EMU ID: 1
Fan configration parameter:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: auto timing
---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name
alarm(permit/forbid)
read temperature sensor fault
permit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
fan block
forbid
temperature high
permit
board fault
permit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 32-9 lists the related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode.
Table 32-9 Related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the fan speed
fan speed adjust
You can set the fan speed in
the manual fan speed
adjustment mode.
Configure the reporting of all
the fan alarms to the control
unit
fan alarmset
-
Query the alarm information
of a fan tray
display fan alarm
-
32.11 Setting the Fan Speed
This topic describes how to set the fan speed.
Prerequisite
l
The EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.
l
The fan speed adjustment mode must be set to manual.
Context
The fan speed levels are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Level 0 indicates the lowest fan speed and level 5
indicates the highest fan speed.
l
The rated fan speed can meet the heat dissipation requirement of the system in the permitted
highest ambient temperature.
l
When the fan runs at a low speed, the damage to the fan is reduced and its life is prolonged.
l
When the system is abnormal or one fan is faulty, the normal fans can switch to the high
speed to increase the air flow so that the heat is dissipated.
l
Reduction of the fan speed reduces the dust absorption and prevents the air filter from being
blocked.
l
You can set the fan speed in the manual fan speed adjustment mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the FAN environment monitoring mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Step 2 Run the fan speed command to set the fan speed.
Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the set parameters.
----End
Example
To set the fan speed to 3, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 1
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed adjust 3
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#
Execute command successful
huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter
EMU ID: 1
Fan configration parameter:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: manual timing
fan speed level: 3
---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name
alarm(permit/forbid)
read temperature sensor fault
permit
fan block
forbid
temperature high
permit
board fault
permit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 32-10 lists the related operations for setting the fan speed.
Table 32-10 Related operations for setting the fan speed
To...
Run the Command...
Set the fan speed adjustment mode
fan speed mode
Set the reporting of all the fan alarm
information to the control unit
fan alarmset
Query the alarm information of a fan tray
display fan alarm
32.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters
This topic describes how to set the parameters of the power shelf in the UA5000 to ensure the
normal running of the power shelf.
Context
Table 32-11 lists the configuration commands of the power shelf.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Table 32-11 Configuration commands of the power shelf
Function
Command
Remarks
The configuration commands supported by the Power4875, Power4875L, Power4845, and
Power4820 are as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Set the battery parameters
power battery
Set the charging currentlimiting coefficient, timed
even charging duration,
number, and capacity of the
battery sets.
Set the battery charging
parameters
power charge
Set the battery charging
parameters, including the
charging mode and charging
voltage.
Set the environment
parameters of the power
supply
power environment
Set the upper and lower alarm
thresholds, and upper and
lower measurement
thresholds of the temperature
or humidity of the power
supply monitoring. Thus, an
alarm is generated when the
power supply works in the
environment that does not
meet the preset criteria, to
ensure the normal running of
the device.
Set the number of the power
modules
power module-num
The Power4845 supports a
maximum of three rectifier
modules.
Set the parameters of the
power module
power module-parameter
Set the on and off states of the
Power4845. The default state
is on. That is, the power
module is in the working
state.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Function
Command
Remarks
Set the power-off
parameters of the power
supply
power off
Set the power-off thresholds
of the load and battery set.
l The power-off types of
the power supply are the
load power off and the
battery set power off.
l When the mains supply is
cut off, the battery set
supplies the power to the
shelf.
l When the voltage of the
battery set is lower than
the power-off threshold of
the load, the system cuts
off the power supply to
the load.
l When the voltage of the
battery set is lower than
the power-off threshold of
the battery set, the system
cuts off the power supply
to the battery set.
Set the standby digital
parameters of the power
supply
power outside_digital
Set the valid level, name, and
customized alarm of the
extended digital parameters
to monitor the digital
parameters of the device in
real time.
Set the power distribution
parameters of the power
supply
power supply-parameter
Set the alarm thresholds of
AC over-voltage, AC undervoltage, DC over-voltage,
and DC under-voltage. Thus,
when the AC voltage or DC
voltage is abnormal, the
rectifier module can power
off automatically to protect
the system.
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L, Power4845, and
Power4820 are as follows:
Set the battery test
parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
power battery-test
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Set the auto-test period
parameter of the battery and
the end voltage of the battery
discharging to implement the
auto-discharging test of the
battery.
419
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Function
Command
Remarks
Set the high-temperature
power-off parameters of the
power supply
power temperature-off
Set the high-temperature
power-off parameter for the
load or battery. Thus, the load
or battery powers off
automatically in the high
working temperature for selfprotection.
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875 and Power4875L are as
follows:
Set the standby analog
parameters of the power
supply
power outside_analog
Set the upper and lower alarm
thresholds, upper and lower
measurement thresholds,
sensor type, unit, name, and
customized alarm of the
analog parameters.
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L are as follows:
Set the installation time of
the battery of the
Power4875L system
power batteryinstall
Set the installation time of the
battery of the Power4875L
system. Thus, the battery can
be replaced in time when the
battery life expires.
Set certain parameters of the
Power4875L system
power default
When you need to initialize
certain parameters of the
Power4875L system, run this
command.
When you set the parameters, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l
DC over-voltage voltage > battery even charging voltage > battery float charging voltage
> DC under-voltage voltage > load power-off voltage > battery power-off voltage
l
DC over-voltage > (float charging voltage + 2 V)
l
Float charging voltage > (DC under-voltage + 2 V)
NOTE
Run the following commands to set the preceding parameters:
l Run the power charge command to set the even charging voltage and float charging voltage of the
battery.
l Run the power battery parameter command to set the DC over-voltage and under-voltage.
l Run the power temperature-off command to set the load power-off voltage of the battery and the
power-off voltage of the battery set.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the commands listed in Table 32-11 to configure the EMU of the power shelf.
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Example
To set the charging current-limiting coefficient to 0.2, timed even charging duration to 60 days,
number of battery sets to 1, and capacity of battery set 0 to 130 AH, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 3
huawei(config-if-power4875L-0)#power battery parameter 1 0.2 60 130
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...
huawei(config-if-power4875L-0)#
Execute command successful
Related Operation
Table 32-12 lists the related operations for configuring the EMU of the power shelf.
Table 32-12 Related operations for configuring the EMU of the power shelf
To...
Run the Command...
The configuration commands supported by the Power4875, Power4875L, Power4845, and
Power4820 are as follows:
Query the alarm information of
the power supply
display power alarm
Query the environment
information of the power supply
display power environment info
Query the environment
configuration parameters of the
power supply
display power environment parameter
Query the running information of
the power supply
display power run info
Query the system configuration
parameters of the power supply
display power system parameter
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4845 and Power4875L are as
follows:
Query the battery test parameters
display power battery-test info
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L are as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Query the installation time of the
Power4875L battery
display power batteryinstalltime
Query the current use status of the
Power4875L battery
display power battery-test-times
Query the current running time of
the Power4875L
display power current-time
Query the system information of
the Power4875L
display power info
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
32 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
To...
Run the Command...
Query the related information of
the Power4875L
display power module-time
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
Configuring the Integrated Data and
Voice Networking
About This Chapter
This topic describes the related operation for configuring the integrated data and voice
networking of the UA5000.
33.1 Networking
The UA5000 accesses the data and voice service through the CSRI and ETDB boards. It transmits
the IP service upstream to the IP network through the IPM board, and transmits the traditional
voice service to the PSTN network through the PVM board.
33.2 Prerequisites
Before configuring the integrated data and voice networking, ensure that the UA5000 meets the
configuration prerequisites.
33.3 Data Plan (IPM)
Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for the
required broadband services such as the ADSL access service and the SHDSL access service.
When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data.
33.4 Data Plan (PVMB)
This topic describes the data plan for the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000.
33.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)
Log in to the IPM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the broadband services
of the UA5000 according to the planned broadband service data.
33.6 Configuration Procedure (PVMB)
This topic describes how to configure the UA5000 PVMB in the integrated data and voice
networking.
33.7 Verification
After the broadband service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to access
the Internet through their PCs. After the voice service is configured successfully, the subscribers
should be able to call each other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
33.1 Networking
The UA5000 accesses the data and voice service through the CSRI and ETDB boards. It transmits
the IP service upstream to the IP network through the IPM board, and transmits the traditional
voice service to the PSTN network through the PVM board.
Figure 33-1 shows the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000.
Figure 33-1 Integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000
OSS
NMS
DHCP Server
IPTV
Server
MGC
Router
BRAS
V5
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P I I P P C C S S E E D
E
T
W W P P V V S S D D D D S
D
S
X X M M M M R R L L T T L
T
S
B B B B D
B
B
B B B B B B
I I
NT1
Splitter
phone
ISDN
Phone
PBX
ISDN
Phone
phone
phone
STB
PC
TV
33.2 Prerequisites
Before configuring the integrated data and voice networking, ensure that the UA5000 meets the
configuration prerequisites.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
The prerequisites for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000 are
as follows:
l
The hardware commissioning must be complete, and the system must be ready for service
configuration.
l
The modem must be connected and must be in the normal state.
l
The upper layer devices, including the BRAS, DHCP sever, multicast sever, MGC, and
NMS workstation must work in the normal state.
33.3 Data Plan (IPM)
Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for the
required broadband services such as the ADSL access service and the SHDSL access service.
When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data.
Table 33-1 provides the data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of
the UA5000.
Table 33-1 Data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking
Item
Data
Remarks
Upstream port
Port number: 0/2/0; Rate: 100 Mbit/s; Flow
control switch state: enabled
If the upstream port is a
GE port, use the default
configuration.
Inband NMS
NM VLAN ID: 31; type: standard
The inband NMS
manages the PVM
board through the
packet transmission of
the IPM board.
IP address of the L3 interface: 10.5.24.3
IP address of the next hop router:
133.5.24.2
IP address of the NMS host: 10.140.5.79
l Community name: public, with the
read-only right.
-
l Community name: private, with the
read-write right.
l Enable the standard SNMP trap
message.
ADSL service
Subscriber access port number: 0/7/0–
0/7/31
-
VPI: 8; VCI: 35
VLAN ID: 32-63; type: Mux
Traffic profile: Upstream bandwidth 512
kbit/s, downstream bandwidth 1 Mbit/s
Upstream port: 0/2/0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
Item
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
Data
Remarks
Traffic entry priority: 1
SHDSL service
Subscriber access port number: 0/8/0–
0/8/15
-
VPI: 8; VCI: 35
VLAN ID: 64-79; type: Mux
Traffic profile: 1 Mbit/s
Upstream port: 0/2/0
Multicast service
VLAN ID: 104; type: Smart
Subscriber access port number: 0/7/0–
0/7/31
VPI: 0; VCI: 35
Upstream port: 0/2/0
IP address of the L3 interface: 10.2.2.1
The multicast service
uses the DHCP mode to
obtain the IP address.
The priority of the
multicast traffic entry is
higher than the priority
of the Internet access
subscriber.
IP addresses of the DHCP server: 10.2.2.2,
10.2.2.3
IP address of the multicast program:
224.1.1.1
Right profile name: profile0
Program name: program1
Traffic entry priority: 5
Internet access mode
xDSL service: VPI 8, VCI 35, PPPoE
mode, set the modem to the bridge mode.
Multicast service: VPI 0, VCI 35, IPoE
mode, set the modem to the bridge mode.
The xDSL services use
the PC dialing method.
If the modem dialing
method is required, set
the modem to the
bridged PPPoE mode.
33.4 Data Plan (PVMB)
This topic describes the data plan for the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000.
Table 33-2 provides the data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of
the UA5000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
Table 33-2 Data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking
Item
Data
MG interface
mgid: 0
code: text
Protocol: H.248
MG port: 2944; MGC: 2944
domainname: UA5000.com
Whether the termination ID on the MG interface supports the
layering configuration: Yes
System parameter
Overseas version flag: Britain
IP address
Signaling IP address of MG interface 0 of the UA5000:
133.140.24.10/24
Media IP address of MG interface 0 of the UA5000:
133.140.24.10/24
Default gateway of MG interface 0 of the UA5000:
133.140.24.1/24
IP address of the MGC: 133.140.25.10/24
Type of service (ToS)
strategy
IP priority and ToS priority: Default values
ISDN BRA service IUA
link parameters
IUA link set number: 1
IUA link number: 15
Local port number: 1401
Peer port number: 1400
ISDN PRA service IUA
link parameters
IUA link set number: 2
IUA link number: 1
Local port number: 1402
Peer port number: 1404
33.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)
Log in to the IPM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the broadband services
of the UA5000 according to the planned broadband service data.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the host software version.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
huawei(config)#display language
NOTE
If the queried host version does not match the planned host version, see the upgrade guide to update the
host software to the planned version.
Step 2 Query and confirm the board.
huawei(config)#display board 0
huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 3 Set the upstream port of the UA5000.
huawei(config)#interface ipm 0/2
huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#speed 0 100
huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#flow-control 0
huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#quit
Step 4 Configure a log host.
huawei(config)#loghost
huawei(config)#loghost
huawei(config)#loghost
huawei(config)#loghost
add 10.188.56.40 syslog-1
activate ip 10.188.56.40
add 10.188.57.40 syslog-2
activate ip 10.188.57.40
Step 5 Add a standard VLAN, and assign FE ports 6 and 7 and IP upstream port 0 to the VLAN.
huawei(config)#vlan
huawei(config)#port
huawei(config)#port
huawei(config)#port
1001
vlan
vlan
vlan
standard
1001 0/2 0
1001 0/2 6
1001 0/2 7
Step 6 Configure the inband NMS.
huawei(config)#vlan 31 standard
huawei(config)#port vlan 31 0/2 0
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 31
huawei(conffig-if-vlanif31)#ip address 10.5.24.3 255.255.255.0
huawei(conffig-if-vlanif31)#quit
huawei(config)#ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 133.5.24.2
huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public
huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.140.5.79 securityname
private
huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 31
Step 7 Configure the ADSL service.
huawei(config)#vlan 32 to 63 mux
huawei(config)#port vlan 32 to 63 0/2 0
huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0
huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 10240 priority 1 priority-policy tag-InPackage
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 32 adsl 0/7/0 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 33 adsl 0/7/1 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 34 adsl 0/7/2 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 35 adsl 0/7/3 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 36 adsl 0/7/4 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 37 adsl 0/7/5 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 38 adsl 0/7/6 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 39 adsl 0/7/7 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 40 adsl 0/7/8 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 41 adsl 0/7/9 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 42 adsl 0/7/10 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 43 adsl 0/7/11 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 44 adsl 0/7/12 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 45 adsl 0/7/13 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 46 adsl 0/7/14 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 47 adsl 0/7/15 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 48 adsl 0/7/16 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 49 adsl 0/7/17 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 50 adsl 0/7/18 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#service-port vlan
huawei(config)#adsl line-profile
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
51 adsl
52 adsl
53 adsl
54 adsl
55 adsl
56 adsl
57 adsl
58 adsl
59 adsl
60 adsl
61 adsl
62 adsl
63 adsl
add 3
0/7/19
0/7/20
0/7/21
0/7/22
0/7/23
0/7/24
0/7/25
0/7/26
0/7/27
0/7/28
0/7/29
0/7/30
0/7/31
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
vpi
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
vci
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
rx-cttr
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
tx-cttr
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Command:
adsl line-profile add
3
Start adding
profile
Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be
neglected
> Do you want to name the profile (y/n)
[n]:
> Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1)
[0]:
> Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:
> Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]:
> Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)
[n]:
> Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream:
> 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]:1
> Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:y
> Target SNR margin in downstream(0~15 dB) [6]:
> Minimum SNR margin in downstream (0~6 dB) [0]:
> Maximum SNR margin in downstream (6~31 dB) [31]:
> Target SNR margin in upstream (0~15 dB) [6]:
> Minimum SNR margin in upstream (0~6 dB)
[0]:
> Maximum SNR margin in upstream (6~31 dB) [31]:
> Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y
> Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [32]:
> Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [6144]:1024
> Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps)
[32]:
> Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [640]:512
Add profile 3 successfully
huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/7
huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#alarm-config all 1
huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#deactivate all
huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#activate all profile-index 3
Step 8 Configure the SHDSL service.
huawei(config)#vlan 64 to 79 mux
huawei(config)#port vlan 64 to 79 0/2 0
huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 64 shdsl 0/8/0 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 65 shdsl 0/8/1 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 66 shdsl 0/8/2 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 67 shdsl 0/8/3 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 68 shdsl 0/8/4 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 69 shdsl 0/8/5 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 70 shdsl 0/8/6 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 71 shdsl 0/8/7 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 72 shdsl 0/8/8 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 73 shdsl 0/8/9 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 74 shdsl 0/8/10 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 75 shdsl 0/8/11 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 76 shdsl 0/8/12 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 77 shdsl 0/8/13 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 78 shdsl 0/8/14 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 79 shdsl 0/8/15 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add 2
Command:
shdsl line-profile add
Start adding profile 2
During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored
> G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire)
[1]:
> Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)
[y]:n
> G.SHDSL minimum line
rate
(Value must be multiple of 64,except 2312kbps,192~2304,2312 kbps)[2048]:1024
> G.SHDSL maximum line
rate
(Value must be multiple of 64,except 2312kbps,1024~2304,2312 kbps)[2048]:
1024
> Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)
[1]:
> Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex
B;
3--support Annex A&B)
[3]:
> Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)
[1]:
> Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)
[1]:
> Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)
[n]:
Add profile 2 successfully
huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/7
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#alarm-config all 1
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#deactivate all
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#activate all 2
Step 9 Configure the multicast service.
huawei(config)#vlan 104 smart
huawei(config)#port vlan 104 0/2 0
huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car 10240 priority 5 priority-policy tag-InPackage
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/0 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/1 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/2 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/3 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/4 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/5 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/6 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/7 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/8 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/9 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/10 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/11 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/12 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/13 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/14 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/15 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/16 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/17 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/18 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/19 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/20 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/21 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/22 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/23 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/24 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/25 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/26 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/27 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/28 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/29 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/30 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
huawei(config)#dhcp mode layer-3 option-60
huawei(config)#dhcp-server 2 ip 10.2.2.2 10.2.2.3
huawei(config)#dhcp domain video //Refer to the actual DHCP option 60 threshold.
huawei(config-dhcp-domain-video)#dhcp-server 2
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 104
huawei(config-if-vlanif104)#ip address 10.2.2.1 24
huawei(config-if-vlanif104)#dhcp domain video gateway 10.2.2.1
huawei(config)#interface ipm 0/2
huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#native-vlan 0 vlan 104
huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#quit
huawei(config)#btv
huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/2/0
huawei(config-btv)#igmp video-port vpi 0 vci 35
huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 104 bind 0/2/0
huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile0 program-name program1 watch
huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add slot 0/7 auth
huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile slot 0/7 profile-name profile0
Step 10 Configure the Internet access mode (configure the modem).
l PPPoE mode
– Set the modem to the bridge mode.
– Set the VPI/VCI of the WAN port on the modem to 8/35.
– Install the PPPoE dialup software on the computer terminal, and set the user name and
password.
l IPoE mode
– Set the modem to the bridge mode.
– Set the VPI/VCI of the WAN port on the modem to 0/35.
----End
33.6 Configuration Procedure (PVMB)
This topic describes how to configure the UA5000 PVMB in the integrated data and voice
networking.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the host software version.
huawei(config)#display language
NOTE
If the version does not match, refer to the version upgrading guide to update the host software to a proper
version.
Step 2 Set the IP address of service network port.
huawei(config)#interface eth
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 133.140.24.10 255.255.255.0 133.140.24.1 vlan_tag
1001
huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Step 3 Configure the QoS IP strategy.
huawei(config)#qos ip 133.140.24.10 strategy tos
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
Step 4 Configure the overseas version flag.
huawei(config)#system parameters 1 8
huawei(config)#display system parameters 1
Step 5 Configure the VoIP voice service.
huawei(config)#board add 0/6 a32
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/6
huawei(config)#display board 0
huawei(config)#interface h248 0
Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 133.140.24.10 mgport 2944 code
text transfer udp domainName ua5000.com mgcip_1 133.140.25.10 mgcport_1 2944 mgmedia-ip 133.140.24.10
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 0 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 0
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
huawei(config)#display if-h248 all
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/6/0 0/6/31 0 telno 12340001
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/6
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
Step 6 Configure the ISDN BRA service.
huawei(config)#board add 0/12 h601dsld
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12
huawei(config)#display board 0
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1 0 pendingtime 4
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 1401 133.140.24.10 1400 133.140.25.10
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state
huawei(config-sigtran)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser batadd 0/12/0 0/12/1 1 15
huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/12
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/12
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
Step 7 Configure the ISDN PRA service.
huawei(config)#board add 0/15 h601edtb
huawei(config)#board confirm 0/15
huawei(config)#display board 0
huawei(config)#interface edt 0/15
huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#runmode indep
huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#quit
huawei(config)#sigtran
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 2 0 pendingtime 4
huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 2 1402 133.140.24.10 1404 133.140.25.10
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state
huawei(config-sigtran)#quit
huawei(config)#esl user
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgprauser add 0/15/0 2 10
huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/15/0
huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgprauser 0/15
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
huawei(config)#save
----End
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
33 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
33.7 Verification
After the broadband service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to access
the Internet through their PCs. After the voice service is configured successfully, the subscribers
should be able to call each other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
A
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
ADSL
asymmetric digital subscriber line
AG
access gateway
B
BE
best effort
BRA
basic rate access
BRI
basic rate interface
C
CCS
common channel signaling
CCITT
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative
Committee
CLI
command line interface
D
DNS
domain name server
DSL
digital subscriber line board
DSCP
differentiated service codepoint
DSP
digital signal processor
DTMF
dual-tone multifrequency
E
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
EPON
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
Ethernet passive optical network
F
FE
fast Ethernet
FoIP
fax over IP
FSK
frequency shift keying
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
G
GE
gigabit Ethernet
GPON
Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network
H
HW
highway
I
IP
Internet Protocol
ISDN
integrated services digital network
IUA
ISDN Q.921-User Adaptation Layer
M
MAC
media access control
MDU
multi dwelling unit
MG
media gateway
MGC
media gateway controller
MGCP
Media Gateway Control Protocol
MoIP
modem over IP
N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
NGN
next generation network
NM
network management
NMS
network management system
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
NT1
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
network termination 1
O
OAM
operations, administration and maintenance
OLT
optical line terminal
ONU
optical network unit
P
optical network unit
PBX
private branch exchange
PCM
pulse code modulation
POS
passive optical splitter
POTS
plain old telephone service
PRA
primary rate access
PRI
primary rate interface
PSTN
public switched telephone network
PVM
packet voice module
Q
QoS
quality of service
R
RTP
Real-time Transfer Protocol
S
SCTP
Stream Control Transmission Protocol
SIGTRAN
signaling transport
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
T
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Product
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
VAG
virtual access gateway
VLAN
virtual local area network
VoIP
voice over IP
VQE
voice quality enhancements
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437